#0520 Delete             --------------
Delete a file with vector or label data
on a data carrier.

#3197 Export Max. Field  --------------
For tasks, which are larger than the machines working range.
The job is clipped into fields and these output individually one
after the other. Previously the graphics and texts are converted
into tool paths and connected with layer tools. All layers are exported
which are marked in colour in increasing order (0..Max. layer). Layers
which are not to be exported, are to be marked in white by clicking on.

|Inputs:
Material X/Y: indication of material size.
Working field X/Y: input of machine working area.
Overlap X/Y: input of an overlapping of the output fields.
Start al..br: start of the processing al, ar, bl and br.

Using 'OK' the milling data in the working field is clipped.
The export form can now be selected. Using 'back', clipping is in the
next field etc.

#9919 Edit Run           --------------
Select 'Edit Run': import of self-created
or LANG LGF2 runs.

#9944 Relief             --------------
Calculation of milling data for coin relief and
free-form surface areas.

#0025 X Mirror 2D        --------------
Mirror all layers or one layer in X about
a vertical axis.
Note: text is not taken into account here.

#0028 Scale 2D Height    --------------
Graphic data and texts of all layers or
one layer are scaled using two vertical points
to a predetermined Y scale.

#0400 Scale 3D % Zero Pt --------------
Graphic data and texts of all layers or
one layer are scale in percent in all axes (X,Y,Z).

#0030 Distortion Width   --------------
Distort the graphic data of all layers or one layer
using two horizontal points to a predetermined X scale.
Note: texts are not taken into account.

#0031 Distortion Height  --------------
Distort the graphic data of all layers or one layer
using two vertical points to a predetermined Y scale.
Note: texts are not taken into account.

#0032 Distortion %       --------------
Distort the graphic data of all layers or one
layer by percent in X.
Note: texts are not taken into account.

#0152 Distortion XYZ     --------------
The graphic data of all layers or one
layer are distorted in the X,Y,Z axes using a factor.
Note: texts are not taken into account.

#0033 Offset XY          --------------
Displace graphic data and texts of all layers or one
layer using a relative value (offset).

#0034 Ref. Posn. XY      --------------
Displace graphic data and texts of all layers or one
layer to an absolute X,Y position.

#0035 Rotate MP in Deg.  --------------
Rotate the graphic data mathematically positive (anticlockwise)
of all layers or one layer in deg. about their mid-point (MP).

Note: texts are not taken into account.

#0102 Position A         --------------
Enter a start point for a line or contour.
Design aid can be activated using the middle
mouse key (alternative using <F2> or <Sft> and
right mouse key).

#0131 Position 3D        --------------
Enter an absolute position 3D using X,Y,Z co-ordinates.
The co-ordinates can be edited in 3D after input.
If only 2 co-ordinates or Z = 0 are entered, then
a 2D position (deep cut) is created.

The design aid can be activated using the middle
mouse key (alternative using
<F2> or <Sft> and right mouse key.

#0094 Point (drilling)   --------------
Enter point for a drilling (PosA, PosE using the same X,Y
values) Points can with HCAM be allocated characteristics
in TTrack.

#0114 Str. Line X,Y E    --------------
Enter point (position) for a deep cut line relatively using
the lengths in X and Y

#0116 Str. Line R,W E    --------------
Enter point (position) for a deep cut line relatively using
lengths and angle.

#0117 St. Line 15> R,W E --------------
Enter point (position) for a deep cut line relatively using
lengths and an angle divisible by 15 deg.

#0106 Line S,E           --------------
Enter line with start (PosA) and end point (PosE) absolutely.

#0118 Rectangle S,E      --------------
Enter a rectangle using an absolute start and an absolute end point.

#0121 Rectangle S,dX/dY  --------------
Enter a rectangle using an absolute start point and the extension
(relative) in X and Y.

#0119 Rectangle MP,EP    --------------
Enter a rectangle with an absolute mid-point
and an absolute end point.

#0120 Rectang. MP,dX/dY  --------------
Enter a rectangle using an absolute mid-point and the extension
(relative) in X and Y.

#0098 Arc 3P             --------------
An arc using 3 points. 1st point is
end point of the last input, 2nd
point ca. and enter arc end point.

#0099 Arc Tangent        --------------
Enter an arc, which closes tangentially to the last input.
The last input must be a line or an arc.

#0100 Full Circ. MP Rad  --------------
Enter a full circle with mid-point and radius.

#0101 Full Circle S,E    --------------
Enter full circle with 2 diagonally lying
reference points.

#0096 Ellipse MP Rx,Ry   --------------
Enter an ellipse using mid-point and radii
in X and Y.

#0097 Ellipse S,E        --------------
Enter an ellipse using 2 diagonal lying
reference points.

#0108 Close Track        --------------
Close the last route to its start point,
so that a closed contour is created.

#0632 UnDo               --------------
Undo the last change in the CAD or in the text
input. UnDo can be carried out to a max. of 5 times.

#0636 ReDo               --------------
Recall the last change using UnDo.

#0042 Mark Track Posn.   --------------
Mark a track or route in the actlayer using end point.
This function seeks the nearest position to the cursor.
All tracks, which lie within the rectangle with at least
one support point, are marked using a frame.
With concurrent pressing of the <Sft> key the
previous marking is retained.

#0043 Mark All           --------------
All tracks and routes in the actlayer are marked.

#0044 Demark             --------------
Again demark a marked path (track or route).
All tracks, which lie completely inside, are
marked using a frame.

For a repeated demarking the key <Sft> must be
pressed at the same time.

#0069 Delete             --------------
All marked tracks or routes are deleted.
Marked data can also be deleted using
<DEL> or <REM>.
If nothing is marked, then a contour or route can
be selected, which can be deleted immediately.
The immediate deletion does not alter the order of the
(milling) data.

#0063 Incline            --------------
The marked tracks and routes are inclined (diagonal).

#0078 Row Polar          --------------
The marked tracks and routes are arranged several times
in the circle.

#0075 Displ. in Layer    --------------
The marked tracks and routes are displaced into another
layer. Thereafter these are no longer available in the actlayer.

#0076 Copy into Layer    --------------
The marked tracks and routes are copied into another layer.
Thereafter these are available in the ActLayer and in the target layer.

#0612 Align Position     --------------
Align several positions on a line.
For this
- a reference point is to be selected and possibly displaced
  to a new position,
- a line (straightedge) is to be entered,
- the point clicked on, which is to be displaced vertically on
  the straightedge.
Input is ended using <R> or <Esc>.

The co-ordinates of the original (not yet displaced
reference point) is displayed in the input line.

#0613 Delete Position    --------------
Delete one or more support points in a contour.
If the start or end point in an open route be deleted, this can
lead to errors as the route will be closed.

If only one point is clicked on, then only this is deleted.
If a frame is placed around several support points of a contour,
then all points within the frame are deleted.

#0614 Repl. by Straight  --------------
Linearisation.
Replace the route between 2 points. A 3rd point
must still be available between these points.

#0615 Replace by Corner  --------------
Replace the route between 2 points by a corner.
A 3rd point must still be available between these points.

#0616 Replace by Circ3P  --------------
Replace the route between point by an arc. A 3rd point must
still be available between these points.
The resolution of the arc is determined by
Input Parameter . Circle Resolution.

#0630 Round-off Corner   --------------
Round-off a corner made from 2 vectors.
If one corner vector or if both vectors are too short,
then no rounding-off is created. In this case a clear
corner must be made beforehand.

#0641 Corner in Frame    --------------
Form corner from the vectors which cut the cursor rectangle.
The cursor can be matched in form and extension during input
with simultaneous pressing of the <Ctrl> key.

#0619 Delete Vector      --------------
Delete a vector in a contour or route (interrupted).

#0621 Separate Vector    --------------
Sub-divide a vector at a position (enter PosA),
which is clicked on using the cursor.
Each contour or route is thus sub-divided into 2 routes.
The separation points can be displaced individually using
'Displace position'.

#0620 Delete Route       --------------
Delete a route between 2 points (interrupt).
There must still be a 3rd point available between these points
for route selection.

#0637 Join Routes        --------------
Join two routes together.
For this the 1st route is first clicked on, a line drawn to the 2nd route
and this also clicked on.

#0639 Separate Posns.    --------------
Separates a path at a support point and sets a new start point (PosA).

#8804 Join Tracks        --------------
Open routes in the actlayer are, so far as possible within
the selected tolerance, joined to contours.
If the error is set to 0, the program seeks automatically
with steadily increasing tolerance to close the contours.
The automatic run is ended if all contours are closed
or an error value of 10 mm has been exceeded.

The contours are finally correctly rotated for an embossed
milling correction.

#8800 Operate Track      --------------
This function removes unnecessary support points and several times
repeated completely congruent tracks in the actlayer. Smaller contours
can be filtered and open routes closed.

|Minimum extension:
Smaller contours are filtered out.

|Minimum number of support points:
Polygons with few support points are removed.

|Close track:
Tracks are closed using 'YES'.

|Vector resolution (support point resolution):
High resolutions demand a long calculation time and
lead, under certain circumstances, to errors. If the resolution
is to remain unchanged, then one should work with the
greatest setting.

#1400 2D Effect          --------------
With this function pictures in actlayer are so distorted as if they were
placed on cylinders, spheres etc.

|Distort quadratically
Distort on the same X/Y dimension.

|Cylinder horiz. / vert.
Radius (cylindrical) distortion.

|Circle set / spheroid set / spheroid distortion
Various spherical distortions.

#0624 Route Width        --------------
Parameter input for 'Wide Route' and 'Shorten Route' (create flow chart).

#0625 Wide Route         --------------
This function creates meandering processes from simple routes in order
to mill a wide line sharp-edged using a pointed tool.
The parameter inputs take place in
'Route width'.
(Flow diagram creation).

#0626 Shorten Route      --------------
This function shortens the end of a route by the separation
to the next graphic lying in the process direction in 'Route Width'.
(Flow diagram creation).

#0055 Rotate Track(s)    --------------
The contours and routes are inverted in the sense of direction.

Note: in the milling correction mathematically
positively rotating contours are calculated outwards and
negatively (clockwise) rotating contours inwards.

#0082 Deep Cut Procedure --------------
All contours and routes are allocated approach (deep cut) movements.

If paths are marked, then the marked, otherwise the data in ActLayer,
are allocated deep cut movements.

If milling paths are to be covered with deep cut movements and in
layers, then first the deep cut movements and thereafter the
layers should be entered.

#1383 Repl. Graphic Text --------------
Graphic texts (e.g. scanned-in texts)
are replaced by ASCII texts capable of being edited.
The vector data are to be marked beforehand.
The text line input is switched on with replace graphic text. Here
text and font are to be entered. The line can then be edited as text.

#3095 Secure Tool        --------------
Save the tool library with all tools in one file.

#3096 Load Tool          --------------
Load the tool library with all tools from a file.

#8973 Select Font        --------------
For editing in 'Font Edit' a character set must be selected
(activated) beforehand.

#8977 Charact. Width     --------------
Set character width to a desired value,
(e.g. correct connection for script lettering or spacing balance).

#8979 Rotation Sense     --------------
Change the rotation sense of the contours.

|Rotate character
Change the rotation sense of the currently loaded
character.

|Correct character rotation sense
The currently loaded character is corrected in rotation sense for
an embossed engraving.

|Correct font rotation sense.
All characters of the currently selected character set
are corrected in rotation sense for an embossed engraving.

#8982 Delete Charact.    --------------
Delete a character in the character set.

#8984 Create             --------------
Create a new, empty character set.

#8987 Status             --------------
Display character set name and characteristics.
The character set name can be edited.
This name, along with a file name, is displayed in
'Select Font'.

#8988 Disp. Char. Set    --------------
The active character set is completely displayed graphically.

#9900 <- Return          --------------
End a sub-menu and return to the higher menu
(= selection is called up from the sub-menu).

#9997 <- Return          --------------
End scale menu and return to the higher menu
(= selection is called up from the sub-menu).

The scale is retained for a later further processing and is
redisplayed with every call-up of the scale menu.

#9998 <- Return          --------------
End a sub-menu and return to the higher menu
(= selection is called up from the sub-menu).

#9913 Scale   :          --------------
Change into the circular scales input.

#1510 Position           --------------
Enter scale reference point.

#1511 Length :           --------------
Enter the length of the linear scale.

#1512 Angle.  :          --------------
Enter the inclination angle in deg. of the baseline
with reference to the horizontal.

#1514 Mode    :          --------------
Enter the arrangement of the scale lines with
reference to the baseline.
Above   : lines lie above.
Centre  : lines lie centred.
Below    : lines lie below.

#1513 TextSepar:         --------------
Separation of the scale text from the scale baseline.
Positive values position the texts above, negative
values below.

#1528 ScTxtDir.:         --------------
Scale text direction:
positive : progression rotated by 180 deg.
negative : text in direction of progression.

#9914 Scaletext:         --------------
Select scale text input:

#1529 Adopt Scale        --------------
The scale is converted into vector data and
saved in the actlayer.
A vectorised scale can no longer be edited.

#1525 Load Scale         --------------
A scale is loaded from a file.

#1526 Save Scale         --------------
A scale is saved in a file.

#1527 Delete Scale       --------------
Delete a file with a scale.

#9912 Scale   :          --------------
Change into the linear scale input.

#1531 Radius  :          --------------
Input of the scale baseline radius.

#1532 StartAng.:         --------------
Scale start angle in deg.
Circular scales are built up clockwise (mathematically negative
direction of rotation) from the largest start angle to the smallest
end angle, e.g. for a scale over 360> the start angle is to be
entered = 360 and the end angle = 0.

#1533 EndAngle:          --------------
Scale end angle in deg.
Circular scales are built up clockwise (mathematically negative
direction of rotation) from the largest start angle to the smallest
end angle, e.g. for a scale over 360> the start angle is to be
entered = 360 and the end angle = 0.

#1534 Mode   :           --------------
Enter arrangement of scale lines with reference to the
baseline:
inwards    : the baseline lies inwards.
centre     : the baseline lies centred.
outwards   : the baseline lies outwards.

#1523 Par. All Texts     --------------
The parameters of the current text are adopted in
all texts.

#1524 Clr. All Texts     --------------
All scale text lines are deleted.

#8201 Load Pixel File    --------------
Read in a monochromatic PCX, TIFF
or BMP file.
Grey shade or colour pictures are not suitable here and cause
an error message.

#8203 Save Pixel File    --------------
Save the current picture in a PCX file.

#8211 Set in Rectangle   --------------
The area framed by a rectangle is set (black).

#8212 Del. in Rectang.   --------------
The area framed by a rectangle is deleted (white).

#8219 Set in Polygon     --------------
The area framed by a polygon run is set (black).

#8218 Del. in Polygon    --------------
The area framed by a polygon run is deleted (white).

#8220 Invert in Polygon  --------------
The area framed by a polygon run is inverted,
i.e. black and white exchanged.

#8213 Picture Extract    --------------
The area framed by a rectangle is adopted
and the outstanding area is cut off.

#8214 Invert Picture     --------------
The content of the complete picture is
inverted, i.e. black and white exchanged.

#8207 Pixel Border       --------------
A pixel border is created from the black areas
in the picture.

#8205 Thin Picture       --------------
The fields in the pixel picture are thinned each
step by 1 pixel. Fields and lines with only one or 
two pixel width are removed. 
Thinning steps offer the possibility of allowing
a larger milling cutter diameter to be incorporated in
the calculation. The milling cutter does not drive to the 
outer border contour but is displaced suitably 
inwards.
 
#8215 Thicken Picture    --------------
The fields in the pixel picture are thickened each
step by 1 pixel. Thickening steps offer the possibility
of allowing a larger milling cutter diameter to be 
incorporated in the calculation. The milling cutter 
does not drive to the outer border contour but is 
displaced suitably outwards.

#8221 Skeleton Picture   --------------
All coherent pixel fields are thinned by 1 pixel 
around a border. Lines which are only 1 pixel wide
are only shortened at the ends by respectively 
1 pixel. By repeated skeletoning an outline graphic can 
be reduced to the width of one pixel. The subsequent
vectorisation then gives individual polygon steps.
Skeletoning is repeated up to 10 times and the outline 
graphic is correspondingly thinned. The number of
skeletoning steps can be selected to be between 1 
and 10. The function Skeleton Picture should not be 
used more frequently than necessary as, through this, 
the lines are also shortened. This function is designed
for the processing of outline graphics. Repeated 
skeletoning of thick lines under certain circumstances
produces unattractive effects.

#8012 PixPicZoom         --------------
The area of the picture framed by a rectangle is
displayed enlarged.

#8011 PixPicStan.        --------------
The graphic is displayed filling the picture.

#1334 Text Position      --------------
Enter line or block reference position.

|AbsPos. X/Y:
Enter reference position absolute to point X=0 and Y=0.

|Displ. X/Y:
Displace the reference position relative to last
point in X and Y.

|Displ. X / Displ. Y:
Displace the reference position relative to the last
point in X or Y.

#1322 Height    :        --------------
Enter text versal height.

#1328 Mode   :           --------------
Enter location of the textline or the text block
relative to the line reference point.

#1330 Text Angle:        --------------
Inclination angle of the baseline referred to
a horizontal.

#1331 Direction:         --------------
Enter direction of the text line (positive/negative)
with circular lettering (radius <> 0)
(in circle/on circle).

#1353 Mark All           --------------
Select all text lines.

#1354 Seek UnDo          --------------
Cancel selection.

#1356 Delete             --------------
Delete the marked text line.

#1358 Displace           --------------
Freely displace the marked text line.
With additionally pressed <Sft> key displacement is in the
advance direction (greater separation) either in
X only or in Y only.

#1359 Displace X         --------------
Displace the marked text line in the X direction.

#1360 Displace Y         --------------
Displace the marked text line in the Y direction.

#1368 Text Posn. X       --------------
Align the marked text line in the X direction on to a vertical,
which is determined by the cursor position.

#1369 Text Posn. Y       --------------
Align the marked text line in the X direction on to a horizontal,
which is determined by the cursor position.

#9922 Alter Text Data    --------------
selection to edit the line data in the marked texts.

#1323 Height Factor:     --------------
The heights of the text lines are multiplied using the 'Height factor'.
With this, texts with different versal heights can be modified.

#1399 <- Adopt           --------------
Adopt all line data, which have been modified in this menu
and quit the input.

#1104 Milldata graphic   --------------
Plot the milling picture in plan view using filled milling track
(milling cutter simulation).

#3002 Load       '*.ZEI' --------------
Import an individual character from LANG LGF2
character set (ZEI).

#3003 Project    '*.ZEI' --------------
Import a data set from the series LANG LGF2
character sets (ZEI).
                                      
#3014 Vector H2R/LG1/SLD --------------
Import a vector (H2R-, LG1 format) or a flat file
(SLD format).

#3009 GerberNC   '*.NCD' --------------
Import Gerber drill data for the production of
printed boards.

#3023 EXCELLON   '*.NCD' --------------
Import EXCELLON drill data for the production
of printed boards.

#3017 Generic    '*.MCR' --------------
Import of vector data from  Generic CAD.

#3022 Kuhlmann   '*.SOR' --------------
Import Kuhlmann SOR vector data.
The commands FER, FEL, FA, TE, TA
are not interpreted.

#3024 Baublys    '*.AH3' --------------
Import of vector data in Baublys AH3 format.

#3021 Baublys    '*.DIG' --------------
Import of vectorised 2D data
in Baublys DIG format.

#3028 APT        '*.APT' --------------
Import APT milling data. If the milling data originates from a
UNIX-System, then these can be imported only after a conversion
using File . Special . UNIX in DOS text

#3101 Character  '*.ZEI' ---------------
Export data for the further processing using LANG LGF2
in a series of character sets (ZEI format).

File name xxxxxxnn.ZEI:
xxxxxx : name using max. 6 ASCII characters.
nn     : serial number 01..99.

#3127 Project    '*.ZEI' --------------
Export data for the further processing using LANG LGF2
in a series of character sets (ZEI format), separated
according to tools.
File name xxxxxwnn.ZEI:
xxxx : name using max. 6 ASCII characters.
ww   : serial tool number. 1..10.
nn   : serial number 01..99.

#3103 HP-GL      '*.PLT' --------------
Saving in HP-GL (Plotter) format.
The support point resolution and further settings are set in
Parameter . Plotter. Contours and routes are saved as polygon runs.

#3108 Isel ADI   '*.OUT' --------------
Saving in isel - ADI format.
Contours and routes are saved as polygon runs.

#3105 ASCII'*.TXT'       --------------
Open ASCII interface for data exchange.

#3124 Generic    '*.MCR' --------------
Saving in Generic CAD (MCR) -
Format (for KIRBA Scanner System).
Contours and routes are saved as polygon runs.

#3117 DATRON     '*.MCR' --------------
Saving in Datron (MCR) format.
Contours and routes are saved as polygon runs.

#3126 Baublys    '*.AH3' --------------
Saving in Baublys AH3 format.

#3122 Baublys    '*.DIG' --------------
Saving in Baublys DIG format.

#3112 ISO Auto-Export    --------------
Saving in DIN/ISO form using abbreviated operation.
The data are always saved in the same exchange file. For data
storage the last setting, which was selected under DIN/ISO, is employed.

#3200 millCONTROL        --------------
Output of milling data to a machine using millCONTROL.
This function is only suitable for milling tracks using tool and
technology data (output via direct mill).

#3226 Graphic Complete   --------------
Complete data output to the graphic.

#2005 Graphic Param.     --------------
Setting for the TLayer graphics.

|Plot:
Switch on/off tools, which are to be plotted
with every graphic build-up.

|Milling graphic level:
YES = milling track at relief surface level.
NO  = milling track at relief bottom.

|Order:
Order of plotting of the tool paths for the milling graphic.
YES = tools are plotted in increasing order.
NO  = tools are plotted in decreasing order.

#2001 ACorr3D 10Tools    --------------
Calculate 3D cut-out tracks for up to 10 tools
from error-free contours with correct rotation sense
and without overlapping.
Tools with cones go round the contour in 3D,
cylindrical tools with 0 deg. in 2D. The ratio
of the tip radii should be selected as ca. 1 : 2, so that
no islands remain in sharp internal corners.

#2002 ACorr2D Bottom     --------------
Calculate 2D milling tracks for up to 10 tools from error-free
contours with correct rotation sense and without overlapping.
The tools go round the contours with the separation of the tip
radius (FrS). The ratio of the tip radii should be selected as
ca. 1 : 2, so that no islands remain in sharp inner corners.

#2012 Delete TLayers     --------------
TLayers are to be deleted if a relief surface calculation takes place
and the cut-out track is not also saved following a cut-out calculation.

#9935 Saddle:            --------------
Project milling tracks in/on a saddle curve. A saddle curve
results from 2 superimposed rectangular radii.

#9936 Ellipse(sphere):   --------------
Project milling tracks in/on a spherical section or a distorted
spherical section (ellipse).

#9938 Polyline:          --------------
Project milling tracks on to a polyline in X/Y direction.

#9941 Support Points:    -------------
Project milling tracks on to a support point surface.

#8603 Load LG1project    --------------
A series of data sets in LG1Obj format is loaded and
allocated to the graphic layers addressed.

#8601 Load Sp. Posns.    --------------
Load the support points for the inclines from a file.

#8602 Save Sp. Posn.     --------------
Save the support points for the inclines in a file.

#8701 P1:                --------------
The location in X,Y of a support point for a surface.
Points 1,2,3 may not lie on a line. The support points
are allocated to the ActLayer.

#8702 P2:                --------------
The location in X,Y of a support point for a surface.
Points 1,2,3 may not lie on a line. The support points
are allocated to the ActLayer.

#8703 P3:                --------------
The location in X,Y of a support point for a surface.
Points 1,2,3 may not lie on a line. The support points
are allocated to the actlayer.

#8704 Z1      :          --------------
Enter the Z value of a support point for a surface.
The support points are allocated to the actlayer.

#8705 Z2      :          --------------
Enter the Z value of a support point for a surface. The
support points are allocated to the ActLayer.

#8706 Z3      :          --------------
Enter the Z value of a support point for a surface.
The support points are allocated to the ActLayer.

#8707 Posn. List         --------------
List and edit the support points in ASCII format.

#8708 Mark Layer         --------------
Mark the contents of a layer (magenta).

#8709 Projection         --------------
Project the graphic layer on to the allocated inclines
and display the milling tracks in grey shades.

#8620 STAN FProjection   --------------
Display projected data sets in the grey shade picture.

#8621 ZOOM FProjection   --------------
Display enlarged the projected data sets in the grey shade picture.

#8622 Display Position   --------------
Click on a projected vector, mark and display
the co-ordinates.

#8711 Posn. 1:           --------------
Position of the inclined reference point.
Points 1,2,3 may not lie on a line.

#8712 Posn. 2:           --------------
Position of the inclined reference point.
Points 1,2,3 may not lie on a line.

#8713 Posn. 3:           --------------
Position of the inclined reference point.
Points 1,2,3 may not lie on a line.

#8714 Z1      :          --------------
Enter the Z value of a support point for the surface.

#8715 Z2      :          --------------
Enter the Z value of a support point for the surface.

#8716 Z3      :          --------------
Enter the Z value of a support point for the surface.

#8722 Apex XY:           --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on to a radius, which
runs in the X or Y direction.
With direction = X: location of the apex line in Y.
With direction = Y: location of the apex line in X.

#8723 Apex Z:            --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on to a radius, which
runs in the X or Y direction.
Depth of apex. Z < 0 : embossed,
Z > 0 : deep cut.

#8721 Direction:         --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on to a radius, which
runs in the X or Y direction.
X : apex runs in X direction,
Y : apex runs in Y direction.

#8726 Mark Location      --------------
Represent the projection surface through a grey shade or colour
picture in plan view with the data to be projected.

#8727 Directn. Z:        --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on to a rotation
symmetrical lying cylinder with variable radius, whose
apex runs in the X or Y direction.
Directn.Z = - : embossed image.
Directn.Z = + : deep cut image.

#8731 Apex X:            --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on a saddle curve.
Location of the apex line in the X direction.

#8732 Apex ZX:           --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on a saddle curve.
Depth of apex Z < 0 : embossed,
Z > 0 : deep cut.

#8734 Apex Y:            --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on a saddle curve.
Location of the apex line in the Y direction.

#8735 Apex ZY:           --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on a saddle curve.
Depth of apex Z < 0 : embossed,
Z > 0 : deep cut.

#8737 Mark Location      --------------
Represent the projection surface through a grey shade or colour
picture in plan view with the data to be projected.

#8741 Mid-point X:       --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to an ellipse section.
Input of mid-point in X, Y.

#8742 Mid-point Y:       --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to an ellipse section.
Input of mid-point in X, Y.

#8745 Mark Location      --------------
Represent the projection surface through a grey shade or colour
picture in plan view with the data to be projected.

#8752 Apex XY:           --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to a lying cone.
The image is correct only if the cone section is parallel
to the mid-axis.
With direction = X: location of apex line in Y,
With direction = Y: location of apex line in X.

#8753 Apex Z1:           --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to a lying cone.
The image is correct only if the cone section is parallel
to the mid-axis.
Depth of apex Z < 0 : embossed,
Z > 0 : deep cut.

#8754 Apex Z2:           --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to a lying cone.
The image is correct only if the cone section is parallel
to the mid-axis.
Depth of apex Z < 0 : embossed,
Z > 0 : deep cut.

#8755 Radius 1:          --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to a lying cone.
The image is correct only if the cone section is parallel
to the mid-axis.
Image radius (always positive).

#8756 Radius 2:          --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to a lying cone.
The image is correct only if the cone section is parallel
to the mid-axis.
Image radius (always positive).

#8751 Direction:         --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to a lying cone.
The image is correct only if the cone section is parallel
to the mid-axis.
X : apex runs in X direction,
Y : apex runs in Y direction.

#8761 Load Polyline      --------------
Load polyline for the projection. A file with a polyline is created
using Operate.Polyline Export.

#8764 Direction          --------------
Project milling track on to a polyline.
X : Polyline runs in the X direction.
Y : Polyline runs in the Y direction.

#8941 TestMillCorr       --------------
Monitor the milling offset calculation, which is calculated
for employment of a spherical cutter.

#8771 Load Sp. Points    --------------
Projection on to a surface spline defined by support points.
Load support points from a file.

#8772 Save Sp. Points    --------------
Projection on to a surface spline defined by support points.
Save support points in a file.

#8773 Edit Sp. Points    --------------
Projection on to a surface spline defined by support points.
Edit existing support points.

#8774 New Sp. Points     --------------
Projection on to a surface spline defined by support points.
Enter new support points.

#8778 Disp.Sp. Points    --------------
Projection on to a surface spline defined by support points.
Display of support points without editing.

#8789 Display B-lines    --------------
Projection on to a surface spline defined by support points.
Display side-view window with B-spline lines.

#8775 Mark Location      --------------
Represent projection surface in grey shades or colour picture
in plan view with the data to be projected.

#8776 Projection         --------------
Project prepared data on to a surface entered. For 2D
engraving data without tool information, safety height, deep cut depth
and sphere radius must be entered.

#8781 Load Polygon       --------------
Project milling tracks on to a milling ring. A file with a polyline
is created using Operate . Polyline Export.

#8785 Mid-point X:       --------------
Project milling tracks on to a polyring. Enter mid-point.

#8786 Mid-point Y:       --------------
Project milling tracks on to a polyring. Enter mid-point.

#8787 Mark Location      --------------
Represent the projection surface by a grey shade or colour picture
in plan view with the data to be projected.

#8788 Projection         --------------
Project the prepared data on to the entered surface. For data
without tool information, safety height, deep cut depth and sphere
radius must be entered.

#3301 Import LANG.RLF    --------------
Load r relief in LANG RLF format from a file.

#3303 Import LG1 rows    --------------
Convert 3D files in LG1 format into relief data.

|Import conditions:
|- The data rows are horizontal.
|- The row separation (Y) is constant.
For a better quality the support point separation in X
should have the resolution of the Y axis.

Inputs:
|Resolution xy:
The relief grid resolution is dependent on the import data and
should lie between resolution xy min and max (comp. Display).

|Border height z:
Relief points, which are not allocated with import data, are set with
the border height Z.

|Fill areas:
Import data, which do not run horizontal or have no constant row
separation cause holes. The holes framed by data are filled with
interpolated surfaces using  'Fill areas = YES'.

#3304 Import DIN/ISO Zl. --------------
Convert 3D files in DIN/ISO format into relief data.

|Import conditions:
|- The data rows are horizontal.
|- The row separation (Y) is constant.
For a better quality the support point separation should have
the resolution of the Y axis.

Vertically running data rows can be rotated by +90> on import.

Inputs:
|Resolution xy:
The relief grid resolution is dependent on the import data and
should lie between resolution xy min and max (comp. Display).

|Border height:
Relief points, which are not allocated import data, are set
with the border height Z.

|Fill areas:
Import data, which do not run horizontal or have no constant row
separation cause holes. the holes framed by data are filled with
interpolated surfaces using 'Fill areas = YES'.

#8791 Vector Position    --------------
Displace the milling data to be projected to another
X-/Y-position.

#8792 Relief Graphic     --------------
Display the loaded relief.

#8793 RelVecGraphic      --------------
Display of the loaded relief together with
the milling data to be projected.

#1103 Relief dZ-Graphic  --------------
Relief plan view with emphasis of finer details.

#1746 Layer Lines        --------------
Relief plan view with layer lines.

#7927 Target Layer       --------------
Change into target layer. If paths are marked, then the 
paths are adopted in the target layer (displaced).

#1101 Graphic            --------------
Match graphic and new picture build-up.

|Arrow keys: 
Displace graphic (pan/scroll). Displacement is possible to
edge of picture only.

|x: 
Replot graphic.

|ZOOM+, ZOOM-: 
Picture enlargement, picture reduction.

|ALL: 
So adjust graphic, that all parts are displayed.

|STANDARD: 
Plot graphic with frame dimensions.

Using Relief and Scan a background graphic can be switched on. 
Relief and Scan can only be used alternately if appropriate
data is available. 
|Relief:
For relief graphics in the background at least 256 
colours are required.

|Scan:
For scanner graphics in the background one can only work with
whole number enlargement/reduction factors (1,2,...n). The max.
enlargement is 8.

#0040 Mark Sp. Points    --------------
Mark the start points, the support points with direction
and the end points on all contours and routes in the actlayer.
Green square: start point of polygon run.
Arrow: support point and direction indicator.
Red triangle: end point of polygon.

#1405 Intarsia           --------------
Automatic calculation of Outline- (M) or
Inline- (W) milling tracks for inlays -
complete with all outer rounding-off.

|Pos. contour rotation sense (anticlockwise)
creates Outline (M).
|Neg. contour rotation sense (clockwise)
creates Inline  (W).

Notes on calculation:
- all path widths are at least. 2*Fr!
- max. contour length 1000-1600 vectors!

#1699 Tr Characteristics --------------
Display and adjustment of contour characteristics
(correction inside, outside, none) for the marked data.
Contours with allocated characteristics are corrected
using the layer tool with export 'Direct Mill' and/or
with display of wide cutter track.

#3093 Mill Data Project  --------------
Open a LG1-Obj. file ( *.LG1 ) or open and save
a LANG-LDRIVER-Project file ( *.LDP ).

|LG1-Obj.-File ( *.LG1 ):
Using 'Open ..' a milling data is loaded and the tool allocated
to the graphic layer. The data can be edited, complete layers
deleted or displaced. Saving a project loaded using 'Open Obj. *.LG1'
takes place using 'File.Direct Mill'.

|LANG-LDRIVER-Project file ( *.LDP ):
A project file is loaded using 'Open ..' and the tool is allocated
to the graphic layer The data can be edited and complete layers
deleted. Using 'Save' are automatically coupled with the correct
tools and position lists.

#0660 Cut                --------------
2 vectors intersect in one contour and the route lying
between these vectors is replaced with a corner.
The corner (route) lies between the 1st and 2nd vector.

#1349 Zoom Row           --------------
Display current line enlarged for better editing.

#1355 Centre to ..       --------------
One or more text lines are centred to a graphic object.
Several text lines are to be marked beforehand.
If no text line is marked, then the shorter operation
for only one line is selected.

The graphic object will be searched in the ActLayer and by
simultaneous pressed <Ctrl> key in all layer. The layer
with the found graphic object will be switched to ActLayer.

#9940 PolylineXY         --------------
Project milling tracks with 2 crossing polylines in
the X and Y direction.

#8611 Load Polyline X    --------------
Load polyline for the projection.
A file with a polyline is created using
Operate.PolyLine Export.
The polyline runs in the X direction.

#8612 Load Polyline Y    --------------
Load polyline for the projection.
A file with a polyline is created using
Operate.PolyLine Export.
The polyline runs in the Y direction.

#8616 Logic              --------------
Every point is projected on to both polylines.
The two Z values are handled as follows:
lowest point (OR): the smallest value
  is adopted.
highest point (AND): the largest value
  is adopted.
Addition: both Z values are added together.

#8613 Mark Location      --------------
Represent the projection surface by grey shade or
colour picture in plan view with the data to be
projected.

#8614 Projection         --------------
Project the prepared data on to an entered surface.
For 2D engraving data without tool information
safety height, deep cut depth and sphere radius must
be entered.

#8615 Multiple Projectn. --------------
An already projected data set is projected again
on to a further surface.

#8799 Display Projection --------------
The projected data is displayed in PLayers.

#8777 Mirror Sp Points Z --------------
Mirror the support points in the Z axis
(reverse direction).

#0702 Milling Tracks 2D  --------------
2D Offset calculations. The proposed cutter offset is
the resultant radius of the layer tool.

|Track parallels:
The 2D offset is calculated for the marked contours.
Thereafter the original contours and the offset tracks
are available.
|Clear track parallels:
The marked contours are cleared in parallel tracks
(continued clearance calculation).

|Mill track relief bottom:
The cutter remains at full depth even in tight points.

|Mill track corner:
The corners of the marked simple geometric forms are
processed, so that sharp inlay work is possible.

|Parallel routes:
parallels are calculated for the marked contours and routes,
until manually broken off. In this function there is no
overlapping check.

#3018 Windows '*.WMF'    --------------
Import Windows WMF data. WMF contents are graphic data.
Contour paths are vectorised coarsely and have no scale
reference.

#3125 MasterCAM '*.NCI'  --------------
3D milling data export to MasterCAM.

#1719 Correct            --------------
|Replace Z range:
Adopt pixel area using cursor and set to a new
common value.

|Horizontal 2PX:
Rotate the relief horizontally after 2 points in the X direction

|Horizontal 2PY:
Rotate the relief horizontally after 2 points in the Y direction.

|Horizontal 3Pkt:
Rotate the relief horizontally after 3 points.

|Wedge (diagonals) XY:
Incline relief height (Z) in X and Y direction.

|Wedge (diagonals) angle:
Incline relief height (Z) in X and Y direction.

|Correct relief:
Systematically correct errors created by the digitalisation
process. Displace all even numbered (0,2,4,..) or all 
odd numbered values (1,3,5,..) 1 pixels to the right.

#7903 Prerequisites      --------------
Processing status (above right):
P : Date in the projection layers.
W : Date in the tool layers.
2D: In the actlayer there are 2D data ->. All
  functions can be used normally.
3D: In the actlayer there are 3D or milling data.
  Here some functions can lead to errors
  (e.g. the right order is lost).
  Here the user must decide whether this is
  permitted.
Green light: program waiting for input.
Red light: function is active.

#7904 Inputs             --------------
Important key allocation:
<L>: confirm - left mouse button.
<Ret>: confirm - Return key.
<R>: Abort - right mouse button.
<Esc>: Abort - ESC key.
<M>: support - middle mouse button
alternative also <F2>.
<F1> : function execution after a data input.
<+>(in the graphic): ZOOM +
<->(in the graphic): ZOOM -

Panning:
If the graphic cursor touches the graphic border with concurrent
pressed <Sft> key, then the picture is displaced.

In CAD all operations take place in the actlayer.
Exceptions from this are the editing functions in
Menu Layout. Here, as desired, one can work in all
layers or in actlayer.

#8782 Standing Cone      --------------
Simplified input for standing cone.

#8783 Torus              --------------
Simplified input for torus ring.

#0633 Repl. by Rectangle --------------
Replace one or more contours by a rectangle with correct
location and dimensions.

If only one contour is clicked on, then only this is replaced,
whereby the original rotation sense is retained. if a frame is
placed around several contours, then all contours are replaced
by a rectangle, whose rotation sense must be determined.

#0634 Rep. by Full Circ. --------------
Replace one or more contours by a full circle with correct
location and dimensions.

If only one contour is clicked on, then only this is replaced,
whereby the original rotation sense is retained. If a frame is
placed around several contours, then all the contours are 
replaced by a full circle, whose rotation sense must be
determined.

#0635 Replace by Ellipse --------------
replace one or more contours by an ellipse with correct
location and dimensions.

If only one contour is clicked on, then only this is
replaced, whereby the original rotation sense is retained.
If a frame is placed around several contours, then all
contours are replaced by an ellipse, whose rotation sense
must be determined.

#8501 3D or Tool         --------------
The selected function is planned for the preparation of
2D graphic data. Its data, however, contains milling
data (3D data and/or additional tool information).

|Abort    
The function is aborted and the milling data is not
modified.

|Ignore
The function is carried out with the milling data. However,
thereafter the data can be faulty.

|Delete 
The 3D data (Pos3D) are replaced by 2D data (PosE)
and/or the tool information is deleted so that finally
2D graphic data are available. Thereafter the function is carried
out normally.

#0651 Delete Position    --------------
Delete a support point in the line to be
interpolated.

#0652 Insert Position    --------------
Insert a further point to 2 support
points.

#0653 Displace Posn.     --------------
Displace a support point in the line to be
interpolated.

#0654 Approximate        --------------
Automatically create a new support point

#0656 Reduce             --------------
Reduce the number of support points.

#0657 Adopt Sp. Pts.     --------------
Adopt only the support points as new line.

#0658 Adopt Spline       --------------
Create and adopt a spline line, which runs
through the edited points.

The value set in InputParameter . SplineResolution
is used for spline interpolation.

#0659 Abort              --------------
End spline editing. The original line remains
unchanged.

#1720 Layer Border       --------------
Search for layer border in relief. Following selection 
ABSOLUTE/relative a point in the desired height is selected 
in the relief.

|ABSOLUTE / relative:
ABSOLUTE = search for border in absolute height in the relief.
relative = search in the relief as function of incline.
The relief is converted for further input.

|Thicken:
Thicken contours found up to a max. of 10 times relief
resolution.

|Level:
Height level for the contour search.
The level can be selected in the range Min .. Max.

#3128 Baublys '*.3'      --------------
Save in Baublys special character format without tool;
normed to 100mm character height.

#0135 Straight           --------------
Input point (position) relative for a deep cut/raised line.

|dX,dY A:
Raised straight, input dX,dY.

|dX,dY E:
Straight deep cut, input dX,dY.

|R,Wi E:
Straight deep cut, input radius, angle.

|15ø R,Wi E:
Straight deep cut, input radius, angle divisible by 15ø.

|R,dX E:
Straight deep cut, R (absolute) and +/-dX,
the prefix dY results from the Mouse posn.

|R,dY E:
Straight deep cut, R (absolute) and +/-dY,
the prefix dX results from the Mouse posn.

|Wi,dX E:
Straight deep cut, angle, dX (absolute).

|Wi,dY E:
Straight deep cut, angle, dY (absolute).

#3001 Adopt              --------------
Abbreviated data exchange with programs. The data exchange
via vector data formats is to be preferred to exchange via
intermediate store as here considerably better resolutions are
transferred.

|[File name]:
Start foreign programs and, following their completion
adopt data. For data exchange the files 'HCAM.LG1','HCAM.EPS', 
'HCAM.PLT', 'HCAM.DXF' or 'HCAM.NCI' are created as desired
in the actual HCAM directory and evaluated after ending 
of foreign program. If data available in desired exchange 
file then import these.

|Institute:
  Program selection: choose foreign program.
Data exchange formats (comp. filter description):
  Lang: HCAM.LG1:
  EPS: HCAM.EPS:
  HP-GL: HCAM.PLT:
  ACAD: HCAM.DXF:
  Mastercam: HCAM.NCI:

#3116 Transfer           --------------
Abbreviated data exchange with programs. The data exchange
via vector data formats is to be preferred to exchange via
intermediate store as here considerably better resolutions are
transferred.

|[File name]:
Save data in target format and start foreign program. For data 
exchange the files 'HCAM.LG1','HCAM.EPS', 'HCAM.PLT', 'HCAM.DXF'
or 'HCAM.NCI' are created before starting foreign program. 

|Institute:
  Program selection: choose foreign program.
Data exchange formats (comp. filter description):
  Lang: HCAM.LG1:
  EPS: HCAM.EPS:
  HP-GL: HCAM.PLT:
  ACAD: HCAM.DXF:
  Mastercam: HCAM.NCI:

#7938 Delete Text        --------------
Deletes all text rows, however, no graphic.

#7801 Tool List          --------------
|Warning!
You have changed the temporary tool data. This can lead to
milling errors. The altered data are not adopted in the
tool library and are lost on leaving MillControl!

Some changes (e.g. deep cut depth are not permitted with 3D milling
data, as only the 2D parts and not, however, the 3D movements can 
be changed. Therefore it is always better to carry out changes
of the technology data already in CAD/CAM before milling track calculation.

#3224 Milling Complete   --------------
Complete data output to the machine.

For working with measurement point and/or tool change
all parameters must be correctly set!
For simple tasks without tool measurement or automatic
tool change the following settings can be determined
- Tool . Tool Lengths e.g. to 0.1 mm
- Gating . Measure in 1st tool to no
- Gating. Rate of cut position Sz > tool lengths e.g. to 2 mm
- Adjustment means - Reference point BPz > Tool lengths
e.g. to 2.00 mm (actual position following program installation).
Now all settings can take place manually on the machine.
The limits in the Z axis are then not monitored and thus
error messages are suppressed.

#3199 Export Graphic     --------------
The graphics and texts are saved in the desired export form
without tool data. All layers, which are marked in colour, are
exported in increasing order (0..Max.Layer). Layers, which are
not to be exported are to be marked in white by clicking on.

If there are 3D milling data (e.g. from  cutout calculation) in
a layer, then the tool data also saved in the graphic layer
is also exported.

#0622 Repl. by Drilling  --------------
Replace one or more paths (routes or contours) by drillings.
If only one path is clicked on this is replaced by one drilling
which lies in the centre of the path. If a frame is drawn around
several paths then all paths are replaced respectively by one
central drilling.

#3111 AH-Soft    '*.H2R' --------------
Export vector data in 2D - H2R format. This format serves
for compact graphics storage. Tool and technology data are
not saved.
With 'Export Graphic' in H2R/LG1 the data are separated by layer.
If milling data is saved via 'Direct Mill', then separation
is according to station number.

#0698 Vector Processing  --------------
Combination of vector processing functions. Following
processing the results are marked. If these are to be laid in
in other layers, then only the target layer is to be
selected in the layer listing.

|Parallel vector:
Selection of an individual vector using the cursor and
calculation of  parallel vector.

|Cut vector:
Select two vectors using the cursor and cut the vectors.
From this results  route with 3 points.

|Set contour:
Select from several vectors (at least 3). After completing
selection using <R>, <Esc> the vectors, if possible,
are combined into a contour.

#1530 Auto Scale Text    --------------
Auto scale text creates simple scale text series following input
of the start dimensions and the increment. The first and last of
the resultant scale texts are indicated during input.

#0062 Rotate             --------------
The marked tracks and routes are rotated. Tracks can be
rotated directly by 90ø about their mid-point or freely
rotated following input of a basis point and the angle
of rotation.

|+90ø/-90ø:
Rotate the marked paths by 90 degrees.

|Rotate:
Rotate the marked paths freely using the cursor.

|Rotate horizontally/vertically:
Rotate the marked paths using two points so that the points
finally lie horizontally or vertically.

#8971 Import Font        --------------
Convert foreign vector set into HZE character set. The
following are imported: ADOBE Type 1, TrueType, LANG ZEI and
LZ1 as well as Kuhlmann BIN.

Modifications, e.g. through copying, deletion etc. of
character sets on the Windows level or similar must be adopted
using 'installed HZE' in the character set list.

Kuhlmann: Umlauts, special characters etc. are randomly
allocated in BIN character sets and must be sorted manually.
Some special characters can only be read in using 'Kuhlmann
Special Char.' and must subsequently be copied into the
character set manually.

|Install HZE:
Following addition or deletion of a character set the font
list must be re-initiated. The list can be sorted as desired
by file name or the entered font name.

#1718 Rightang. Interpol.--------------
An area framed by a rectangle is interpolated in the
horizontal or vertical direction. The interpolation always
takes place in the extension of the shorter rectangle side.

#1110 Graphic Select     --------------
Select graphic area in the window.
Key +: enlarge detail.
Key -: reduce detail.
Arrow keys: increase detail in columns and lines.

The detail is placed at the desired position using the cursor.
Using <L>, <Ret> the graphic is plotted n the desired setting.
<R>, <Esc> abort the input.

#0601 Scale Line         --------------
Display the data of a line between 2 points. The last
entered point is saved and is again available as the
first point of a renewed measurement. With this, for
example, a point can be established in zoom and thereafter
the 2nd point positioned in another graphic setting.
With the simultaneous pressing of the <Sft> key the next
dot in the ActLayer is captured.

<L>,<Ret>: Determine the start of the scale line.
<R>,<Esc>: End function.

#1335 Edit: Block/Line   --------------
Change over block set/line set.

|Block:
Related text lines are known as block and are
edited together. There is no circular lettering
possible in block (radius <> 0).

|Row:
All text lines are edited individually.

#1326 Inclination:       --------------
Enter text angle [°] of inclination
(Slope text characters).

#1367 Text > Graphic     --------------
Convert the marked text lines into vectorised graphics.
A conversion is, for example, necessary before editing
in CAD. Lettering is automatically vectorised for Export,
AutoCorrection, Projections etc.

|Keep text:
The texts are converted into paths and the text lines are
kept. The data are thus available as paths and as texts.
Attention: a subsequent further processing in Export,
AutoCorrection, projections can lead to errors due to
double paths!

|Delete text:
The texts are converted into paths and the text lines are
deleted. Thereafter the texts can no longer be edited.

|In all (text):
The paths are saved in the layers allocated to the text lines.

|In layer # (Selection of a target layer):
The paths are saved in the given target layer.

|Start:
State text conversion.

#0105 Position E         --------------
Enter a point (position X/Y) for a line absolutely.

Operations:
<L>,<E>,<Ret> = position deep cut.
<R>,<Esc> = abort input.
<M>,<F2> = design aid.
<A> = position raised.
<S> = close contour.

#0093 Position E         --------------
Enter a point (position X/Y) for a line absolutely.

Operations:
<L>,<Ret> = position deep cut.
<R> = position raised.
<Esc> = abort input.
<M>,<F2> = design aid.

#8728 Projection         --------------
Project the prepared data on to the Relief.
For 2D graphic data the safety height and deep cut depth of the layer tool
is indicated. For initial milling the relief should be converted using
Relief . Picture FrCorr to the tool to be used.

The relief projection takes place dependent on the setting Project
Type (relative or absolute).

#1761 Layer from Picture -------------
Create relief layer lines (contours). These contour lines can be used 
for the smoothing of very steep (vertical) relief areas.
Depending on the type of projection, the relief Z values are processed
relative or absolute.

|Tool number: [Select using <F2>]
Number of the cutter from the tool library. Depending on the
type of projection the relief Z value is processed relative or absolute.

|Layer number:
Desired number of layer (contour) levels from relief upper edge to
relief base.

#7804 Error Result       --------------
Possible errors have been determined  in the calculated
milling paths. Subsequently you can select an error treatment.
In all cases please check the milling data e.g. using TLayer!
To detect the error all calculations with the exception of
the clearance track are checked.

|Delete:
The effected milling paths are removed.

|Marking:
All milling paths are marked for control or
post-treatment.

|Ignore:
The message is ignored and the milling paths
remain unchanged.

#8719 Multiple Project.  --------------
Again project an already projected data set on to
other surfaces.

See also 'Projection'.

#8725 Projection         --------------
Project the prepared data on to the surface entered. For 2D
engraving data without tool information the safety height,
deep cut depth and sphere radius must be entered.
Milling data from AutoCorrection already has tools.
Here only the spherical error correction is queried.

As selected with spherical error correction for deep cut radius or
saddle. The representation of a spherical tool in a radius
always creates a distortion outside the crown line. through
this cutouts are incorrect and the mirror calculated for the
level is falsified. The representation error is extensively
balanced using the spherical error correction. Disadvantage is,
however, the reducing milling depth towards the edge and a slight
distortion of the engraving.

For the projection of 2D data from a graphic layer a valid layer
tool or a tool in the data set is required. The projection of
milling data sets with several tools in the graphic layer is not
permitted, as the correct spherical correction is calculated
for the first tool only. If neither a tool in the data set
nor a layer tool is available, then an error message results.

#0642 Track Finish       --------------
Auto clean up. Prepare vector data (e.g. from the scanner module).
This function sharpens recognisable corners and smoothes curves.
If paths are marked, then the marked data otherwise data in the
actlayer are processed.

|Scan picture resolution:
This function should first be set to ca. the doubled scanner resolution
and then more and more coarse, until the desired effect is achieved.

|Set track finish [0..3]:
the data to be processed receive
0 : fine straightlines and curves
  (without corner creation using interpolation).
1 : straight lines, corners and curves (standard) *
  (with corner creation using interpolation).
2 : mainly straightlines, corners
  (with corner creation without interpolation).
3 : coarse straightlines and corners
  (with corner creation without interpolation).

|Track optimisation [Y/N]:
Finally unnecessary points are removed using a track optimisation.

This function can be used repeatedly to great advantage.
Before first call-up save your graphic in an additional layer. Now use
Track Finish on one of the layers using track optimisation = YES.
You can compare the result with the initial data at any time. As
required call-up Track Finish repeatedly using the same or a somewhat
smaller scan picture resolution. If the function has altered your data
too much, then regain the last result using UnDo.

#9920 Edit Row:          --------------
Using the text module you can set and edit labels on the graphic screen
in a simple fashion. For this goto in the menu Edit. 

Inputs and processing take place as selected in blocks or rows.
The texts and graphics become layers and with this allocated to
the later processing tools.

The labels can be saved for a later reuse, taken over in the
vector graphic or exported in various formats. You can produce
labels with up to 4000 rows, which each contain up to 100
characters.

#3098 Text Edit          --------------
Start an editor to process an ASCII/ANSI - file.

#1702 Rel UnDo           --------------
The last implemented modification of the
relief picture is cancelled.
In each case only the last status can be recreated.

#1751 Load Relief        --------------
Load a relief in HRL- or HRP - format from a file.
The previous relief is over-written.

#3305 Import Baublys BFF --------------
Load a relief in Baublys BFF format from a file.
Data are referred to the position bottom left = 0.0
and ZMax (above) = 0.

#3307 Import Rel Surface --------------
A relief surface relief previously calculated in AutoCorrection
is imported as relief. For the relief surface calculation a
line-form process should be used. Grid points which possibly
empty are filled on importation by interpolation. For further
conditions and process please note the function Import LG1 lines.

#1712 Interpolate Rows   --------------
Relief pixels, which lie on a straight connection
between 2 points, are interpolated linearly.
With this errors in the relief can be corrected very
easily and precisely. For interpolation 2 points are
entered consecutively. For the input of the second
point a line is drawn as an aid.

#1735 Surf. Rel. Cut     --------------
Create from as far as possible identical relief surface runs.
Internal corners in the contours should be avoided.
The surface progression results from the geometry and
is essentially determined using Surface Height and Surface.
The parameter Surface creates a flat area in
the surface middle. The base height gives a parallel
displacement in the Z direction.

|Radius/parabol/cubic:
Radius/parabol = rounder progression towards the middle flattened.
Cubic = progression towards the middle and to the contour
        flattened.

|Centre X/Y [-0.99..0..+0.99]:
Central displacement in X and in Y direction.
The setting 0 leaves the centre in the middle of the contour.
Positive values displace towards the right and upwards.

|Scaling X/Y [0..1..2]:
Progression scaling of the X and Y axes.
The setting 1 leaves surface unaltered. In the contour middle
the scaling is always 1. With a scaling < 1 the left/lower side
is flattened and the right/upper side raised.

|Cut:
UNI = surface progression in all directions.
HOR = horizontal surface progression.
VER = vertical surface progression.

|Base height:
Additional height displacement in positive or negative
direction. Alternative to manual number input, the Z value
can also be taken over following <M> or <F2> in the number
input from the existing relief. For input
comp. Relief Edit . Pixel Edit . Indicate Pos.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1725 Linear compensate  --------------
Compensate the area surrounded by a contour to a line or point.

|Liner input:
If the linear input is interrupted following the 1st pt.,
ten the linear compensation takes place to a point.

|Level:
Height difference contour to line.
The level can be entered directly manually or
selected in relief following <M>, <F2>.

|Linear / Parabolic / Cubic:
Linear    = linear progression contour - line (pt.).
Parabolic = progression contour - line (pt.),
flattened to point..
Cubic     = progression contour - line (pt.), flattened
to point and to contour.

|Interpol.
With interpol. > 1 a coarsened relief surface relief is
created rapidly and then interpolated. Interpol. = 1
creates a relief surface relief with the max. possible
resolution. This type of surface creation can take a long
time.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1723 Border+Plane Surf. -------------
Border + Plan create a lane (level) surface whose border
is formed using a relief surface. The contour for which a
relief surface is to be calculated, must be selected using
the cursor. Only closed borders can be accepted as surfaces.

|Progression:
Form of surface border progression.

|Surface height:
Height of the plane surface limited by the surface border.
The surface height can be entered directly manually or selected
in relief following <M>, <F2>.

|Border progression on/off:
ON  = create surface using border progression.
OFF = only plane surface without border progression.

Relief limitations using Border+Plane surface:
Cutoff below (lower limit) using 'OR'.
Cutoff above (upper limit) using 'AND'.
Displace upwards using 'ADD'.
Displace downwards using 'SUB'.
Invert background using 'INVERS'.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1729 Cyl. in Contour    --------------
The function creates a surface relief progression (e.g. cylinder)
a long  vector. The surface is limited using a contour.

|Progression :
Form of the progression. The progression is loaded from a file.

|Base height direction:
Offset in Z direction for an elevation or deep cut. The base height
can be entered directly manually or selected in relief following
<M>, <F2>.

|Apex line:
Direction of the cylinder (Apex).

|Copy :
A vector can be selected as apex line in place of
the apex line input.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1717 Liner Progression  --------------
The function creates a  linear progression between 2 Surface
relief lines. The relief surface lines are arranged as ends.
Progression 0 = start of vector,
Progression 1 = end of vector.

|Progression 0/1:
Form of progression. The progression is loaded from a file.

|Base height:
Offset in Z direction for an elevation or deep cut. The base height
can be entered directly manually or selected in relief following
<M>, <F2>.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#8724 Radius  :          --------------
Input of radius data for the projection:

|Radius:
Projection radius (R).

|Apex Z:
Depth (H) at apex. Input takes place alternatively
using width (W).

|Width:
Width (W) of the radius. Input takes place alternatively
using apex Z (H).

|Embossed:
YES = the radius is created embossed.
NO  = the radius is created deep cut.

#8733 Radius X:          --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on a saddle curve.
Location of the apex line in the X direction.

|Apex Z:
Depth (H) at apex. Input takes place alternatively
using width (W).

|Width:
Width (W) of the radius. Input takes place alternatively
using apex Z (H).

|Embossed:
YES = the radius is created embossed.
NO  = the radius is created deep cut.

#8736 Radius Y:          --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on a saddle curve.
Location of the apex line in the Y direction.

|Apex Z:
Depth (H) at the apex. The input takes place alternatively
using width (W).

|Width:
Width (W) of the radius. The input takes place alternatively
using apex Z (H).

|Embossed:
YES = the radius is created embossed.
NO  = the radius is created deep cut.

#1778 Apex Line          --------------
Seek the deep cut apex lines in the relief.

#1776 Dimension Line     --------------
Display a line between two points to be entered to measure the data.

#0859 Edit Own           --------------
Indicate saved relief objects.

|Height:
Max. height of the random dots.

|Density:
Density (separation) of the random dots.

|Base height:
Offset in Z direction for elevation or deep cut. The base height
can be entered directly manually or selected in the relief
following <M>, <F2>.

#3029 Nill&Ritz '*.LOG'
Import of 2D/3D vector data from
Nill&Ritz Logo-Format.

#3129 Nill&Ritz '*.LOG'
Export of 2D/3D vector data in 
Nill&Ritz Logo-Format.

#3006 EPS '*.EPS/AI'     --------------
Import an EPS file, which contains no vector data and no grid
picture. Files are read in using ADOBE Illustrator Format. The
data must be exported in DTP (e.g. CorelDRAW)  using the
following settings:

|- contours without filling,
|- outline as hairline,
|- text as curves.
Data which have been falsely saved, cannot be read in and the export
is aborted with an error message. In this case please export the
data again with the correct settings.

Although EPS data with fillings are imported, the contours are,
however, joined by webs. To avoid this, the contours must be
exported without filling!

#3008 HP-GL '*.PLT'      --------------
HP-GL functions with a fixed plotter resolution. Many
manufacturers transfer vectorised HP-GL data, i.e. circles
are broken down into polygon moves. Here also lies the decisive
disadvantage: curved moves are frequently to coarsely vectorised
for one milling processing. Really useful results are achieved
if the data are exported from CAD or DTP programs with increased
resolution or several times magnified. In HCAM these data can then
be easily matched again. Texts are usually transferred vectorised
in HP-GL, whereby this can transfer such data very simply

The support point resolution for HP-Gl usually lies at 0,025 mm
(inch/1000). Some standard applications in addition support
only one limited extension (to A0). In HCAM the resolution of
HP-GL (support point accuracy) can be matched with step
resolution  in Input Parameter . Plotter; the extension is
almost unlimited.

Unfortunately there are many HP-GL formats for milling plotters,
with extensively arbitrary, and with HP, non-documented 3D
orders. These in part very exotic formats cannot be imported.

#3016 ASCII '*.TXT'      --------------
The open ASCII interface is helpful for all applications,
which want to issue 3D engraving/milling data to a machine.
The format can be easily created and can be processed using
a text editor. A command always begins with a 2-place
character, consisting of capital letters and numbers, followed by
1 or 3 parameters. The format includes vectors, arcs, splines
and different technology data. Notes on formatting can be
found under the instruction CAD . Import.

#3104 DXF        '*.DXF' --------------
Saving in AutoCAD - DXF format.
With Input Parameter . Arc Tolerance > 0  there is an
automatic creation of an arc (arc back calculation)
from 2D polylines.

|Input DXF - Export format:
|  Post decimal point places [3..8]:
  Input of the desired accuracy
  (No. of places after the decimal point at least 3..max. 8).
|  Export format, output format setting:
  LINE/CIR = export using lines and arcs.
  POLYLINE = export as vectorised polyline.

#1733 Object Sequence    --------------
Alter the sequence of the objects. The object sequence
determines the logic inter alia the relief result.

The input of functions 'At Position #' and 'Reverse sequence'
are immediately activated. All other inputs can be activated
several times one after the other and are activated first after
adopt.

#1703 GCut Auto          --------------
Automatic milling data creation from pixel pictures. For RCutAuto
a complete run for the creation of milling data is to be
entered, calculated and saved beforehand. Every recall of RCutAuto
processes the picture with the same settings and saves the milling
data in the same ISO file.
- The PCX or BMP file which was produced using 'Import' is always loaded.
- The picture is scaled in X and Y to the size it was produce using
  'Import..'.
- The milling data is always calculated using the settings from 'Grid'
  or 'Dither'.
- The milling data is saved in the ISO file previously produced
  using 'Export TLayer . DINISO'

#1704 GCut Auto-Param.   --------------
Parameter setting for 'RCut Auto'.

|Z mirror [Y/N]:
With YES the picture is inverted using 'RCut Auto'.

|Approximate:
With YES the picture is approximated using 'RCut Auto'.

#1306 Display Mill Track --------------
The picture is plotted with the wide cutter track of the layer
tool. Dependent on the setting in Input Parameter . Colour the
cutter width is plotted in relief surface - (for texts in
relief surface and relief bottom height) or only in relief
bottom height. For this function a tool must be entered!

For paths with allocated characteristics milling tracks are
calculated and using these the cutter track is plotted.

With 'fill contours = YES' all contours are filled using
the tool colour.

The colour parameter input is opened by clicking with <M>.

|Note (filled graphic):
With tools with FrS=0,0 and FEt=0.001 as well as 'Fill contours = YES'
the contours are filled combined only, without displaying the wide
milling track.

#1109 Co-plot            --------------
Switch on or off layers, which are to be plotted with every
graphic build up. Layers switched on are marked with their
colour, switched off layers in white.

#1726 Surface            --------------
Create a spline surface within  one/more contours.
For the input of support points the separation or the number
of support points can be selected. On taking over Z from
background = YES, the support points are set to the
background height.

|Aspect angle:
Setting of the projection preview (grid net).

|Spline/Linear:
Interpolation procedure between the support points.

|Base height:
Offset in Z direction for raising or lowering. The base height can be
entered directly manually or selected in relief following <M>, <F2>.

|Displ.XY:
Displace individual support points in xy. For this the point is to
be clicked on as closely as possible and displaced
with the <L> key depressed.

|Scroll Z:
Input using a scroll mouse (e.g. boeder Scroll Mouse +).
By rotating the scroll wheel the Z value is displaced.

|Pos Z:
Input of Z value in the input field.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1770 Surf. Rel. Apex    --------------
Create a relief surface relief, which forms no central apex. For
this the curve set is displaced appropriately. An apex line, on which
the highest point lies, must be determined for the calculation.
If the apex is to lie at different heights, then the apex line is to
be created beforehand in CAD as appropriate 3D line (comp. 3D apex).

|Surface height:
Surfaces - raising at the central apex.

|Plane surface:
Flat part at the central apex. If no surface is desired then enter
0 here.

|Radius/parabol/cubic:
Principal curved progression. The radius or cubic progression
is always so distorted, that the curve runs out to the central apex.

|Method:
Matching of the surface creation for critical cases.

|Base height:
Offset in Z direction for raising or lowering. The base height can be
entered directly manually or selected in relief following <M>, <F2>.

|Interpol.:
With interpol. > 1 a rough relief surface relief is created rapidly
and then interpolated. Interpol. = 1 creates a relief surface relief
with the max. possible resolution. This type of surface creation
can take a long time.

|Linear 3D apex:
This function creates a linear 3D progression for special effects,
between start and end height from the apex line.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#0631 Contour Cut        --------------
Depending on the selection of the end point a contour is
separated into two contours or two contours are combined
together. In each case the contours must be closed.

The cut is to be selected using 2 points on the contour(s).
If the points lie on a contour, then 2 closed contours are
created on the cut line. If the points lie on 2 separate
contours, then these are combined together on the cut line.

#1756 Picture MillCorr   --------------
The current relief picture is replaced by a 3D milling corrected
relief. The thus modified can, for example, be further used with
projections. Here nay 2D or 3D milling tracks can be projected on
to the relief. These milling tracks can be engraved deep cut or
embossed, but can also be clearance tracks. For the projection
of milling tracks, which have been previously designed in CAD, as
a rule converted reliefs are required on tools.

Example for the procedure:
- relief milling correction using Picture MillCorr.
- design processing borders in CAD via Relief.
- create clearance tracks in CAD.
- form the milling tracks on the relief using Projects . Relief
  and export

|Tool number: [select using <F2>]:
Number of the cutter from the tool library.

|Procedure: [select using <F2>]:
Rapid   : specially quick correction for same shape reliefs.
Standard: rapid, usually sufficiently correct for relief surfaces.
Exact   : exact and time consuming correction calculation. Should
always be selected with the setting initial milling.

|Smooth, initial milling: [select using <F2>]:
Smooth: fine relief correction for the final relief.
Initial milling: coarse relief correction for rapid creation
of initial milling tracks.

You can achieve favourable conditions if milling resolution and relief
resolution agree. In part, you can save considerable calculation time
if you match milling resolution and relief resolution, then you can
match the relief using Edit . Scale . Reduce [%]/[mm]. To reduce you
obtain the best results if whole number divisions (100%/2 or /3..) are
used. With other divisions there are interferences, which reduce the
relief quality. If there are small differences between the desired
milling resolution and the relief resolution, then it is better if
you match the milling resolution to the existing relief resolution.

#9948 Relief VTR:        --------------
Relief creation from vector data (contours, routes and points).
before first input define the relief using:
New relief: set base surface.

For input select the functions and, if required, thereafter the matching
paths. The selectable paths are marked in the graphic in Prussian blue.
Incline 3 pt.: incline (plane) surface over 3 points.
Incline 4 pt.: incline bent surface over 4 points.
Relief surface: curved surface with gradient towards the contour.
Relief surface cut: simple curved surface.
Relief surface apex: curved surface with defined apex.
Surface: 3D surface spline.
Line balance: grade surface to one point or one line.
Relief progression: straight gradient between 2 heights.
Border + Plan: plane surface with border progression.
Ellipse: sphere or ellipse point.
Route: line with 3D progression.
Char.Projection: special projection on surfaces.
Pattern: create interlace, grid, brickwork, ornament.
Cylinder in contour: limit cylinder by contour.
Line progression: balance 3D progressions at the ends of the line.
LINE-Grav input: 3D -line input (using 3D tableau).
LINE-Grav param: setting the 3D line input.
Insert relief: insert available relief.

To edit already inserted objects, select:
Create new: recalculate relief from existing objects.
Object edit: select and edit an object.
Object search: select an object in the list.
Object sequence/clr/copy/exchange/convert: process objects.
Relief posn. height: indication of relief coordinates.
Relief eight line: horizontal cut through the relief.
Dimension line: measure in the relief.
Standard/Zoom projection: relief perspective indication.
Illuminate: display relief using lighting.
Graphic display: vector graphic ON/OFF.

#9902 File               --------------
Select 'File' and 'Layout'.

#9904 Plot               --------------
Select 'Plot', 'Text' and 'Operate'.

#9905 Operate            --------------
Select 'Edit' and 'Operate'.

#9907 Process            --------------
Select 'Process' and 'TTrack'.

#1771 Relief in Bgr Pict.--------------
The currently active relief is saved in the background picture.
This picture can be displayed as alternative background photo
with the aid Background . Bgr Picture in CAD.

HCAM supports the display of the current reliefs or a picture for
background Thus, for example, you can scan a specification as grey
shade picture. Read in the picture using Import PCX/BMP and adopt
as background picture using relief in Bgr Picture. In CAD plot
your contours and routes via this photo. As desired you can design
a relief from the plotted paths using  ReliefVTR. Fr further editing
in CAD you can now chose between Bgr Picture and Relief as background.

#0617 Enter Position     --------------
A further point is entered between 2 support
points of a vector.
If, following the change of vector, the input is aborted
using <R>, then a point is entered on the vector.

#8978 Corr.Engrav.Ltr.   --------------
This function calculates inset engraved lettering from
error-free outline lettering. Lettering must be suitable for a
milling correction inwards (no routes, no overcutting)! All
settings of the outline lettering (names, spacing) are taken
over by the engraving lettering. Calculation takes place for the
the nominated symbol height (10mm). The offset values must be
referred to this height.

Parameter: direction of correction is a according to the AutoCorr
parameter (down milling/up milling). Outline lettering is vectorised
as per the setting 'Input parameter . Circle/Spline resolution'.
The calculated paths are saved as arcs and vectors in the engraving
lettering set according to the 'arc tolerance' set.

|Target font:
Name for target characters. The program automatically proposes
engraving lettering 'G..' (alternative 'Z..'). The name can,
however, also be freely chosen, by the user.
Note: character sets must be in the HCAM directory!
|Offset for 1st track [mm]<F2>:
Contour separation for 1st clearance track. A tool can be selected
using <F2> as input aid. The 1st track is calculated from FrS, FWi
and FEt.
|Offset of clearance paths [mm]:
The separation of the calculated parallel tracks must be selected
together with the calculation method (radius/diameter offset).
|Rounding of corners:
Selection: pointed and round. In critical cases round is to be selected.
|Calculation method:
Selection radius and diameter offset (comp. offset of clearance paths).
|Path representation:
Selection: mid-line and wide milling track. In critical cases set
'Cutter track' and 'Pause after char. = 1 sec or key'.
Then you can control the result for every character.
|Pause after char:
Selection: none, 1 sec pause, key. For monitoring the engraving paths.

#1803 Contour Progress.  --------------
Similar to the function 'Route' Contour Progression creates a
progression of the boundary contour. Different to 'Route' other
characteristics are possible here:
- progression on one side of the contour only (outer, inner).
- progression at the base pointed or rounded off.

The same conditions apply for Contour Progression  as are necessary
for a correct offset calculation (closed contours, no overcutting).
If problems occur with complex data with Progression = Point, then
the data should be broken down into several objects.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1804 Insert Obj.Layer   --------------
Insertion of another layer using VTR -objects.
With this a sub-program technique is possible.

Layer with object data can be inserted for relief
calculation from VTR objects. The layer to be inserted
may not be the actual VTR layer and must contain exclusively
VTR objects (for relief creation).

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#0707 3D Apex            --------------
Create apex line for ReliefVTR.

|3D Contour Apex:
This function calculates a 3D apex line from closed contours. The
Z values, in relation to the respective contour width, lie between
0 and 1. Tighter contours produce smaller Z values, wider contours
produce larger Z values. This apex line is required for
ReliefVTR . relief surface Apex, in order to create a variable
relief surface height.

The input Offset corresponds to a milling correction input.
The offset is to be set so large, that the desired apex results
(contour width/2).

|Linear 3D apex:
This function creates a linear 3D progression for special effects,
between start and end height from the apex line.

#7803 Milling            --------------
|The position of the chuck Z is too small for
the planned tool!
The chuck reference point BPz is smaller than the
tool length. With this the tool cannot be started 
(Reference point BPz + tool length are greater than the
Z working range).

|Remedial measures:
- clamp the tool shorter and/or
- clamp the tool lower and set the reference point lower.

#8217 Smooth Picture    --------------
Rough steps in grid picture are cut by 1 pixel
and thus unnecessary grading in lines avoided.
It is sensible to use this filter once only. Multiple use
does not achieve any further significant improvement.

#1732 Clear Object       --------------
Delete object (and restore).

|Object:
The restored contours are adopted in the ActLayer
after leaving the relief module.

|Object+Paths:
Deletes the object and the associated paths
(contours, routes).

#1777 Incline 4 pt.      --------------
Convert inclined surfaces, which are limited by contour(s),
into  relief. The surface is determined in X, Y and Z by
4 points (P1..P4). This function creates a curved surface in
the space. Points P1..P4 should, as far as possible, lie
on the extreme points of the surface.

The Z values (Z1..Z4) can be entered directly manually or
selected in relief following <M>, <F2>. With the input of
<F3> for the Z value the actual Z value at the moment of
surface creation is read from the relief. For the Z value,
figures are displayed during the input '?'. Thus surfaces
can be constructed independent of each other. If the reference
height is changed, then all the therefrom dependent surfaces
change with a new creation.

Select position 'a'= absolute and 'r'= relative.
With 'relative' the supporting points are also moved with the surface
with 'absolute' the support points remain independent from the contour.

#1721 Incline            --------------
Sloping surface, creates 3 or 4 point sloping flat surfache.
Inclined surfaces, which are limited by contour(s), are converted
into relief. The area is determined by 3(4) points (P1, P2, P3(, P4))
in X, Y and Z.

The Z values (Z1, Z2, Z3(, Z4)) can be directly entered manually or
selected in relief following <M>, <F2>. With input of <F3> for
the Z value, the actual Z value at the point in time of the area
creation is read from the relief. For the Z figure value '?' is
indicated during the input. With this areas can be created independent
of each other. If the reference height is changed then all areas
dependent on this alter with new creation.

|Select position 'a'=absolute and 'r'=relative.
With 'relative' the support points are also moved with the areas,
with 'absolute' the support points remain independent of the contour.
Editing (large changes) using 'convert object' leaves the supporting
points unchanged, thus other inclines result!

|3 Points/4 Points:
Switching for 3 point/4 point input.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1001 Select Palette     --------------
The colour palette for grey shade/colour representations
of other grey shade representations are used, inter alia,
in Projections, Relief and Grid Cut.

|Background Palette: setting of the background intensity (4..32)
for background relief or picture. Small values give a marked
contrast, large values give a weak picture.

#1756 Picture MillCorr   --------------
The current relief picture is replaced by a 3D milling corrected
relief. The thus modified relief can for example, be used further
with projections. Here any desired 2D or 3D milling tracks can be
projected. These milling tracks can be deep cut or raised engravings
and also clearance tracks. For the projection of clearance tracks
which have been previously designed in CAD, as a rule reliefs
converted to tools are necessary.

Example of the procedure
- relief cutter correction using Picture Mill Correction.
- design processing borders in CAD via relief.
- create clearance tracks in CAD.
- form to relief and export milling tracks using
  Projections . Relief.

|Tool number: [select using <F2>]
Number of the cutter from the tool library.

|Procedure [select using <F2>]
Exact: exact and time consuming correction calculation.
Point: exact and very rapid correction calculation for spherical
and cylindrical tools. With tools with sphere inter alia errors
can occur in particular at steep points (for tools with a sphere
do not apply!).

|Smooth/initial milling: [select using <F2>]
Smooth: Fine relief correction for the final relief.
Initial milling: rough relief correction for rapid
creation of the initial milling tracks.

#1779 Draft Angle        --------------
Clearance and draft angle.
Clear an embossed relief downwards and apply a draft angle. This
function is foreseen for embossed relief. If it is not certain
that the current relief is embossed then the question
'Emboss relief?  [Y/N]?' has to be answered. The draft angle is
calculated inwards. The lowest relief level remains unchanged.

|Angle of the draft angle (W) [ø]:
Angle of the draft angle for relief and clearance. The draft
angle in relief is calculated inwards. All surfaces which have
a small deviation from vertical as draft angle are inclined.

|Create draft angle inwards [Y/N]:
With YES the relief draft angle is created inwards.

|Type of calculation exact/pointed:
exact: exact and time costly correction calculation.
pointed: for sphere and cylinder tools precise and very rapid
correction calculation. With tools with spheres under certain
circumstances errors occur particularly at steep point
(do not use for tools with spheres!).

|Clear form downwards (F) [mm]:
The relief is extended downwards (cleared).

|Clearance using draft angle [Y/N]:
With YES the cleared item is allocated a draft angle.
|Add border for cleared incline [Y/N]:
With YES the relief is enlarged outwards by the width of the lower draft
angle.

#8003 Vectorisation      --------------
Centreline vectorisation. The borders of the dark fields
are sought and saved as vectorised lines. The centre line
of thin lines is sought and saved as a route.
(Only for deepcut engraving).

An alternative method is available using 'Border Search'
and subsequent centreline calculation using 'TTrack . Milling
Track . MillingTrackBase.

|Scan picture resolution [dpi]:
Grid resolution of scanned picture in dpi.

|Track type (vectorisation procedure):
0 = mainly arcs
(without corner location, without approximation, without
interpolation).
1 = fine lines + arcs
(without corner location, with approximation, with interpolation).
2 = lines, corners, arcs [Standard]
(with corner location, with approximation, with interpolation).
3 = lines + corners
(with corner location, with approximation, without interpolation).
4 = coarse lines, corners
(with corner location, with approximation, without interpolation).

|Smooth:
With YES a smoothing takes place with arc interpolation.
To set select <M> or <F2>.

|Quality level:
Setting for the vectorisation accuracy.
0=very high, 4= small vector resolution.
To set select <M> or <F2>.

#0077 Export Macro       --------------
The marked tracks and routes are saved in a macro file
together with a reference point.

2D/3D -graphic data or milling data with tool
can be saved as Macro.  To export tool data save the tool object
and mark this using 'Mark All' (also finds tool data).

|Reference grid:
Select one of the 9 main reference points.

|Reference free:
Enter a reference point independently.

|Save:
The macro is saved in a file with reference point.

#3130 LDriver '*.LDP'    --------------
Milling data are issued via 'direct mill' together with the tool and
technology data for the  LANG-LDriver(GDriver). The format is not
suitable for data exchange via 'Export Graphic'.

|Project Export (LDP) - Normal output (load file using LDriver):
For normal output no special entries in 'LDriver.ini' are
necessary. Save LDP file using 'LDriver *.LDP' and load into LDriver.

|Export *.LDP - automatic output using LDriver from Ver.4 or GDriver:
for automatic output the LDriver must be appropriately set up.  Entry in
'LDriver.ini' in section [ldriver] (for GDriver analogous).
  [ldriver]
  program type=Impala
program modus=auto
  machine type=Impala
  control type=Demo
  Autodatei=D:\LANG\LDriver\Imp400\HCAM.LDP

1) For export a correct path must be given  'establish LDP'.
   Start LDriver for the first output.
   'LDriver' is shown only in the task strip.
2) Using 'LDriver *.LDP' create the LDP file in accordance with
   entry in 'LDriver.ini' (here for example 'HCAM.LDP').
3) The LDriver output window is opened automatically.
   Output is started using <OK> and the LDP file (here e.g.'HCAM.LDP')
   deleted.
For all other outputs repeat procedure from 2).

|Set up LDP (automatic data output):
Select export path (here for example 'D:\LANG\LDriver\Imp400\HCAM.LDP').
The path must agree with the entry 'LDriver.ini . Auto file'.

#0038 New                --------------
In order to create a new graphic all graphic
layers and texts are deleted.

With selection of the function using <M, F2> the data to be deleted
(graphic layer, text, aid lines, working frames, error marks, tool
layer, project.Layer, LDP back-up, relief, scanner picture) can be
selected individually.

#8801 Mark Intersect Pt  --------------
Checking of data in the actlayer
before milling path calculations.

|Auto Track Check (Checks vector and text data):
The vector and text data in the actlayer are examined.
The following are carried out in sequence:
track optimisation, join tracks, sense of rotation for embossed or
recessed correction, interface point examination.
|Constraints:
- if the layer contains 3D or milling data the
  function is aborted.
- if text data are available for this layer the examination
  takes place in full, however, without text and result
  adoption into the graphic layer. Otherwise the checked
  and possibly corrected data is adopted in the graphic layer.

|Track Check (Checks vector data only):
All contours and routes in ActLayer are checked. Closed contours are filled
and errors, which are to be found within the selected resolution
are marked. Contours are marked, according to their sense of rotation,
green or blue; routes are marked in yellow. The area around errors, such as
overlapping and false sense of rotation are marked in red. The marked areas
can contain errors. Therefore these should be examined again in ZOOM.

Following examination the areas enclosed by contours are shown with
'Areas enclosed by contours:' in mmý, cmý and m".igt.
The accuracy is determined by check resolution set.

|Seek intersect point (Checks vector data only):
Checks in ActLayer all vectors against each other for possible
overlapping. All overlappings are marked and saved. The last
registered overlapping is also displayed with every graphic
build-up in CAD. If there are double points in the data set,
then these points, however max. 500 points, are marked.

|Delete interface point (Checks vector data only):
Deletes the current interface point list. The list of overlappings
are also deleted with the next milling correction or with the next
call-up of the marked interface point.

#1709 Relief Volume      --------------
The relief volume in mm3 and the relief surface in mmý are indicated
for the current loaded relief. Accuracy is determined by the
relief resolution set.

The volume is calculated for the deepest to the highest
relief surface.

The surface is calculated for all parts of the relief > RZMin
(Basis surface).

#1713 Set MinMax         --------------
The points in a rectangle of 2x2 .. 4x4 pixels are set
anew to the
- mid-value
- greatest value
- smallest value.

|Diameter:
Setting of the rectangular scale
2 = 2x2 Pixel .. 4 = 4x4 Pixel.

The selection mean/largest/smallest diameter in the active function
can be modified using <M>, <F2>.

#3225 Mill from Mark     --------------
Graphic input of a start point for the processing and output
to the machine.

|Output from mark:
  Setting of a new support pt. for processing.
|Output tool object:
  Mill/indicate only a single tool data set.
  An individual tool object can be selected for output.

Note: for working with measurement point and/or tool
change all parameters must be correctly set!
For simple tasks without tool measurement or automatic
tool change the following settings can be determined
- Tool . Tool Lengths e.g. to 0.1 mm
- Gating . measure in 1st tool to No.
- Gating. Rate of cut position Sz > tool lengths e.g. to 2 mm
- Adjustment means - Reference point BPz > Tool lengths
e.g. to 2.00 mm (actual position following program installation).
Now all settings can take place manually on the machine. The
limits in the Z axis are then not monitored and thus error
messages are suppressed.

#3227 Graphic from Mark  --------------
Graphic input of a start point for the processing
and output to the machine.

|Output from mark:
  Setting of a new support pt. for processing.
|Output tool object:
  Mill/indicate only a single tool data set.
  An individual tool object can be selected for output.

#8002 Border Search      --------------
Outline vectorisation. Vectorised closed contours are
created from the dark fields.

|Scan picture resolution [dpi]:
Grid resolution of the complete picture in dpi.

|Track type (vectorisation process)
0 : mainly arcs
Calculation of smooth runs (arcs) creates high quality with
graphics with large fields and curves - is less suitable for
very small symbols (texts).
1 : fine lines + arcs
(without corner location, with approximation, with interpolation).
2 : lines, corners, arcs [Standard]
(with corner location, with approximation, with interpolation).
3 : lines + corners
(with corner location, with approximation, without interpolation).
4 : coarse lines, corners
(with corner location, with approximation, without interpolation).

|Smooth areas
With YES a smoothing takes place with circular arc interpolation.
Not used for track type = 0.
To set select <M> or <F2>.

|Quality level
Setting for the vectorisation accuracy.
0=very high, 4=small vector resolution.
To set select <M> or <F2>.

#0644 Smooth             --------------
Approximation (smoothing) of 2D-vector data.

#3118 Kuhlmann '*.SOR'   --------------
Saving in Kuhlmann SOR format. If there is tool information
in the data (e.g. following direct mill or export graphic
+ milling data in the layers), then tool station numbers
are passed on with WZ n (n = station number). With the export
of pure graphic data the layer numbers (+1) are passed on as
tool number (WZ n) (Layer 0 = WZ 1 etc.).

With Input Parameter . Arc Tolerance > 0 there is an
automatic creation of arcs (arc back calculation) from
vectorised data.

|Date for relief calculations:
Additional saving of RE and RA, for export of 2D graphic data.

|Direction D3A:
Direction alignment = dependent on PROGRAV-Software status.
D3A = 0 switches off 3D movements and exports data in 2D
without WZ!
With D3A <> 0 the milling depth is formed from the deep cut
depth + safety height.

|Note safety height:
If tools are given safety heights > 0, then the
machine (using D3A) travels this safety height downwards;
i.e. the Z-zero point is displaced by the safety height above the
material. In this case the milling depth can also be controlled using
the safety height.
(Safety height, local: Program main menu . K . Safety height = 0).

If the tools are given safety heights = 0 then the
Z-zero point can be placed at the material surface for
processing.
(safety height, global: Program main menu . K . Safety height > 0).

#3019 Mastercam          --------------
|*.NCI (3D/2D)
Milling data acceptance from Mastercam. With import of
3D milling data and additional monitoring of the Z axis takes
place. If the upper processing point is  further away from 0
than 0.01 mm, then there is a message and, if desired, a
displacement to Z upper = 0.0 mm.

|ASCII-Pt. *.DOC/*.FIA
Ordered 3D dot cloud.

#0136 Slot               --------------
Input for a rounded linear or circular slot.

|linear
Input for a straight, horizontal slot. The
slot is rounded over the complete thickness
|  Centre:
  Reference point (slot middle) in mm.
|  Width B:
  Width of the slot in mm.
|  Thickness D:
  Overall thickness of the slot in mm.

|Circular
Input for a slot in arc. The reference point and the
dimensioning can be determined over various parameters.
|  Posn. <F2>:
  Switch for input centre of slot middle.
|  Centre/slot middle:
  Ref. point in mm.
|  Main radius R:
  Radius from centre to slot middle in mm.
|  Thickness D:
  Thickness of the slot in mm.
|  Angle/width <F2>:
  Switch of dimensioning.
|  Posn. angle/initial angle:
  Dimensioning angle in degrees.
|  Pass-over angle/measured width/end angle:
  Dimensioning angle in degrees or dimensioning width mm.

#1737 Convert Object     --------------
Mark individual relief objects and displace, distort
or activate the convert menu using Space.

Various Relief objects, due to their format, do not all allow
reshaping. In these cases one has to work using
'Object Copy' and 'Object exchange.

#1774 Graphic Indicator  --------------
Select the desired indicator.

|Relief objects / intermediate store:
Select vector data indicator.

|Plot:
Plot the graphic using the selected setting.

|Colours:
Adjustment of colour table for 
representation of the Relief picture.

#1759 Relief Layer Corr. --------------
Process a relief in single layers, e.g. if the relief depth exceeds the
machine working depth. The relief is divided automatically into
several layers, the milling paths are created and shown in 3D. The
milling data can be exported or saved in a graphic layer. The relief is 
processed in layers from top downwards. Layer thickness and layer 
number are alternative inputs. The last input is
always valid. 

|Layer thickness [mm]:
Thickness of individual layers in mm. With uneven layer distribution
the last layer is thinner.

|Layer number [2..99]:
Distribution of the relief into 2..99 equally thick layers.

|Limit relief [YES/NO]:
With "YES" the partial relief in xy is limited to the range which
contains data. This range can be increased through "Limit Offset".

|Limit Offset:
Increase of relief with "Limit relief = YES". The relief is increased up
to its original size. The increase in size by at least half of the
finishing tool-cutter tip is sensible (FrS+FrK).

|Calculate:
Start calculation procedure. The calculation setting of each step is to be
entered separately (Relief AutoCorr). The setting of the parameter
Fin. tool, lift Level = [Y/N] = Yes is sensible. Thus the milling paths on
the plane Level 0 (layer upper side) are avoided. Following the successful
calculation the milling paths are shown in 3D. The milling paths can be
viewed and exported in 'Export Milling Data'.
|  NORM Projection:
  The (3D-) data are shown in perspective. With setting in horizontal
  projection (all angles = 0) the 3D tracks are shown in grey-(colour-)steps.
|  ZOOM Projection:
  An enlargement of the (3D-) data is shown in perspective. This
  function is used after 'Norm Projection'.
|  PLayer Export:
  The calculated cutting data are exported.
|  PLayer > ActLayer:
The milling data is taken over in one graphic layer.
|  Next calculation:
  The calculation of the next layer is started.

#0085 Tangent            --------------
Create a tangential connection on a contour.
Possibilities are tangents from a point on a contour
or tangential connections between 2 contours.
The contours must be closed and free of error.
Tangents can be created on almost any contour or polygon.
The contour is interrupted at the point of contact of the tangent.
Limitation: the initial point of the tangent may not lie on
the contour.

|Point -> Contour:
A tangential bond emanating from a point
on a contour. 

|Contour -> Contour:
Create a tangential connection between 2 contours.

#0855 Surface Milling    --------------
Create 2D milling tracks to clear a surface.
For this function an empty tool should be selected.

|Spirals:
Spiral form clearance track for round surfaces.

|Circles:
Circular clearance track for round surfaces.

|Radial:
Radial clearance track for round surfaces.

|Rectangle:
Clear rectangular surface.
Clear rectangular surface using horizontal-,
vertical hatching and with rectangular spiral.

|Round of rectangle:
Clear rectangular surface using rectangular spiral,
however, with rounding off of corners.
Caution: the spiral separation in the curves is to some
extent increased!

|Spiral > Rectangle:
Transition from a near circular spiral (centre)
into an external rectangle.
Caution: the spiral separation in the curves is to some
extent increased!

|Picture frame:
Create a frame (rectangle) with the layout border.

#1760 Relief Layer Mill  --------------
Relief initial milling calculation in layers.
Depending on the type of projection the relief is processed relative
or absolute.

|Tool number: [Select using <F2>]
Number of the cutter from the tool library.

|Layer number:
Desired number of layer (contour) levels from relief upper edge to
relief base.

|Track separation f(FrS+FrK):
Separation of milling tracks dependent on cutter radius
(Cutter tip radius + cutter sphere radius).

|Continue relief edge Y/N:
The input is dependent on the relief shape.
YES: the relief is increased by the radius of the tool.
For embossed reliefs. With this the program creates milling paths
beyond the limits of the work piece. 
NO: the size of the relief remains unchanged.
For recessed reliefs.

|Hatching angle:
Course direction of the linear hatching tracks.

|Hatching using contour Y/N:
YES: the hatching contours are also saved.
NO: only the pure hatching lines are saved.

|Contour parallel Y/N:
YES: creation of contour parallel clearance tracks.
NO : creation of linear clearance tracks.

|Pre-milling offset Z:
Safety offset of the milling tracks to the relief.

|Test rack display:
Display to check the vector and tool data. The display can be
advanced in steps using <Space> and by page using <S>.

|Standard/Zoom projection:
The (3D) data are displayed in perspective. With setting in
plan view (all angles = 0) the 3D tracks are shown in grey
(colour) shades. PosA: colour setting for raised movements.
With input PosA without colour the perspective display is with
height level marking.

#8805 Clr.Double Path    --------------
This function removes congruent paths and vectors which occur
frequently. Individual, in part double vectors are also
detected and corrected. For the removal of complete vectors or
partial vectors the contours are opened (PosA is entered)!

#1515 ScTxtTyp:          --------------
Determine the arrangement of the texts on the scale.
For some types of scale texts the text can be rotated by 180°
using 'SkTxtRi.'.


|horiz.:
scale text horizontal.

|Vert.:
scale text vertical.

|Circ.:
scale text circular (only for circular scales).

|Centre:
centre scale text tangential.

|Radial.:
Scale text in the direction of the line gradations (for circular scales).

#1734 Object Search      --------------
Search and selection aid for editing the relief objects.
The secure selection of some objects is, in part, difficult,
e.g. if objects are congruent. To Object search belong the
selection for indexing the current object, the object list
and the marked paths in the graphic. The selected object
is marked in the graphic and emphasised in red in the list.

|Contour #:
Indication and input of the current series object number.

|First, last one forward/backward:
Advancing / selection of the current object. The current
object is marked in red in the object list and in the graphic.
The cursor keys <CuUp, PgUp, CuDn, PgDn, Home, End>
also serve for the selection of current objects.

|Edit:
Editing of the current object (comp. Object Edit).

|Object sequence:
Amend the sequence of the objects.

|Object clr:
Delete current object (comp. Object clr).

|Object copy:
Copy the paths for an existing object. Thereafter
these are available as marked paths.

|Object exchange:
The paths of an existing object are replaced by new paths.

#0611 Repl.w. Curve      --------------
The route between 2 points is replaced by a parallel
arc (Fit curve). Between these points there must be a
3rd point still available.

With simultaneous pressing of <Sft> a curve
(Spline4) with tangential transition to the binding
point is created.

The resolution of the arc is determined by
Input Parameter . Spine Resolution.

#0800 Place drill holes  --------------
Place drill holes on a plate. The working limit given in
Layout . Limits is used as limit.

Beachten Sie auch die Funktion 'Bohrzyklen'.

|Centre
A drill hole is placed in the centre.

|Corner
Place 4 drill holes at the corners with the separation ax and ay for
working limit.

|Edge:
Place 8 drill holes on an edge at a separation of ax and ay
for working limit.

Note: drill holes along a line can be created using
Process . LineType.

#0946 Action Indicator   --------------
If there is only one tool in a data set then, selecting
<F2, M> the tool can be taken over as layer tool.

|Indicator Green (2D):
There is no tool in the data set which could be taken over. 

|Indicator Red (3D):
A single tool can be taken over as a layer tool.

#8797 Unwind             --------------
Unwind graphic data on to a cylinder. To create
unwound milling data the model must be distorted and then,
using Projection, converted into projected milling paths.

If a stamp calculated using AutoCorr. be developed, then the
milling data is to be taken over in a graphic layer using
'TLayer > ActLayer'.
Unwind is only possible with the projection setting 'Graphic'.

Procedure for recessed engraving (milling data in the graphic layer):
- 'Projection . Projection Parameter . Data Source' to 'Graphic'.
- using 'Projection . Relief . Unwind' match milling paths to the surface.
- using 'Projection' project milling paths on to the surface.
- view and export projected milling data.

Procedure for embossed engraving (milling data in the graphic layer):
- calculate 3D milling paths in 'AutoCorrection'.
- take over milling paths in one graphic layer.
- 'Projection . Projection Parameter . Data Source' to 'Graphic'.
- using 'Projections . Radius . Unwind' math milling paths.
- using 'Projections . Radius . Projection' project milling paths.
- view and export projected milling data. 

#8796 Unwind             --------------
Unwind graphic data on to a polyring. To create
unwound milling data the model must be distorted and then,
using Projection, converted into projected milling paths.

If a stamp calculated using AutoCorr is to be developed, then
the milling data must first be adopted in a graphic layer using
'TLayer > ActLayer'.
Unwind is only possible with the Projection setting 'Graphic'.
The unwind centre is always the centre of the polyring.

Normal circle radius R [mm]:
Radius on which the initial data remains unchanged. All paths
which deviate from the radius are deformed according to the polyring.

Procedure for recessed engraving (milling data in the graphic layer):
- 'Projection . Projection Parameter . Data Source' to 'Graphic'.
- using 'Projections . Radius . Unwind' math milling paths.
- using 'Projections . Radius . Projection' project milling paths.
- view and export projected milling data. 

Procedure for embossed engraving (milling data in the graphic layer):
- calculate 3d Milling paths in 'AutoCorrection' 3Dchnen.
- take over milling paths into one graphic layer.
- 'Projection . Projection Parameter . Data Source' to 'Graphic'.
- using 'Projections . Polyring . Unwind' match milling paths.
- using 'Projections . Polyring . Projection' project milling paths.
- view and export projected milling data. 

#0623 Round-off all      --------------
Round off all internal and external corners in the marked contours
independent of the length of the vector. For this
procedure one or more contours can be marked.
The calculation is suitable for closed contours free of overlapping!!

|Corner radius:
Desired rounding-off radius. The width of the area enclosed by the
contour(s) must, at all positions, be at least 2 x corner radius. If this
minimum width is undercut then holes result or the contour
is ignored. 

|Round-off angle:
Vectorising angle for the rounding-off (3°-170°).
An angle of 3° to ca. 30° rounds off all corners.
an angle  >120° (e.g. 150°) forms corners from all
rounding-off in the given radius.

For the calculation several contours can be clicked on one
after the other. The function is ended using <Esc>
or clicking in a free field (without marking a contour).

#3027 DIN/ISO '*.???'    --------------
Import of DIN/ISO milling data.
Read in are paths with G0, G1, G2 and G3.
At the start of data at least 1 set with G0 is expected.
If this is not available, then a set G0 X0 Y0 is created.
For the milling paths at least at the start G1, G2 or G3
must be put in once. If no correct import of the data is
achieved, then the ISO data is either faulty or contains
sets with special functions. In this case you should check
and revise the data using an editor.

Data from UNIX systems are formatted in another manner and must
be converted into DOS using file . Special . UNIX before import.

|Circle MP abs/rel:
Absolute/relative dimensioning of the circle centre point.
With 'Auto' an automatic recognition relative/absolute is used.

|Import format 2D/3D:
Import only graphic vectors for 2D, all milling data for 3D.
With import of 3D milling data there follows an additional check
of the Z axis. If the upper processing point is further away
than 0,01mm from 0, then a message results and selective
displacement to Z above = 0.0mm.

|Adopt tool with 3D:
With YES the tool data F=advance mm/min, S=Spindle revs rpm
and T=tool number are read in and saved as tool in the data set.
These data are suitable only for the further export to a
machine. The tool data will possibly have to be supplemented.

|Import metric/inch [Y/N]:
Switch of scaling mm/inch. With e setting "inch" all dimensions are
converted to mm using a factor of 25.4.

#0647 Sort manually      --------------
Manual sequence determination of paths (graphic or milling paths
using the cursor. For sorting, the start points for all possible contours
are marked. Following selection of the first start point using the cursor, 
a connecting line is drawn as input aid from the end point of the last
selected contour/milling block to the start point lying nearest to the cursor.
A series is confirmed  using  <L> . Following <R> the still unsorted
contours/blocks are taken over in unmodified sequence.

Paths lying on he surrounding paths are sorted jointly
Milling paths (with tools) can only be sorted as interleaved blocks.

Note: if there are several tool objects in the data set then these are
found individually, i.e. the logical connection between several tools has
to be determined by the user.
Therefore, for AutoCorrection the parameter should be switched in
'Clearance paths together [Y/N]:' to YES.

|All graphic paths:
All contours are sorted individually.

|Milling blocks:
Interlaced contours which belong to one tool object related contours
(internal contours, followed by the external contour) can only be
sorted together. 

#6001 Navigator          --------------
Select a Navigator (for sign, front panel,..)
plate,..). It leads you through the processing.
The working off takes place from top down.
You can select the function marked in black.
If a function is not to be selected, then switch 
to the next operation using 'Forward'.
Using the function 'Back' you switch to the
previous function.

If you select an individual function (New, Open,..),
then Navigator is activated automatically when
they are ended. Following the selection of a
menu (Plot, Edit,..) the Navigator must be started
again using 'Parameter . Navigator'.

Using 'End Navigator' you finish with Navigator.
You start it again using 'Parameter . Navigator'. 
Using <Esc> or <R> (righthand Mouse key)
you abort Navigator. With a new start the
Navigator reappears at the point at which it was 
ended using <Esc/R> .

#6011 New / Limits       --------------
You can adjust the graphic for a new task using
'New / Limits. 'New / Limits' deletes the data in the 
working memory and determines the processing limits
for the subsequent work. For the limits  at least the
working frame must be entered left below (0) to
right above.

#6012 Open               --------------
Open a file with vector and text data.
Read are LG1, H2R and SLD data.
Using the middle Mouse key <M> (alternative <F2>)
a library selection is activated.

If you do not wish to open any file then, using 'forward',
switch to the next function.

#6013 Tools              --------------
For simple recessed work, the layers are linked and
exported using the layer tools (Tools #0..MaxLayer).
The other tools are planned for milling offset calculations
in AutoCorrection, Relief etc. 

Independent of the geometry a change station (WSt) 
must be allotted to each tool. Tools with WSt = 0 are
switched off. A tool change is only carried out with the
change of WSt#. On the other hand tools with the same
geometry data but different technology data (milling depth,
advance,...) can have the same WSt#.
The values (max. layer depth, chip lift,
smoothing offset.) are used for 'characteristics'
or 3D cycles respectively.

#6014 Aid lines         --------------
The following graphic and text inputs capture on activated 
aid lines. For the aid line inputs 'Display' and 'Capture'
must be switched on.

If you do not wish to enter any aid lines, then, using 'Forward',
switch to the next function.

#6015 Input text         --------------
Using the text module you can set and edit labels in
a simple fashion. For this goto 'edit:' in the menu. 
With the input of the first line a line reference point
is demanded immediately. This point can be placed at
the required point using the cursor or entered via
the keyboard.

Inputs and processing take place in part in blocks or rows.
The texts and graphics are allocated to layers and thus to
the later processing tools.

#6016 CAD                --------------
Using the 'CAD' menu you achieve graphic input and all
further functions. Enter your drawings in CAD.
Line graphics can be further edited in the menus 'Edit', 
'Operate' and 'Process.'

After having completely entered the drawing you return
again to the Navigator using 'Parameter . Navigator'.

If you do not wish to enter any drawing then, using 'Forward'
switch to the next function. 

#6017 Save               --------------
Completely save a task. If a file name still does not exist,
then the program goes to file selection
(comp. 'Save as'). In CAD the key combination <Ctrl S>
has the same function. 

The program saves SLD format only. If previously
a H2R- or LG1 file is loaded, then a new name has to be
entered using 'Save'. In the SLD format all data of the current
task are saved including characteristics, aid lines, layer
tools, technology data and task frameworks.

#6018 Direct mill        --------------
The graphics and texts are converted into milling paths,
linked with the layer tools and saved in the desired export
format. All layers are exported, which are marked in colour,
in increasing order (0..MaxLayer). Layers, which are not to be
exported are to be marked in white by clicking on. 

For each layer with milling data a valid tool must be entered
(comp.'Paramet . Tool Input').
If there are 3D milling data in a layer (e.g. from a cutout
calculation) then they are exported in the tool data also saved 
in the graphic layer.

#6019 3D Cycles          --------------
Direct calculation of 3D milling cycles from marked
contours or drillings. The conversion can always take place
for one contour and/or drilling only. The 3D cycles are saved,
together with the tool data, in the given target layer.

Drillings, spiral drillings and indentations can also be used
on paths which are not drillings. Then the centre and the 
average diameter are determined from the data in X/Y and
taken over into the input. 

#6020 Edit               --------------
Paths (drawings) can be modified (corrected). If texts
are to be edited, then these must be vectorised beforehand
using 'Edit Line . Operat Line .Text > Graphic'.

After you have completely edited the drawing, you return to
Navigator again using 'Parameter . Navigator'.

If you do not wish to edit then, using 'Forward' switch to
next function.

#6021 Intarsia           --------------
Calculation of outline or inline milling tracks for inlay
work. The intarsia can, as desired, be provided with
a shoulder (offset cutting at less depth). For shoulders
and offsets the same or different tools can be selected.
Equally the milling paths can be saved in different
or the same target layers. The calculation of the shoulder
is switched off if the shoulder depth or shoulder width = 0
is selected.

The width of the surface enclosed by the contour(s) must be
at least 2 x offset radius at all points. If this minimum width
is undercut then holes result or the contour is ignored.

#6022 Scanner            --------------
Scanner module for vectorisation of b/w grid pictures.
Using 'Load Pixel file' you import a monochrome
PCX, TIFF or BMP file. Using 'Edge search' vectorised
closed contours are created.

For this set the parameters
Scan picture resolution [dpi]: (e.g. 300)
Type of track: 2
Smooth: YES
Quality level:
Note: optimise your edges using
'Process . Track Finish'.

If you do not wish to scan then, using 'Forward',
switch to next function. 

#6023 Layout             --------------
Following scan adjust your graphic here.

If you do not wish to adjust the graphic then, using 'Forward',
switch to next function.

#6024 Process            --------------
Using 'Mark Interfaces' check you data before the
milling path calculation. Using 'Optimise track' remove the
errors, unnecessary support points and paths. Using 'Finish
Track' vector data (e.g.  from the scanner module) are
processed. This function sharpens recognisable corners and
smoothes curves. This function can be applied repeatedly
with great success. Before the first call-up save your
graphic in another layer. Now use 'Finish Track' on one of
the layers and compare the result with the specification.
As required call up 'Finish Track' again with a slightly
smaller scan picture resolution. If the function has
modified its data too much, the recall the last result
using 'UnDo'.

After the drawing has been completely processed return
to Navigator again using 'Parameter . Navigator'.

If you do not wish to process
then, using 'Forward',
switch to next function.

#6025 AutoCorrection     --------------
Calculate selection of  AutoCorrection for 2D/3D milling
tracks for up to 10 tools from error-free contours without
overlaps. Here you can set the correction procedure
(2D,3D,..) clearance procedure (lines, parallel,..)
calculation position (top side/base), (embossed/recessed).

#6026 Projections        --------------
Select projections for unwinding and projecting of
the prepared 2D and cutout data on standard and free-
form surfaces.

If you do not wish to project then, using 'Forward',
switch to next function.

#6028 Import PLI         --------------
Polylines are required for mirrored runs, projections etc.
They may have no undercuts. Here you can import an
existing polyline as specification.

If you do not wish to import a polyline then, using 'Forward',
switch to next function.

#6029 Export PLI         --------------
Polylines are required for mirrored runs, projections etc.
They may have no undercuts.
Here the marked track is saved in a file as polyline.

Save the marked polyline using
'operat . Limit Lines . PolyLine Export'.

#6030 Project open       --------------
Select a project and unpack into the PROJECT directory.

Under PROJECT you can save all data, even foreign data,
which are linked to you current work. Using 'Project Save'
these data are packed and saved together in a target file.
If you open this project again then all data are again
available in the PROJECT directory.

#6031 Project Save       --------------
Pack all data in the PROJECT directory and save together.

Under PROJECT you can save all data, even foreign data,
which are linked to you current work. Using 'Project Save'
these data are packed and saved together in a target file.
If you open this project again then all data are again
available in the PROJECT directory.

#6032 Relief VTR:        --------------
Relief creation from vector data (contours, tracks and
points). Before the first input define the relief using:
'New Relief'. To create surfaces mark the appropriate
path, and change to 'Relief VTR'. Here select the
function (e.g. 'Mirror') and thereafter the associated
path.

To edit already entered objects select: 'Object Edit' or
'Object Search'.

#6033 Relief AutoCorr    --------------
Automatic 3D relief milling correction for up to 3 tools.
The input takes place in columns: (premilling coarse), middle
(premilling fine), right (smooth). The input premilling fine
is only possible together with premilling coarse and smooth.
If contours have been marked previously in CAD, then these or
otherwise the relief limit, is used as milling limit. 

Export the calculated milling paths using 'Relief AutoCorr .
PLayer Export' and select the export target.

#0066 Scale (height)     --------------
The marked tracks and routes are scaled.

|Scale %:
Scaling with cursor or % input.

|Dimension 2 Pt.X/Y:
The marked data are scaled using a new width/height, which is
determined from 2 points which are to be entered. 

|Dimension limit X/Y:
The marked data are scaled to a new total width/total height.

|Distort X/Y:
Distortion using cursor or % input.

#0016 Display ZMaxPosn   --------------
Display the highest and lowest point in
the projected milling tracks.
The figures are the milling depth on the marked points
(positive downwards).
The sum corresponds with the surface depth + engraving depth
in the material. 

#7902 Error in data!     --------------
During the program start data errors have occurred or the program is
prematurely aborted.
Before the program abort you have the following
choice:

|Clr. Data:
The temporary graphic and text data are deleted and
the program ended.

|Clr. Parameter:
The program parameters are deleted and the
program ended. 

If this error occurs frequently you should react as follows:
1) Select 'Clr. Data'.
   the graphic and text data are deleted
   and the program ended.
   Thereafter start the program again.

If the error occurs again then:
2) Select 'Clr. Parameter'.
   The program parameters are deleted
   and the program ended.
 Thereafter start the program again.

If the error continues to occur then usually the only answer
is a new installation engraving program in a new directory.

#8502 Design Help        --------------
The design help can only be activated using <M> with position
inputs into Menu plot. With this the (target) point is determined.
|Input:
Normal cursor input.
|End point:
Select a start/end point of a vector.
|Vector middle:
Select middle of a vector.
|Object middle:
Middle of route(s)/contour(s) to be selected.
|Intersect point:
Intersect point of two vectors. IP also outside the vectors.
|IP on vector:
Intersect point of two vectors. IP only on the vectors.
|Lot on vector:
Lot on one vector to be selected.
|Next:
Trace on next vector or vector end point.
|Cut object:
Extend vector traced up to the object to be selected.
|Extreme pt.:
Extreme point of route(s)/contour(s) to be selected.
|Main directions:
Input horiz/vert/45> to the last main points.
Main points are end + middle of last vector as well as
middle + extreme points of last route or contour.
|Middle of 2 points]:
Capture at the middle of two end points.

#0605 Paths - Info       --------------
Show vector information on the marked paths.
For individual paths the path designation is displayed,
for several paths the number of contours and tracks as well
as the number of polygon points, the elongation and the
centre of the data. 

#9931 Projections        --------------
Projection of prepared 2D and cut-out data on regular and
free-form surface areas.

You can project 2D paths from the graphic layers (setting
'Projections . Proj.Parameter . Data source = Graphic')
or precalculated cutout and mirror tracks from the TLayers
(AutoCorrection) (setting 'Projections .
Proj.Parameter . Data source = AutoCorr').

For the projection of graphic layers a correct tool should be
entered, so far as no tool data is to found in the milling data. 

#1807 Polyradius         --------------
A modifiable radius formation is created along a vector
(rotationally symmetrical cylinder with variable radius),
whose crown runs in the vector direction. 

|Progression:
Polyline which determines the partial radius.

|Base height:
Offset in Z-direction to raise or lower. The base height can
be directly entered manually or, following <M>, <F2>, selected
in Relief.

Procedure:
1) The progression (e.g. bottle shape) as a rule, is entered using 'operat .
   Limitlines . Polylines Limits . Draw', and saved as polyline (.PLI)
   in the project directory using 'operat . Polylines Export'

2) The vector (line) for the crown progression is, for example, entered as
   single  vector using 'Draw . Line S,E'.
   The position of the vector is arbitrary. The rotation-symmetrical body
   is created later according to the crown progression from he start of
   the line in the direction of the end of the line.
3) Using the function 'ReliefVTR . Polyradius'
   - select the line and
   - load the progression (.PLI) using 'Progression . Select File' from
     the project directory.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1724 Route / Cylinder --------------
Change contours and routes into relief data and incorporate
in the existing relief.
The progression is projected to the
right and left of the route and has,
as a rule, its highest points in the centre. Thus the runs
for routes differ fundamentally from runs for surfaces. Surface
runs, as a rule, have an increasing progression, runs for routes
have a decreasing progression.

|Progression:
Form of the border or line. The progression
is loaded from a file which is stored in Operate.

|Ends:
Open routes can end straight or rounded.

|Base height:
Offset in Z-direction for elevation or depression.
The base height can be entered manually or
selected in Relief after <M>, <F2>.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1772 Object Copy        --------------
An object copy is re-stored. The restored contours are taken on
in the ActLayer after leaving the relief model.
This function is useful if the paths are needed
again for a further object or if the paths are to be modified.

Note:
For modifications (edit, correct,...) of the object paths first create a copy 
using  'Object Copy', rework the paths in CAD, mark the altered paths
and take this over again ReliefVTR. Using 'Exchange Object' the old paths
can then be replaced by the newly modified paths (exchanged).

#1775 Object Exchange    --------------
The borders of the selected object are replaced by the new borders
to be selected.
First they have to be selected in accordance with the requirements of 
the 'old' object , thereafter the new paths are to be marked. If several paths
(contours, routes) have to be replaced for the object, then the paths must
be combined beforehand in CAD,

Note:
For modifications (edit, correct,...) of the object paths first create a copy 
using  'Object Copy', rework the paths in CAD, mark the altered paths
and take this over again ReliefVTR. Using 'Exchange Object' the old paths
can then be replaced by the newly modified paths (exchanged). Using
'Exchange Object' the old paths can then be replaced by (exchanged with) 
the new modified paths. 

#1806 Show Level         --------------
Indicator for relief height.

|Level:
Height level - the level can be selected in the range Min .. Max.

A cut is made by Relief in the selected height
All Relief depths > level are marked in black and all
parts < level are marked in white.

#0648 Man. Nesting       --------------
Manual Nesting (optimise clipping) of the milling paths
or graphics in one layer (Nesting in the ActLayer) or
a complete layer (Nesting complete layer).
Here, Nesting is not possible for graphic paths (before a milling
path calculation) and for milling paths.

|Nesting in the  ActLayer:
Individual milling objects in the ActLayer can be arranged manually
(displaced and rotated). For this an object is clicked on and with
depressed key <L> displaced to the desired target position.
Using <F3/F4> the selected object can be rotated in 30° steps.

|Nesting complete layer:
All paths in one layer to be selected can be displaced manually. 
For displacement the frame is dashed and the paths are also plotted
(up to max 20000 pts).
Objects (milling paths in the layer), using <F3/F4> are rotated by +/-30°.
Text are not rotated here. 

#0661 Wide Route         --------------
Create connection lines for flow chart.

|Parameter:
Parameter input for 'Wide Route' and 'Shorten Route'.

|Wide Route:
This function creates meandering processes from simple
routes in order to mill a wide line sharp-edged using
a pointed tool. The parameter inputs take place in
'Parameter'.

|Shorten Route:
This function shortens the end of a route by the
separation to the next graphic lying in the process
direction in 'Parameter'.

#0059 Cut                --------------
The marked path are cut together and separated at the
intersection points. Subsequently the routes to be
removed can be marked and deleted.

If contours are required, then the paths must be combined together after
cutting and editing (e.g. using 'Process . Combine Routes' or
'Edit . Pos. Combine').

#0086 Trim               --------------
The path to be trimmed is cut using a second path.
Subsequently the projecting paths can be deleted.

|Select paths:
The path to be trimmed and the path which is to be used for trimming
are to be selected. The paths can be individual vectors, routes
and closed contours.

|  'Select the path to be trimmed!' (Path1):
  The path which is to be trimmed (the path which is to be
  modified) is to be selected first.

|  'Trim using..' (Path2):
  Select path which is to be used for trimming
  (path remains unmodified).

Depending how the path to be trimmed (Path1) has been selected
various results are possible:

|  Marking in Path 1:
  Path1 is cut just using Path2.

|  Marking at the first or last vector:
  Path1 is cut using Path2. If the lengthening
  of the first/last vector results in an intersection with Path2,
  then the vector is lengthened.

|  Marking an individual vector:
  The vector (Path1) is cut using Path2. If the 
  lengthening of the vector results in an intersection 
  with Path2,then the vector is lengthened in the appropriate
  direction.

#3316 Mastercam Import   --------------
Import of surface data via Mastercam. Here you can set up an
existing Mastercam  program and call up directly from HCAM.
With this, surface formats such as IGES, VDA or Mastercam format
can be read in, saved in Mastercam in STL format and this data
imported using HCAM.

Procedure for the importing of IGES and VDA data:
- Select the import data name using 'Import IGES' or 'Import VDA'.
  The Mastercam set is automatically called up and the file read
  into Mastercam.
- Export the data using 'File . Convert . STL . Write' and
  end Mastercam. If you wish to write your export file in a certain
  directory, then you can set this in Mastercam using:
  system configuration (Button configuration in the upper strip) .
  File . STL . Select data path.
- Import  the STL file using HCAM.

|Import IGES:
Selection and importing of IGES data using Mastercam.
For import preset tolerances are used. If problems occur wit import
it is recommended that the file is taken over again with the tolerances
from the IGES file. For this, in Mastercam select 'File . Convert .
IGES . Read'. Here, after file selection, the window 'IGES Import'
is shown. There select the parameter 'Take over file values . Tolerance'
(switch on).

|Import  VDA:
Selection and importing of VDA data using Mastercam.

|Import all:
Start Mastercam.

|Adjust:
Adjust a Mastercam program (e.g. DRAFT7.EXE).

#1758 Projection Type    --------------
Setting of the relief projections (diagram of milling paths
from the relief).

|Relative (normal procedure):
The projection is so laid in the Z direction, that the highest
relief point lies at Z = 0, independent of whether milling paths
lie at this position or not. The relative process is sensible,
if the complete relief is to be created without further milling
data.

|Absolute:
Relief values are used for the projection. For this the highest
relief point lies at Z <= 0. Higher points are not
capable of being milled (in this case there is an error message).
The absolute procedure is sensible, if other milling data
(2D or cutout) has to fit another projection.

The relief posn. in Z can be determined using 'Relief Edit . Displace Z'

#1749 Displace Z         ---------------
Using displace Z you can displace the complete relief to a
desired position in the Z direction.
The defining of the relief posn. is important, especially in
combination with the setting 'Projection type = Absolut'.

|Highest Point
The relief is so displaced that the highest point lies
at Z = 0.

|Lowest Point
The relief is so displaced that the lowest point lies
at Z = 0.

|Select Point
A selectable point in the relief is placed on a defined
Z value.
For this select a position
in the relief. The Z value of this position is indicated and can
be modified. Following confirmation the relief is so displaced that
the point lies at the given height.

#1784 Relief Diagnosis   --------------
Result preview of a relief milling correction dependent on
selected tool and the milling resolution (track separation).
For this function should be set at least 1024 x 720
pixels.

Input takes place in two stages: preparatory input of the 
'Tool #' and the milling separation [%]' f[FrS+FrK]. After this
the are to be examined is selected. This selection can be 
repeated as desired using <L>. The input and indication are
ended using <Esc> or <R>.

|Preparatory input:
|Tool #:
Selection of a milling tool for the relief correction.

|Milling separation [%]:
Selection of the milling trace separation in % of the point radius [FrS] +
spherical radius [FrK]. The calculated milling trace separation is shown
under 'Milling separation  [mm]:'.

|Relief Milling Diagnosis:
Following conformation of the preparatory data input, a
rectangular cursor with the elongation indicator 'Select area, abort 
using <Esc,R>:' is shown for the area to be examined.
Evaluation takes place following conformation using <L>. The results 

in light section presentation (rendered picture) and the
scanned height (in mm) are shown one below the other
on the right of the pictures.
|  Original: relief extract.
|  Corrected: cutter corrected relief.
|  Milling picture: from the milling paths of the recalculated relief.
|  Remaining surface: the difference (remaining surface) of the
   original milling picture.

Note:
- the given height values apply respectively for the section only.
- the corrected section is only approximately correct at the edge.
- the height values for the remaining surfaces are suitable for 
  orientation only.

#2013 Relief Surface Rel.--------------
The surface area of an application stamp is calculated from
the contours in Layer #0, the fissures in Layers #1,2,3 and
the relief surface progression. The contours describe the
edge of the relief surface. The fissures: graphic shapes such as,
for example a griffon, in addition to a relief surface relief limited
by contours also fissure lines, which can lie at differing heights.

'Relief Surface Rel.' calculates only line shaped milling data
for deep cut relief surfaces. Fundamentally the tool for the
creation of the relief surface must be suitable. In addition
the window should always be checked using the relief surface
progression. 

The tracks created in the surface relief processing, as for the milling
tracks of a cutout engraving, are secured in the tool layers and, on saving,
can be saved, as required, for a complete processing of the work piece
with all tools or alone for the surface relief processing only.


|Load relief surface progression:
Form-input of the progression from border to centre of surface
area or Form-load from a file. The surface relief progression describes
the milling depth from edge of contour to the centre of the contour
(the milling depth grows from both sides inwards). For very wide
surface reliefs only the changes to the surface relief have to be described
with the surface relief progression. At the end of the surface relief
progression, the depth (horizontal) is kept constant.

|Tool #:
Selection of processing tool (with spherical radius).
The actual tool is shown.
With the calculation of the cutter offset to the relief surface progression
a tool angle (FWi) = 0 degrees is assumed. In the majority of cases
this is no problem but can, however, lead to undercuts in the area of very
steep relief surface forms. With the input of the surface relief progression 
the cutter angle (FWi)  should therefore not be exceeded as max slop.
Surface relief tools must meet the following conditioned:
· spherical radius (FrK) >0 (e.g. 0.5mm),
· point radius (FrS) = 0mm,
· cutter angle (FWi) smaller than the steepest point in the surface relief.

|Mill track separation:
Separation of milling tracks on the surface.

|Layer#1,#2,#3:
Data areas for fissures. Layers, which are allocated data
marked with '#', empty layers with '0'.

|Process (Layer #1..3):
Adjustment of the process according to which the fissures
are to be taken into account.
0 = Layer switched off.
1 = Fissure height as rel. offset f (residual height).
2 = Fissure height as offset up to upper relief surface limit.
3 = Absolute fissure height (only for Layer #1).

|Elevation[%]:
Height of the fissures relative to the max. surface relief depth.

#0856 Tr Characteristics --------------
Display and set contour characteristics (correction inside,
outside, drillings, none) for marked data. Only contours
and drillings are suitable for track characteristics. Contours
or drillings with allocated characteristics are converted using
'Direct Mill' and/or with display of wide milling tracks in
cutter paths. The geometry and technology data of the layer tool
are used for the calculation of the cutter path.

For the calculation of offset a cylindrical tool is assumed, i.e. the
cutter angle is not taken into account.

Characteristics should be allocated to the graphic as the step
after the correct arrangement of the graphic.
Subsequent intervention in Edit or Process can delete the
characteristics!

|Internal excavation, milling around, pocket characteristics:
For contours for the creation of excavations, simple milled
around points and cleared pockets. The sense of rotation of
the milling paths (climb milling/conventional milling) is
dependent on the sense of rotation of the graphic.

|Routes
Characteristics for milling of routes (without offset calculation).

|Drilling, spiral drilling, hollow characteristics:
For drillings for creation of simple or spiral shaped
drillings and hollows.

|None:
Delete characteristics.

#0643 Transform          --------------
If the graphic paths are marked, then Transform can be opened 
using <TAB>or <SPACE>. Using the input you can modify
position, size, scaling, of the rotation and slope angle of the
marked objects. The input Transform shows the
horizontal and vertical coordinates of the object.

|Position, angle of rotation, scale/mirror, size, slope:
Dialogue field for processing of the object.

|X, Y / Wi, X, Y / H, V:
Relative/ABSOLUTE coordinates of the marking
points set.

|Relative/ABSOLUTE (for position, angle of rotation):
Coordinate reference for position and angle of rotation.

|Individual/proportional (for scale/mirror, size):
  Individual: the figures are entered individually.
  Proportional: on modification of a figure the second
    figure is also modified accordingly.

|Marking points:
The marking points in accordance with the eight halt points
of a selection and the mid-point of the object. The X-/Y-
coordinates refer to these points.

|Allocate Duplicate/Original:
Produces a copy of the object at a new position or
allocates the determined options to the marked object.

#7805 ISO-Filter-Paramet.--------------
|Tool change
M-function for a tool change to differentiate
between automatic change and manual change.
M6 = automatic change,
M66 = manual change (change by hand),
empty = no M-function for tool change.

|Algebraic sign axis B/C:
Sign of the rotation angle.
1 leaves the direction of rotation unchanged.
-1 mirrors the direction of rotation.

#9915 Multi-axial Proj.: --------------
Projecting of the prepared 2D and 3D cutout data on relief
surfaces. You can project 2D paths from the graphic layers (Setting
'Proj.Parameter . Data Source = Graphic') or precalculated
cutout and mirror tracks from the TLayers (AutoCorrection)
(Setting 'Proj.Parameter . Data Source = AutoCorr').

For the projection of graphic layers a correct tool should be entered,
so far as no tool data is to be found in the milling data. 

This function can be used by equipping your program with multi-axial
projection only. 'Multi-axial Proj.' creates tool paths in 5 axes
(X/Y/Z/A/B; axis X/Y/Z are linear axes; axis A rotates about A,
axis B rotates about Y). Projection takes place on finished relief surfaces.
Undercutting cannot be either calculated or milled! Suitable machine and
export filters (capable of 4/5 axes). 

#0087 Return Smoothing   --------------
All paths (graphic and milling paths) are travelled to and fro.
This is helpful for the improvement of the surface quality with
materials such as wood, plastics and similar. 

The length of the milling paths are indicated following path conversion:
|  path to =
  original milling path before conversion.
|  path to and fro =
  milling path following conversion (double path).

#1332 Row Sep.:          --------------
Line separation. There are
3 alternatives for input.

|Line separation [%]:
Line separation in % of upper case height.
Display in field line sep.: in %.

|Line separation [mm]:
Line separation in mm with upper case height=10 mm.
Display in field line sep.: in %.

|Intermediate space [mm]:
Absolute input of the space between the text
lines. Display in field line sep.: in mm.

The effect of 'Line sep.' is dependent on the setting
'Block'/'Line':
|  Block:
  The value for 'Line sep.' is used immediately for the
  complete block.
|  Line:
  The line separation is maintained with continuous text
  to the previous line.
  With creation of a new line using <Ret> the
  line separation is maintained to the new line.

#0037 New label          --------------
Shortened operation of label input.
The functions are called up one after the other:
- File . New
- Layout . Limits
- Edit Line.

#0600 Scale Two Posns.   --------------
Measure two positions to each other and display the
resultant separation X and Y, length and angle.
Measuring takes place over all graphic layers.

#0606 Scale of Frame     --------------
Display location of a position absolutely and
relatively to a frame.
Measuring takes place over all graphic layers.

#1739 Align Limits       --------------
Align relief at working limits or working limits to the relief.

|BildMax: match picture frame to graphic.
The picture limits are so set that the graphic fills the
complete picture.

|Centre graphic: centre the graphic within the borders.
The graphic is arranged centrally in the picture frame.

|Centre frame: centre graphic and borders.
The graphic borders and the graphic are so placed that the
frame centre and the relief lies on the position X = 0 and Y = 0.

|Displace: displace graphic.
The relief is displaced using the cursor.

|Relief zero point: determine Relief zero point. (only HCAM)
Displayed is a grid with 3 x 9 reference points In all
3 axes one reference point below, in the middle and
above respectively. the momentary zero point is marked in the grid.
After clicking on one reference point  the relief is so displaced,
that this point lies on zero in all axes (X/Y/Z).

If a free reference point is to be defined then, after selection
of the point (above, right in the window) a new zero point in the
relief is selected using the cursor. After clicking on this (zero)
the relief is so displaced that the point lies at zero in all axes
(X/Y/Z).

#1781 Render             --------------
Calculate the picture of a relief graphic in the aspect
angle and with defined illumination source.

|Aspect angle:
Set relief aspect angle.
With setting 0° the render picture will be calculated faster.

|Light angle:
Set angle and separation of the illumination source.

|Resolution:
Picture resolution - a low resolution gives a rapid result
with low quality - a high resolution give a good result
with longer calculation times.

|Drawing:
Setting soft/middle/hard. For most applications a soft
setting is recommended.

|Contrast:
Grey tones (contrast) slight .. very strong.
This setting is effective with the aspect angle <> 0° only.

|Graphic:
View calculated picture.

|BMP picture:
The momentary aspect is saved in a BMP-picture-file.

#3113 Save               --------------
A job is stored completely under an already available file name.
If no file name is available, then the program branches into
file selection (comp. 'Save under'). Equal functions in CAD have
the key combination <Ctrl S> or the help means 'Save'.


The program saves only SLD-Format. If a H2R or LG1 file
has been previously loaded, then a new name must be given
with 'Save'. In the SLD format all data of the current task are saved
including characteristics, aid lines, layer tools, technology data and
working frame.

#0081 Collect from Layer --------------
Data from another layer are marked and copied
into the ActLayer. Thereafter these are available in the
ActLayer and in the source layer.
For this the source layer is to be selected first. Thereafter routes and
and paths can be marked in the selected layer.
Indicator: 'Route selection - end using <Esc>'. The input
is ended using <Esc> or <R> and the marked routes are copied into 
the ActLayer.

#7937 Delete Layer       --------------
Delete the graphic data of one or more layers.
To delete, several layers can be marked (with a cross) and
the collectively removed using 'Delete'.
Note: texts are not taken into account.

#0134 Arc 2P,R           --------------
Enter arc with radius and 2 points (Start point and
end point). 4 variations are possible by rotation
sense input and selection of larger/smaller arcs.

|Large arc neg.
Large clockwise arc (mathematically negative).
|Small arc neg.
Small clockwise arc (mathematically negative).
|Large arc pos.
Large anticlockwise arc (mathematically positive).
|Small arc pos.
Small anticlockwise arc (mathematically positive).

#0133 Arc Key            --------------
Enter arc via the keyboard. These arcs cannot be entered
using the cursor.

|Arc R,AW,WL:
Arc input using the keyboard via input of radius, start angle and
arc length..
  R : circular radius in mm.
  AW : angle for circle start in degrees.
  WL : angle for arc length in degrees.

|Arc R,AW,EW:
Arc input using the keyboard via input of radius, start angle and end angle.
  R : circular radius in mm.
  AW : angle for circle start (SA) in degrees.
  EW : angle for circle end (EA) in degrees.
  The rotation sense results from the sign EA-SA.

|Arc R,S:
Arc input using the keyboard via input of radius and height
of crown. Both end points of the arc lie on a horizontal line.
  R : circular radius in mm.
  S : crown height in mm.
  The crown height must be smaller than the radius.

#0068 Duplicate          --------------
A copy of the marked route can be displaced relatively or
absolutely, free in X,Y or only horizontally (x) or vertically
(y). For duplicate a basis point is required on which the
graphic can be handled using the cursor.

If the input parameter 'Capture grid' is set to a value > 0,
then the basis point can be captured. With Capture Layer = -1
with this capture is on support points of the marked route and
with Capture Layer >= 0 on support points of the graphic layer
defined using capture layer.

|Relative/Absolute:
A numerical input is evaluated as Relative (as displacement to
the last position) or Absolute (reference to zero point).
|Displace XY:
Displace routes in XY.
|Displace X:
Displace routes horizontally only.
|Displace Y:
Displace vertically only.

If, for the confirmation of the positioning of the target
(<L>), the <Ctrl> key is pressed, then the paths can be
duplicated several times while retaining the basis point.

#0067 Displace           --------------
The marked route can be displaced relatively or absolutely,
free in X,Y or only horizontally (x) or vertically (y).
For displacement a basis point is required on which the
graphic can be handled using the cursor.

If the input parameter 'Capture Grid' is set to a value > 0,
then the basis point can be captured. With Capture Layer = -1
with this capturing is on support points of the marked route and
with Capture layer >= 0 on support points of the graphic layer
defined using capture layer. 

|Relative/Absolute:
A numerical input is evaluated as Relative (as displacement to
the last position) or Absolute (reference to zero point).
|Displace XY:
Displace routes in XY.
|Displace X:
Displace routes horizontally only.
|Displace Y:
Displace vertically only.

#0060 Mirror             --------------
The marked tracks and routes are mirrored either directly to
an axis in X/Y or to a freely entered axis.

|Left / Centre. / Right / Below / Middle / Above:
The marked graphic is mirrored about the given axis.

|Rotate+Mirror:
The marked graphic is rotated about an axis at any angle
For this, following the input of the basis point of the mirror axis
the second point of the mirror axis is to be entered. 
If the input parameter Capturing Grid is set to a value > 0,
then the basis point and the second point of the mirror axis can be
captured. With capturing layer = -1 capturing is on the support point
of the marked route and with Capturing Layer >= 0, on the support
point of the graphic layer defined using Capturing Layer.

#0703 Centre to ..       --------------
The marked tracks and routes are centred in X/Y to a graphic
object to be selected.

With simultaneous pressing of the <Contr.> key 'Centre to..' captures
on the next which is sought in all layers.

#0607 Tr. Start Posn.    --------------
Displace start point of a contour (click on new point).
This function is not suitable for open routes!

#0649 Interpol. Edit     --------------
Edit and replace the route between 2 points with a spline.

3 points are required for input. First the two end positions and then 
a position between these positions have to be entered one after
the other using the cursor. The curve support points as well as
start-end slope can be edited. The start and end points can, however, 
not be  modified. 

|Delete posn.
Delete a support point in the curve.
|Enter posn.:
Enter a new point in the curve.
|Displace posn.:
Displace a support point.
|Approximate:
Approximate the curve, i.e. enter support points.
|Reduce:
Coarsen the curve, i.e. remove support points.
|Take over support points:
Take over the edited support points in place of the original
curve.
|Take over spline:
Vectorise the spline curve and take over in place of the
curve.
|Abort:
Abort the input, the curve remains unchanged.

#0629 Join Positions     --------------
Join two positions. The selected support point is connected to
the next lying position. If the distance to the next point is less than
0.02 mm, then the support points are laid one on top of the other. If
the separation is larger, then a connecting vector is introduced.

#0638 Attach Position    --------------
Attach a line to a route. The route is so rotated, that the
point to which it is to be attached lies at the end.
After addition of a position further input can take place in the 
menu 'Draw'.

#0645 Sort Track         --------------
Determine the working off sequence of the paths.

|Auto:
Automatic milling path sorting. The contours and routes in the
ActLayer are so sorted that the shortest empty paths result.
This function does not always lead to favourable milling runs and
should therefore be applied only after comprehensive editing.

|First:
The next path to be clicked on is set at the first place.

|Last:
The next path to be clicked on is set at the last place.
Alternatively sorting can be by using the marking tool (arrow).
The data are combined at the end of the layer following removal
of the marking in this order. Thus the data are processed
in the order in which they were marked.

|One forwards
The path to be clicked on is shifted one place forwards.

|One backwards
The path to be clicked on is shifted one place backwards.

|Reverse order
The order of the paths is reversed.

|Sort track/route
Closed contours and open routes are sorted into
different layers.

|Sort internal/external
Data are so sorted that paths lying inside are processed
before paths lying outside. Routes are sorted before contours,
i.e. first processed.

|Contour overlapping:
Separate the content of ActLayer into routes and contours from
outwards originating groups. This function is mainly required for contour
sorting for 'HCAM . ReliefVTR'.

#0005 Display Test Tr.   --------------
Display to check the vector and tool data. If paths are marked,
then the marked, otherwise the data in  ActLayer, are displayed.
The display can, as selected, be scrolled on using buttons or
via the keyboard. If the display is scrolled on using the cursor,
then the cursor is set at the last position.

|Position indicator:
R0 = frame position below left.
R1 = frame position above right.
O2,O3,OE = Object information.
T1..T8 = tool data.
PA = Position emerged (X/Y).
PE = Position inserted (X/Y).
P3 = Position 3D (X/Y/Z).

The following operations are possible via the keyboard:
|<SPACE>, <CuDn> : 1 row forward.
|<S>, <PgDn> : 1 side forward.
|<A> : up to next PosA.
|<L>, <End> : file end.
|<Z>, <CuUp>, <PgUp> : 1 row back.
|<M> : select target position using the cursor.
|<E> : edit current position.

#1091 Info               --------------
The Program Status Indicator contains the program and version 
designation and the list of the cleared modules. 

#1305 Tool Alignment     --------------
Adjustment of a suitable tool for the engraving. For the
layer tool tip radius [FrS], angle [FWi] and deep cut depth
[FEt] can be modified and, if desired, a control graphic can
be plotted using the tool. The following are displayed:
relief surface radius [Res], relief bottom radius [FrS] and
the tool centre track.

Note: tool matching is planned for graphics and texts only in combination
with the layer tool. In order that you do not inadvertently process
milling data with tools an error message is created for this case at
the start of tool matching. 

The tool data set is taken over in the tool library using OK.

#8974 View Character     --------------
Select and view an individual character in the active
character set. For this the symbol selection from the current
character set is indicated. All characters allocated data
are designated by their ASCII character.

Structure:
|1. Line:
  Character set: name of the loaded character set.
  #: Number of the character (32..255 according to ASCII) on which
     the cursor stands.
  'A': ASCII character under the cursor.
  >  8.18:  current character width.

|2. .. 4th line:
Character selection Chr(32) = SPACE .. Chr(255) - all allocated
characters are marked according to ASCII, empty characters are 
marked using SPACE ' '. The desired character is to be selected using
the keyboard cursor. The character just activated is shown in the
1st line and marked inversely in lines 2..4.
Following confirmation using <Ret> or <L> the character is activated
and shown graphically. 

#8975 Save Character     --------------
Save an individual character in the active character set.
For this the character selection from the current character set is shown. 
All characters allocated data are designated through their ASCII 
character.

Structure:
|1. Line:
  Character set: name of the loaded character set.
  #: Number of the character (32..255 according to ASCII) on which
     the cursor stands.
  'A': ASCII character under the cursor.
  >  8.18:  current character width.

|2. .. 4th line:
Character selection Chr(32) = SPACE .. Chr(255) - all allocated
characters are marked according to ASCII, empty characters are 
marked using SPACE ' '. The desired character is to be selected using
the keyboard cursor. The character just activated is shown in the 
1st line and marked inversely in lines 2..4.
Following confirmation using <Ret> or <L> the character is activated
and shown graphically. 

#8976 Char. X0-Offset    --------------
Following importation all characters lie at the position X = 0.
For individual lettering it is necessary to displace the start
point, (e.g. correct connection for script lettering or spacing
balance).

For the input of the X - displacement using the cursor a vertical
aid line is faded in. Two input forms are possible for this
aid line:

|Capture:
With input of the key <f> or <F> the cursor input is set to 'Capture'.
With this the aid line always springs to the next position
or circular end position.

|Capture off:
With input of the key <a>, <A> or after the start of the
function, the aid line is always carried with the cursor.
Every X-position which can be selected using the cursor
is capable of being entered. <Esc> breaks off input. Following
<Ret> the cursor/character input and the query: save Y/N ?
is faded in. Following <Y> the displaced characters are saved,
<N> breaks off the input and the character remains unchanged.

#8980 Displ. Charact.    --------------
Load a character from the active character set and save under
another character (key) in the character set (change code of
character set).

For this:
1 Call up the function 'Displace character'.
2 Select character to be displaced (load marking character).
 All characters allocated with data are designated through their
  ASCII character (comp. 'View character').
  Following confirmation using <Ret> or <L> the character is
  activated and shown graphically. 
3 Select target character (save marking character).
  The target character should be free (not allocated), (all non-
  listed characters are free). If the target character is already allocated,
  then the old content is overwritten and is lost. Following
  confirmation using <Ret> or <L> the character is saved at the
  new position and deleted at the old position in the character set.
  After saving the character branching automatically to posn. 2
  takes place (load marking character) and a further character can
  be selected and displaced/copied. The process is broken off if
  <Esc> or <R> is pressed during Load marking character 

#8981 Copy Charact.      --------------
Load a character from the active character set and save a copy
under another character (key) in the character set.
After this the character is available twice.

For this:
1 Call up the function 'Displace character'.
2 Select character to be displaced (load marking character).
 All characters allocated with data are designated through their
  ASCII character (comp. 'View character').
  Following confirmation using <Ret> or <L> the character is
  activated and shown graphically. 
3 Select target character (save marking character).
The target character should be free (not allocated), (all non-
  listed characters are free). If the target character is already allocated,
  then the old content is overwritten and is lost. Following
  confirmation using <Ret> or <L> the character is saved at the
  new position and deleted at the old position in the character set.
  After saving the character branching automatically to posn. 2
  takes place (load marking character) and a further character can
  be selected and displaced/copied. The process is broken off if
  <Esc> or <R> is pressed during Load marking character 

#8983 Copy Together      --------------
Copy together characters from different
character sets.

Characters with their character width are copied from the 
source character set into the target character set. The character
in the source character set is not deleted!
For this:
1 Call up the function 'Copy together' and, one after the other, load
  source and target character set (HZE). If, inadvertently two
  identical character sets are selected, then the error message
  Error: same character sets!
2 Select character to be displaced (Load marking character). All
  characters allocated data are designated through their ASCII 
  character (comp. 'View character').
Following confirmation using <Ret> or <L> the character is
  activated and shown graphically. 
3 Select target character (save marking character).
The target character should be free (not allocated), (all non-
  listed characters are free). If the target character is already allocated,
  then the old content is overwritten and is lost. Following
  confirmation using <Ret> or <L> the character is saved at the
  new position and deleted at the old position in the character set.
  After saving the character branching automatically to posn. 2
  takes place (load marking character) and a further character can
  be selected and displaced/copied. The process is broken off

#8995 Corr. Scale/Offs   --------------
Some imported character sets have a false dimension and/or a
Y displacement. These character sets are corrected using an
offset (displacement in Y) and a dimension alignment (factor).

3 values are to be entered for correction. For this one can proceed
as follows: 
1 Import character set.
2 View character with character check and gauge correction values.
3 Modify character set in Corr. Scale/Offs using the gauged correction
  values.

|Y-Offset:
Displace the character in the Y-direction. Y-Offset = 0.00 gives
no displacement.

|Dimension matching:
Scaling factor for matching of the character. The dimension matching =
1.00 does not modify the character.

|Adjust character width:
YES: all character widths are newly determined. The SPACE 
width is set to 3.0 mm and the X0 - Offset to 0. A matching
of the character width is necessary if a dimension matching
has taken place. 

#8986 Auto Kerning       --------------
Automatic calculation of the separation value (Kerning) for
character combinations. Here a fixed aesthetic table is
employed.

Milling: to determine separation a standard cutter radius (for
character heights = 10.0 mm) must be given. This is the 
cutter radius for the engraving of the character at 10 mm
character height. For Outline lettering 'Fxxxxxxx.HZE' normally
a cutter radius of 0.2mm is assumed.

#1516 Line Arrangement:  --------------
Select line arrangement (distribution) in the scale. The normal
scales are created with linear arrangement. All further arrangements
are special resolutions.

|Linear:
Setting for general linear/circular scales.

|Wx = ASin(x/as):
The line arrangement is determined by a fixed formula.

For circular scales the line angle is calculated using ASin(x/as)
[x=Line No. / as=number of lines]. The zero line lies in the centre
at the position 'Start angle'. The value 'End angle' here is without
significance.

For linear scales the line position is calculated using
ASin(x/as)/Pi*Length [x=Line No. / as=number of lines / Pi=3.14..].
The zero line lies in the centre on the scale - 'Position'.

To create a scale the number of lines for a half side must be entered.

The respective line is activated using Graduation . Line graduation > 0
(e.g. = 1). t least Graduation1 must be activated. The activated
graduations must be in sequence. Otherwise the value 'Line graduation'
has no influence on the arrangement. The scale is created from zero line
(in the centre) = Graduation1 outwards = Graduation(..n). If, for example
Graduation1 and Graduation2 activated, then there is a scale with the line
sequence 1, 2, 1, 2, etc.

#8210 Edit pixel         --------------
Set or delete individual pixels (picture dots). A pixel is set
using <L> and deleted using <R>. Input is ended by clicking on
in the menu or with <F1>, <Esc>.

#1344 Text:              --------------
Enter and edit text lines. <Alt E> Change into editor.
Block setting: only with current block.
Line setting  : with all lines.

Using the Windows editor both external text files can be read-in and texts
can also be taken over via the intermediate store. If texts have been
read-in via the file menu of the editors, then these must be saved for
take over into the file 'HS05.TMP'. The file 'HS05.TMP' can be found in
the main directory of the program.

<Alt G> enlarge character.
<Alt K> reduce character.
<Alt H> set character higher.
<Alt T> set character lower.
<Alt V> distort character.
<Alt N> incline character.
<Alt S> space character.
<Alt P> displace character parallel.
<Alt X> character spacing to right.
<Alt Y> character spacing to left.
<Alt Z> serial number on/off.
<Ctrl Pos1> text input in 1st text line.
<Ctrl End> text input in last line.
<Ctrl B> edit character width.
<Ctrl Y> delete text line.
<Esc> end text input.
<BS> delete the character before the cursor. <BS> in a space line
  deletes the line.
<Del> delete the character after the cursor. In the setting Block the
  next block line is moved up after the last character in the line.
<F5> Special character input: select a character in the input block
  using the cursor.

|Serial number.
A serial number is introduced and ended using the key combination
<Alt Z>. In each text line, however, only one serial number is permitted.
With every export (Direct mill or Export Graphic) the serial numbers are
incremented or de-incremented about the amount given in the
Parameter Inc Serial Number +/-99999:. All other export and vectorisation
processes have no influence on the serial number. The input of leading
zeros in the serial number is permitted. A number overrun (boundary value)
is not checked. '_' = <Alt Z>
%Example: _009_   incremented -> 010
%Example: _999_   incremented -> 1000
%Example: _-100_  incremented -> -99
%Example: _-1_    incremented -> 0
%Example: _+1234_ incremented -> 1235
%Example: +_1234_ incremented -> +1235

|Input of special characters.
In text line input the character selection can be opened using <F5>.
Through simple clicking on every listed a character can be selected
using the cursor. 

|Clicking on a new text line using the cursor.
During text input in the Edit Menu, existing text lines can be clicked on
or new text lines can be created at free positions. If with clicking
on no existing text line is found, then the cursor is placed at the position
clicked on and the program waits for the input of an absolute line
reference point (with the input of the 1st text line).

|Modify character separation <Ctl B>.
If, in the input line, the key combination <Ctrl B> is pressed in front
of a character which is to be modified, then a window with an except
of 3 characters is opened. For the middle character now the start and
end offset can be modified. The vertical lines mark the new limits of the
character. With Save, these modifications are secured in the character set
and used in all text lines with this character set.

|Start Offset :
The character start position (pre-spacing) is modified
(comp. Input in Font Edit . Character X0-Offset).
|End Offset :
The character end position (post-spacing) is modified
(comp. Input in Font Edit . Character Width).
|Save :
The modified character is saved.
|Esc :
Input is ended.

#1320 Font    :          --------------
Select character set for the text line.
Character set name:
G..: lettering for inserted (deep cut) engraving.
F..: outline lettering for free clearance.

|Select character set.
Only character sets which are listed in the dialogue box can be selected. 
For file selection click on file name. A double click or OK starts the loading
process. With single clicking on only a selection of characters is shown
in the graphics window. Only character sets are listed in HZE format,
which have been previously installed. the program installs the character
set automatically with its first start if the character set has previously
been loaded into the current directory (in which the program is to
be found). With later modifications, such as importation of character sets,
deletion, status changes etc., this installation must be started by the user
using 'Font Edit . Import Font . install HZE'.

You can sort the character list using 'Font Editor . Import
Font . install HZE' as desired according to file name or the
entered font names.

#1324 Distort:           --------------
Enter text line distortion.
The inputs distort/width are alternatives. the last input is always relevant
for the text line. The character width calculated using the distortion is
displayed under 'width'.

Negative distortions give a mirroring in the X direction.

#1325 Width  :           --------------
Enter text line width.
The inputs distort/width are alternatives. the last input is always relevant
for the text line. The distortion calculated using the text line width is
displayed under 'Distortion'.

A negative text line width gives a mirroring in the X direction.

#1327 Character Separ.:  --------------
Adjust separation between the characters. The scale is
referred to a upper case height of 10 mm.
Standard setting = 2.5mm, for italic letters = 0mm.

#1329 Radius  :          --------------
Enter circular lettering radius (only with setting lines).

With Radius a circular lettering is switched on. A Radius = 0.0 
creates a straight text line (circular lettering switched off).
For definition of the circular lettering the parameters Radius, 
Text Angle and Direction are important. The input of a circular lettering
is not possible for text blocks. Radius is the measurement to the middle
point of the basic circle of the lower edge of the lettering on which is to
be engraved. It gives the curvature of the lettering. With positive radius
the line reference point lies on the basic circle. With negative radius the
line reference point lies in the centre of the basic circle.

|Radius = 0:
Straight text line.

|Radius > 0:
The reference point lies on the arc.

|Radius < 0:
The reference point lies on the arc middle.

#9921 Operate Row:       --------------
Select 'Operate line:' to modify (edit) text lines.

In this menu individual text lines or blocks made up from several text
lines  are modified and positioned. Before activating a function the
text line to be handled must be marked with the marking aid. Leaving 
the menu deletes the marking. Text lines are marked by their limits and
the line reference point. Modifications in this menu can be reversed
using UnDo.

Text lines can be marked singly or with a frame.
If the <Sft> key is pressed at the same time then the new marking is
included.

#1370 Font allocation    --------------
Dependent on the versal height a character set to be selected is
allocated to the marked text lines.

Up to 3 different character sets can be allocated automatically.
All text lines with height 0..Height 1 are allocated to the first character set
heights > Height 1..Height 2 etc. to the second character set. The first and
second height can be set freely. They must, however, be entered in
ascending order. The character set selection takes place via the
Font - Input
(comp. 'Edit Line . Font:'). After the last font input or after <F1> the
automatic allocation takes place.

#1345 Line-1             --------------
Switch into the previous scale text line.

#1346 Zeile+1            --------------
Switch into the next scale text line.

#1347 Text:              --------------
Enter and edit scale text lines.

<Alt G> enlarge character.
<Alt K> reduce character.
<Alt H> place character higher.
<Alt T> place character lower.
<Alt V> distort character.
<Alt N> angle character.
<Alt S> bar character.
<Alt P> displace character parallel.
<Alt X> character spacing to the right.
<Alt Y> character spacing to the left.
<Alt Z> serial number ON/OFF.
<Ctrl Pos1> text input in 1st text line.
<Ctrl End> text input in last text line.
<Ctrl B> edit character width.
<Ctrl Y> delete text line.
<Esc> end text input.
<BS> delete character before the cursor. <BS> in
  an empty line deletes the line.
<Del> delete character after the cursor. In the setting Block, following
  the last character in the line, the next block moves forward
<F5> special character input: select a character in the input block
  using the cursor.

#3214 Set up Help        --------------
Help for the first setting up of the direct output (simplified
Input of parameters).
To set up the output 'Mill CONTROL' follow the instructions.

#3210 Tool               --------------
Input of tool data for direct output.
This input is only possible with the setting 'Parameter . Limits .
Type of Output = 1'.
Remark: before measuring in a position using the reference tool a 
surveyed tool must be in the milling spindle. The length of the
reference tool must be entered in  tool lengths [RefToolNo]. Following
institution the collet chuck position may not be changed through
adjustment of the milling spindle. If this is nevertheless the case, then
all Z values must be remeasured! Please also take note of the chapter
Adjust the machine.

The following selection is dependent on the selected type of machine:

|Touch:
Length touch:
  - Automatic (measurement cell).
  - Manual measurement.
  - Tool length from tables.

Reference tool #:
  Number of the tool from the table for surveying the machine.

Touch feed:
  Z-feed to approach the measurement cell (length touch = 1).

Measure 1st tool:
  The program expects that, before processing, the tool is fixed to
  Station #1. If processing starts with this tool, then the survey process
  can be forced. If processing starts with another tool   (#2..), then a
  tool change is carried out and the new tool is always surveyed
  (length tough = Measurement point or manual).
  YES: tool #1 is surveyed.
  NO: tool #1 is not surveyed. the length touch for the 1st tool may only
  be switched off if it is certain that has been correctly surveyed.

Touch position Ax,y,z:
  Position for the tool measurement (length touch = 1/2).
  Can be measured in using the machine (<F2>).

Collet chuck Z:
  Reference point for the tool.
  With set reference tool surveying can be carried out using the
  machine (<F2>). The collet chuck position is the reference point
  for all further processing. It must be greater than 0.0 mm. If you machine
  has an operational load cell and the touch position X, Y, Z has been
  correctly entered, the collet chuck position Z can also be determined using
  Survey Position . AutoMess.

|Lengths:
|Tool length T1:
  Unclamped length of the tool (clutch to tip).

|Changer:
Autom. tool change [Y/N]:
  Setting of the tool change strategies.
  YES: the machines work with automatic tool change.
  For this all valid change stations are entered with their previous position.
  NO: the machine works only with manual tool change.

Change separation Z [mm]:
  With the approach movement at the height of the change separation Z,
  the machine drives over the change station. the change separation
  must be so selected, that all obstructions can be driven over. In doubtful
  cases this value is to be set to 0.0 mm.

WStat-Add. Milling path control:
  Additional tool change with exceeding of the tool life travel. If the tools
  to be used have been entered with a tool life travel greater than 1.0 mm,
  then the milling path of the tool is monitored in X, Y and Z, and with
  exceeding of the tool life travel withdrawn after ending of the last vector
  and the tool exchanged. The station number offset entered using TStat-Add.
  Milling path control is added to the current change station for a new change
  station number, with every created tool exchange. 

Change station #:
  Selection of the station number, for which the change position is to be
  entered.

Change position X, Y, Z:
  Position of the change station at which the tool is collected and
  returned again.

Change pre-position X, Y:
Z for every change station there belongs a ore-position in the working
  area of the machine, which is driven to before and after the change
station. From the pre-position the machine drives straight over the
  change station and sinks down to the change position Z.   This
  pre-position should lie directly in front of the change station, however,
  outside the tool changer area.

#3218 Tool List          --------------
Edit tool and technology data. Additional tool change can be
determined here according to milling path.

If the tool data are changed this can take place locally only. as soon as
the machine output is left the changes are lost.

Attention: modifications of the insertion depth or the clearance height,
under certain circumstances can change the engraving.

#3223 Tool Change        --------------
Automatic change to a new tool using the machine.

After activating the function the Z axis drives to the momentary position
at its upper end, the tool cover is opened and waits for the input of a
new tool. The input Tool(s) shows the station number which was last used.

|New tool:
input of a new tool (#1..99). If the station number is
retained, then there is no tool change.
With the same stations, however, with automatic or manual
measurement, surveying can be carried out after confirmation
of the current tool. With input of a new station number, the machine
deposits the tool in its station and collects the new tool. All change
movements using the set rapid movement. Depending on the setting,
tool survey takes place after exchange.

Dependent on the parameter 'Tool . Axial Touch' the tool
is surveyed:
  Measuring point: automatic tool survey at the touch position.
  Manual: manual tool survey at the touch point.
  Table: no tool survey.
Following a tool change (and a tool survey) the machine drives
to its free drive (Home) position. Finally, the tool cover is again
closed.

Note: you should modify tools only on demand or with
the function tool change.

#1108 TLayer MGraphic    --------------
Display the calculated tool paths.

|Graphic parameters
Select the tools, representation of the relief surface or relief bottom
and character order.

|  Draw:
  tools, which are to be plotted with every graphic build-up,
  switch ON/OFF:

|  Milling graphic Level:
  YES: milling track at height of surface relief.
  NO: milling track on base.

|  Sequence:
  Sequence of the tool paths for the Mill Graphic.
  YES: tools are shown in ascending order.
  NO: tools are shown in decreasing order.

|Milling cutter track
The picture is plotted with the wide cutter track of the tools.

|Mark 3D cut-out
All 3D movements, which do not run at the relief bottom are
emphasised.

|Mark 3D level
All movements are marked depending on their Z value.
For this both limit levels are to be determined.

|Display Pos3D
Click on to a vector in the tool path, mark and display co-ordinates.

|Standard/Zoom projection
The tool paths are displayed in perspective. With the setting in plan view
(all angles = 0) the paths are displayed in grey (colour) shades.
PosA: colour for raised movements. With input without colour the
perspective display takes place using height level marking.

#9933 Incline:           --------------
Project milling tracks on to an inclined surface.
The position of the surface is input using 3 support points
whose X/Y position is freely selected.

#9932 Multi-incline:     --------------
Project milling tracks on to several inclined surfaces allocated
to the graphic layers.
Representation takes place simultaneously as project for all
layers and inclinations.

#9934 Radius:            --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on a radius
(Cylinder), whose crown runs in the X or Y direction.

#9939 Polyradius:        --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on a rotationally
symmetrical lying cylinder with variable radius, whose
apex runs in the X or Y direction.

The variable is designed as polyline.

#9937 Cone:              --------------
Projection of the milling tracks in or on a horizontal cone
whose crown runs in X or Y direction.

#9942 Polyring:          --------------
Project milling tracks on to a ring-shaped polyline
(also vertical cone and torus).

#9943 Relief:            --------------
Projection (presentation) of the milling tracks on a free-form surface.
The free form surface can be loaded or created in the module
'Relief':

#8720 Angle XY,Z         --------------
Incline input via angle.
The incline is input via two angles, angleXY and angleZ.
For this the query appears in the input line:
angleXY[degrees], angleZ[degrees]: 45,10| The angleXY is the
input of direction of the incline (angleZ) in the level. An
angleXY of 0 degrees runs horizontally from left to right.
An angle XY of 90° runs vertically from bottom upwards
etc.

The angleZ defines the surface incline. A positive angle
gives a rising surface from the zero position, a negative angle
gives a descending surface. If the angleZ gives an angle which
would lie above the zero height, then the surface is displaced
downwards so that the highest position lies at 0. 

The reference point for both angles is the position 0,0, i.e. bottom
left. The input '45,10' an ascending surface in a diagonal direction
at an angle of 10°.

#8717 Mark Location      --------------
Represent the projection surface using a grey shade or colour
picture in plan view with the data to be projected.
The setting of the colour or grey tone representation (Table)
takes place using 'Parameter . Palette selection'.

#9945 Relief File:       --------------
Load Relief file in menu and save relief data formats,
print data formats and CAD or digitalised data. The
functions in this menu load only a complete relief and, with
this, overwrite the previous content of the working store.

#9946 Edit Relief:       --------------
Relief picture processes (manipulate complete reliefs).

#9947 Relief AutoCorr:   --------------
3D milling correction for reliefs.
In Relief AutoCorrection you have several procedures for 3D
relief milling correction for any cutter shape. In principle reliefs
are employed for several milling processes:
· uncorrected relief as project basis for engraving data.
  the relief is provided in the menus Relief File, Edit and VTR
  and are then to be made projected using Projections . Relief 2D or
  3D milling paths on the unchanged relief.
· cutter corrected relief for projection of clearance paths.
  the relief is provided as above and converted to a tool using
  'Relief AutoCorrection . Picture MillCorr' (the relief is replaced
  by a cutter corrected relief).
  now 2D and 3D milling paths prepared in CAD are projected on to
  this relief using Projections . Relief.
  advantage of this process is the possibility of projecting any desired
  milling paths, e.g. also to process only milling paths
  around a partial relief area.
· automatic creation of complex milling data for several tools
  via Relief AutoCorrection as well as some special milling 
  processes for layer processing (see below).

#1752 Save Relief        --------------
Save a relief in HRL- or HRP - format in a file. With packed
storage 'Reliefparameter Packed Storage = YES' the relief
is saved in packed HRP format.

#1738 Mirror+Rotate      --------------
Mirror complete relief in X, Y, Z and rotate by +90° or -90°.

|Counterplate XZ:
Simultaneous mirroring for a counterplate X and Z direction.

#1715 New Relief         --------------
Input data for a new relief and create an empty relief.
'Picture borders' measurements are recommended from Layout.
Work in Relief VTR are normally created and edited in the
resolution proposed by the program. The proposed resolution
ensures a sufficient quality combined with rapid sequence of
operations. If all objects are arranged complete, the
resolution can be increased to the desired degree and the
relief newly created. Creation is fully automatic.

The input for 'New Relief' can be expanded using 'Relief File .
Relief Parameter . Expand Reliefdefinit'.

|Zero point x0, y0, z0 [mm], Width (X), height (Y)[mm]: (expanded definition)
Relief zero point bottom left and the Extension of the relief
in mm (input with expanded Reliefdefinition = YES only).

|Resolution dx, dy [mm]: (expanded definition)
Resolution of the relief in X and Y. Insofar as no vital reasons
contradict this, it is recommended that the resolution in X and Y
are selected equal. Not all settings give the laiddown measurements
using the selected resolution. In this case a dimension has to be
rounded off. As desired you can round off the resolution or match
the extension. (input with expanded Reliefdefinition = YES only).

|Resolution [mm]:
Resolution of the reliefs in X- and Y-direction. For the draft phase
it is recommended that the resolution proposed by the program
is retained. The resolution should be increased first with the calculation
of the finished relief. Normal settings are then ca. 0.01mm-0.1mm. 
(input with expanded Reliefdefinition = NO only).

|Depth (Z) [mm]:
Extension of the relief in Z-direction. The depth (Z) should not
be significantly exceeded as otherwise one has to reckon with
overrun.

|ReliefObj-Layer#:
Selection of the layer, in which the relief objects are saved.

#1114 ZOOM Selection     --------------
Enlarge/reduce picture.
All: the area of the picture is so selected that all graphic elements
  are shown.
Marked: the area of the picture is so selected that all marked graphic
  elements are shown.
10%..500%: Graphic zoom.

#8916 Layer list         --------------
Clicking on the layer selection using <F2>, <M> opens a
text editor with the layer list. Here the layer names can be edited,
however, with this, the list structure may not be modified. If the
editor is ended and the modified data saved, then these names
are taken over as tool/layer names. 

#1722 Relief Surface     --------------
Create relief surface using a 'Progression'.
The progression is loaded from a file, which is saved in Operate.

|Progression:
Form of progression from edge to surface middle.

|Base height:
Additional height offset in positive or negative
direction. As alternative to manual input of figures, the Z value
can also be adopted in the figure input from existing following
<M> or <F2>. For input comp. Relief Edit . Pixel Edit . Display Posn.

|Interpol.
With interpol. > 1 a coarsened surface is rapidly created and
thereafter interpolated. Interpol. = 1 creates a relief surface
surface using the max. possible resolution. This type of surface
creation can take a long time.

|Smoothing level:
Additional smoothing function for the relief surface relief. With
this border errors and apex formation can be suppressed.

|Method (mirror..corner):
Influencing of the surface progression.

|Scaling Z:
Modify relief surface in height (direction Z) using a factor.

|Scaling X:
Modify relief surface in width (in the direction of the mirror progression)
using a factor.

|About contour:
YES : the relief surface is created about the contour(s) to the edge
of the relief.
NO : the relief surface is created within the contour(s).

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#0132 Polygon            --------------
Enter a polygon or a star using 3..20 corners.

|Polygon corner/circumcircle

Polygon circumcircle radius.

|Polygon corner/incircle

Polygon with incircle radius.

|Polygon basis/circumcircle

Polygon circumcircle radius.

|Polygon basis/incircle

Polygon with incircle radius.

|Star
Star with 3..20 points.

|Rectangular object:
Create various rectangular symbols as well as rhombus and ellipse.
The reference position can be respectively selected after selection
with <F2>, <M> also using the cursor.

#1782 Relief Parameter   --------------
Enter Relief settings.

|Save packed [Y/N]:
With YES reliefs are saved in compromised HRP format. NO saves
in the standard HRL format.

|Expand. Reliefdefinit[Y/N]:
Set input for ReliefVTR . New Relief.
YES: expanded input.
NO: shortened standard input.

|Contrast dz-graphic =
Set contrast level for 'Contrast picture (dz graphic)'.

#1785 Laser 3D Hatching  --------------
The relief is processed in layers using hatching lines in several
directions. The data are saved in an automatically created tool
object for laser.

|Line separation:
determines the parallel offset of the hatching lines. 

|Combine clearance lines [Y/N]:
YES = the hatching lines are combined together.

|Bidirectional [Y/N]:
'YES' milling path optimised movement, 'NO' only in one direction.

|Also save contour [Y/N]:
'YES' saves the hatching limits tougher with the created paths.

|Directions [1..6]:
1 = Hatching lines  in 0° direction.
2 = Hatching lines  in 0° and 90° direction.
3 = Hatching lines  in 0°, 60° and 120° direction.
4 = Hatching lines  in 0°, 45°, 90° and 135° direction.
5 = Hatching lines  in 0°, 36°, 72°, 108° and 144° direction.
6 = Hatching lines  in 0°, 30°, 60°, 90°, 120° and 150° direction.

|Layer thickness [mm]:
Thickness in Z direction for a layer with hatching lines.

|Image direction:
'Above>below': layer creation runs from top to bottom.
'Below>above': the layer creation runs from bottom to top.

#3131 AHSoft SLD         --------------
Export of the unmodified milling data for multi-axis applications
together with the tool and technology data.

#0015 Proj.Parameters    --------------
Set initial details for the projections.

|Vectorisation resolution:
Support point separation for the projection (projection resolution). A
small separation gives a better quality but with a large amount of data.

!Note Projections to relief:
A coarser projection resolution than the relief resolution can be completely
sensible for a better milling quality. A projection resolution finer than
the existing relief resolution makes no sense. The program compares
the resolution before a relief projection. If the projection resolution
X < relief resolution X or projection resolution Y < relief resolution Y has
been selected there is a warning:
  'Projection resolution < relief resolution'
  'Match resolution Y/N?'
With 'YES' the projection resolution is set to the relief resolution.
The projection resolution set is used for projection, e.g. if a 
projection resolution of 0.1mm is set and the relief resolution lies
at 0.02mm, then there is no warning and the data are projected with 0.1mm.

|Also project PosA [Y/N]:
With 'YES' the withdrawn [objects] are plotted as 3D movements with a fixed
clearance height of 0.5mm over the projected upper surface relief surface.
This parameter is not active for 'Multi-inclination'!

|Data source:
AutoCorr = project precalculated cut-out and relief surface tracks
  from the TLayers (AutoCorrection).
Graphic = project 2D data from the graphic layers.

#8730 Multi-axis Param.   -------------
Data input ('Multi-axis processes') for the projection.

|Limiting angle axes A+/A-/B+/B- [°]:
The function 'Multi-axis Proj. . Projection' creates tool paths for a 
general arrangement in 5 axes using the tool attitude is vertical
to the surface. The axis is an axis of rotation which rotates about the
linear X axis. Axis B is an axis of rotation which rotates about the
Y axis. For the axes of rotation max angle settings of max.
+/- 90° are possible. The  max. axis settings can be limited here
for positive and negative angle settings. Collision of axes with
the work piece are not monitored by the program!

Note: the axis A/B used here does not correspond with the axis
arrangement of the machine.

|Setting angle axis A/B [°]:
For setting angle 0° vertical tool settings are created to the
surface using 'Projection'. For setting angles <> 0 the tool
setting is rotated appropriately.

|Backlash angle A/B (0..10)[°]:
Filter for the swivelling axes A/B. Without filter (backlash = 0)
the swivelling axes follow all surface changes. This leads, under
certain circumstances, to an uneven run. A backlash angle > 0
prevents fine pendulum movements. Disadvantage is a swivelling
error up to max. +/- backlash. the backlash is only effective
within a vector. Vector end points are set to the correct angle.
For flat surface structures a backlash of ca.2° suffices.

|Surface safety level [mm]:
All empty movements are carried through at this safety level, i.e. to
approach a processing movement a point on the 'Surface safety level'
vertically above the surface is first  and then from here driven on in the
direction of the surface.

|Insertion process:
For insertion in the material there are two processes selectable:
|Vertical:
  (Standard) The tool mills vertically to the surface into the material.
|Z parallel:
  The tool mills vertically downwards (parallel to the Z axis).

#0854 Holding Webs       --------------
Enter holding webs for milling tasks. At the holding web processing tool
moves upwards from relief bottom by the web thickness, so that the material
at this point is not completely cut through and the inner part is retained
on milling out. Holding webs can only be entered for closed contours.
At the point where a holding web is placed there should be no 3D paths.

For the holding web input there are the following input variants available:
!2D graphic data + layertool (tool library - with tool indicator):
- 2D holding webs on the base ('2D select./mark/all'),
- displaced holding webs for 3D cutout ('3D displ.' - not for eMill).
!2D milling data + tool in the layer (without tool indicator):
- 2D-webs on base only ('2D select/mark/all'),
- no displaced holding webs for 3D cutout ('3D displ.').

|Web width:
Width of the web (without cutter width). The selected contours
must have a minimum length of 5*web width.

|Web thickness:
Thickness of holding web (in Z direction).

|Process (2D ../3D) :
|  Select 2D:
  Retaining webs are created for cutouts.
  A holding web is placed at the clicked on position and the contour
  start point so displaced, that the holding web is the last to be travelled.
  For contour one or more points can be clicked on for holding webs.
  In this case the last defined holding web of a contour is at the end
  of the contour.

|  2D mark.:
  Retaining webs are created for excavations.
  A holding web is placed at the end of the clicked on contour.
  Only one holding web can be defined per contour.

|  2D all :
  Retaining webs are created for excavations.
  Holding webs for all contours are introduced in the ActLayer respectively
  at the end of the contour. 

|  3D Displ. (not for milling data with tool in the layer, not for eMill):
  Parallel contours (islands) are created, with appropriate separation
  to the contour to be corrected, for a 3D cutout movement. Using these
  islands the tool, following a cutout calculation raises by the web
  thickness. For this calculation the contours for an embossed
  correction must be correctly arranged and a spherical layer tool
  determined. The islands are always arranged to the right of the
  contour. For the calculation outlying parts of contours (straight or
  outer bends) are required. Internal corners or overcutting cause
  errors.
  Procedure:
  - rotate contours for embossed correction (e.g. join tracks).
- determine layer tool with sphere.
  - create islands using holding webs.
  - 3D cutout correction using MillCorr 2D/3D and layer tool outwards.
  - remove 3D contours (milling paths) around the islands using
    operat . delete.

#1517 Division1:         --------------
Scale graduations, division with highest priority.

|Graduation division:
Division of the scale graduations. For linear scales in mm,
for circular scales  in degrees (°).
Graduation division = 0 division off the division.

|Graduation type:
Selection of graduation type using <F2> (line, rectangle,..).
Graduation type = 0 switches off division.

|Graduation length:
Length of graduation in mm.

|Graduation width:
Width of the graduation in mm. Not required for
graduation type = line.

|Text on graduation:
YES: text can be allocated to this graduation.

#1518 Division2:         --------------
Scale graduations, division with second highest priority.

|Graduation division:
Division of the scale graduations. For linear scales in mm,
for circular scales  in degrees (°).
Graduation division = 0 division off the division.

|Graduation type:
Selection of graduation type using <F2> (line, rectangle,..).
Graduation type = 0 switches off division.

|Graduation length:
Length of graduation in mm.

|Graduation width:
Width of the graduation in mm. Not required for
graduation type = line.

|Text on graduation:
YES: text can be allocated to this graduation.

#1519 Division3:         --------------
Scale graduations, division with third highest priority.

|Graduation division:
Division of the scale graduations. For linear scales in mm,
for circular scales  in degrees (°).
Graduation division = 0 division off the division.

|Graduation type:
Selection of graduation type using <F2> (line, rectangle,..).
Graduation type = 0 switches off division.

|Graduation length:
Length of graduation in mm.

|Graduation width:
Width of the graduation in mm. Not required for
graduation type = line.

|Text on graduation:
YES: text can be allocated to this graduation.

#1520 Division4:         --------------
Scale graduations, division with fourth highest priority.

|Graduation division:
Division of the scale graduations. For linear scales in mm,
for circular scales  in degrees (°).
Graduation division = 0 division off the division.

|Graduation type:
Selection of graduation type using <F2> (line, rectangle,..).
Graduation type = 0 switches off division.

|Graduation length:
Length of graduation in mm.

|Graduation width:
Width of the graduation in mm. Not required for
graduation type = line.

|Text on graduation:
YES: text can be allocated to this graduation.

#1521 Division5:         --------------
Scale graduations, division with least priority.

|Graduation division:
Division of the scale graduations. For linear scales in mm,
for circular scales  in degrees (°).
Graduation division = 0 division off the division.

|Graduation type:
Selection of graduation type using <F2> (line, rectangle,..).
Graduation type = 0 switches off division.

|Graduation length:
Length of graduation in mm.

|Graduation width:
Width of the graduation in mm. Not required for
graduation type = line.

|Text on graduation:
YES: text can be allocated to this graduation.

#8850 Export [X/Y/Z/B/C] --------------
Conversion of the 5 axes movements created using the function
'Multi-axis Proj. . Projection' to the respective type of processing
and machine axis arrangement.

|3-axes [X/Y/Z]:
Export for 3 axis movements (only with X/Y/Z). The angle settings
are ignored. In deviation to the normal 3 axis projection in
'Projections . Relief' here, however, here insertion movements
vertical to the material surface can be calculated with the aid of
the switch 'Insertion Process . Vertical'. 

The following conversions are designed for the export filter
!'DIN/ISO . Eckelmann MAchsen(ME)'!

|In horiz. posn. [X/Y/Z/B]:
Export for 4 axis movements using the machine axes X/Y/Z/B. With this
the form lies on the table. With the help of 'Setting angle axis C'
the work piece and thus the processing can be rotated.
|  Limiting angle axis B+/B- [+/- 90°]:
  The machine axis B is an angle of rotation, which rotates about the
  linear axis Y. For the angle of rotation a max. angle setting of +/- 90°
  is possible. The max. axis setting can here be limited for positive and
  negative angle settings. Collisions of the axes with the work piece
  are not monitored by the program!
|  Setting angle axis C [+/- 180°]:
  Rotation of the lying work piece using axis (rotates about the
  linear Z axis). Using the setting angle the work piece is rotated 
on the working table for the complete milling data set. 

|Standing from left/right:
The work piece stands on the C axis. The zero point in X and Y is in the 
centre (rotation point) of the C axis. Zero point Z should lie at the highest
point of the work piece. The approach movement cannot be controlled
from the program. It should so take place that collisions with the work piece
are avoided. The processing takes place dependent on selection of from
left or right.
|  Limiting angle axis B+/- and C+/- [°]:
  Max. angle setting for the axis B (rotates about Y) and for axis C
  (rotates about Z). Collisions of axes with the work piece are not monitored
  by the program!
|  Preposition X [mm]:
  The position in front of the work piece is approached before and after
  processing. with export via DIN/ISO the 'Preposition' is taken over
  automatically as 'X approach position' and 'X free run position.
  Modifications should be carried out only with caution.
|  Clearance height Z [mm]:
  New empty movements are created through the conversion of the axes.
 Empty movements take place at the laiddown 'Clearance height Z'.

|Export > Machine
Conversion of the 5 axis movement to the selected type of processing
(3 axes [X/Y/Z] / lying [X/Y/Z/B] / standing[X/Y/Z/B/C]) and export
to the machine. For multi-axis processing (lying [] / standing [])
suitable machines and export filters (4-/5 axis capable) are required.

|Export > ActLayer
Conversion of the 5 axis movement to the selected type of processing
(3 axes [X/Y/Z] / lying [X/Y/Z/B] / standing[X/Y/Z/B/C]) and saving of
the milling data in a layer. For multi-axis processing (lying [] / standing [])
suitable machines and export filters (4-/5 axis capable) are required.

If the graphic layer is empty before taking over the data, then the
milling paths are copied without further notice. If there is already data in
the graphic layer, then there is a query on further action. Selection:
|  Load on:
  The milling data are loaded on too the existing data in the graphic layer
  (attached at the end). In order that a later export of the milling data can 
  take place   without problem, the user is to ensure that only milling data
  with tool(s) is in this layer.
|  Overwrite:
  The data in the graphic layer is replaced by the milling data.
|  Abort:
  The operation is ended without further action.

!Note:
With the taking over of milling data into a graphic layer, in addition
to the milling paths the tools employed are also saved. So that these
data can be exported correctly using 'Direct Mill'. Multi-axis milling
data can be visualised to a limited extent using 'File . Volume Aspect'
(3 axis evaluation only).

Tool input.
The tools in the graphic layer can also still be edited later in that
the appropriate layer is switched active and the tool input is
activated using the aid '2D/3D'. If there are milling data with tool
information in the layer, then the tool input is opened using the
indicator 'Tools in data set..'. Here you edit only the tool(s) in the
data set, the tool library remains unchanged.

Data processing.
Milling data should no longer be edited as, with this, the data sequence
and the tool allocation are modified. With the selection of editing there
is therefore a warning.

#0036 New Series Label   --------------
The following files are called up one after the other:
- File . New
- Layout . Limits
- Text series label
- Parameter . Tool Library
- File . Direct mill.

#9911 Font Editor:       --------------
Import, export and editing of vector character sets for the
internal HZE format.

|1 Font Import:
For this select 'Import Font' and the character set file to be imported.

|Load in 2 HZE font from CD:
- Copy the desired fonts  from the CD directory 'HZE' into
  the program directory on the hard disk.
- Select 'FontEdit . Import Fonts . Install HZE'.

|3 Revise individual characters:
- Set the 'Input parameter . Circular Resolution' to >30 and
  the spline resolution to >15.
- Select the character set using 'Font Edit . Select Font'.
- Load the characters to be revise using 'View character'.
- Take over the characters using 'Import/Export . Copy'.
- Revise the characters in CAD according to their presentation
  and mark the character which is to be saved.
- Select 'Font Edit', the previously marked character is indicated.
- Select 'Save Character'.

|4 Create own characters:
- Set the 'Input parameter . Circular Resolution' to >30 and
  the spline resolution to >15.
  The character to be saved should be created in CAD as far as possible
  error free.
  Remove points of discontinuity in the arcs in CAD before export.
- Mark the character to be saved.
- Select 'Font Edit', the previously marked character is indicated.
- Select 'Save Character'.

Vector data are converted as far as possible into arcs for acceptance
in the 'Font Editor'. For the arc creation the 'Input Parameter .
Arc Tolerance' should be at ca. 0.01mm. Rougher values give less
data, but also larger deviations.

Errors in the conversion in 'Font Editor' are easy to recognise by the
arrows. Arcs are shown in light green, vectors in violet. 
If errors in the data are visible (e.g. on an arc followed immediately
by a short vector), then correct the data in CAD and export once again.

#0045 Mark               --------------
Alternative selection of aid 'Search' (marking arrow) using
<F2>. If no function is active, pressing of the righthand Mouse
key opens the alternative menu (<F2>) for 'Search' in CAD.

|Demark all
Select / remove all marking.

|Mark all.
Select and mark all paths in the ActLayer.

|Mark track posn:
Mark paths at their end points.

|Mark in layer:
A path is sought in all layers. The next path is marked and the
associated layer is switched as ActLayer.

|Demark:
Again demark a marked path (track or route).

|Paths - Info:
Indicate vector information on the marked paths. Indicated are 
for individual paths the path designation, for several paths the number
of contours and routes as well as the number of polygon points, the
elongation and the centre of the data.

|Cut <Ctrl X>, copy <Ctrl C>, enter <Ctrl V>:
Exchange marked path via the (program-) intermediate store.

|Grouping / remove grouping
Group paths. Currently grouping is only sensible in combination
with the functions in ReliefVTR.

#3102 EPS '*.EPS'        --------------
Saving of postscript vector data.

Selection 'EPS-Export':
|Path format:
Vector : contours and routes are saved as polygon runs.
Spline : curves in the paths are saved as splines.

|Contour marking for:
In CorelDraw contours, following selection 'Layout .
Grouping, Delete' and 'Combine', are filled with colour.
Depending on the version of CorelDraw Version the paths
for this must be marked differently.
Corel5 : contours can be filled in CorelDraw5.
Corel8 : contours can be filled in CorelDraw5.

Werden die Daten mit 'direct mill' und gültigen Werkzeugen exportiert,
dann werden Linienbreiten entsprechend der Fräserspitzen-Breite
erzeugt.

#0700 Milling Path       --------------
Milling path creation from 2D graphics.
Die Korrektur erfolgt nach rechts, d.h. die Offsetrichtung wird
mit dem Konturdrehsinn bestimmt.

|Tool:
Selection of the cutting tool from the library.
The calculation fundamentally takes place using a tool.

|Target layer:
Selection of the target layer for the milling data.

|Procedure:
Milling path: the marked 2D paths are converted into milling centre
  tracks.

Clear track parallel: calculate parallel clearance paths.

Contour band: continued 2D contour calculation up to bandwidth.

Milling track base: 2D milling correction whereby the tool remains
 in full depth in tight areas.

Milling track corner: work corners in simple geometric  shapes,
  so that sharp edged inlay work is possible.

Route parallel: 2D milling correction for tracks and open routes.
  However, here no paths are monitored.

Intarsia: automatic calculation of outline (M) or inline (W)
  milling tracks for inlay work. Positive sense of contour rotation
  creates outline (M), negative sense of contour rotation creates
  inline (W).

|Contour offset:
Additional offset of the cutter tip in pos. direction.
For Route parallel in pos./neg. direction.
In negative direction the contour offset can be selected max. up
to tip radius.

|Bandwidth:
Bandwidth (only with the contour band procedure).

|Delete original contour:
With YES the marked path is deleted.

|Save using tool:
'YES' saves the given tool to the milling paths.
With 'NO' the result is saved without the tool.
Remark: Milling data You should always save with tool

#3228 tasten + fräsen    --------------
Werkstücke Abtasten und fräsen mit LANG MCG und einem schaltenden
Taster der Fa. Vangraph oder LANG. Der Taster wird anstelle der
Werkzeugvermessung mit der Steuerung MCG verbunden. Zu Bearbeitungs-
beginn muß der Taster eingesetzt sein! Die Arbeitsfolge ist immer:
Oberfläche aufnehmen und auf diese Oberfläche gravieren.

|Werkzeuglängenantastung.
Die Werkzeuglängenantastung ist wie zur normalen Fräsausgabe möglich
(Einstellung 'Tabelle', 'AutoMeß', 'manuell').

|Werkzeuglängenantastung = AutoMeß:
Bei dieser Einstellung muß zum Meßzeitpunkt die Werkzeugvermessung
(Meßpunkt) aktiviert und an der LANG MCG angeschlossen sein. Hierzu
empfiehlt sich eine Parallelverzweigung einzusetzen, an welche Taster
und Werkzeugvermessung anzuschließen sind. Bei Werkzeugvermessung
werden nur die Werkzeuge, nicht aber der Taster vermessen. Zur Bearbei-
tung werden die Tasterlänge und die Werkzeuglängen gegeneinander
verrechnet. Wird der Taster zur Oberflächenaufnahme nicht korrekt
eingesetzt (bis zum Anschlag an der Spannzange), dann variiert die
Graviertiefe entsprechend.

|Werkzeuglängenantastung = Tabelle:
Die Werkzeuglängen (Spannzangenspitze) müssen in der Längentabelle
eingetragen sein. Ist die Länge zu kurz eingetragen, dann fährt die
Maschine beim Gravieren zu tief ins Material.

Die Tasterdaten werden unter einrichten eingegeben. Die Tasterlänge
und Werkzeuglänge werden gegeneinander verrechnet. Änderungen der
Gravurtiefe bitte nur mit 'Werkzeugdaten . Eintauchtiefe' oder
'Eint.-Offset' eingeben! Verstellungen der Codierschalter an der MCG
verschieben lediglich den 0-Punkt für Taster und Werkzeug und können
zur Kollision führen.

In 'millCONTROL' müssen alle Parameter korrekt eingerichtet sein.
Vergleichen Sie hierzu Ihr Handbuch bzw. die Programmhilfe. Hier
müssen unbedingt eingestellt werden:
- Parameter: Komplett (Ausgabeart = 1).
- Werkzeug . Antastung: Referenzwerkzeug #99 (= Taster)
Die Werkzeuglänge #99 ist die Tasterlänge. Der Eintrag hierzu
erfolgt nach den Einstellungen in 'tasten + fräsen' automatisch.

Für die automatische Werkzeugvermessung achten Sie bitte darauf, daß
die Spannzangenposition größer als das längste Werkzeug (auch größer
als die Tasterlänge) ist. Im Zweifelsfall muß die Spannzange mit dem
längsten Werkzeug/Taster eingemessen werden.

|Abtasten und fräsen unbestimmter Werkstücke (Freiformflächen).
Das Werkstück wird mit 'millCONTROL . tasten + fräsen' im Raster
f(Tastauflösung XY) nur an den Stellen digitalisiert, wo graviert
werden soll. Das Abtastfeld darf aus max. 16000 x 16000 Punkten
f(Abmessung der Gesamtfläche, Tastauflösung XY) bestehen.
Zu Bearbeitungsbeginn muß der Taster eingesetzt sein!

%Datenerstellung:
Fräs-/Gravierdaten werden wie für eine normale 2D/3D-Gravur in den
Layern erstellt. Achten Sie bitte darauf, daß die Gravur auf einer
bearbeitbaren Fläche liegt. Bestimmen Sie zu der Bearbeitung das
Layerwerkzeug komplett mit allen Geometrie- und Technologiedaten.
Exportieren Sie die Gravur mit 'direct mill' (andere Layer mit Daten,
die nicht gefräst werden sollen, weiß schalten) und wählen Sie
'millCONTROL'.

|Abtasten und fräsen rotationssymmetrischer Werkstücke.
Mit 'millCONTROL . tasten + fräsen' werden rotationssysmmetrische
Oberflächen abgetastet und anschließend sofort bearbeitet. Das
Werkstück wird entlang einer Abtastlinie digitalisiert und die Gravur
automatisch auf diese Oberfläche projiziert.
Zu Bearbeitungsbeginn muß der Taster eingesetzt sein!

Zur Ausgabe beachten Sie bitte folgende Einstellungen:
- Die Abtastlinie wird mit 'Layerwerkzeug . WSt = 9000' und größer
  gekennzeichnet. Der Gravur können mehrere Abtastlinien zugeordnet
  werden. Die Auswahl erfolgt mit WSt=90xx (xx ist die Linien-Nummer).
  9000 ist die Abtastlinie zum Werkzeug in der Station (WSt) #00nn,
  9001 ist die Abtastlinie zum Werkzeug in der Station (WSt) #01nn usw.
  Die Abtastlinie mit WSt 9999 wird für alle Fräswerkzeuge (WSt #1,#2..)
  verwendet, denen keine eigene Abtastlinie zugeordnet ist.
  nn steht für eine beliebige Zahl (Werkzeugwechselstation). Die Anzahl
  der tatsächlich verwendbaren Wechselstationen ist damit auf 99 begrenzt.
  Mit den 100er-WSt# werden die Abtastlinien zugeordnet. Das Programm
  tastet nur die Linien ab, die auch einem Werkzeug zugeordnet sind.
- Die Abtastlinie verläuft radial aus Zentrumsrichtung kommend nach
  Außen und darf keine Hinterschneidungen besitzen. Die Abtaststrecke
  darf aus max. 1000 Punkte f(Linienlänge, Tastauflösung XY) bestehen.
  Werden weniger als 500 Punkte aufgenommen, dann werden die Punkte mit
  einem Spline interpoliert. Wegen der am Anfang und Ende etwas
  ungenauen Spline Interpolation, ist es ratsam über die Gravurgrenzen
  hinaus (ca. Wert der Tastauflösung XY) zu digitalisieren.

%Datenerstellung:
Fräs-/Gravierdaten werden wie für eine normale 2D/3D-Gravur in den
Layern erstellt. Sinnvollerweise sollte die Eingabe zentrisch erfolgen.
D.h. der Bearbeitungsnullpunkt liegt in der Mitte (im Zentrum des
Werkstückes). Zur Orientierungshilfe kann eine schematische Zeichnung
in einen Hintergrundlayer gelegt werden.

Geben Sie die Beschriftung/Gravur in einen leeren Layer ein (z.B.
Layer #0). Achten Sie bitte darauf, daß die Gravur auf einer bearbeit-
baren Fläche liegt. Bestimmen Sie zu der Bearbeitung das Layerwerkzeug
komplett mit allen Geometrie- und Technologiedaten.
Die Abtastlinie wird durch die WSt-100-Nummern zugeordnet.
WSt#1..99 => Abtastlinie 0, WSt#100..199 => Abtastlinie1 u.s.w.

Geben Sie in einem leeren Layer (z.B. Layer #1) eine Linie (Abtastlinie)
in der Mitte der Gravur an, die abgetastet werden soll. Die Linie
kann aus einem oder mehreren Vektoren bestehen. Sie darf keine
ausgetauchte Wege und keine Umkehrpunkte (Strecke mp-p[n] > Strecke
mp-p[n+1]) enthalten. Die Linie muß vom Zentrum nach außen verlaufen.
Geben Sie dem Layerwerkzeug die Wechselstation (WSt) # >= 9000. Für
die erste Linie WSt# 9000, die zweite Linie (im nächsten Layer) WSt#
9001 u.s.w. Die Abtastlinien müssen nach dem letzten Gravurlayer
folgen und dürfen in der Reihenfolge nicht mit Gravur-/Fräsdaten
vermischt werden. Die Abtastlinie mit WSt 9999 wird für alle Fräswerk-
zeuge (WSt #1,#2...) verwendet, denen keine eigene Abtastlinie
zugeordnet ist.

Exportieren Sie die Gravur (Layer #0) und die Abtastlinie (Layer #1)
mit 'direct mill' (andere Layer mit Daten weiß schalten) und wählen
Sie 'millCONTROL'.

%Ausgabe mehrerer Gravuren/Texte:
Mehre Texte können auf die gleiche Oberfläche projiziert werden, wenn
das Zentrum für alle Fräsarbeiten gleich ist (eine Abtastung für
mehrere Gravuren/Texte). Alternativ können auch mehrere Gravuren/
Texte auf verschiedene Oberflächen projiziert werden. Dazu werden die
einzelnen Gravierabschnitte in verschiedene Layer wie unter Datener-
stellung beschrieben, gelegt. Zu jedem Gravurdatensatz muß eine
Abtastlinie in einen getrennten Layer eingegeben werden. Exportieren
Sie nacheinander mit 'direct mill' den ersten Gravurdatensatz mit
Abtastlinie und bearbeiten Sie diese wie oben beschrieben, danach
den zweiten Gravurdatensatz mit zweiter Abtastlinie u.s.w.

Ändern sich für eine weitere Bearbeitung die Gravuren/Texte, dann
müssen lediglich diese Layer geändert werden und die Bearbeitung
erfolgt in der oben beschriebenen Weise.

|Funktionsbeschreibung 'tasten + fräsen'.
|  Einrichten:
  Taster und Projektionsdaten einstellen.
  - Die Tasterdaten werden unter 'einrichten' eingegeben. Die Tasterlänge
    und Werkzeuglänge werden gegeneinander verrechnet. Änderungen
    der Gravurtiefe bitte nur mit Eintauchtiefe (Werkzeugdaten) eingeben.
    Verstellungen der Codierschalter an der MCG verschieben lediglich
    den 0-Punkt für Taster und Werkzeug und können evtl. zur Kollision
    führen.
  - Die Tasterlänge wird unter Werkzeuglänge #99 übernommen und das
    Referenzwerkzeug wird auf 99 gesetzt.

|    Zentrum X/Y:
    Zentrum der rotationssymmetrischen Abbildung (für Freiformflächen-
    Abbildung werden diese Werte nicht benötigt). Wenn das Werkstück
    zentrisch eingegeben wurde, dann sind diese Werte X=0mm / Y=0mm.

|    Tasterauflösung XY:
    Stützpunktabstand für die Digitalisierung. Bei einer Tasterauf-
    lösung von 1,0mm wird jeden mm ein Stützpunkt aufgenommen.

|    min./max. Abtastweg:
    Der Taster sollte unter 'Spannmittel . Bezugspunkt BPz' so einge-
    richtet werden, daß er kurz über dem ersten Meßpunkt steht. Das
    Programm bestimmt anhand der Einstellungen min./max. Abtastweg
    in welche Richtung jeweils der Z-Punkt korrigiert werden soll.
    Wird z.B. der Abtastweg kleiner als der eingestellte min.
    Abtastweg, dann weicht der Taster nach Oben aus. Wird anderer-
    seits der Abtastweg größer als der max. Abtastweg, dann wird
    der Taster nach Unten verstellt. Damit können verschiedene
    Effekte erreicht werden: Nachfolgende Punkte können höher als der
    Taster Nullpunkt in Z liegen ohne daß dies zwingend zur Kollision
    führt, da der Taster automatisch nach Oben ausweicht.
    Die Abtastzeit kann besonders mit max. Abtastweg drastisch
    reduziert werden, da die max. Abtastwege begrenzt werden.
    Beachten Sie jedoch, daß die max. Steigung der Oberfläche durch
    den min. Abtastweg in Verbindung mit der Tasterauflösung begrenzt
    wird. Bei dem z.Zt. verwendeten Taster ist diese Grenze jedoch
    von geringerer Bedeutung, da der Taster an sich stark eingeschränkt
    ist.

|    Tasterlänge:
    Länge des eingesetzten Tasters von der Spannzange bis zur Tast-
    spitze (Schaltstellung).

|  Spannmittel:
  Das Spannmittel bzw. Werkstück sollte hier mit dem Taster (wichtig:
  'Antastung . Referenzwerkzeug # = 99') eingemessen werden. In der
  Regel bleiben die Einstellungen 'Spannmittel = 1' und 'zentrieren in
  X/Y = Nein'. Eingegeben werden muß der Bezugspunkt in X/Y/Z (Null-
  punkt der Bearbeitung). Dieser Punkt kann nach <M> oder <F2> mit der
  Maschine eingemessen werden.

|  Eint.-Offset:
  Korrektur der Frästiefe. Wenn die Werkzeuglängen nicht genau zu
  bestimmen sind oder die Frästiefe korrigiert werden soll, dann kann
  hier die Eintauchtiefe für alle Werkzeuge durch verschieben der
  Bearbeitungs-Z-Punktes nach Oben (Werte < 0) oder nach Unten
  (Werte > 0) bis max. +/- 10,0mm korrigiert werden. Bei Verwendung
  mehrerer Fräswerkzeuge können einzelne Werkzeuglängen hier nicht
  korrigiert werden. In diesem Fall muß z.B. in Werkzeugliste die
  Eintauchtiefe temporär korrigiert werden. Wird jedoch nur ein
  Fräswerkzeug verwendet, dann kann hier bequem die Frästiefe angepaßt
  werden. Die Einstellung 'Eint.-Offset' bleibt erhalten bis die
  Auswahl 'tasten + fräsen' verlassen wird.

|  tasten + fräsen:
  Die Oberfläche wird digitalisiert und anschließend sofort bearbeitet
  (siehe Unten: Abtast- und Fräsablauf).

|  Fräswiederholung:
  Eine vorher digitalisierte Oberfläche wird erneut bearbeitet. Z.B.
  um die Gravur tieferzusetzen. Diese Funktion ist nur nach 'tasten +
  fräsen' oder 'tasten + Grafik' möglich. Zur Fräswiederholung kann
  das Werkzeug gewechselt und vermessen werden. Anzeige: 'Werkzeug
  einwechseln und vermessen?'.
  'JA': Eingabe der neuen Wechselstation und/oder <Ret>.
    Das Werkzeug wird vermessen.
  'Nein': Das Werkzeug wird weder gewechselt noch vermessen.

|  tasten + Grafik:
  Die Oberfläche wird digitalisiert und die projizierten Wege werden
  grafisch angezeigt.

|  Fräsproj. speich.:
  Ein mit 'tasten + fräsen' oder 'tasten + Grafik' erzeugtes Fräsobjekt
  wird in eine '.SLD' Datei gespeichert. Diese Datei kann mit 'Datei .
  öffnen' wieder eingelesen und später wieder ohne erneutes abtasten
  ausgegeben werden. Zur erneuten Fräsausgabe stehen u.a. die Export-
  hilfen mit der 'Ausgabe ab Marke' u.s.w. zur Verfügung.

|Abtast- und Fräsablauf (Auswahl tasten + fräsen).
Das Programm trennt bei Abtasten und fräsen rotationssymmetrischer
Werkstücke automatisch die Fräsdaten (Wechselstation 1..9998) und die
Abtastlinie (Wechselstation 9999).
- Die MCG wird initialisiert, die Frässpindel, Sprühung, Absaugung
  usw. werden ausgeschaltet.
- Die Maschine geht in den Tastmodus.
  Meldung: 'Bitte Taster einsetzen'  / 'Wenn Fräsmotor steht'.
  Jetzt muß der schaltende Taster eingesetzt werden.
  Nach der Bestätigung wird die Oberfläche in Punkten aufgenommen.
  Das Programm projiziert automatisch die Fräsdaten auf die vorher
  aufgenommenen Punkte.
- Die Maschine geht in den Fräsmodus.
  Meldung: 'Werkzeug wechseln' / 'Station #n' / 'Wenn Fräsmotor steht'.
  Jetzt muß das Fräswerkzeug eingesetzt werden.
  Wenn Tasterlänge und Werkzeuglängen genau bestimmt wurden, dann
  erfolgt die nachfolgende Gravur automatisch ohne jede weitere
  Bedienung auf die richtige Frästiefe.

#0604 3D-Effekt (VTR)    --------------
2D-Konturen werden in 3D Flächen mit Perspektiv-Ansicht
gewandelt. Diese 3D-Flächen können mit 'ReliefVTR . 3D-Effekte'
in ein Relief eingearbeitet werden.

|Tiefe [mm]:
Zur Volumen-Darstellung wird zu den Konturen eine
Volumen-Tiefe benötigt.

|Winkel XY / Winkel YZ:
Perspektivwinkel für die 3D-Flächen (Volumen).

#8743 Apex Z:            --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to an ellipse section.
Depth of apex Z < 0 : embossed,
Z > 0 : deep cut.

Der Betrag des Scheitels muß immer kleiner als der
Radius X oder Y gewählt werden!

#8744 Radius X:          --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to an ellipse section.
With radius X = radius Y forms a spherical section.
Image radius (always positive).

Der Radius ist immer größer als der Betrag des Scheitels
Z zu wählen!

#8746 Radius Y:          --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on to an
ellipse section.
With radius X = radius Y forms a sphere section.
Image radius (always positive).

Der Radius ist immer größer als der Betrag des Scheitels
Z zu wählen!

#8747 Radius Y+X:        --------------
Projection of the milling tracks on a spherical section.
Both radii are modified simultaneously.
Image radius (always positive).

Der Radius ist immer größer als der Betrag des Scheitels
Z zu wählen!

#8718 Projection         --------------
Project the prepared data on to the surface entered.
A layer tool should be entered for 2D graphic data.

Die Projektion erfolgt in Abhängigkeit der eingestellten
Datenquelle. Bei Datenquelle = Autokorr werden die zur
Verfügung stehenden 3D - Werkzeugdaten unmittelbar
projiziert und können daraufhin abgespeichert werden.

Bei Datenquelle = Grafik werden die Wege im AktLayer
projiziert. Soweit sich im Layer keine Fräsdaten mit
Werkzeug befinden, sollte hier ein Layerwerkzeug eingegeben
sein. Zum Fräsen von Formen (oder der Spiegelfläche) wird
in der Regel ein Kugelwerkzeug (FrK > 0) mit der
Eintauchtiefe (FEt) = 0 verwendet.
Die wesentlichen Werkzeugdaten werden vor der Projektion
angezeigt:
 Flughöhe : Sicherheitsabstand der Fräserspitze zur
   Materialoberfläche bei ausgetauchten Bewegungen.
 Eintaucht: Frästiefe des Werkzeuges gemessen von der
   Fräserspitze zur Materialoberfläche.
   Zum Fräsen einer Fläche meist Eintauchtiefe = 0.
 Kugelrad.: Kugelradius des verwendeten Werkzeuges.
   Soll keine Korrektur erfolgen, dann ist der Wert 0
   einzugeben. Wird der Kugelradius zu groß gewählt,
   dann erfolgt die Fehlermeldung 'Bereichsüberschreitung'.

#3310 Relief Export      --------------
Save relief as picture or surface data.

|LANG RLF:
Save a relief in LANG RLF format in file. As the RLF Format data
can only be saved with equal X and Y resolutions, different x/y
resolutions are lost.

STL: STL is a stereo lithographic surface format from the firm
3D-Systems. For export STL binary files are created.

|STL (CAD):
Very fast export with reduced surface amount. With this procedure 
Z tolerances between the singular triangles are created. In top view
all surfaces are closed. Many CAD - systems accept this data also.

|STL (closed.):
Export with reduced amount of surfaces. The surface is closed 
without gaps. With this procedure bigger relief tolerances are
possible.

|STL (connected):
Export with higher amount of surfaces. The Surface is closed 
without gaps. A few CAD - systems accept only this data format. 

|DXF-3DFace:
Export of current relief in a DXF file using 3DFACE - surfaces. This
file can, for example, be read-in using AutoCAD.

|ISO-Pkt.:
Save current relief as point cloud in DIN/ISO format.
The relief is saved as horizontal lines from left to right.
Every line starts with 'G0 ..' followed by 2 or more 'G1 ..' points.
Points with the same Z-level are combined into straight lines.
Commentary lines are at the start of data and are recorded
in brackets '( .. )'

|PCX- / BMP picture:
Save the relief as grey shade picture (256 shades) in PCX / BMP
format.

|VDA: Export in VDA format.
Automatic surface restoration for relief data from point clouds
(digitalised data), constructed or imported reliefs, grey shade
pictures etc. For area location a tolerance of (0.001..100mm) must
be determined. The area calculation takes place without further
operation.
Verfahrensbedingt entstehen zwischen den Einzelflächen Toleranzen
in Z-Richtung und unstetige Übergänge (Scheitel).

For surface restoration an as clean cut as possible relief should be
used. A relief filtering using 'Relief Edit . Filter . Error Pixel/
maverick/approximate/approximate firmly/smooth' is advisable produces
smoother reliefs and lesser, qualitatively better VDA surfaces.

Procedure for conversion of digitalised data in VDA:
- Read-in digitalised data using 'Relief File . Relief Import ...'
  as relief.
- Remove relief errors, filter reliefs
- Export relief in VDA format using
  'Relief File . Relief Export . VDA'.

#1094 Select Colour      --------------
Set colour parameters for the wide milling track.

|Layer colours/Tool colour:
YES: with every graphic build up only the layer colours
are used.
NO : with every graphic build, as far as no other colours
are applied, the layer colours are used. If, however, there
are tool data in the layers, then the tool colours are used.

|Milling track Y=base/N=relief surface:
With plotting using the aid milling track with
YES the cutting width is shown at the base (=tip radius) and with
NO  the cutting width is shown at the relief surface height.

|Fill contour Y=precise/N=rapid (only for HCAM!):
With plotting using the aid milling track, with
YES the fill contour is calculated accurately, with
NO  the filling contour is calculated as quickly as possible, -
with complex contours errors can, however, occur.

|Fill contours:
On plotting using the aid milling track, with
YES all contours are filled for better engraving preview, with
NO  only the contours are plotted.

|Empty paths visible:
With YES the emerged lines are also drawn.

|Clip area Fast Graphic:
Dependent on the graphic card lines in Zoom are no longer correctly
shown. Using Clip Area the limits can be defined from which slower but
more secure clip routine is applied. Standard setting 16000.
If, with Zoom, lines in the graphic are missing, then the Clip Area must
be made smaller (setting 8000, 4000). On the other hand, for a good
graphic card the Clip Area can be increased (32000, 64000 ..)
for more rapid graphic build-up.

#7906 Start Help         --------------
%Scope of performance
%----------------
Engraving technique is a comprehensive and therefore learning intensive
technology. Engraving covers the technical and also the artistic field.
Included is almost the complete field of metal cutting milling technology
as well as numerous applications in type-related occupational forms. Due to
the complexity which is required, finding a complete solution for engraving
techniques should not be underestimated.

From AHSoft you obtain a large selection of programs, which cover either
only partial fields of engraving technology (program lines eSIGN, iSIGN+) or
the complete range (e.g. HCAM3D prof).

|  HCAM (HCAM2D prof, HCAM3D plus, HCAM3D prof, HCAMit!):
  For the complete 3D milling/engraving range.
|  iSIGN (iSIGN+, iSIGN+2D, iSIGN+3D, iMill):
  For the complete surface engraving range (labels, simple
  front plates, lettering, stamps and much more).
|  eSIGN (eSIGN, eSIGN2D):
  Simple solution to engraving which contains only the functions
  most required.

|  eMillPhoto(SE), eMillSTL(SE):
  Milling program for 3D - Moulds.


%Demo:
%-----
Demo versions can be obtained only for the program lines eSIGN, iSIGN+.
If you are interested in a complete solution (program line HCAM), then
please arrange a demonstration.

The max. usage duration is 4 weeks. Using the demo-version you can
completely test the export path to your machine with simple tasks.

Ist Ihre Demo abgelaufen, dann
- installieren Sie eine neuere Demo (dies ist jedoch nur mit Demos
  neuerer Versionsnummer möglich) oder
- fordern Sie eine weitere Demo per eMail oder
- bestellen Sie eine Vollversion.
Dazu senden Sie bitte eine eMail an: Info@AHSoftgravur.de


%Program operation:
%------------------
The surface of the program made available is not completely conform with
Windows Office operation. Although with this you have a slightly greater
demand on familiarisation, you then have a long-term advantage of
significantly shorter operations. The number of required Mouse clicks
reduces, in part, considerably compared with normal operation.

You can adjust the program for appearance, menu technique etc.
Please note the help on this for 'Input Parameters'.

For operation please note the function 'Parameter . Help'.
|  Instructions (CAD..):
  General operating instructions on the program.
!  Please  these with care.
  You can obtain help on program functions using the aid
  'Program Help' ('?' or <F9>) and by clicking on the function.

|  Start help:
  Selection help and this message can be switched ON/OFF here.

|  Language:
  Here you can adjust the program language (German/English).
  If foreign language files are available, these are listed. On
  selection the language is replaced by the foreign language desired.

|  .. Version selection:
  Here you can adjust the program to the desired level of upgrade
  (e.g. eSIGN(SE), eSIGN2D(SE), iSIGN+, iSIGN+2D, iSIGN+3D).

$7905

#0107 Freehand Line      --------------
Plot a freehand line using the cursor. The 
program optimizes freehand lines automatically.

#0095 Spline             --------------
Enter a spline using any number of support points.
Die Splineauflösung (Anzahl der Interpolationspunkte) wird durch
'Eingabeparameter . Splineauflösung' bestimmt. 

With the function spline the next continuous curve is drawn through
a number of support points. The calculated curve, in all cases, runs
through these points. With small changes in slope these can be
lie far apart, in tight curve areas these should, however, be selected
more densely. Discontinuous points, i.e. bends in the curve, cannot be
entered as a spline. Here the function must be interrupted and a new
spline started. The last position  input determines the slope of the curve
at the end point.

During input a line to the position is carried permanently as
"rubber band". As soon as 3 support points are entered the start of the
curve is also drawn. A support point is taken over using <L>. Using <R>
the function is ended. If, during a spline input, a support point in
the vicinity of the contour start position is selected, then this point is
captured and the contour closed. Further point input creates a new spline
with new contour start point.

#8996 Import/Export      --------------
Insert marked vector data in a character
or export a character as vector data.
(Datenaustausch mit CAD).

|Delete task
Delete the store (e.g. before 'insert').

|Insert
If vector data are to be copied with 'insert' in a character,
then this must be marked beforehand in HCAD and placed
correctly in the correct dimension.

|Copy
Should a character be adopted according to HCAD,
then it is intermediately stored using 'copy'.
After quitting the Font Editor the character is displayed
marked in HCAD.

#1742 Lin-Grav parameter --------------
Parameter setting for the direct input of 3D lines

|Progression, ends, logic:
Setting for line creation. In general one works with
Logic ADD (apply) or SUB (remove) only.
|ZMin, ZMax:
Limiting values for the ZAct values which can be set.

|ZAct:
Z value for the line input. During input the Z value
can be increased in steps using <F3> or reduced in
steps using <F4>.

|ZStep:
Step width for the increase/reduction using <F3> and <F4>.

|Eingabe (Posit./FreiH/Spline):
Posit.: Eingabe als Positionsfolge in 3D mit Z-Wert-Eingabe
  zu jedem Eingabepunkt.
FreiH.: Eingabe als Freihandlinie mit linearem Verlauf
  vom Anfang (Z0) zum Ende (Z1) der Linie (Eingabe des
  Anfangs- und End-Z-Wertes). Zum Editieren kann hier
  jeder einzelne Punkt in 3D verändert werden.
Spline: Spline-Eingabe. Mit Z-Wert-Eingabe zu jedem
  Spline-Stützpunkt.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#7901 Help               --------------
Program settings and help for the start window, language,
menu selection ...

|Start Help:
Selection and Help with program start on/off.
For the programs of the series eMill.. Start Help is not
available.

|Clr. Parameter:
The program parameters are deleted.
After this all program settings are lost.

|Menu record:
Recording of the last program operations for
later error tracking.

|Language: (foreign language selection, so far as available).
If foreign language files are available, these are listed.
With selection the existing language files are replaced
by the foreign language.

|NEW:
Up-to-date information on the program.

|Instruction (CAD..):
Operating instruction for the program

#0628 Line Type          --------------
Durchgezogene Linien (Strecken, Konturen) durch Linientypen
(punktiert, gestrichelt, ..) ersetzen.

|Convert line type
Marked contours and routes are replaced by dotted, dashed etc.
line types.

Using New you can input your own line types. The new line type is
defined using a list of max. 12 sublengths.
- positive number: enter dash length.
- negative number: enter interruption.
- Number = 0.0: Define a point using the number 0.0.
For the correct input an interruption should follow a line. The line type
is secured by the program in place of the previous line type and is
available with every selection of the function line type.

|Dot line
The marked contours and routes are converted to dot rows.
The dots can be modified without problem (scaled, distorted,
displaced etc.), without influencing their shape. Dotted
lines (drillings) are first converted into geometric shapes
using 'Replace dots'.

|Replace dots
Finished arranged 'dot lines' are converted into triangular,
rectangular or elliptical shaped dots.

#1740 Scale              --------------
Adapt the relief in size, resolution...

|Scale %:
Match dimensions in X/Y/Z (input in %).
With proportional = YES all axes are the same,
with NO axes are entered individually.

|Distort XYZ:
Height/width ratio (input in mm).
With proportional = YES all axes are the same,
with NO axes are entered individually.

|Reduce %:
Make picture coarser - remove points and thus
reduce resolution and amount of data.

|Shades:
Grey value shading.

|Double resolution:
Double resolution of the complete picture in X/Y.
Position and extension remain unaltered.

#1321 Text Style:        --------------
Text representation normal or in capital letters.

|CAPS:
Representation in capital letters.

|Upper/lower case:
Normal representation.

#9917 Scanner            --------------
'Scanner' selection: scanner module for
vectorisation / border search.

#2903 Edit Run           --------------
LANG LGF2 - Abläufe importieren oder Fräsabläufe
eingegeben, editieren und erzeugen.

|New run file:
Select/create a run file.

|Import LGF-2 [ABL]:
Import a run in LANG-LGF2 format and create run files (#1..#99).
Run parameters:
|  LGF2-Text in ASCII:
  Conversion if HZE character sets from HCAM are used.
If the HZE character sets from HCAM are used, then the
  LANG-LGF2 text format must be converted into ASCII/ANSI text.
  If, on the other hand, the original LANG-ZEI character sets are used,
  work must be carried out in LANG format.
|  Import target graphic/SLD:
  Results are graphic data or labels with editable texts.

|LOAD [LG1/H2R]:
Select file name for vector data (milling data) import in the file menu
and enter in a run.

If, for example, several milling data files are combined,
then this can be controlled via a run. Example for the
arrangement of several milling files using 'LOAD':
- Create new run using 'New run file'.
- Using 'LOAD [LG1/H2R]' select file name in the desired order
  The selection is ended using <Esc>.
- In the editor supplement the order 'Position2D 0 0 A' with
  the actual reference positions (e.g.: 'Position2D 20 150 A').
- Load data using 'Run run'.

Note: using 'Direct mill . Export Help' you can sort the data later
(e.g. optimise the tool run).

|Edit run:
Select and supplement an existing run file.

Note: run files can be deleted in the data selection using <REM>
and confirmation of the query.

|Run run:
Interpret run data (convert into a layer).

|Run commands:
Help file with all run commands. The commands can, as required,
be opened parallel to the editor and input help copied.

Example produce figure wheel:
- Produce new run.
- Select all LG1 milling files one after the other.
- Supplement 'Run *.TMA Edit' with commands.
  ;example run
  LAYER 0
  AXIS4 10
  LOAD C:\DATA\FIGURE1.LG1
  AXIS4 20
  LOAD C:\DATA\FIGURE2.LG1
  AXIS4 30
  LOAD C:\DATA\FIGURE3.LG1
  ...

#1710 Relief Height Line --------------
The height line is displayed from a horizontal
section through the relief. The section line is
positioned in y-direction using the cursor.

Nur für Programme mit CAD:
With <F2, M> select 'Take over cut': takeover of the
current horizontal cut in the CAM intermediate store.

#9999 Program End        --------------
The program is ended.

With 'Input parameter . Basic setting . Save data for following
session  = YES', all data remain in the graphic layers and texts
and are available with a renewed program start.

#1115 Relief Graphic NORM--------------
Redraw the graphic with the picture limits set.
Setting of the relief graphic using <F2>, <M>:

|Standard gray tone picture:
Set standard gray tone (color) relief picture. 
The color chart can be charged under 'Colors'.

|Contrast dz graphic = 2:
Relief plan view with emphasis of fine detail.
Set contrast level 1..5.

|Render:
Show the rendered relief graphic with firmly set 
lighting source.

|Relief Object / Intermediate store:
Selection of the vector data indication.

|Color:
Setting of the color chart for the relief 
representation.

#1112 Graphic Displace   --------------
Displace the graphic using the cursor. For this click
on to a point using the cursor, with the key <L> pressed
move to the target and release key. The graphic is now
indicated as he clicked on position is now in the target.

In Verbindung mit <F6> kann die Funktion wiederholt aktiviert
werden, ohne daß der Button mit dem Cursor angeklickt werden muß.

#1773 Scale/smooth       --------------
Eine Fläche wird mit dem Level skaliert und entsprechend dem Verlauf
und dem Glättungsradius (Umfeld) geglättet. Geglättet wird exakt
innerhalb der Kontur, d.h. außenliegende Teile bleiben unverändert.

|Level:
Skalierfaktor für die Fläche.
1 = keine Änderung.

|Verlauf (Nein, linear, Radius, parabol, cubic):
Glättungseigenschaften für Nachbarpunkte.

|Glättradius:
Zu berücksichtigenden Bereich in mm um den zu glättenden Punkt.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1812 3D-Linie(n)        --------------
Linie(n) aus CAD mit linearem 3D-Verlauf versehen.
Die Linienerzeugung ist ähnlich 'Strecke / Zylinder'
hier jedoch zusätzlich mit Eingabe einer Start- und
Endtiefe (-höhe).

|Verlauf:
Form des Randes oder der Linie.

|Enden:
Offener Strecken können gerade oder abgerundet enden.

|Position Z0/Z1 [mm]:
Z0: Starthöhe in mm (Markierung: grünes Quaddrat).
Z1: Endhöhe in mm (Markierung: rotes Dreieck).

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1811 Ballige Fläche     --------------
Balliger Flächentyp aus einer runden Basisfläche und
Verlauf zum Rand.

|Flächenhöhe:
Flächen - Erhebung am Zentrumspunkt.

|Verlauf: (Nein, linear, Radius, parabol, cubic):
Randverlauf für die Rand-Flächenangleichung.

|Randbreite [mm]:
Randbreite für die Rand-Flächenangleichung.

|Grundhöhe:
Offset in Z-Richtung zur Erhöhung oder Vertiefung. Die
Grundhöhe kann direkt manuell eingegeben oder nach <M>,
<F2> im Relief ausgewählt werden.

|Zentrum:
Flächenzentrum (höchster Punkt). Zur Erzeugung spezieller
Verläufe kann das Zentrum auch außerhalb liegen

|Umkreis X/Y:
Markierung der Grenzen für die Basisfläche. Im Allgemeinen
sollte die gesamte Fläche innerhalb des Umkreises (Ellipse)
liegen. Der Umkreis sollte die Flächen-Grenzkontur möglichst
eng umschließen (beste Verrundung).
Mit größerem/kleinerem Umkreis kassen sich spezielle Effekte
erzielen.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#0802 Multi Head Drill   --------------
Nur geeignet für DIN/ISO . Multicam!
Ansteuerung einer Spez.-Bohrmaschine mit 9 Bohrern in einer
Bohrmatrix. Die Benutzung dieser Funktion erzeugt eine eigene
Wechselstations-Nr, die beim DIN/ISO-Export für Multicam eine
Spezielle Befehlssequenz auslöst.

In der Funktion können 10 verschiedene Einstellungen
eingestellt und ausgewählt werden. Zum ersten Programmstart
sind alle Einträge leer und können noch nicht benutzt werden.

Die Funktion bleibt geöffnet und weitere Einstellungen
können beliebig oft ausgewählt werden. Die Funktion wird mit
Abbrechen [x] beendet.

!Multi Head Drill einstellen:
Wählen Sie eine Einstellung (leer) in der Liste mit <F2>. Sie
erhalten die Einricht - Eingabe.

|Bohrerauswahl:
  Die Auswahl der aktiven Bohrer erfolgt durch Anklicken der
  L-förmigen Bohrer-Auswahl (1..9). Ist kein Bohrer ausgewählt,
  dann ist die Einstellung inaktiv und kann nicht verwendet werden.

|Werkzeug #:
  Auswahl des Fräswerkzeuges aus der Bibliothek. Die Berechnung
  erfolgt grundsätzlich mit einem Layerwerkzeug. Das zugehörige
  Werkzeug muß komplett eingegeben sein (incl. Wechselstations-
  nummer >0).

|Ziellayer:
  Auswahl des Ziellayers (Fräsdlayers) für die Fräsdaten.
  In diesen Layer werden die Werkzeugwege gespeichert.

|Bezeichnung:
  Namen für die Einstellung. Unter diesem Namen wird die
  Einstellung in der Liste aufgeführt.

!Multi Head Drill verwenden:
Wählen Sie eine Einstellung, die nicht leer ist, aus der Liste
und wählen Sie anschließend den Bohrungspunkt (x y).

!Hinweis:
Der Versatz der Bohrer wird beim Export kompensiert. Werden mehrere
Bohrer gleichzeitig verwendet, dann wird der Bohrer mit der
niedrigsten Nr. kompensiert. Z.B.: Sind die Bohrer #2 + #5
gleichzeitig im Einsatz, dann wird die Position für Bohrer #2
korrigiert.

Die Funktion 'Multi-Head-Drill' kann für geübte Nutzer auch direkt
über eine ensprechende Wechselstations-Nr. des Werkzeuges manuell
ausgelöst werden. Die Wechselstation besteht aus einem Offset von
1000+BohrerNr. Die BohrerNr ist die binäre Codierung der Bohrer
(1..9). Bohrer 1 = BohrerNr: 1; Bohrer 2 = BohrerNr: 2;
Bohrer 3 = BohrerNr: 4; Bohrer 9 = BohrerNr: 256 u.s.w.
Z.B.: Sind die Bohrer #2 + #5 gleichzeitig im Einsatz, dann ergibt
sich die Wechselstations-Nr. aus 1000 + 2 + 16 = 1018.

#0699 Border lines       --------------
Enter polylines for for mirror runs, projections and frames for
the automatic milling path calculation.

Polylines are required for mirror runs, projections etc.
They may have no undercutting. Die Polylinie sollte
im I.Quadranten gezeichnet werden und der äußerste Punkt links und
unten sollte jeweils auf 0 liegen. Eine andere Lage verändert den
Spiegelverlauf und ist in der Regel nicht gewünscht. Deshalb die
Anzeige/Frage 'Polylinien Basis liegt nicht auf 0/0!' 'Daten auf
0 verschieben J/N?' immer mit 'JA' beantworten.

An dieser Stelle sollten nur komplexe Verläufe erzeugt werden
(z.B. mit mehreren Umkehrpunkten), die nicht mit den Eingabehilfen
für Spiegelverläufe definiert werden können.

Frames are employed as working limits for automatic clearance
(in TTrack . Mill Track 2D and in AutoCorrection),
if Layout . Frame is switched to 'YES'. A frame must consist of
closed contours and may have no overlapping (not with milling
corrected paths also). The frame must be suitable for hatching
or milling correction.

|Polylines limits
Enter width and height of a new polyline.

|Import polylines
Import a polyline for finishing.

|Export polylines
The marked >route< is saved as polyline in a file.

|Import frame
Import the frame for finishing.

|Export frame
Save the marked contour(s) frame.
Using Export frame the previous working frame
is overwritten.

#1762 Limits             --------------
Edit picture limits
(Relief beschneiden/erweitern).

|Extract XY:
Adopt the area to be framed by a rectangle.

|Add border:
Create a border around the relief.
Fräsdaten enden an den Reliefgrenzen. Um ein Teil komplett
auszufräsen ist es evtl. notwendig vor einer Korrektur die
Reliefgrenzen zu vergrößern. Das Relief muß in der Regel um
den Radius des größten Fräswerkzeuges vergrößert werden.

|Border width [mm]:
  Enter an additional border (free space) around the relief.

|  Same level [Y/N]:
  YES : Continue the relief with the outside level. The input
    'Border level' has no function.
  NO  : Continue the relief with the amount from 'Border level'.

|Border level [mm]:
  Z - level for the border offset around the relief. This setting 
  is used only with setting ' Same level = YES'. Settings are possible 
  only from relief minimum to relief maximum. Pre setting is relief 
  minimum.

|Border above/below:
Relief z - level, cut off the relief above or below. 
For the z level input please first select a suitable relief point with 
the cursor. This z - level can be changed to the wished level with the 
following input. Settings are possible only from relief minimum to 
relief maximum.

# 190103: Rest entfernt
|Align picture:
Align graphic to relief.

|Fill border:
Set points with the value RelZMin (lowest value in the
relief) on the relief border to the neighbouring value.
A width of one pixel is filled in. This function can be
recalled repeatedly in order to fill in wider borders.

#1808 Direction surface  --------------
Surface progression within a contour in one direction only. The
surface progression (curvature) is always perpendicular to the
scaling progression (direction arrow), to the left. The surface
progression is scaled into the with borders limited surface
(matched in length). The directional surface is planned for regular
shapes such as a circle, ellipse or similar. Surfaces with internal
corners produce errors.

|Progression:
Surface progression perpendicular to scaling progression (arrow),
to the left.

|Scale (Scaling progression) [Progression, linear]:
The surface progression can be scaled along the directional arrow.
|  Progression:
  Scaling of surface progression. Height =1 leaves the surface
  unchanged, Height>1 increases the surface, Height<1 reduces the
  surface. The progression should cover the complete surface in
  the direction of the arrow.
|  Linear:
  Even run (Height=1) d.h. ein vorher geladener Verlauf
  wird gelöscht.

|From the left/from the right/both sides:
The input is only effective with the selection of a scaling
progression.
|  From the left:
  The scaling takes place in the direction of the arrow.
|  From the right:
  The scaling takes place against the arrow.
|  Both sides:
  The scaling takes place in both directions.

|Directional angle:
Rotation of the directional arrow.

|Base height:
Offset in Z-direction to raise or lower. The base height can be
entered manually or selected in Relief following <M>, <F2>.

|Smoothing step:
Additional smoothing function for the surface. With this, edge
errors and formation of peaks can be suppressed.

Beispiele in 'BEISPIELE_Relief':
Das Projekt 'Richtungsfläche.PRO' enthält einen einfachen Verlauf
(vgl. 'RICHTFLe.GIF'). Das Projekt 'Richtungsfläche1.PRO' enthält
einen Verlauf mit zusätzlicher Skalierung von beiden Seiten
(vgl. 'RICHTFL1.GIF').

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1809 Polygon evening    --------------
Even out a surface surrounded by a contour to one or more Bezier
progression lines. The progression lines can create evening out with
3D peaks through various Z-values of the support points. If several
3D-progression lines are entered then the Z-values must be matched
to each other, in order to avoid points of discontinuity in the
surface.

|Progression XY new:
Enter progression lines (Bzier - Splines). For the line, both end
points and then the Bezier-spline support points are first entered.
The Z-values are preallocated with it 0.5mm. The line input is
active until it is aborted using <R>, <Esc>.

|Progression XY edit:
Displace the support points (end points and B-spline support points)
of the progression lines in the x/y level.

|Progression clr:
Delete a progression line.

|Scroll Z:
Z-value input for the support points using a scroll mouse.
Z-values are displaced by rotating the scroll wheel.

|Pos Z:
Z-value input into the input field for the support points.

|Progression linear/parabolic/cubic:
Linear = Linear progression contour line.
Parabolic = Progression smoothed off to the line.
Cubic = Progression to the line and smoothed to the contour.

|Base height:
Offset in Z-direction to increase height or depth. The base height
can be entered directly manually or selected following <M>, <F2>
in Relief.

|Interpol.
With Interpol.>1 a coarsened surface is created rapidly and
thereafter interpolated. Interpol.=1 creates a surface with maximum
resolution. This type of surface creation can take a long time.

|Smoothing step:
Additional smoothing function for the surface. With this, edge
errors and formation of peaks can be suppressed.

|Method [1,2]:
Different calculation methods result in different surfaces.

Polygon Ausgleich ist eine Ergänzung/Fortsetzung der Funktion
'Linien Ausgleich'. Die Ergebnisse enthalten jedoch häufig unstete
Stellen. Somit ist der Umgang sehr schwierig.

Beispiele in 'BEISPIELE_Relief':
Ein Beispiel erhalten Sie mit 'PolygonAusgleich.PRO' und
'POLYAUS1.GIF'.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1728 Relief Progression --------------
'Construct' a linear progression within contours. With this
a progression is possible, for example in order to create
a character, which is not possible using other functions.
Z.B. Variable Flankenwinkel oder Variable Abrundungsradien.

A progression is always possible for a simple surface only
If the option Reference route if selected, then the route
in the direction to the contour can have no internal corners.
Contours with internal corners in the route are to be
divided into several contours.

Eine Fläche besitzt immer 2 Höhen (Bezugshöhe - meist Innenhöhe 
des Zeichens und die Konturhöhe - meist Außenhöhe (=0)) und die 
Bezugs - Definition. Diese kann ein einzelner Punkt (Eckpunkt = 
Bezugspunkt), ein einzelner Vektor (Bezugsvektor) oder eine 
Teilstrecke der Kontur (Bezugsstrecke) sein. Bezugspunkt, 
Bezugsvektor oder Bezugsstrecke sind immer Teil der Flächen - 
Umgrenzungskontur.

|Reference height:
Surface height at the position of the reference point, vector
or route.

|Contour height:
Surface end at the contour limit.

|Reference point:
Select a point for the surface progression.

|Reference vector :
Select a vector for the surface progression.

|Reference route:
Select several vectors for the surface progression.
The vectors must be selected for their direction of
progression. Please the direction arrow.
Wählen Sie zuerst den ersten Vektor und danach den letzten
Vektor der Bezugsstrecke.

Beispiele in 'BEISPIELE_Relief':
Ein Beispiel erhalten Sie mit 'AH_Text.PRO' und 'AH_Text.GIF'.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1800 Char. Projection   --------------
Convert contours and routes into embossed relief data. This function
is used, for example, for the creation of character/graphic on to
a bent background. The flanks of the graphic here contain,
independent of the background, the given progression. On the other
hand, with a projection using routes or border and plan, the border
progression is co-plotted.
The logic is laid down for this procedure.

|Progression:
Form of the border or line.

|Filling:
Filling of closed contours (relief surface of the drawing).
With routes selection is not permitted!

|Base height:
Offset in Z direction to elevate. The base height can be entered
directly manually or following selection of <M>, <F2> in Relief.

Example of projected graphic with plane base - procedure:
- enter 2D paths (drawing).
- create relief using, for example, a radius.
- develop graphic using Projection . Relief . Unwind.
- using ReliefVTR . Char.Projection create drawing on radius.
- using plane surface fill the drawing base plan.
- using Relief . Edit . Layer Border (ABSOLUTE) create contours
  for the clearance tool and finish in CAD.
- form the milling paths prepared in CAD on the surface using
  Projection . Relief.

Hiermit werden komplexe Aufgabenstellung gemeinsam mit mehreren
weiteren CAD-Funktionen gelöst. Die Lösung wurde für spezielle
Ziffernräder und Prägestempel entwickelt. Hier geht es um die
Reduzierung der Fräszeiten  und damit der Stückkosten durch
optimierte optimierte Ausspitzwege im 3D-Raum. Diese Wege werden
anhand des konstruierten Reliefs in 2D gezeichnet und danach auf
das Relief projiziert.

Beispiele in 'BEISPIELE_Relief':
Ein Beispiel erhalten Sie mit 'AHSoft_0499.PRO'. Die Fräsdaten
befinden sich in den Layern 8 und 9.
Layer 8: Die Oberfläche wird vorgefräst.
Layer 9: Die Zeichen werden umfahren und freigeräumt.

#0709 Intarsia           --------------
Automatic calculation of Outline- (M) or Inline- (W)
milling tracks for only tasks - complete with all outer rounding off.

The width of the surface enclosed by the contour(s) must, at all
positions, be at least 2 x offset radius. if this minimum width is
undercut then holes result or the contour is ignored.

For the intarsia- (inlay) calculation there are processes available:

-------------------------------------------------------------------
|Intarsia with shoulders:
-------------------------------------------------------------------
The intarsia can, as desired, be provided with a shoulders.
The shoulder (offset milling at small depth) ensures that
the inlays are not pushed through. For shoulders and offset
different and also similar tools can be selected. Equally the
calculated milling paths can be saved in different or the same
target layer.

The tip radii for shoulder and offset tools should be selected similar
or the same. A tip radius (FrS) ratio > 2 : 1 should be avoided.!

The shoulder calculation is switched off if the shoulder depth = 0
or shoulder width = 0 is selected.

If the matching opposite side for an intarsia task is to be produced,
the following inputs are to be changed:
- if different tools are employed then offset and shoulder tools must
  be exchanged so that the rounding off matches the tool gradients.
- Correction [inner(w)]/[outer(m)] exchange.
- Contour = limit for tool [shoulder]/[  offset] exchange.

|Offset tool #[0..199]:
Selection of the milling tool for the offset track. <M,F2> Tool input.

|Offset target layer [0..LayerMax]:
Selection of the target layer for the offset track. <M,F2> Layer selection.

|Contour offset (+/-100)[mm]:
Additional offset of the cutter tip in pos./neg. direction.
In the positive direction max. 99.999mm. In the negative direction
max. cutter tip radius of the offset tool.

|Shoulder tool # [0..199]:
Selection of the milling tool for the shoulder track.
<M,F2> Tool input.

|Shoulder target layer [0..LayerMax]:
Section of the target layer for the shoulder track.
<M,F2> Layer selection.

|Shoulder width (Sb)[<= 2*FrS Offs]:
Shoulder width max. diameter of the offset tool.
A shoulder width = 0 switches off the shoulder calculation.
With sharp angles in the contour the shoulder width should
be clearly smaller than the tool width as otherwise islands,
which cannot be cleared, remain.

|Shoulder depth (St)[0..FEt Offs]:
Shoulder depth < milling depth of the offset tool.
A shoulder depth = 0 switches off the shoulder calculation.

|Correction [inner(w)/outer(m)]:
Correction direction for the intarsia.
Inner (w): correction inwards so that cutouts are created.
Outer (m): correction outwards so that milling around is created.

|Direction [1=down milling, 2=up milling]:
Milling direction down or up milling. For down milling a surface
(relief surface) is milled around in the mathematically negative
direction.

|Round-off angle [°]:
Rounding off outer corners (5..30°).

|Smoothing offset [<100% FrS]:
For clean milling the offset track is worked over with a
final cut the width of the smoothing offset.

|Contour = limit for tool:
Shoulder: the boundary contour (graphic) is observed for the
  shoulder tool.
Offset: the boundary contour (graphic) is observed for the
  offset tool.

|Save with tool [Y/N]:
'YES' saves the given tool to the milling paths. With 'NO'
the result of the graphic path (without tool) is saved.

-------------------------------------------------------------------
|Intarsia + Clearance:
-------------------------------------------------------------------
$7910 Textaufruf 'Intarsien + Abräum'

#8790 Reliefprojection   --------------
Projection of prepared 2D-/3D-data on relief surface areas.
You can project 2D paths from the graphic layers. Sollen Wege
aus der AutoKorrektur oder Spiegeldaten projiziert werden, müssen
diese zuvor in einen Layer gespeichert werden.

For the projection of graphic layers a correct tool should be
entered, so far as no tool data is to found in the milling data.

|Unwind:
$8798

|Projection:
$8728

|Standard/Zoom Projection:
3D indicator over grid, vectors, points or surface. Direction
of view can be set in 10° steps. Using PosA you adjust the line
representation colour. With input PosA without colour there results
a perspective indicator with adjustable height level marking.

|PLayer > ActLayer:
$3123

|PLayer Export:
$9926

#7926 ActLayer           --------------
Layer box: Adjust ActLayer for processing and
displays the active layer.

Selection is by clicking on the desired layer.
The values e.g. (0  9/1) show:
- layer number (0),
- number of support points in the layer (9),
- number of text lines (1).

By clicking on the character element next to the layer indicator
the graphic can be switched for this layer to co-plot 'inactive'
(=white) or 'active' (=layer color).

Clicking on the layer selection using <F2>, <M> opens a
text editor with the layer list. Here the layer names can be edited,
however, with this, the list structure may not be modified. If the
editor is ended and the modified data saved, then these names
are taken over as tool/layer names.

#3187 Auto Import        --------------
Automatisierter Datenimport.
Vor der ersten Benutzung muß unter 'Auto-Import einrichten'
<F2> das Verfahren eingestellt werden!

Diese Funktion ist hilfreich bei immer wiederkehrenden gleichen
Datenimporten. Der voreingestellte Ablauf wird weitgehend
automatisch abgearbeitet und damit viele Bedienungen eingespart.

Der Arbeitsablauf ist wie folgt vorgesehen:
1) Daten bereitstellen. Z.B. in CorelDraw eine Zeichnung erstellen
   und im AI-Format in den eingestellten 'Pfad' exportieren.
2) Im Gravierprogramm mit 'Auto Import' die Daten importieren.
   Bei richtiger Einstellung werden nicht nur Bedienungen zum
   Import automatisiert, sondern auch weitere Prüfungen und
   Korrekturen der Daten erfolgen automatisch.
Für einen optimalen Ablauf wird empfohlen, immer die gleiche
Exportdatei (gleichen Namen) zu verwenden. Damit wird im
Gravierprogramm die Dateiauswahl eingespart.

|Normale Anwahl 'Auto Import' mit <L>:
Die Daten werden gemäß den Voreinstellungen importiert und
bearbeitet. Wird im angegebenen Pfad nur eine Datei des
Importformates gefunden, dann wird diese sofort importiert.
Werden mehrere Dateien vorgefunden, wird die Dateiauswahl
geöffnet.

|Auto-Import einrichten (Anwahl mit <F2/M>):
'Importformat' und 'Pfad' müssen gültige Werte enthalten. Die
Hilfen 'Arbeit anpassen' bis 'Schnittpkt. suchen' können
ein- und ausgeschaltet werden.

|  Importformat:
  Auswahl eines Daten - Importformates. Mit dem Importformat
  wird die Dateierweiterung (Suffix) festgelegt.
  Der Name der Importdatei wird nicht voreingestellt.
  Wird bei 'Auto Import' im angegebenen Pfad nur eine Datei des
  Importformates gefunden, dann wird diese sofort importiert.
  Werden mehrere Dateien vorgefunden, wird die Dateiauswahl
  geöffnet.

|  Pfad:
  Auswahl eines Datenpfades für den Import.
  Mit 'Auto Import' werden Daten nur in diesem Pfad gesucht. Ein
  möglicher Pfad für den Datenaustausch ist das Unterverzeichnis
  'Project'. Sie finden den Pfad bequem in der Dateiauswahl unter
  'Project'.

|  Arbeit anpassen:
  JA: Die importierten Daten werden in den ersten Quadranten
    gelegt (Nullpunkt links unten) und die Grenzen eingestellt.
  Nein: Die Daten bleiben unverändert.

|  Bahnoptimierung:
  JA: Die Daten werden überprüft und unnötige Punkte entfernt.
  Nein: Die Daten bleiben unverändert.
  Werden z.B. Strecken für eine vertiefte Gravur importiert, dann
  sollte die 'Bahnoptimierung' mit 'Nein' ausgeschaltet werden.

|  Strecken verbinden:
  JA: Strecken - Segmente werden, wenn möglich zu Konturen
    verbunden. Z.B. nötig nach einem Import von DXF - Daten.
  Nein: Die Daten bleiben unverändert.

|  Sort.Innen/Außen:
  JA: Die Reihenfolge der Konturen wird so geändert, daß
    innenliegende Konturen vor der Außenkontur abgearbeitet
    werden. Z.B. nötig für Ausfräsarbeiten.
    Bei Verwendung der 'AutoKorrektur' kann die Datenreihenfolge
    wieder geändert werden (vgl. Parameter).
  Nein: Die Daten bleiben unverändert.
  Für einfache vertiefte Gravuren sollte diese Prüfung mit
  'Nein' ausgeschaltet werden.

|  Schnittpkt. suchen:
  JA: Die Daten werden auf Überschneidungen geprüft.
    Z.B. nötig vor einer Offsetberechnung.
  Nein: Die Daten bleiben unverändert.
  Für einfache vertiefte Gravuren sollte diese Prüfung mit
  'Nein' ausgeschaltet werden.

#2010 ACorr2D/3D         --------------
Calculate 2D/3D milling tracks for up to 10 tools from error-free
contours without overlapping. Tools with cone travel around
the contour in 3D, cylindrical tools with 0 degrees in 2D.
The tool path calculation takes place by block. With this more
favourable milling paths and shorter calculation times.

Very high vector resolutions for arcs should be avoided.
Very large cutter radii in comparison to the contour
extensions lead, under certain circumstances, to a error-prone
calculation.

|Tool selection(1-10):
The tools are to be entered continuously into the list from smallest
(beginning with 1) up to the largest tool (clearance tool) with its
serial number from the tool library. The tool input is always to take place
coherently, spacing is not permitted. The tools are to be entered in 
ascending order of their tip radius (FrS). The cutter angle of the
tools (FWi) should be the same. In any case, for a correct working off
of the program, the total radii (RES) of the given tools are to be arranged
in ascending order. Cutter angles can be entered in the range from 
0degrees (cylindrical) to 89.999 degrees. Using <M, F2> or clicking on
to the tool graphic the program changes into the tool input.

|Correction process:
|  2D/2D+3D:
  Tools are calculated with cutouts if the cutter angle is >0 degrees. With
  this the tool travels around the contours complete with all cutouts.
  The ratio of the tip radii must be so selected that, in sharp inner corners
  no islands remain. Ratios 1:<=2 etc., occur only with flat inner corners,
  the ratio can be selected larger.
|  3D:
  Create 3D cutout tracks only.
|  Corner:
  The tool clearance island is calculated using a ratio of the
  tip radii > 1:2.5. the corner tool does not travel around the contour.

|Clearance process:
The line-shaped clearance movements are to be preferred.
Clearance lines can be calculated quicker and very much safer
and in the majority of cases lead to shorter milling times!
|  Line-shaped:
  Create clearance contour and clearance lines in the angle to be given.
  The clearance lines are as far as possible combined together.
|  Lines unidirectional:
  Create clearance contour and clearance lines in the angle to be given.
  The lines always run in one direction.
|  Track parallel radius:
  A clearance track is created through equidistant milling run lines
  (radius related island engraving).
|  Track parallel diameter:
  A clearance track is created through equidistant milling run lines
  (diameter related island engraving).
|  Konturband:
  Es wird ein Abräumband durch äquidistante Fräslauflinien mit
  vorgegebener Breite erzeugt. Für diese Berechnung wird
  zusätzlich die Eingabe einer Bahndbreite benötigt.
|  No clearance track:
  Create no clearance track.

|Clearance angle:
Input of the angle for line-shaped clearance tracks (-360°<0<=+360°).

|Konturband Breite:
Bahndbreite für das Abräumverfahren 'Konturband'. Die Berechnung
endet bei erreichen der vorgegebenen Bahndbreite.

|Relief surface/base:
|  Relief surface:
the contours describe the relief surface. Correction takes place using
  the resulting radius (FrS+cone).
|  Base:
  The contours describe the base. Correction takes place using the
  tip radius (FrS).

|Embossed/Recessed:
|  Embossed:
  Create milling tracks for an embossed stamp.
|  Recessed:
  Create milling tracks at the base (recessed).

|Werkzeug Spitzenversatz:
Korrektur der Werkzeug Offsetberechnung. Mit dem Spitzenversatz
kann die Berechnung geringfügig korrigiert werden. Z.B. eine
Arbeit kann mit einem Spitzenversatz wiederholt werden, um
Werkzeugfehler auszugleichen.
Der Spitzenversatz kann im Bereich -(kleinster Spitzenradius)
bis +10mm eingestellt werden.

|Parameter:
Parameter input for AutoCorrection.
A detailed description of the AutoCorrection parameter is contained
under 'Input Parameters'.

|Tool Block (Tool block input):
From #50 the tools subdivided into blocks of 10. A block can be
selected, edited, opened and saved.
|  Editing:
  Edit tools of the block (goto in the tool input at the position of the
  first tool in the block).
|  -:
  1 Block back (>= 50).
|  +:
  1 Block forwards (<= 190).
|  <Open:
  Load block of 10 tools from file into the current block from the
  tool library.
|  Save:
  Save the current block of the tool library (10 tools) in
  a file.

The tools always begin at the start of the block (group of 10).
Tools with a valid station number (>0) are taken over into the
calculation list in the order of the input in the tool library. If no tool
with a valid station number is available, then at least the first 
block tool is taken over.

#9929 Auto Correction    --------------
In 'AutoCorrection:' the cutter track calculations are combined into
2D, 3D-cutout and the surface relief calculation. The determination
of the correction direction internal/external takes place through
the setting Internal/external. For this correction the data are used
within the current working area (ActLayer). The calculated cutter tracks
are saved in the tool layer (TLayer). A calculation can be repeated as
often as desired, thereafter the respectively last calculated cutter tracks
are to be found in the Tlayers. The program calculates all milling data
of AutoCorrection in one run. Thus you save considerable operating
expenditure and achieve shorter calculation times.

#1357 Mirror             --------------
Mirror the marked text rows. This function changes 
the signs for text distortion and text width.

#8202 Scanner            --------------
Scan in specifications or adopt scan data The selection
indicates, depending on application - status, a different
number of functions. For first application you receive only
the indicator application.

|Intermediate store:
If there is a pixel picture in the Windows intermediate store
this function can be selected. Intermediate store imports the
data as b/w picture.

|[File name]:
Here every program can be selected which can create b/w pixel
pictures (e.g. Scanner program, Photostyler, CorelDraw ...).
A file connection must be selected using 'Arrange' before first
use. This program is started with [File name].

The program [File name] can allocate 'HSCAN.PCX/BMP/TIF' with
b/w-picture-data or the Windows intermediate store with a b/w
picture. Following normal ending of [Filename], HCAM checks
  1. the Windows intermediate store,
  2. the file 'HSCAN.PCX' in the HCAM master directory,
  3. the file 'HSCAN.BMP' in the HCAM master directory,
  4. the file 'HSCAN.TIF' in the HCAM master directory.
Das erste Bild das gefunden wird, wird als Scandatei geladen.
Das Bild muß reine s/w - Daten enthalten Graustufen- oder
Farbbilder sind nicht erlaubt. BMP-Dateien dürfen keine gepackte
Daten enthalten.

|Set up:
Select scanner program, Photostyler.. for pixel picture creation.

#3209 Parameters         --------------
Input of parameters for direct output. The parameters must be
completely entered before the first processing.

The following selection is dependent on the selected machine type:

|Limits:
Determine dynamic machine limits.

|  Max.rate of feed [X/Y/Z/ [vhf]:
  Pay attention that no forward feed is selected which exceeds the
  control limits. With the exceeding the control switches to the
  minimum (safety) forward feed.
  Für vhf: Standard = 6m/min.

|  Flughöhe global/lokal  [J/N]:
  JA = global: Der unter 'globale Flughöhe' Wert wird für alle
    Werkzeuge verwendet. Die Werkzeug-Flughöhe wird ignoriert.
    Der eingestellte Z-Nullpunkt ist die Materialoberfläche.
    Standardeinstellung.
  Nein = lokal: Die Frästiefe ist die Summe aus der Werkzeug-
    Flughöhe + Vektor-Z-Wert. Der Bearbeitungsnullpunkt liegt
    um die Flughöhe versetzt über der Materialoberfläche.
|  globale Flughöhe        [mm]:
  Einstellung für 'globale Flughöhe'. Standard = 1,0mm.

|  Type of output [all machines other than vhf]:
  0 : Minimum output without tool change.
  1 : Output with 'Tool setting.
|  Type of output [vhf]:
  0 : Output without tool changer.
  1 : Output with tool changer (standard).

|Space:
Determine machine working space and axis resolution.
|  Arbeitsraum (max) X/Y/Z [mm];
  Arbeitsraum der Maschine (Maschinen-Bewegungsbereich)
  für die Achse X/Y/Z eingeben.
|  Steigung (Auflösung) X/Y/Z:
  Kleinstes Increment (Schritt) der Steuerung/Maschine bestimmen.
  Für vhf: Standard = 0,001mm
|  Arbeitsraumüberwachung [J/N]:
  JA : Das Programm kontrolliert vor Ausgabe der Daten die
    Maschinengrenzen und erzeugt evtl. eine Fehlermeldung.
  Nein: Maschinengrenzen werden nicht überwacht.
  Für vhf: Standard = JA

|Return traverse:
Position to be driven to after processing.
|  Homeposition anfahren [J/N]:
  JA : Die Maschine fährt nach Arbeitsende an den unter
    'Homeposition X/Y' eingetragenen Punkt.
  Nein: Die Maschine bleibt an der letzten Bearbeitungsposition
    stehen.
  Für vhf: Standard = JA
|  Homeposition X/Y [mm]:
  Eingabe der Homposition für 'Homeposition anfahren = JA'.
  Für vhf: Standard = 0

|Axes:
Using 'axis exchange' the coordinates of the milling data set are
exchanged and mirrored. For the axis change respectively only one
address (X, Y])may be given. With '-' sign the axis is mirrored
about the zero point.

|  Axis X, Y(, Z):
  input of the address through which the X(,Y) axis of the
  machine are to be replaced. possible inputs are (+/-) X, Y.
  Für vhf: Standard = +X / -Y / +Z

|Port:
Setting of the RS232 interface (COM1..4) for the operation of
machines. take suitable settings from your machine description.

|  Port COM1..4 [(0)1..4]:
  Auswahl der seriellen Schnittstelle an welche die
  Maschinensteuerung angeschlossen ist. Die meisten Rechner
  besitzen nur COM1 = 1 (und COM2 = 2).
  Für vhf: Standard = 1.
    Für Kontrollzwecke kann hier auch COM0 = 0 ausgewählt werden.
    In diesem Fall werden die Exportdaten nicht über die serielle
    Schnittstelle geschickt, sondern werden in die Datei
    'MKontr_vhf.DAT' (im Programmverzeichnis) geschrieben.
|  Baudrate  [1200..9600,38400]:
  Einstellung der Übertragungsgeschwindigkeit für die Daten zur
  Steuerung.
  Für vhf: Standard = 19200
  Für Roland: Standard = 19200.
|  Sendeverzögerung  [0..255ms]:
  Zu Testzwecken (Fehlersuche) kann die Datenübertragung verzögert
  werden. Standard = 0 (keine Verzögerung).

|File:
Load and save the parameter set in 'Mill CONTROL'.

  vhf-Parameter INI [vhf]:
  Control must be initialised for first use after switching on.
  This monitoring takes place automatically. If the control is
  switched off during operation of HCAM/iSIGN, then here the
  initialisation must be undertaken manually.

#2023 Tiefe Schneide     --------------
'Tiefe Schneide' ist ein spezielles Rechenverfahren im Menü
AutoKorr für 1 Werkzeug. Eine relativ tiefe Gravur wird mit
einem Werkzeug in mehreren einzeln berechneten Schichten
abgearbeitet.
Für die Berechnung werden die AutoKorr - Parameter verwendet.
Einige Einstellungen sind allerdings fest vorgegeben.

|Werkzeug:
Für die Berechnung wird ein Schaft-, Kegel- oder Kugelwerkzeug
benötigt. Ein Kugelwerkzeug kann mit einem senkrechten Schaft
oder mit einem Kegel versehen sein. Das Werkzeug muß komplett
mit Geometrie- und Technologiedaten I eingegeben werden.
- Für Schaftwerkzeuge (Kegelwinkel = 0) werden 2D-Fräswege, für
  Kegelwerkzeuge (1° < Kegelwinkel < 80°) werden Ausspitz-(3D-)
  Fräswege berechnet.
- Der Kegelwinkel muß immer <= Schneidenwinkel gewählt werden!
- Für Kugelwerkzeuge wird ein Fräseroffset passend zum
  Berührungspunkt mit der Schneide berechnet.
- Die Fräserspitze (FrS + FrK) muß >= 0,01mm gewählt werden.

|Schneidenhöhe [(0,001..999,999)mm]:
Höhe einer Schneide oder Tiefe der Gravur in mm.

|Schneidenwinkel [(0..79,999)°]:
Winkel der Schneide gemessen zur Senkrechten. Der Schneidenwinkel
muß >= dem Fräserwinkel gewählt werden. Ein Schneidenwinkel mit
0° ergibt eine senkrechte Flanke (senkrechte Flanken sollten
allerdings besser mit den herkömmlichen Rechenverfahren berechnet
werden).

|Spitzenversatz [mm]:
Der Spitzenversatz wird aus den Werkzeugdaten ermittelt und muß
nicht eingegeben werden (Spitzenversatz = FrK * Cos(FWi) + FrS).
Der Spitzenversatz für Kugelwerkzeuge wird vorerst unabhängig
vom Schneidenwinkel berechnet.

|Spitzenoffset [mm]:
(-Spitzenversatz-0,01mm < Spitzenoffset < 99,999mm).
Zusätzliche manueller Versatz des Fräserspitze (Veränderung
des Spitzenversatzes). Der Spitzenoffset wird nur zur
Fräseroffsetberechnung, nicht für Abräumbewegungen berücksichtigt.

|Schichttiefe [(0,01..99,999)mm] / Schichtzahl (2..99):
Immer die letzte Eingabe für Schichttiefe [mm] / Schichtzahl wird
als aktive Eingabe übernommen. Die alternative Eingabe wird dann
als Anzeige verwendet.
- Wird Schichttiefe [mm] eingegeben, dann werden die angegebenen
  Tiefen gefräst. Die letzte Schicht ist dann die Resttiefe
  (>0,001mm).
- Wird Schichtzahl eingegeben ergeben sich immer gleichmäßige
  Schichtstärken.

|Eintauchwinkel [(10..90)°]:
Alle Eintauchbewegungen werden mit einer schrägen Anfahrbewegung
versehen (10° < Eintauchwinkel <= 90°). Ein Eintauchwinkel von
89°-90° wird senkrecht (90°) erzeugt.

|Abräumwege:
Es können Abräumbewegungen entweder für alle Schichten oder nur
für die letzte Schicht berechnet werden. Der Abräumabstand kann
über den Spitzenoffset und die AutoKorr - Parameter verändert
werden. Für Abräumbewegungen mit Kugelwerkzeugen wird mit der
gesamten Spitze (FrS+FrK) gerechnet.
Wählbare Abräumverfahren sind zeilenförmig (nur horizontal),
Zeilen unidirekt. (nur horizontal), bahnparallel Rad.,
bahnparallel Durchm., keine Abräumbahn.

|Fräswege für [erhaben/vertieft]:
Einstellung der Berechnung für erhaben und vertieft.

#7911 Auto Menü          --------------
Macro - Ablauf erstellen auswählen und ausführen.
Mit 'Auto Menü' können Bedienungsabläufe automatisiert werden.
Zur Bedienung beachten Sie die Befehle mit Beschreibung in den
Beispieldateien.

#3026 DXF '*.DXF'        --------------
Import AutoCAD - DXF files. Vector data can be controlled and
corrected in the menu 'Process'. Texts can be adapted using
'Edit line:' and 'Operat. Line'.

AutoCAD character sets must be replaced by engraving letters (HZE).
As text distortion in the DXF Format (not the text width) is taken
over the texts frequently appear with other widths. If this is not
wanted, then the texts must be corrected. Alternatively it is
recommended that here data exchange is via HP-GL. If texts have
been imported via DXF, then the text style can be changed easily
in Module Text using 'Operat line . Font' for the complete file.

Bitte keinen 'hochgezogenen' Text (für 3D Ansichten) verwenden.
Ein hochgezogener Text kann falsch positioniert und kann nicht
weiterverarbeitet werden. Texte bitte als normale 2D-Beschriftungen
in AutoCAD eingeben.

The import of 2D data from AutoCad to Ver. 12 is without problem -
other CAD systems in part provide very incomplete data. In Ver.13
AutoCAD is, at best, compatible with itself as this contains coded
areas. From Ver.14 onwards AutoCAD can also save downward compatible
in format DXF Ver.12.
Limitations: polylines are evaluated with width 0.
3D DXF is a pure graphic processing and usually not be used for
milling tasks.

Recommended data export from AutoCAD:
- delete all layers not required such as, for example, dimensioning and
  check and delete all disabled, frozen and switched off layers.
- save file, load again and 'clean'. Repeat this several times until
  no further check messages appear. For this see also the AutoCAD handbook.

If problems occur with import, then import DXF data in AutoCAD, revise
the contents there as described above and export the data set again for
HCAM/iSIGN+.

#8798 Unwind             --------------
Unwind 2D graphic data on to any relief. The unwinding takes place
only in the setting Data source = graphic (not AutoCorrection).
!The graphic data in the ActLayer are replaced by the unwound paths.

Procedure for unwinding embossed stamp data:
- provide 2D paths in the layer.
- provide relief on to which it is to be unwound and projected.
- 'Projection . Data Source' on 'graphic'.
- complete 2D paths in 'Projection . Relief . Unwind' on the surface.
- using the 2D distorted paths calculate the stamp in 'AutoCorrection'.
- 'Projection . Data Source 'on 'AutoCorrection'.
- view as and export projected milling data.

Alternative for embossed engraving:
- calculate 3D milling paths in 'AutoCorrection'.
- take over milling paths into one graphic layer.
- 'Projection . Projection parameter . Data Source' to 'Graphic'.
- using 'Projection . Relief . Unwind' match milling paths to the surface.
- using 'Projection' project milling paths on to the surface.
- view and export projected milling data.

Bitte beachten Sie: Abrollen und Projektion von Gravurdaten auf
Relief sind nur in Bereichen mit relativ geringer, gleichmäßiger
Krümmung sinnvoll. Z.B. eine leicht gewölbte Oberfläche.
Auf sehr steilen Oberflächen oder auf Stufen müssen Sie mit
ungenügenden Ergebnissen rechnen.

Zum Abrollen sind 2 Variationen verfügbar.
|Abrollen auf Zeile.
The data can be unwound with any desired angle. If the data are
unwound in two axes then this make take place consecutively. E.g.
first in the X direction (angle = 0ø) and thereafter in the Y
direction (angle = 90ø).

|  Reference point BPx/BPy:
  This start point remains unchanged with unwind.
  Using <M> or <F2> in this input you change into cursor input
  before the reference point.

|  Unwind direction [ø]:
  Direction (axis) along which it is unwound.

|  Unwind resolution [mm]:
  Vectorisation resolution (accuracy) for unwinding.

|Abrollen auf Array.
Dieses Verfahren ist für Oberflächen geeignet, die in mehreren
Richtungen gekrümmt sind. Die Vektorisierungsauflösung ist hier
fest eingestellt. Die Anzahl der Punkte ist jeweils in X- und in
Y-Richtung auf max. 1000 begrenzt.

#8729 Projection         --------------
Project the prepared data on to the current relief.
For 2D graphic data the clearance height and insertion depth of the
layer tool are shown.
The relief projection takes place dependent on the type of projection setting
(relative or absolute).

The projection creates tool paths for a general arrangement in 5 axes
 with the tool attitude vertical to the surface. Axis A is an angle of
rotation which rotates about the linear X axis. Axis B is an axis of
rotation which rotates about the linear Y axis. For the axes of rotation
max. angle settings of +/- 90° are possible. The max. axis settings
can be limited for positive and negative angle settings using
axis A+/A-/B+/B- [°].
For the standing output using 'Export[]' the general axis A is converted
into machine axis B and the general axis B into machine C. If, for
example, the swing of machine axis C is to be prevented this can take
place through the limiting angle of the general axis B.

In order to avoid angular error the paths to be projected should be removed
at least 5 relief points from a sharp edge in the relief.

!Note:
Collision of the axes with the work piece is not monitored by the program!

!Note:
The axes A/B employed here do not always correspond with the axis
arrangement of the machine.

|Limiting angle axis A+/A- [-90°..+90°]:
Max. angle setting for axis A (rotates about X).

|Limiting angle axis B+/B- [-90°..+90°]:
Max. angle setting for axis B (rotates about Y).

|setting angle axis A/B [-90°..+90°]:
Setting of the axis as deviation from vertical.

|Surface safety level [mm]:
All empty movements are carried through at this safety level, i.e. to
approach a processing movement a point on the 'Surface safety level'
vertically above the surface is first  and then from here driven on in the
direction of the surface.

|Insertion process:
For insertion in the material there are two processes selectable:
|Vertical:
  (Standard) The tool mills vertically to the surface into the material.
|Z parallel:
  The tool mills vertically downwards (parallel to the Z axis).

|Projections displacement X/Y: (for uniform radii only!)
If a projection occurs in the steep flanks of a radius (boundary area),
then high tolerances have to be reckoned with. The projection
tolerances can be avoided in that the graphic for projection is
displaced in the flank part of the radius and, following projection
turned back by the appropriate angle. For this one can proceed
as follows:
1) create relief with radius. Ser  crown + centre must lie at the position
   X=0; Y=0; Z=0!
2) Displace the graphic to be projected in CAD into the radius crown
   area  (e.g. -15mm).
   Helpful is the previous input of an aid line, which is to be used later
   for the matching of the projection.
3) Roll up and project the displaced vector. For this  a
   'Projection displacement' is entered in the opposite direction
   (e.g. 15mm).
4) The program opens only with 'Projection displacement' <> 0
   the selection 'Proj. Displacement'.
|   Displace x/y:
   The projection can here be displaced to the desired position (corrected).
|   Take over:
   The projection is taken over in the momentary setting.

|Mittlere Winkelstellung für kleine Konturausdehnungen einstellen:
Durch die Projektion auf Rasterdaten entstehen häufig Pendelbewegungen.
Für kleine Konturen können unnötige Pendelbewegungen vermieden werden
indem die gesamte Kontur mit einer mittleren Winkelstellung gefräst
wird. Die Überwachung erfolgt über 2 Grenzwerteingaben. Die Parameter
sind immer gemeinsam gültig einzugeben.

|  Pendelbegrenz.Max.Ausd.XY  [mm]:
  Max. Ausdehnung der zusammenhängenden Fräslinie für welche ein
  mittlerer Winkelwert erzeugt werden soll. Eine Kontur, die in
  einer Achse (X oder Y) größere Abmessungen hat, bleibt unverändert,
  d.h. mit Winkeländerung innerhalb der Kontur. Für Werte < 0.05mm
  werden in keinem Fall mittlere Winkel berechnet.

|  Pendelbegrenz.Max.Winkeldiff[°]:
  Max. Winkeländerung innerhalb der Kontur/Strecke. Wird der Wert
  der max. Winkeldiff. unterschritten wird für den Fräsweg ein
  konstanter Winkel erzeugt. Für Werte < 0.05° werden in keinem
  Fall mittlere Winkel berechnet.

!Beispiel:
Pendelbegrenz.Max.Ausd.XY  [mm] = 10
Pendelbegrenz.Max.Winkeldiff[°] = 20
Für alle Konturen, deren Ausdehnungen in den Achsen X und Y 10mm
nicht überschreiten und deren Winkelausschläge nicht mehr als
20° betragen, werden mittlere Anstellwinkel erzeugt.

#3115 Laser              --------------
Export für Laser - Flachgravuren.
Vor der ersten Datenausgabe müssen alle Parameter in 'Laser Parameter',
'Laser Schnittstelle' und 'Laser Bearbeitungspos' korrekt eingestellt
werden!

|Trotec Speedy:
  Datenausgabe für Trotec Speedy (Increment = 0,005mm).

|Trotec Professional:
  Datenausgabe für Trotec Professional (Increment = 0,001047mm).

|Laser Parameter:
  Steuerung der Vorschübe und Laser-Lampe gem. Trodat Handbuch.
  Insgesamt können 16 Parametersätze [WSt 1..16] eingestellt werden.
  Die Zuordnung erfolgt gem. den im CAM-Bereich gewählten
  Wechselstations-Nummern (WSt) oder der Layer-Nummer.
  Werden die Laserwege als CAM-Daten mit Werkzeuge exportiert (direct mill),
  dann erfgolgt die Zuordnung entsprechend den verwendeten Wechselstations-
  Nummern (WSt).
  Werden die Laserwege als Grafik-Daten ohne Werkzeuge exportiert (Export
  Grafik), dann erfolgt die Zuordnung entsprechend der Grafik-Layernummer
  (Layer0 = WSt1, Layer1 = WSt2 u.s.w.).

  Grenzwerte:
  Wird WSt < 1 ausgegeben, dann wird WSt auf 1 gesetzt, wird WSt > 16
  ausgegeben, dann wird WSt auf 16 gesetzt und damit die Parameter
  zu WSt 16 exportiert.

|Laser Schnittstelle:
  Einstellung der RS232-Schnittstelle (COM1..4) zum Betrieb der
  Maschine.

|  Export Datei/COM1..4   [J/N]:
    JA: Die Daten werden in eine Datei gespeichert.
    Nein: Die Daten werden über RS232-Schnittstelle an die Maschine
    übertragen.

|  Datei-Erweiterung (Suffix)  :
    Für die Speicherung in eine Datei wird hier die Dateierweiterung
    (z.B.: 'PLT', 'HPG', ...) eingegeben.

|  Port COM1..4          [1..4]:
    Auswahl der seriellen Schnittstelle an welche die
    Maschinensteuerung angeschlossen ist. Die meisten Rechner
    verwenden nur COM1 (= 1) und COM2 (= 2).

|  Baudrate  [1200..9600,38400]:
    Einstellung der Übertragungsgeschwindigkeit.
    Für Trotec = 19200.

|  Parität [N=keine,E=gerade,O]:
    Übertragungsparität, abhängig von der angeschlossenen Maschine.
    Für Trotec = N.

|  Stopbits               [1/2]:
    Trennungsbits zw. den Zeichen.
    Für Trotec = 1.

|  Wortlänge              [7/8]:
    Übertragungswortlänge.
    Für Trotec = 8.

|  Handshake [Hardw./XON(1..3)]:
    Übertragungshandshake, abhängig von der angeschlossenen Maschine.
    Für Trotec = XON/XOFF.

|Laser Bearbeitungspos:
  Ausgabe - Offset in X und Y-Richtung.

#7800 ISO-Filter-Paramet.--------------
|Tool change
M-function  tool change to differentiate between automatic
change and manual change.
M6 = automatic change,
M66 = manual change (hand change),
empty = no M-function for tool change.

|Address round axis
Address of the round axis, which is used in place of the
linear-axis. Select A, B, C (dependent on machine type).

|Round axis for ...:
Address of the linear axis which is replaced by a round
axis.

Spezielle Einstellungen abhängig vom Exportfilter:
|isel-Zwischenformat + isel-Zwi-Spec.COOLANT
  Resolution round axis for 1°: Factor(resolution) for a 1 degree
  rotation. Factor 1000 (resolution 0,001 degree), factor 3600
  (resolution in angel seconds).

| Kuhlmann FDIN . Spindelhochlaufzeit [sec]:
  Programmpause für die Zeit des Spindelanlaufes.

|  Autograv, WinPC-NC / PC-NC . Kreisbogen  [abs/rel]:
  Einstellen der Kreisbogendarstellung absolut/relativ.

|  Eckelmann-NCMind . Programmnummer:
  Angabe einer optionalen Programmnummer, die im Kopf der
  ISO-Datei eingetragen wird.

|  Eckelmann-NCMind . Kühlungsart [M8 / M7]:
  Auswahl verschiedener Kühlschmierarten.

|  Eckelmann-NCMind . Konturen mit RundA.schalt:
  Nur für spezielle 4-Achsen Ausstattung. Bei 'JA' wird die Rundachse
  jeweils zum Zentrum der Kontur geschaltet. Die eigentliche Fräsung
  erfolgt mit X/Y/Z Bewegung.

|MACH 2/3/4 (ME) . Absaugen [J/N]:
  Absaugung ein-/ausschalten.

|MACH 2/3/4 (ME) . Sprühen [J/N]:
  Sprüheinrichtung ein-/ausschalten.

#1765 Hatching           --------------
Converts a gray scale graphic into a hatched picture. A reduced number 
of gray scales are represented with hatched lines and a raster picture 
occurs. For a good contrast rich result, the photo should revised with 
a photo style program. With this disturbing elements should removed and
a strong contrast should be selected.

For hatching a tool with a fine dip radius (FrS 0.05 .. 0.1 mm) is 
needed. The hatching separation is selected automatically using the
tool dip, gray level and the settings (see below).

|Hatching level [1..32]:
The picture is reduced in 1..32 hatching level. Useful are settings
4..16.

|Density [-20..100%]:
Hatching density (line separation). The resolution correspondent with 
the contrast. A value <0 takes place a lessen contrast, a value >0 
becomes a better contrast.

|Brightness [-20..100%]:
Changes the line separation for all hatching levels and changes the
brightness.

|Hatching contour separation [0..100%]:
Determines the safety separation of the milling path in milling 
direction to the contour. With selection 'Combine hatch lines = YES' 
this setting must be >0 (e.g. 20 .. 70%).

|Hatching angle [-2,-1,0..180°]:
-2 = The hatching angle is created automatically with increased value 
  pro level.
-1 = The hatching angle is created automatically with increased value 
  pro level and with an alternating 90° movement .
0..180 = The hatching angle for all levels is the entered value.

|Hatching directions [1..6]:
1 = Hatching lines only in entered direction.
2 = Hatching lines in entered direction + 90° moving.
3 = Hatching lines in entered direction + 60° and 120° moving.
And so on.

|Link hatching lines [Y/N]:
'YES' = The hatching lines are connected.

|Add hatching contours [Y/N]:
'YES' saves the hatching borders to the tool path.

#0071 MillCorr           --- iSIGN/eSIGN ---
The 2D offset is calculated for the marked contours.
The proposed cutter offset is the resultant radius
of the layer tool.

Für die Berechnung werden fehlerfreie, geschlossene Konturen
verlangt. Im Zweifelsfall sollten die Wege vor einer Berechnung
mit 'mark. Schnittpunkte' überprüft werden.

Berechnet wird der Offset immer in positiver Richtung
(rechts von der Kontur). Soll in entgegengesetzter Richtung
berechnet werden, muß der Drehsinn der Kontur(en) vorher mit
'drehe Bahn(en)' invertiert werden.

#6004 eMill2D(SE)        --------------
eMill2D(SE) ist ein Programm zur Berechnung von Fräswegen aus
importierten Daten (z.B. aus CorelDRAW, AutoCAD o.ä). Die Grafik
kann im EPS (Adobe Illustrator)-, HPGL- oder DXF-Format vorliegen.
Aus fehlerfreien Grafiken werden mit wenigen Mausklicks hochwertige
Fräswege für nahezu alle 3- oder 4-achsige Bearbeitungsmaschinen
erzeugt.

Navigator.
Im Navigator sind die wichtigsten Programmfunktionen in der richtigen
Reihenfolge der Bearbeitung gelistet. Der Navigator führt Sie durch
die Bearbeitung. Die Abarbeitung erfolgt von Oben nach Unten. Die
schwarz markierte Funktion können Sie anwählen. Soll eine Funktion
nicht gewählt werden, dann schalten Sie mit 'weiter' zur nächsten
Bedienung. Mit 'zurück' schalten Sie zur vorhergehenden Funktion.

Hilfe zu den Funktionen erhalten Sie bei aktiviertem Navigator mit
<F9>, im Menü auch mit dem Hilfsmittel [?] und anklicken der Funktion.

|Import: *****************************************************************
|  Vektor H2R/LG1/SLD
  Eine Vektordatei (H2R-, LG1-Format) oder eine Schilddatei (SLD-Format)
  importieren.
  Hinweis: SLD-Daten dürfen keine referenzierte Texte enthalten!

|  EPS  *.EPS/AI
  Eine EPS - Datei importieren, die nur Vektordaten und keine
  Rasterbilder enthält. Eingelesen werden Dateien im ADOBE-
  Illustrator-Format ('*.ai'). Die Daten müssen im DTP (z.B.
  CorelDRAW) mit folgenden Einstellungen exportiert werden:
  - Konturen ohne Füllung (auch nicht Weiß),
  - Outline als Haarlinie (dünnste Linie),
  - Texte als Kurven (vektorisiert).
  Daten, die falsch gespeichert wurden, können nicht eingelesen werden
  und der Import wird mit einer Fehlermeldung abgebrochen. In diesem
  Fall exportieren Sie die Daten bitte erneut mit korrekten Einstellungen.

  EPS-Daten mit Füllungen werden zwar importiert, die Konturen sind
  jedoch durch Stege verbunden. Um dies zu vermeiden, müssen die
  Konturen ohne Füllungen exportiert werden!

  EPS-Daten mit Splines werden vektorisiert. Die Vektorisierungsauflösung
  kann mit 'Eingabeparameter . Splineauflösung' eingestellt werden.

|  HP-GL
  HP-GL arbeitet mit einer festen Plotterauflösung. Viele Hersteller
  übertragen vektorisierte HP-GL Daten, d.h. Kreise sind in Polygonzüge
  zerlegt. Darin liegt auch der entscheidende Nachteil: Kurvenzüge sind
  häufig für eine Fräsbearbeitung zu grob vektorisiert. Recht brauchbare
  Ergebnisse werden erreicht, wenn die Daten mit erhöhter Auflösung oder
  mehrfach vergrößert aus dem CAD oder DTP - Programm exportiert werden.

  HPGL-Daten mit Kreisbögen werden vektorisiert. Die Vektorisierungsauf-
  lösung kann mit 'Eingabeparameter . Kreisauflösung' eingestellt werden.

|  DXF  *.DXF
  AutoCAD - DXF-Dateien importieren.
  Hinweis: Die DXF-Dateien dürfen keine referenzierte Texte enthalten!

  Unproblematisch ist der Import von 2D-Daten aus AutoCAD bis Ver.12 -
  andere CAD-Systeme liefern z.T. sehr unvollständige Daten. In der
  Ver.13 ist AutoCAD bestenfalls zu sich selber kompatibel, da dieses
  verschlüsselte Bereichen enthält. Ab der Ver.14 kann AutoCAD auch
  abwärtskompatibel im Format DXF Ver.12 abspeichern.
  Einschränkungen: Polylinien werden mit der Breite 0 ausgewertet.
  3D-DXF ist eine reine Grafik und kann meist für Fräsbearbeitungen
  nicht verwendet werden.

  Empfohlener Datenexport aus AutoCAD:
  - Alle nicht benötigten Layer, wie z.B. Bemaßung löschen und alle
    gesperrte, gefrorene und ausgeschaltete Layer überprüfen und löschen.
  - Datei sichern, wieder einladen und 'bereinigen'. Dies mehrmals
    wiederholen bis keine Prüfmeldungen mehr erfolgen. Siehe hierzu
    auch das AutoCAD - Handbuch.

  Treten beim Import Probleme auf, dann importieren Sie die DXF-Daten
  in AutoCAD, überarbeiten den Inhalt dort wie oben beschrieben und
  exportieren den Datensatz wieder.

  DXF-Daten mit Kreisbögen werden vektorisiert. Die Vektorisierungsauf-
  lösung kann mit 'Eingabeparameter . Kreisauflösung' eingestellt werden.


|Grenzen: ****************************************************************
$0020

|Bahnen verbinden: *******************************************************
$8804

|mark. Schnittpunkte: ****************************************************
$8801

|FrKorr2D: ***************************************************************
$0797

|direct mill: ************************************************************
  Die Grafiken und Wege werden in Werkzeugwege umgewandelt, evtl. mit
  den Layerwerkzeugen verknüpft und in das gewünschte Exportformat
  gespeichert. Exportiert werden alle Layer, die farblich markiert sind
  in aufsteigender Reihenfolge (0..MaxLayer). Layer, die nicht
  exportiert werden sollen sind durch anklicken weiß zu markieren.

  Für jeden Layer mit 2D-Fräsdaten muß ein gültiges Werkzeug eingegeben
  sein (vgl. 'Paramet . Werkzeugeingabe'). Befinden sich Fräsdaten
  (z.B. aus einer Fräserkorrektur) in einem Layer, dann werden die
  im Grafiklayer mitgespeicherten Werkzeugdaten exportiert.

  Exportweg.
  Wählen Sie in der Liste den geeigneten Exportweg (z.B. DIN/ISO, LG1Obj
  u.s.w.). Das Programm listet die letzten 3 benutzten Exportwege. Ist
  der gewünschte Exportweg nicht gelistet, dann wählen Sie 'alle' und
  danach den gewünschten Exportweg in der Gesamtliste.

  Für Hilfen zum Exportweg wählen Sie zuerst den Exportweg und dann <F9>.

----------------------------------------

$7905

#1698 Aid Lines          --------------
Enter, edit, activate etc., aid lines for CAD. The graphic and
text inputs collect aid lines. 'Display' must be switched on
for aid line input.

With 'input parameter . cursor grid > 0', the help line is catched
to the next in the grid founded position.

|New horizontal/vertical:
Enter a new aid line.

|Picture frame:
Create aid line for the working limit (set using 'Layout . Limits').

|Centring cross:
Create aid line for the centring axis (set using 'Layout . Limits').

|Displace:
Displace an existing aid line.
Bei <Entf> wird die aktuelle (schw. markierte) Hilfslinie gelöscht.

|Delete all:
Delete all aid lines.

|Display: on/off:
Display or conceal aid lines.

|Capture on/off:
Position input using the cursor is captured on the next aid line.

With using in CAD (not modules, not text) there are some short 
operations:
- A new help line is created with click onto the ruler.
  A click onto the horizontal ruler creates a horizontal help line.
  A click onto the vertical ruler creates a vertical help line.
- A click (within the catch distance) onto he help line, the help
  line is selected (black) and can be displaced by using the cursor 
  or can be removed by using <Del>. If within the catch distance no 
  help line is found, the help line input is selected.

#0041 Mark               --------------
Mark a path (track or route) in the ActLayer. This function seeks
the nearest neighbouring vector to the cursor. All tracks which lie
completely inside are marked with a frame. With concurrent pressing
of the <Sft> key the previous marking is retained. To remove a
marking a free part of the graphic is clicked on.

With concurrent pressing of the <Ctrl> key a path is sought in all
layers and all text rows. The layer with the nearest path becomes
ActLayer and the path is marked. Subjoining using <Sft> or the
marking in the rectangle is not possible here. If a text row is found,
the program changes to the text edit.

As marked paths are connected to the end of the data after removal
of marking, the data sequence in the ActLayer can be sorted by
repeated clicking on to the paths.

In the text module only text lines are marked (at their reference
point) using this tool.

With clicking on using <M> the selection takes place.

|Demark all
Select / remove all marking.

|Mark all.
Select and mark all paths in the ActLayer.

|Mark track posn.
Mark a track or route in the ActLayer using end point. This function
seeks the nearest position to the cursor. All tracks, which lie
within the rectangle with at least one support point, are marked
using a frame. With concurrent pressing of the <Sft> key the previous
marking is retained.

|Mark in layer
A path (track or route) is sought in all layers. The layer with the
nearest path is switched as ActLayer and the path is marked. The same
effect is produced by search with simultaneously pressed <Ctrl> key.

|Demark:
Again demark a marked path (track or route).

|Paths -info:
Show vector information on the marked paths. For individual paths
the path designation is displayed, for several paths the number of
contours and tracks as well as the number of polygon points, the
elongation and the centre of the data. With 'Path in material' only
the 2D - path is shown also with 3D tracks.

|Cut <Ctrl X>, copy <Ctrl C>, input <Ctrl V>:
Exchange marked path via the (program- intermediate store.

|Grouping / remove grouping
Group paths. Currently grouping is only sensible in combination
with the functions in ReliefVTR.

The marking tool can also be activated in CAD using <M>, <F2>.

#3193 Export Help        --------------
|Tool edit export:
The export data/data of a LG1 file are examined and possible
associated tools listed. The tool data be edited and resaved.

|Speich.Werkzeugliste:
Hilfe zur Erstellung eines Arbeitsblattes.
Speichert die Daten des Exports (Dateinamen, Abmessungen,
Werkzeuge u.s.w.) in eine ASCII - Datei.

|Tool sequence:
Sort the milling order of the tool objects according to various
criteria. The objects are sorted using 'WSt ascending'/'WSt
descending'/'Tool names'/'Cutting radius'/'Tip radius'/'Spherical
radius'/'Angle'/'Clearance height'/'Insertion depth'/'Working feed XY'
/'Insertion feed Z'/'Spindle revolutions'/'Tool life travel' the
objects are sorted according to these criteria. The sequence can be
inverted using 'Reverse sequence'.

|Output from mark:
Input of a start point for the processing.

|  From cursor contour/position:
  Select a start contour or start position using the cursor.

|  +/- Tool object/contour/position/milling path:
  Displace the start position forwards /backwards.

|Tool object:
  Select and export only an individual tool data set.

|Vektorfilter:
  Entfernen von Stützpunkten im Bereich 0.001 .. 10mm. Dabei wird
  der Fräsweg soweit wie möglich nicht verändert.
  Einige Maschine reagieren ungünstig auf hoch aufgelöste Fräsdaten
  (Stützunkte liegen so dicht, daß die Übertragungs- oder
  Vorberechnungszeit die Abarbeitungs-(Fräs-)zeit überschreitet).
  Für diese Maschinen kann nach einem einstellbaren Grenzwert die
  Stützpunktdichte reduziert werden. Bitte beachten Sie, daß dabei
  die Genauigkeit der Fräsdaten verändert wird.

|Smooth milling paths:
Approximate (smooth) the milling data in the range 0.001 .. 10mm.
The repeated smoothing of the milling data produces no advantages.

|Print graphic:
The current drawing is output on the standard printer.
- Align page: The graphic is matched to the sheet dimensions.
  NO = the graphic is printed in real dimensions.
- Fill in contours: all closed contours are filled.
- Paper border offset: additional border around the graphic.
- With frame: print with graphic frame.
- With dimensioning: dimensioning of graphic frame print a.r.
- High format: select high/transverse format.
If the printer and the hardware security system are on the same
interface, then the program can be processed only after
completion of the printing process.

|TestTrackIndicator:
Indicator for checking the vector and tool data. The
indication can be switched forward in steps using <Space> and
by page using <S>.

|Norm/Zoom Projection:
The (3D-) data are shown in perspective. By setting in horizontal
projection (all angles = 0) the 3D tracks are shown in grey tone
(coloured).
PosA: colour setting for withdrawal movements. With input without
colour the perspective indication takes place with height level
marking.

|Volume aspect:
The milling paths are shown as volume aspect of the worked work
piece. In addition a quader is so worked, as if it were milled.
For this indication valid tools are required in the data set.

|Prepared inputs:
|  limits:
  work piece: the working limits are the picture frame and the
    milling paths.
  milling path: the indicator limits are determined by the
    milling paths.

|  Resolution:
  Setting very fine to very coarse. The setting 'very fine' requires
  long calculation times, 'very coarse' creates a coarsely gridded
  view.

|  Create:
  The view is calculated.

|Setting of the volume aspect:
|  Palette selection:
  Selection of the grey tones/colour palette.

|  Graphic:
  Graphic setting for the grey tones/colour setting.

|  Posn. height:
  Shows the 3D relief position and incline angle on the
  cursor position.
  RX, RY, RZ: relief position in mm.
  WiZX, WiZY: incline in degrees on the relief position for the
    directions Z-X (horizontal) and Z-Y (vertical).

|  Height line:
  The height line is shown from a horizontal section through the
  relief. The cut line is positioned in the Y-direction using the
  cursor.

|  Norm/Zoom Projection:
  3D-indicator above grids, vectors, points or surfaces. The aspect
  direction can be set in 10° steps. The line representation
  colour is set using PosA. With the input PosA without colour the
  perspective indicator with adjustable height level marking appears.

|  Save relief:
  Save volume aspect as relief.

|  Render:
  The picture of the graphic in the aspect angle and with defined
  lighting source is calculated (rendered).
    Aspect angle: adjust aspect angle.
    Light angle: angle and separation of the lighting source.
    Resolution: picture resolution 'slight'..'high'.
    Drawing: setting soft/hard.
    Contrast: grey toning 'slight'..'very high'.
    Graphic: view calculated picture.
    Save relief: save the picture as relief.
    BMP picture: the picture is saved in a BMP file.

|Grafik speichern:
Hilfe zur Erstellung eines Arbeitsblattes.
Die augenblickliche Grafik wird in eine BMP - Datei gespeichert.
|  Einstellung Arbeitsbereich/Grafikbereich:
  Grenzen des Grafikausschnittes. Bei Einstellung Arbeitsbereich
  wird nur das Werkstück innerhalb der Arbeitsgrenzen gespeichert.
  Hinweis: Bei Zoom kann nur der sichtbare Bereich gespeichert
  werden. Bei Einstellung Grafikbereich wird der komplette für
  die Grafik vorgesehene Breich gespeichert.

#3232 Print Graphic      --------------
Graphics and texts are printed out on the standard printer.
All layers, which are marked in colour, are exported in
ascending order (0..MaxLayer). Layers, which are not to be
printed are to be marked in white by clicking on.

|Adjust side [Y/N]:
YES: the graphic is adjusted to the size of the sheet.

|Fill contours [Y/N]:
YES: all closed contours are filled.

|Paper edge offset [mm]:
Additional edge around the graphic.

|With frame [Y/N]:
YES: print with graphic frame.

|With dimensions [Y/N]:
YES: print dimensions of graphic frame above right.

|Portrait [Y/N]:
Select portrait/landscape format.

|Line thickness  (1..100)Pix.:
Setting for the line thickness for printing the cutter middle line
(Fill contours = NO).

Note:
If the printer and hardware security operate at the same
interface, then the program can be further operated following
ending of the print process.

#1003 Tool simulation   ---------------
Show the tool path in the graphic with the programmed feed and 
tool data.

|Middle line/Wide tool path:
Select the tool path representation in the graphic.

|Show/Don't show raised movements:
Tool simulation with or without raised tool movements.

|Feed factor [0.1..10]:
With setting 1 the graphic is created with the original tool feed. 
The feed factor reduces or increases the tool feed. The feed factor 
<1 reduces the tool feed a factor >1 increases the tool feed.

|Relief:
|  Onto relief:
  The tool simulation takes place onto a pre calculated relief
  picture.
|  Relief quality:
  Quality setting for the background relief 'very fine' .. 'very 
  rough'. The setting 'very fine' needs more calculation time.
|  Render:
  YES: The background relief is shown as a rendered picture.
|  Color:
  Select the color table for the background relief or the rendered 
  picture.


#1002 Save graphic       --------------
Save the picture in the graphic area to a file.

|Work area/graphic area:
|  Work area:
  The graphic inside the work area ('Layout . Border') is saved.
  If graphic zoom is used, only the visible area will be saved.
|  Graphic area:
  The whole visible program graphic area will be saved.


#1301 Adjustment         --------------
Automatically adjust simple labels with straight text lines.
Rotated texts or texts with circular lettering cannot be adjusted.

!Respect:
If this function is used with plate matrix data, all 
text rows will be arranged new. This arrangement can 
be cancelled with 'CAD . Undo'.

|All switches OFF (Harmonisation):
Text lines are placed in the middle of the label.
Note: this setting again combines all text lines into a block.

|Adjustment height (Indicate height or width):
The text lines are so enlarged that the apex limits are touched in one axis.
The relative height ratio of the text lines is retained. Adjustment of
height cannot be combined with other adjustment.

|Adjustment height (Indicate height + width):
The text lines are so enlarged that these touch the label borders.
The text lines are all set to the same versal height.
Adjustment of height cannot be combined with other adjustment.

|Adjustment of line separation:
The line separation is so enlarged that the label height is achieved.
Adjustment assumes the same versal height.
This input can be combined with 'Adjustment distortion'.

|Adjustment distortion:
The distortion is so enlarged that the label width is achieved.
This input can be combined with 'Adjustment line separation'.

#1302 Text on Cutout     --------------
Using this function a straight text line can be arranged in a graphic
object (in the ActLayer or in all layers).

Order of operation:
1 Enter or mark a text row.
2 Select 'Text to cutaway' and enter the separation.
3 Click to the graphic object.
4 Displace the text row point to the help line.

|Separation:
Define edge separation to the graphic object.
Following input of the desired edge separation and the selection of
a graphic object 6 aid lines are drawn around the object. The text can
then be displaced to these aid lines.

|Select graphic object:
An object in the ActLayer can be selected
directly using the cursor. An object in other layers, with simultaneous
pressing of the <Ctrl> key, can be selected using the cursor.

#7912 Tastatur Kommandos --------------
Für einige Bedienungen stehen im CAD Tastatur - Kommandos zur Verfügung.

|<F1>
Funktion aktivieren (Start).

|<F2>
Eingabehilfen oder alternative Funktion. Gleiche Funktion hat auch die
rechte Maustatste. Eingabehilfen sind:
- In der Grafik die häufig benötigten Zeichen- und Editierfunktionen,
- nach der Auswahl einer Funktion in zeichnen die Konstruktionshilfe,
- Hilfsmittel mit Doppelbelegung,
- im Menü die Menüauswahl. u.s.w.

|<+>, <F7>
Zoom (+) an der Stelle des Grafikcursors (Bildmitte). Dieser Zoom wirkt
nicht im Font Editor, in den Projektionen und im Scannerprogramm.

|<->, <F8>
Zoom (-) an der Stelle des Grafikcursors (Bildmitte). Dieser Zoom wirkt
nicht im Font Editor, in den Projektionen und im Scannerprogramm.

|<F9>
Hilfe zu den Funktionen (vgl. Hilfe und ? Hilfe).

|< >,<Tab>
Markierte Wege editieren (vgl. 'operat . Umformen').

|<Strg S>
CAD-Daten sichern (in Datei *.SLD). Ist bereits ein Dateinamen bekannt
(wird in der Fensterleiste oben angezeigt), dann werden die Daten
unmittelbar in diese Datei gesichert. Andernfalls wird der Dateidialog
zum Auswahl eines Dateinamens geöffnet.

|<Strg X>
Ausschneiden in Zwischenablage.
(Nur im CAD, vgl. Markierungshilfsmittel).

|<Strg C>
Kopieren in Zwischenablage.
(Nur im CAD, vgl. Markierungshilfsmittel).

|<Strg V>
Einfügen aus Zwischenablage.
(Nur im CAD, vgl. Markierungshilfsmittel).

|<DEL>,<Entf>
Die markierten Wege löschen.

|<Shift> + markieren
Beim Markieren im CAD werden bei gleichzeitigem Drücken der Taste <Shift>
die Wege hinzumarkiert.
- <Shift> und markieren: Hinzumarkieren oder bei bereits markierten
  Wegen entmarkieren.
- <Shift> und Cursorbewegung am Grafikrand: Zoom - Verschiebung
  (Displaylist).

|<Esc>
Die Bedienung von <Esc> in einer Funktion breicht deren Bedienung ab.
Gleiche Funktion hat auch die rechte Maustatste.

#0799 Import Macro       --------------
Import vector data (LG1, H2R) as macro.
After import, macros are marked and can be placed
immediately or aligned with functions in operate.
With imported macros the reference point in the
functions 'duplicate' and 'displace' are already
known and need not be explicitly entered.

If, for the confirmation of the positioning of the target
(<L>), the <Ctrl> key is pressed, then the paths can be
duplicated several times while retaining the basis point.

#1810 Knurl              --------------
Cord (knurl) creation along a route. The route may have no bends or
tight curves! Double lines produce relief errors and should be avoided.
|  Progression:
  Basic form of the knurl. If a flat structure is to be created a
  very flat progression has to be entered here.
  (e.g. 0.01mm). This basic form determines the width of the knurl.
|  Transverse progression [%]:
  Width of the individual string in % of the width of the
  progression (see above).
|  Transverse separation [%]:
  Separation of the individual strings in % of the width of the
  progression (see above).
|  Transverse angle [°]:
  Rotation of the individual string to the basic route in degrees.
|  Base height:
  Offset in Z-direction for increasing or decreasing height. The base
  height can be entered manually or selected in relief following <M>, <F2>.

#1736 Pattern            --------------
Create relief pattern with grid, wall, sand ...

|Grid (creation of a grid pattern within (a) contour(s):
Grid data: For most applications the proposed settings are recommended for
the creation of relief: ends = not rounded off, base height = thickness.
|  Separation:
  Grid mesh separation.
|  Angle of rotation:
  Grid rotation 0ø gives horizont./vert. grid lines.
|  Thickness (grid thickness):
  Is dependent on progression and should be set at  ca. 2 * wire gauge.
  If, for example, a radius of 1 mm is selected, then the thickness
  should be set to ca. 2mm.
|  Flat (0..separation):
  Determines the  flattening in the area of crossing points:
|  Round off:
  With the setting 'YES' the flattenings are rounded off.
|  Progression:
  Form of the border or the line.
|  Ends:
  Open routes can end straight or rounded off.
|  Base height:
  Offset in Z direction for raising or lowering. The base height can be
  entered directly manually or selected in relief following <M>, <F2>.


|Wall:
Creation of a brickwall pattern within (a) contour(s).
|  Separation X/Y:
  Pattern size.
|  Angle of rotation:
  Rotation of pattern. 0° produces horizontal brickwall.
|  Progression:
  Form of the border or the line.
|  Ends:
  Open routes can end straight or rounded off.
|  Base height:
  Offset in Z direction for raising or lowering. The base height can be
  entered directly manually or selected in relief following <M>, <F2>.


|Pattern in contour:
Arrange relief pattern within contours.
|  Method
  Relief: Select a relief that will be multiple arranged.
  Ornament: Select a ornament point for multiple arrangement.
    For this a relief surface course is necessary.
|  Course: 
  Relief surface course for an ornament point.
|  Form separation x, y: 
  Separation for the pattern points.
|  Alternation:
  Setting for point variation.
    Pattern offset: Displacement for the point grid to he contour.
      Within the contours the grid will be created with the settings
      (Separ.X/Y, FabX/Y, Angle ...). This grid can displaced in X/Y 
      direction.
    Distance factor X,Y: Factor for distance increase (distance variation).
      Starting with the first pattern point (left, above) the following
      distance is multiplied with FabX/Y. 
      Amounts for FabX/Y:
        >0..<1 = The following distances were reduced.
        1      = The distances were not changed.
        >1     = The following distances are continuos increased. 
    Random start: Creation of random distances.
        0      = The random creation is turned off.
        1..100 = Random distances with the definite start.
    Pattern scaling X, Y, Z: The ornament point is scaled with the 
                 determined factors. Scal X/Y/Z = 1 let the point 
                 unchanged. ScalZ is used only with relief points.
|  Rotation angle:
  Rotation of the pattern grid within the contour.
|  Ground height: 
  Offset in z direction for an increasing or a decreasing. 


|Hammer effect:
Surface creation with a hammered effect. The hammer punch is created
with ellipse form which random vary.
|  Basic radius x/y:
  Basic expansion of the ellipse in x-/y direction
|Variation x/y:
  Max. ellipse deviation (location, width(x), height).
|  Random start [0..100]:
  0 : Random start with random. With each calculation a new arrangement 
      is calculated. 
  1..100 : Random with start. With each calculation the same arrangement 
      for this random start is calculated.
|  Course [radius, parabolic, cubic]:
  Course or the ellipse Z - course (surface).
|  Form separation x/y:
  Basic separation for the ellipse. This separation should selected 
  smaller than the basic radius so that the ellipse overlap something.
|  Form depth z:
  Ellipse surface depth in mm.
|  Ground height: 
  Offset in z direction for an increasing or a decreasing.

  
|Sand:
Creation of a random surface with none or more contours.
|  Height:
  Max. height of random points.
|  Density:
  Density (separation) of random points.
|  Base height:
  Offset in Z direction for raising or lowering. The base height can be
  entered directly manually or selected in relief following <M>, <F2>.


|Pattern on a line.
Create pattern on a line.
|  Method
  Relief: Select a relief that should be multiple arranged.
  Ornament: Select a ornament point for multiple arrangement.
    For ornament a relief surface course is necessary.
|  Course:
  Relief surface course for an ornament point.
|  Pattern separation:
  Standard point separation on the line. The used separation can 
  differ according to the compensation settings.
|  Length compensation:
  no : The given separation is used.
  next : The separation is enlarged or reduced for a complete share out.
  enlarge : The separation is enlarged for a complete share out.
  reduce : The separation is reduced for a complete share out.
|  Rotate:
  The pattern points were rotated according to the line course.
|  Scale:
  The pattern points are scaled with the used scaling factor. 
  A scaling factor X/Y/Z = 1 don't change the point size.
|  Scaling order:
  1 - 1 - 1 : The separation is constant. Each point is scaled with
    the scaling factor.
  1 < 2 < 3 : The point size is changed linear from line start to 
    line end.
  1 < 2 > 3 : The point size is changed linear from line start to the
    middle and is scaled back from the middle to the line end.
|  Distance factor: 
  A distance factor 1 don't change the point separation. A distance
  factor > 1 enlarges the distance with each point.
|  Ground height: 
  Offset in z direction for an increasing or a decreasing. 


|Kordel:
$1810 Kordel


|Chain:
Chain creation on lines and contours. The chain is created alternately
with a lying  and a standing chain segment. A middle connection in
the chain segments is optional possible.
|  Radius:
  Chain segment radius.
|  Stretch:
  Stretching (extend) the chain segment. 
|  Strength:
  Chain segment strength (wire diameter).
|  Middle connection:
  Optional middle connection for a 'strong' chain.
|  Connection segment:
  Instruction for creation of the standing chain segments. 
    Straight  : The segments ends straight.
    End slope : The segments ends with slope.
    End round : The segments ends with radius.
|  Line type:
  Relief surface course for the chain segments.
    Jump   : Becomes a rectangular (flat) course.
    Radius : Becomes a rounded course (standard).
    Linear : Becomes a sharp shape.
|  Length compensation:
  Changes the length of the chain segments for an exact line/contour end.
  no      : No compensation.
  next    : Enlarges or reduces the chain segments for the next exact end.
  enlarge : Enlarges the chain segments for the next exact end.
  reduce  : Reduces the chain segments for the next exact end.
|  Ground height: 
  Offset in z direction for an increasing or a decreasing. 


|Point:
Creation of individual ornament points.


|Snail:
|  Course: 
  Relief surface course for the spiral.
|  Mid point:
  Center of the snail (spiral).
|  Spiral:
  Start radius: Spiral start radius.
  End radius  : Spiral end radius.
  Track separation: Horizontal spiral separation per revolution.
  Start angle : Spiral start angle in °.
  Resolution  : Spiral vector resolution in °.
  Start height: Spiral start height (z).
  End height  : Spiral end height (z).
|  Round off:
  No : No round off.
  YES end   : Spiral end round off.
  YES start : Spiral start round off.
  YES both  : Spiral start and end round off.
|  Ground height: 
  Offset in z direction for an increasing or a decreasing. 

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#6002 Arbeitshilfe       --------------
eMillRelief ist eine komfortable Lösung für die Photogravur,
STL - Formenbearbeitung, Relieffräsung. Graustufenbilder und STL-
Formdaten werden vom Programm in Reliefdaten umgesetzt und daraus
mit wenigen Mausklicks hochwertige Fräsdaten für nahezu alle 3-
oder 4-achsige Bearbeitungsmaschinen erzeugt.

|Navigator
Im Navigator sind die wichtigsten Programmfunktionen in der richtigen
Bearbeitungs-Reihenfolge. Der Navigator führt Sie durch die Bearbeitung.
Die Abarbeitung erfolgt von Oben nach Unten. Die schwarz markierte
Funktion können Sie anwählen. Soll eine Funktion nicht gewählt werden,
dann schalten Sie mit 'weiter' zur nächsten Bedienung. Mit 'zurück'
schalten Sie zur vorhergehenden Funktion.

Hilfe zu den Funktionen erhalten Sie bei aktiviertem Navigator
mit <F9>, im Menü auch mit [?] und anklicken der Funktion.

|öffnen:
$3306 Import Photo

  - STL - Stereolithographie
    STL ist ein Stereo Lithographie - Format der Firma 3D-Systems.
    Zum Import werden ASCII- und Binär-Dateien akzeptiert. Die
    Maßeinheit wird immer in mm angenommen. Vor der Relieferzeugung
    können Sie die STL-Flächen drehen.
    Eingaben:
      WiXY: Drehen um Z (-90°..+90°)
      WiYZ: Drehen um X (0°..180°).
    Die STL-Daten sollten möglichst in Bearbeitungslage vorliegen.
 
  - DXF-3DFace:
    Einlesen von DXF-Dateien mit 3DFACE - Flächen. Diese Daten
    werden z.B. mit der Roland Picza Digitalisiermaschine erzeugt.
    Hier können nur Dateien mit 3DFACE - Flächen korrekt eingelesen
    werden. Standard 2D - DXF - Daten sind für diesen Import ungeeignet!
    Im Zweifelsfall kontrollieren Sie bitte Ihre Daten mit einem
    geeigneten Editor oder CAD.

|filtern:
  Das Photo überarbeiten/glätten. Geeignete Filter sind z.B.
  approximieren (stark).

|spiegeln+drehen:
  Falls noch nicht erfolgt, kann das Bild gedreht oder in allen
  Achsen gespiegelt werden.

|Relief AutoKorr:
  Aus dem Bild werden Fräsdaten für bis zu 3 Werkzeuge gleichzeitig
  berechnet. Zur Bedienung beachten Sie bitte die Hilfe <F9> bei
  aktivierter Funktion.
  Die Relief-Z-Position wird so gelegt, daß der höchste Reliefpunkt
  auf Z=0 liegt. Die Frästiefe ist abhängig von der Form oder dem
  Bild. Der Nullpunkt in X/Y liegt links unten. Die Fräsabmessungen
  werden beim 'Import' oder mit 'skalieren' bestimmt.

|Fräsdaten Export:
  Nach der Berechnung können Sie die Fräswege in verschiedenen
  Fomaten exportieren.
  
|Ende Navigator:
  Programmbedienung ohne Navigator. Jetzt stehen alle Menüfunktionen
  zur Verfügung. Zur Bedienung beachten Sie bitte die Programmhilfe
  [?] oder <F9> und anklicken der Funktion.

----------------------------------------

$7905

#0853 Approach Movement  --------------
With the approach movement the processing tool, dependent on the
process, drives tangentially, diagonally or in 3D to the (selected)
start point of the 2D-contour. Only one approach movement can be
elected per contour.
Approach movements are selectable for closed 2D-contours only.
They are not suitable for paths with characteristics and not for
paths with 3D-movements! Für Layer mit 3D-Bewegungen kann die
Funktion 'WBahn . Spantiefenzustell.' angewendet werden.

There are two input variants available for approach movements:
!2D-graphic data + layer tool (tool library).
!2D-milling data + tool in the layer.

|Tangential ON, tangential ON/OFF:
The tool drives in a quadrant from the right or from the left
 ('Direction from right/left') in the direction of progression to the
position on the contour clicked on to. For position input a square
with the extension of the approach movement is drawn using the
cursor (only possible with inputs 2D-graphic data + layer tool).
With the input attention must be paid that the approach movement
crosses no path. By setting 'tangential ON/OFF' the tool drives
additionally still tangential out of the contour.
Die Ausdehnung der Ein-/Ausfahrbewegung hängt vom Werkzeugradius ab
und kann mit 'Anfahrlänge' und 'Radius Faktor' eingestellt werden.

|3D on contour:
The tool drives diagonally to the start point of the contour
using 'Incision angle' (5..85°).

|3D tangential:
The tool drives diagonally with the 'Incision angle' (5°..85°) and
tangential with the 'Tangential angle (1°..10°) from the right or
from the left ('Direction from right/left') in the direction of
progression to the start point of the contour.

|Anfahrlänge:
Einstellung für 'tangential ein' und 'tangential ein/aus'.
Mit Anfahrlänge kann die Länge des tangentialen Kreisbogens im
Bereich 10° .. 90° eingestellt werden. Mit 10° wird eine kurze
Anfahrbewegung und mit 90° ein viertel Kreis gefahren.

|Radius Faktor:
Einstellung für 'tangential ein' und 'tangential ein/aus'.
Die Ausdehnung der tangentialen Anfahrbewegung richtet sich nach
dem verwendeten Werkzeug. Der tatsächlich gefahrene Radius ergibt
sich aus: Einfahrradius = Radius Faktor x Werkzeugradius [FrS].

|Direction from right/left:
Direction for the approach movement 'tangential ON',
'tangential ON/OFF' and '3D tangential'.

|Incision angle =
Angle of the incision movement (5°..85°) for the approach
movements '3D to contour' and '3D tangential'.

|Tangential angle =
Angle of the tangential approach movement '3D tangential'.

!Reduction of feed + withdrawal route (from Ver. 6.x):
Milling feed reduction, e.g. for spots, outside milling etc.
Here the feed can be reduced so that freed parts can be
better maintained. With feed reduction = 100% or
withdrawal route < 0.01mm no feed reduction is produced.
Feed reduction can be exported using data formats only,
which support a feed control (e.g. not LG1Obj.).

|Feed reduction =
Reduction of the milling feed in the range 1..100%.

|Withdrawal route =
Route for which the feed is to be decreased

|Start:
Start of the contour selection for the approach movements.

#1763 Grid               --------------
Grid create dots with different diameters and constant distance (for 
3D machines). The variable point diameters are created with a conic tool 
that dips in the material in accordance. Small point diameter use a less
depth, big point diameter use a greater depth (3D milling). The grid
procedure needs conic tool and a 3D milling machine.

-------------------------------------------------------------------
Display in the window above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
|Dimension X*Y [mm]:
  Dimension of the picture and the engraved work piece.

|Max. milling depth Z [mm]:
  Shows the biggest milling depth (black point) in the material. The
  max. milling depth results from the point separation and the tool
  angle.

|Point number X/Y / Total point number:
  Point number, if all of the possible points where milled. On white 
  places no points are created. Please comply the point number while
  You enter the parameters. With the number of points, You can estimate
  the whole milling time (approx. 1..4 points/sec.).

-------------------------------------------------------------------
Inputs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
|Tool tip radius [mm]:
  With smaller tip radius smaller dot separation and a larger
  total dot count is achieved. For a fine grid point the tool dip 
  should selected as small as possible.

|Tool angle [°]:
  You need a conic tool for the grid procedure. Reasonable tool angle 
  lies between 40° and 49°. A smaller tool angle enlarged the milling
  depth. 

|Safety height:
  Safety separation for the tool dip to the material surface for raised
  movements. For smaller safety height the overall cut movement in Z is
  shorter and more points are milled in the same time.

|Processing method:
  Milling procedure for grid.
  Vertical: 
    Each point is milled in material from the safety height (long
    movements).
  Diagonal fr. mat:
    Each point is milled in the material with a sloping movement following
    the tool arc. To the next point a sloping movement to the material
    surface is used (short 3D movements).
  Rows: 
    Each point is connected with a line to the next point, so hat results 
    milling lines with changing depths and changing line width (short 
    3D movements).
  Diagonal fr. SH:
    Each point is milled in the material with a sloping movement following
    the tool arc. For the next point a sloping movement to the safety 
    height is used (long 3D movements).

|Point separation [mm]:
  Grid point separation. The separation must be selected greater than 
  4 x tool dip diameter. With smaller separation no contrast is possible.
  With greater point separation a better contrast is possible but it 
  produces a smaller picture resolution in result.

|Black value:
  A black value <0 gives a lighter picture following engraving.

#9923 Grid photo        ---------------
Grid photo is a comfortable solution for 2D photo engraving. Gray
scale pictures are converted in relief and with a few mouse clicks.
The program creates high-quality milling data for almost all milling
machines. Grid photo convert gray scale pictures in point- or line
formed milling data. The photos should be available as pictures with
256 gray levels (exception jpg).

With the milling there result a rastered picture that correspondent
with photos in a daily newspaper. The bright - dark different in the
picture is created with points or lines with corresponding width or
density.  The imported photos can be edited (scale, filter, mirror,
...) and convert in milling data very fast. You can control the 
created milling data with 'Mill graphic' and repeat the milling data 
calculation as often as whatever.

Grid photo uses different raster, dither and hatching procedures for 
the calculation of optimized milling data. With the raster procedure 
gray scale points are created using milling points in different 
diameters (3D - milling data). With the dither procedure gray scale 
points are created through milling points with constant diameter and 
variable spacing. The hatching procedure creates 2D - hatching lines 
in several directions and density.

#1753 Raster Photo       --------------
$9923 Raster Photo:


|Navigator
The navigator combines the most important program functions in the right
operation order. The operation order follows in the navigator from above 
to below. You can select the black shown function. If You don't want 
select a function, then switch to the next function with 'continue'. 
With 'back' You can switch back to the previous function.

A function help You receive with activated navigator using <F9>, in the 
menu by using the aid [?] and click onto the function.


|open:
$1755 Import Photo


|filter:
Correct or smooth the photo. Useful filters are e.g. approximate (strong).


|mirror+rotate:
You can rotate or mirror the picture.

$1738 spiegeln+drehen


|Raster photo:
Milling data for 1 tool are calculated from the present picture.


|Milling data export:
You can export the calculated milling data in various formats.


|End navigator:
Ends the navigator. For program operation now You can use all of the 
menu functions. For help please use the aid [?] an click onto the 
function.

----------------------------------------

$7905

#3123 Milldata > Layer   --------------
Take over the milling data into a graphic layer from the
TLayers (following a milling path calculation) or from
the PLayers (following a milling path projection).

With the aid of this function 2D and 3D milling data can
be combined in the graphic layers and output into a project
using 'File . direct Mill'.

If the graphic layer is empty before data takeover, then the
milling paths are copied without further direction. If there
is already data in the graphic layer, then there is a query
as to further procedure.

Selection:
|Load in:
  The milling data are loaded in to the data present in the
  graphic layer (link behind). In order that a later export
  of milling data can take pace without problem, it is to be
  ensured by the user, that only milling data with tool(s)
  are in this layer.

|Overwrite:
  The data in the graphic layer are replaced by milling data.

|Abort:
  Operation is ended without further action.

!Note:
With the acceptance of milling data into a graphic layer, in
addition to the milling paths also the tools used are stored,
so that these data, at a later date exported using 'Direct Mill',
are always with the correct tools.

Tool input.
The tools in the graphic layer can also, at a later date be
still edited, in that you activate the appropriate layer and,
with the aid of '2D/3D', activate the tool input.
If there are milling data with tool information in the layer,
then the tool input is opened using the indicator 'Tool(s) in
Data Set..'. The tool library remains unchanged.

Data processing.
Milling data should not be edited further as, with this, the
data sequence and the tool allocation will be changed.
With call-up of editing there is therefore a warning.

Milling data in a graphic layer may no longer be edited,
otherwise there is a danger that the tool allocation is lost.

#1093 Input Parameter    --------------
Program settings.

|Graphic with ruler:
  YES: indicate a ruler at the lefthand and upper graphic edge.

|Hilfe Verzög.   [0..100*0,1s]:
  Einstellung für die automatische Kurzhilfe für Menü - Funktionen.
  0: Es wird keine Hilfe angezeigt.
  1..100: Zeitverzögerung in 0,1sec. Befindet sich der Cursor länger
    als die angegebene Zeit auf einer Menüfunktion, dann wir
    eine kurze Beschreibung (Hilfe) der Funktion angezeigt.

|Arc tolerance:
  Automatic arc creation with export of 2D data. Arcs are created
  from the vector data which deviate the max. amount from the polyline
  with the set tolerance. With input Arc Tolerance = 0 there is no
  arc creation. Typical settings are 0.01..0.05mm.

|Save data for later session:
  YES: the work remains for the next session after end of the
    program (standard).
  NO: the work is saved in a file at the end of the program.

|Rechnerleistung hoch [J/N]:
  JA: Das Programm benötigt auch im Leerlauf hohe Rechenleistung.
  Nein: Die Rechenleistung wird im Leerlauf (Aktionsanzeige = grün)
    begrenzt. Diese Einstellung ist günstiger für Notebooks. Viele
    Prozessoren benötigen dann weniger Batterieleistung.

#1750 Status             --------------
Display characteristic data and dimensions of the
relief file. The Z coordinates run positively
upwards (against direction LG1 - Format).

File size [kB]:
size of the picture file.

Size X*Y*Z [pix]:
  Relief extension in dots.

Extension outside [mm]:
  Relief border extension (border of the relief pt.) in mm.

Left below X*Y*Z [mm]:
  Relief extreme point left - below.

Right above X*Y*Z [mm]:
  Relief extreme point right - above.

Scaling [mm]:
  Relief dot resolution in x, y and z.

#3109 HP-GL 2D/3D        --------------
Export of 2D and, through special 3D commands, extended HP-GL data.

|HP-GL (2D):
Standard HPGL output. Usable only with 2D data.

|PERITEC (2.5D)/3D:
2.5D: Format to control PERIGRAF machines in 2D. The output
  is possible with changing (tool) deep cut (inset) depths.
3D: Format to control PERIGRAF machines in 3D.

|SEI-PLT man./aut. change:
Extended format for control of the SEI - milling plotter with manual
(man.) or automatic (aut.) tool exchange. With this machine no free
drive position can be approached.

|PORTATEC:
Format for machines of the firm PORTATEC, Schmorkau with self-control.

|vhf CNC 950
Datenexport für vhf-Steuerungen 450/950.

|TEETZ Mimaki/3D:
Output on 'Mimaki'. 'Teetz 3D' is dependent of control status.

|Zünd 2D;
2D Format für Zünd-Plotter.
|  Vakuum ein [J/N]:
  JA = Vakuumpumpe ein, Nein = Vakuumpumpe aus.
|  Absaugen [J/N]:
  JA = Absaugung ein, Nein = Absaugung aus.
|  Wartezeit vor Start  [0,01s]:
  Verzögerung vor Start der Bearbeitung in 0,01sec.
  Einstellubereic 0..1000 (=0..10sec).
|  Beschleunigung EA  1..4/1..4:
  Einstellung der Beschleunigung für eingetauchte 'E' und
  ausgetauchte 'A' Bewegungen. Die Einstellung erfolgt jeweils
  in Stufen 1..4. Die Werte werden aneinandergeschrieben.
  Z.B.: 13 = Beschleunigung 'E' = 1, 'A' = 3.

|Zünd M-Line 3D;
Format for Zünd plotter.

|Mimaki 3D
Simplified output to Mimaki engraving plotter. A comfortable
output is possible in Direct Mill.

|Roland 2D/3D;
Format for Roland machines, dependent on control status.

|MultiCam;
Simplified output to MultiCam milling machines. A more comfortable
is possible using 'DIN/ISO'.

|Gravograph 2D/3D;
Format for 2D/3D-data output to Gravograph machines with serial
interface.

|VISION HPGL
Datenausgabe für VISION Graviermaschinen (Vertrieb
Fa.Scritec oHG, Kerken).


|HP-GL Parameters:
Special settings for output.

|  Export File/COM1..4 [Y/N]:
  YES: The milling data are copied into a file.
  NO: The milling data is transferred to the machine, via a
    serial interface.

|  Expand file (Suffix):
  Here the data expansion (e.g.: 'PLT', 'HPG', ...)  can be
  entered for saving in a file.

|  Figure separation (","/" "/..):
  Separator between the figures of coordinates. Dependent on the
  machine, the figure separation is to be set to match (e.g.:
  Roland, Teetz Mimaki = ','(comma); Gravograph = ' '(Space)).

|  Free drive position X/Y/Z [mm]:
  Position to which, after processing, the machine is to be moved.
  Individual machines (e.g.: SEI) do not support this possibility.

|  Increment resolution:
  Matching of the increment resolution to the resolution of the machine.
  Normal settings are, for example, 0.025 or Teetz Mimaki = 0.0254;
  Roland, Mimaki = 0.01.


|HP-GL interface:
The interface settings are used only with the setting 
'HP-GL-3D-Parameter . Export File/COM1..4 [Y/N]' = No.
%Typical settings (from top down).
%- Mimaki:       1; 9600; N; 2;    8; DTR/DSR; 0
%- Teetz Mimaki: 1; 9600; N; 2(1); 8; RTS/CTS; 0
%- Gravograph:   1;19200; O; 2(1); 8; RTS/CTS; 0
%- Roland:       1; 9600; N; 2(1); 8; RTS/CTS; 0

|  Port COM1..4 [1..4]:
  Selection of the interface (Com1..4) for data transmission.

|  Baud rate  [1200..9600,38400]:
  Setting of the transmission speed (usually 9600).

|  Parity [N=none,E=straight,O]:
  Transmission parity, dependent on the machine connected.

|  Stop bits [1/2]:
  Separation bits between the figures (usually 2).

|  Word length [7/8]:
  Transmission word length (usually 8).

|  Handshake [Hardw./XON(1..3)]:
  Transmission handshake, dependent on the machine connected.

|  Transmission delay  [0..255ms]:
  Pause times between the symbols = 0. This value should be set to
  values >0 for test purposes only.

#3211 Preparation        --------------
Input of prepared data for direct output.
The following selection is dependent on the selected type of machine:

|Tension means
Enter processing zero point for up to 20 tensioning means.
|Current tension means #:
  the following data output takes place on this tension means.

|Reference point (ZeroP) X/Y/Z:
  Work piece (chuck) reference point. this reference point is
  the zero point for milling. The reference point can be entered as
  figure or entered after calling up using the key < F2> via the set-up
  function (comp. Survey Position). These positions can be surveyed
  using applied reference tool (<F2> key).

  Nach <F2> stehen einige Messrutinen zum Einrichten zur Verfügung:
|  Spannmittel Pos.Eingabe:
    Hinweis:
    Die hier angebotenen automatischen Vermessungen und die Z-Level
    Antastung sind nur mit eingesetztem Kantentaster möglich!
    Steht kein Kantentaster zur Verfügung, dann können die einzelnen
    Meßpositionen auch manuell angefahren werden. Das Programm
    ermittelt aus den eingemessenen Positionen das Werkstückzentrum
    und übernimmt dieses als neue Spannmittel-Position.
    Ein Kantentaster kann nur in Verbindung mit LANG-MCG eingesetzt
    werden!

|    Spannmittelpos einmessen:
    Spannmittel mit der Maschine manuell anfahren (einmessen).

|    Rechteck Kantenmessung:
    Ein rechteckiges Werkstück (mit einem Kantentaster) an bis zu
    4 Punkten anfahren und das Zentrum ermitteln.
    Der Mittelpunkt einer Achse wird berechnet sobald die beiden
    zugehörigen Kanten vermessen sind.

|    Rechteck Spezialmessung:
    Ein rechteckiges Werkstück (mit einem Kantentaster) an bis zu
    3 Punkten anfahren und das Zentrum in X ermitteln.
    Der Mittelpunkt der X-Achse wird berechnet sobald die beiden
    zugehörigen Kanten vermessen sind.
    Der Y-Meßpunkt wird mit dem Y-Versatz ermittelt sobald die untere
    Kante vermessen ist.

|    Kreis Außen-Kantenmessung:
    Ein kreisförmiges Werkstück (mit einem Kantentaster) an 3 Punkten
    anfahren und das Zentrum ermitteln.
    Der Kreis-Mittelpunkt wird berechnet sobald alle 3 Kanten vermessen
    sind. Der Tastkugel Durchmesser wird nur zur Radiusberechnung
    (Hilfeanzeige) verwendet.

|    Kreis Innen-Kantenmessung:
    Ein kreisförmiges Werkstück (rundes Loch) (mit einem Kantentaster)
    an 3 Punkten anfahren und das Zentrum ermitteln.
    Der Kreis-Mittelpunkt wird berechnet sobald alle 3 Kanten vermessen
    sind. Der Tastkugel Durchmesser wird nur zur Radiusberechnung
    (Hilfeanzeige) verwendet.
    Im Gegensatz zur 'Kreis Außen-Kantenmessung' werden hier alle 3
    Meßpunkte ohne neu anzufahren vermessen.

|    Z-Level antasten:
    Den Z-Wert an der Spannmittelposition mit einem Kantentaster
    vermessen. Ohne Kantentaster ist diese Meßrutine nicht verwendbar.
    Bei Bestätigung des Eingabefensters mit <F2> oder <M> wird eine
    Testrutine zur Anzeige der MCG-Eingänge gestartet.
    Hinweis:
    Beim Anmessen schräger Flächen kann der Taster seitlich ausweichen.
    Mit schrägen Flächen entstehen prinzipiell Fehlmessungen.

|    Kante mit Taster messen / Kante manuell messen:
    Umstellung der Meßverfahren. Einige Verfahren sind auch ohne
    automatisch arbeitenden Kantentaster und mit anderen Steuerungen
    möglich. Zum manuellen Vermessen fahren Sie mit der Maschine an
    die vorgesehene Kante und übernehmen der entsprechenden X-/Y-Wert.

|Centring to RP in X/Y:
  With 'YES' centre data to chuck position.
  This setting is sensible for label production only, if centrally tensioning
  vices are used. Otherwise set the centring axes in the menu 'Layout'.

  Zentriert werden nur Daten mit einfacher oder serieller Ausgabe.
  Bei Verwendung der parallelen Mehrfachpositionierung (einstellbar mit
  'Vorbereitung . Mehrfach . Mehrfachpositionierung [J/N] = JA') wird
  der Bezugspunkt nicht zentriert.

|Multiple
Set parallel or serial multiple processing. The parallel or serial repetition
of the work piece is controlled In the input Multiple. The simultaneous
setting of the parallel (multiple positioning = YES) and serial
repetition (repetitions > 0) is not possible.

Multiple positioning [Y/N]:
  YES: the following settings for separation, number and label edge
  are active for parallel repetitions.
  NO: parallel repetitions are switched off.

Separation X, Y [mm]:
  Horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) repetition separation.

Number X, Y:
  Number of the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) repetitions.

Engrave label edge [0..3]:
  Mill label limitation (edge).
  0 = mill no label edge.
  1 = mill frame around the label.
  2 = mill corner marks.
  3 = mark corners with points.

Label edge tool [0..199]:
  Tool for the label edge milling. The tool must have been defined before
  in the cutter library.

Repetitions [0..999]:
  Setting for serial repetitions (multiple positioning = NO). 
  With repetitions > 0 the milling data set is repeatedly output at the 
  same X/Y/Z position.

  Bei 'Wiederholungen = 0' wird die Fräsung nur einmal ausgegeben.
  Bei 'Wiederholungen = 1' wird die Arbeit 1x wiederholt, d.h. zwei
  mal gefräst. Bei Verwendung von 'Stop vor Werkstück' (einstellbar mit
  'Vorbereitung . Vorbereit . Stop vor Werkstück [J/N] = JA') fährt die
  Maschine zur Homeposition (Einstellung in 'Parameter . Rückzug .
  Homeposition X/Y [mm]'). Das Programm hält dann die Übertragung mit
  der Meldung 'weiter J/N' an. Erst nach Bestätigung wird die Bearbeitung
  fortgesetzt. Dies kann z.B. zum Werkstückwechsel an der Maschine genutzt
  werden.

|Graphic
Setting for graphic indication during the milling and graphic output.

Graphic indicator [Y/N]:
  YES: the graphic is also plotted with the output.
  NO:  no graphic with the output.

Working space / work piece [Y/N]:
  YES: the graphic shows the work piece within the working space limits.
  NO:  the graphic shows only the work piece elongation.

Enter graphic indicator angle [Y/N]:
  Input of the perspective - presentation of a milling data set. The
  viewing direction is shown schematically through a cuboid. You can
  adjust the aspect in steps of 10 degrees by clicking on to the direction
  arrow using the cursor. Using PosA set the presentation colour of the
  withdrawn positions. Following <OK> the graphic is plotted, <Esc>
  breaks off the input.
  YES: enter graphic aspect angle.

|Prepare
Adjust machine accessories.

|  Remove by suction [Y/N]:
  YES: removal by suction is switched ON/OFF with the processing.
  NO:  removal by suction remains off during processing.

|  Spray [Y/N]:
  YES: spraying is switched ON/OFF with the processing.
  NO:  spraying remains off during processing.

|  Milling spindle [Y/N]:
  YES: the milling spindle is switched ON/OFF with the processing.
  NO:  the milling spindle remains off during processing.

|  Milling spindle delay [sec]:
  Run-up and brake delay for the milling spindle. With
  high cycle spindles ca. 10000 revs/sec.

|  ToolTensioningDelay. [500..4000ms]:
  Delay following tool tensioning with automatic tool change.

|  Stop before work piece [Y/N]:
  YES: with serial multi-processing the processing is stopped
  before each work piece.
  NO: there is no stop before a new work piece.

|  Stop before tool change. [Y/N]:
  YES: with tool change the process is stopped before
  each new tool.
  NO: there is no stop before the tool change.

|  Ser.Schnittstelle aktiv [J/N]:
  Für die Kombination vhf + Windows 2000 darf die Daten - Schnittstelle
  nicht ausgeschaltet werden, da ansonsten die Maschine unkontrollierte
  Bewegungen ausführen kann. Für diesen Fall muß der Parameter auf 'JA'
  geschaltet werden.

|  Two spindle-Offset (for LANG only):
  With <> 0 the 2nd tool is displaced in X for two spindle operation.
  With more than two tools there is an error message
  Two spindle X-Offset <> 0! and output is broken off.

|Measuring:
With measuring you can use machine positions for measuring
and save this in a target layer. The position can be taken over in 2D
(measure Pos3D = NO) or 3D(measure Pos3D = YES).
If 2D points are taken over then these are marked as drillings in
the target layer.

|Target layer:
Graphic layer for the measuring positions.
|measure Pos3D:
YES = Pos3D is saved in the layer.
NO = the drillings are saved in the layer.
The positions surveyed by the machine are referred to the current
chuck (adjusted to the graphic).
If a change of axis is carried out (e.g. Y = -Y), then the axis change
is taken into account respectively, so far as only the sign is to be
changed. Axes mutually exchanged are not taken into account.

#3208 Type    :          --------------
Selection of the machine type for direct output.

|MIMAKI:
  Direct machining with Mimaki engraving plotter.

|LANG MCG:
  Direct machining with LANG stepper motor drive MCGxx.

|vhf cnc750:
  Direct machining with vhf controller CNC750.
  Für ältere Controller ist diese Schnittstelle nicht einsetzbar.

  Zur Ausgabe an die vhf-Maschine kontrollieren Sie bitte die
  nachfolgenden 'Parameter' - Einstellungen. Beachten Sie bitte
  dazu auch die Programmhilfe [?] zu 'Parameter'. Die Parameter
  sind soweit möglich voreingestellt. Speziell an die Maschine
  müssen besonders die Arbeitsgrenzen und die Schnittstellen-
  Einstellungen (Baudrate) angepaßt werden.
  Die nachfolgenden Einstellungen sind Standards und gelten für
  die meisten Einsatzgebiete. Für spezielle Anwendungen können
  die Einstellung (nach Rücksprache mit vhf) auch variieren.

|  Grenzen:
%  Max.Vorschub [X/Y/Z/ [m/min] Standard = 6m/min.
%  max.Spindeldrehzahl  [U/min] Standard = 60000.
%  min.Spindeldrehzahl  [U/min] Standard = 5000.
%  Flughöhe global/lokal  [J/N] Standard = JA.
%  globale Flughöhe        [mm] Standard = 1,0mm.
%  Ausgabeart                   Standard = 1.
%  Kleinster Vekt.[0,001-0,5mm] Standard = 0,005mm.

|  Raum:
%  Arbeitsraum (max) X/Y/Z [mm] Standard = Maschinen-Bewegungsbereich.
%  Steigung (Auflösung) X/Y/Z   Standard = 0,001mm.
%  Arbeitsraumüberwachung [J/N] Standard = JA.

|  Rückzug:
%  Homeposition anfahren  [J/N] Standard = JA.
%  Homeposition X/Y        [mm] Standard = 0.

|  Achsen:
%  Achse X/Y/Z                  Standard = +X / -Y / +Z.

|  Port:
%  Port COM1..4          [1..4] Standard = 1.
%  Baudrate  [1200..9600,38400] Standard = 19200.
%  Sendeverzögerung  [0..255ms] Standard = 0.

|  Datei:
  Steuerungsinitialisierung "vhf.dev":
  Für einfache Tests ist die Standard vhf Initialisierungsdatei
  "vhf.dev" ausreichend. Für den professionellen Betrieb benötigen
  Sie eine an die Steuerung und Maschine angepaßte Datei. Diese
  erhalten Sie auf Anfrage von der Firma vhf.

|Gravograph:
Direkte Ansteuerung einer Gravograph - Maschine in 3D vom
Typ IS200/400/700(Schrittmotor) und IS6000(xp)/8000(xp)
(Servomotor). Werkzeugwechsel ist in dieser Kombination leider
nicht möglich.

|Roland 2D:
Direkte Ansteuerung einer Roland Maschine (Roland EGX-30 (EGX-20).
Die Maschine und diese Ausgabe läßt nur reine 2D-Arbeiten zu. Mit
Auswahl 'Typ: Roland 2D' wird die Roland Maschine mit einigen
Parametern voreingestellt:
- Max. Vorschub [X/Y] [m/min]: 3 m/min
- Max. Spindeldrehzahl [U/min]: 15000
- Min. Spindeldrehzahl [U/min]: 4000
|  Port:
  Baudrate: 9600
  Wortlänge: 8

|Roland 3D:
Direkte Ansteuerung einer Roland Maschine (Roland EGX-400 und EGX-600).
Mit Auswahl 'Typ: Roland 3D' wird die Roland Maschine mit einigen
Parametern voreingestellt:
- Max. Vorschub [X/Y/Z] [m/min]: 6 m/min
- Max. Spindeldrehzahl [U/min]: 30000
- Min. Spindeldrehzahl [U/min]: 8000
- Flughöhe global/lokal [J/N]:JA
- globale Flughöhe [mm]: 1 mm
- Kleinster Vektor [0,001..0,5mm]:0,005 mm
|  Port:
  Baudrate: 19200
  Parität: Fest eingestellt E=EVEN (Einstellung Roland O=ODD)!
  Stopbits: Fest eingestellt = 1
  Wortlänge: 8
  Handshake: Fest eingestellt Hardware RTS/CTS

#7808 Benutzercode       --------------
Die Programme sind für eine vorläufige, freie Nutzung von
einigen Wochen ausgelegt. Der ordnungsgemäße Weiterbetrieb
des Fräs-/Gravierprogrammes ist nur mit einem Benutzercode
erlaubt und möglich. Den Benutzercode erhalten Sie von
Ihrem Programm - Lieferanten.

Ein Benutzercode kann pro Programmsitzung nur einmal
eingegeben werden. Ist die Eingabe nicht korrekt, ist eine
weitere Eingabe des Benutzercodes nur nach einem erneuten
Programmstart möglich.

#1711 Edit Pixel         --------------
Einzelne Reliefpunkte (Pixel) mit dem Cursor bearbeiten.
Für alle Funktionen, mit Ausnahme von ZeigePos ist zunächst
ein Referenzpunkt (Z1) auszuwählen. Danach werden alle weiter
angeklickte Reliefpunkte (ZCurs) mit dem Referenzpunkt bearbeitet.

|Display position:
Display relief point data.

|Set Pos COPY:
Set points to the adopted value.
ZCurs = Z1.

|Minimum OR:
Set point smaller than adopted value.
If ZCurs < Z1 then ZCurs = Z1.

|Maximum AND:
Set relief points, which are higher than the adopted value.
If ZCurs > Z1 then ZCurs = Z1.

|Sum ADD:
Add points to adopted value.
ZCurs = ZCurs + Z1.

|Subtr. SUB:
Subtract adopted value from point.
ZCurs = ZCurs - Z1.

|Apply -> Max:
Add relief point with the half difference to zmax.
ZCurs = ZCurs + (ZMax - ZCurs) / 2.

|Remove -> 0:
Divide then adopted point in half.
ZCurs = ZCurs / 2.

#3107 DIN/ISO            --------------
Export of milling data in ISO or a similar format. depending on the
export filter the milling data can be created for 3 axes (X/Y/Z), for 4 axes
(additional round axis for the wrap processing) or multi-axis machines.

|DIN/ISO FILTER:
Selection of the export filter for a control/machine. Standard export filter
(X/Y/Z + round axis) are marked in black. Multi-axis export filter
(4 and 5 axes) are marked in blue.

|Start position X,Y:
Position to cross over an obstruction, which is approached before
milling.
Für einige neuere Exportfilter kann mit Anfahrpos. X =-9999.99
und Y=-9999.99 die Anfahrposition ausgeschaltet werden. Dann
wird die erste Bearbeitungsposition im NC-Datensatz angefahren.

|Round engraving radius:
Approach of the 4th axis for a cylindrical engraving. A round engraving
diameter -0.001mm to +0.001mm gives an output with the X,Y,Z axes.
With negative values (<-0.001mm) the Y axis (direction of rotation
of the round axis) is mirrored. A round axis for multi-axis export filter
cannot be switched on.

|Cooling ON:
With 'YES' the command M8/M9 in the data set cooling lubrication is
switched on.

|Free movement position X,Y,Z:
Movement after ending processing. Input takes place positively upwards
for Z. Depending on the export filter the free movement position Z
is approached also for tool change.

Bei Eingabe einer negativen Freifahrposition in X und Y (z.B. X=-1
und Y=-1) wird keine Freifahrposition X/Y angefahren. Die
Freifahrposition Z wird jedoch immer verwendet.

|Set number:
NO: no set number output.
1,2,3,..: set number (to max. 99999) with every set.
GO:1,2,.: set number (to max. 99999) with every contour (GO).
10,20,..: set number in tens (10,20,30, ...).

|TStat-Add. Milling path control:
Additional tool change with exceeding of the tool life travel.

|Parameter:
For standard export filter: input for tool change,
  Address round axis and round axis for ...
For multi-axis export filter: input for tool change
  and algebraic sign axis B/C.
Comp. separate help under 'Parameter'.

|OK:
Confirmation of input and input of a file name for the milling data export.

|Esc:
Abort input.

!Hinweis:
Bei Einstellung des Eingabeparameters 'Kreisbogen-Toleranz' > 0
werden beim Export aus den Polygonzügen, soweit möglich Kreisbögen
in der eingestellten Toleranz erzeugt. Kreisbögen mit einer
'Kreisbogen-Toleranz = 0,01' werden immer dann erzeugt, wenn
- die Bögen mit einer 'Kreisauflösung' > 35 erstellt wurden,
- Fräser-Offsetberechnungen bis zum Radius von 3mm mit einem
  'Abrundungswinkel' <= 20° erfolgten,
- Fräser-Offsetberechnungen bis zum Radius von 10mm mit einem
  'Abrundungswinkel' <= 10° erfolgten.
Für 'Kreisbogen-Toleranz > 0,01' werden Kreisbögen auch bei kleinerer
'Kreisauflösung' bzw. größerem 'Abrundungswinkel' erzeugt.

!Note 'Deckel Dialogue 11':
Tool change can take place as selected using 'T' (stations number 1..999)
and with 'TT' (stations number 1001..1999).
Example: tool station number 7 gives 'T7',
  tool station number 1007 gives 'TT7'.

!Hinweis 'MAZAK Drehmaschinen':
+ Der Rundgravierdurchmesser erzeugt die Ausgabeart:
- Für Gravur auf Planfläche:
  Rundgravierdurchmesser = 0 - erzeugt Tool xx.0
- Für Gravur auf Mantelfläche:
  Rundgravierdurchmesser <> 0 - erzeugt Tool xx.1
  Das Vorzeichen (+/-) des Rundgravierdurchmessers steuert den
  Drehsinn der Achse C.

+ Der Dateinamen darf nur aus 1..8 Ziffern bestehen.

+ Vor dem Export wird die darzustellende ToolNr ausgewählt:
|  Tool-Nr.-Form:
  Integr.4 = 4-stellige Ausgabe für Integrex (z.B. T3100.0).
  Integr.6 = 6-stellige Ausgabe für Integrex (z.B. T031000.0).
  Revolver = 4-stellige Ausgabe für Revolver-Maschinen (z.B. T3100).

|  Mit WZ-Korrektur-Nr. [J/N]:
  Bei JA wird eine WZ-Korrektur-Nr (=WerkzeugNr) erzeugt.
  - Für 4-stellige WZ-Nr = 00..99 (z.B. T3131.0 oder T0707),
  - für 6-stellige WZ-Nr = 000..255 (z.B. T031031.0 oder T007007),

!Note 'Röders RFM Engraving':
Travel over height between individual tasks.
Withdrawn movements between the tool objects are basically travelled
at the height of the 'Free movement position Z' , i.e. within a milling data
set (for a tool) take place withdrawn at the level of the clearance height.
Connections between individual milling objects are travelled at the
height of the 'Free movement position Z'.

!Hinweis 'Autograv':
Sie können mit 'Parameter .Kreisbogen  [abs/rel]' die Kreisbogen-
ausgabe einstellen. Standard ist 'relativ'. In diesem Fall muß
beim Import in 'WinPC-NC' der Parameter 'Datenformat . DIN/ISO
G02/G03' auf 'relativ' gestellt werden!

!Hinweis 'Eckelmann-NCMind':
Mit Anfahrpos. X =-9999.99 + Y=-9999.99 wird immer zur ersten
Bearbeitungsposition im NC-Datensatz angefahren.
Programmnummer:
  Programmnummer im Kopf der ISO-Programmes.
Kühlungsart [M8 / M7]:
  Auswahl der Kühlung. Wahlweise M7 oder M8.
Konturen mit RundA.schalt:
  Zum Schalten der Rundachse (nur für Spezialanwendung).
Alle G0 auf FreifahrPosZ:
  Mit Einstellung 'JA' werden alle G0 - Bewegungen auf der Höhe
  der Freifahrposition Z ausgeführt. Bei 'Nein' erfolgen die
  Bewegungen auf Flughöhe.

!Hinweis: 'Siemens 840D Unterpr.':
Dieser Export erzeugt Unterprogramme mit Werkzeugwechsel.

!Hinweis: 'Andronic/8V Mikromat':
!Hinweis: 'MACH 8 - Mitsubishi':
Mit Anfahrpos. X =-9999.99 + Y=-9999.99 wird immer zur ersten
Bearbeitungsposition im NC-Datensatz angefahren.

!Hinweis: 'BES-Grav':
Mit Anfahrpos. X =-9999.99 + Y=-9999.99 wird immer zur ersten
Bearbeitungsposition im NC-Datensatz angefahren.
Mit 'Parameter . Variable Technologie[J/N] = JA' werden die
Technologiedaten für Vorschübe XY, Eintauchvorschub Z und
Spindeldrehzahl in Variable im Programmkopf geschrieben.
Mit Änderung der Variablen kann so das komplette Programm
angepasst werden.

!Hinweis: 'Spinner PD Umfang840D'
Export für Spinner Drehmanschinen zur Gravur auf Mantelflächen.
Die Wechselpositionen sind mit X300 und Z150 fest eingestellt.
Für diese Ausgabe muß ein Rundgravierdurchmesser angegeben werden.
Die Satznummer wird immer in 10er Schritten ausgegeben.
Mit Anfahrpos. X =-9999.99 + Y=-9999.99 wird immer zur ersten
Bearbeitungsposition im NC-Datensatz angefahren.

!Hinweis: 'BEAMICON':
Daten für Steuerungen der Firma Benezan Electronics, Rottenburg.
Mit Anfahrpos. X =-9999.99 + Y=-9999.99 wird immer zur ersten
Bearbeitungsposition im NC-Datensatz angefahren.

!Hinweis: 'ANDRONIC KM2060';
Fräsdaten für Kuhlmann RUBIN mit Andronic KM2060.
Mit ISO-Filter-Parameter . Laser Werkzeugvermess. [J/N] = JA
wird die Werkzeugvermessung aktiviert.
Mit Anfahrpos. X =-9999.99 + Y=-9999.99 wird immer zur ersten
Bearbeitungsposition im NC-Datensatz angefahren.

!Hinweis: 'KÖRNER (Bohrzyklen):
Spezieller Fräsdatenexport für Körner - Steuerungen.
Mit diesem Export werden Bohrungen (vgl. zeichnen . Punkt) durch Zyklen
(selbst erstellbares DIN - Programm) ersetzt. Alle anderen Bewegungen
bleiben unverändert. Der Zyklus wird in die Datei 'Zyklus.PGM' gespeichert
und muß sich im Verzeichnis des Programmes (HCAM../iSIGN..) befinden
(vgl. Beispieldatei 'Zyklus.PGM'). Vor der Ausführung des Zyklusses
fährt die Z-Achse auf die mit der Werkzeug-Eintauchtiefe angegebenen
Startposition. Wenn die Zyklen an der Materialoberfläche beginnen sollen,
ist eine Eintauchtiefe von 0mm anzugeben.
Mit Anfahrpos. X =-9999.99 + Y=-9999.99 wird immer zur ersten
Bearbeitungsposition im NC-Datensatz angefahren.

!Hinweis: 'MultiCam G41/42':
Alternative Ausgabe zu MultiCam Maschinen. Für diesen Export kann unter
'Parameter' vor jeder Kontur G41 oder G42 für eine Offsetberechnung mit
der Steuerung eingestellt werden. Dieser spezielle Export ist nicht
geeignet für die Verwendung eine Multihead Bohrkopfes.
Mit Anfahrpos. X =-9999.99 + Y=-9999.99 wird immer zur ersten
Bearbeitungsposition im NC-Datensatz angefahren.

!Hinweis: 'Step Four':
Datenexport für Step Four Steuerungen. Dieser Export unterstützt
keinen Werkzeugwechsel.
Mit Anfahrpos. X =-9999.99 + Y=-9999.99 wird immer zur ersten
Bearbeitungsposition im NC-Datensatz angefahren.

#0073 Calc. Track Parall.--- iSIGN+ ---
The marked contours are cleared in parallel tracks. The
proposed cutter offset is the resultant radius of the layer
tool.

Für die Berechnung werden fehlerfreie, geschlossene Konturen
verlangt. Im Zweifelsfall sollten die Wege vor einer Berechnung
mit 'mark. Schnittpunkte' überprüft werden.

Berechnet wird der Offset immer in positiver Richtung
(rechts von der Kontur). Soll in entgegengesetzter Richtung
berechnet werden, muß der Drehsinn der Kontur(en) vorher mit
'drehe Bahn(en)' invertiert werden.

#7808 Schraff/Abräumen    --------------

|Line separation:
Determines the parallel offset of the individual milling tracks.

|Safety:
Determines the safety separation of the milling tracks in
the milling direction of the contour (track). If the value is selected
greater than 50 % of the line separation, a safety query takes place
additionally. Für die Abräumverfahren muß hier ein Wert > 0 eingetragen
werden, sonst können keine Verbindungen zwischen den Schraffurlinien
berechnet werden. Die Einstellung sollte bei ca. 50% des Linienabstandes
liegen.

|Hatching angle:
Determines the hatching angle in degrees in the mathematically positive
sense of rotation.
0 degrees gives horizontal hatching lines.

|Internal block type:
With YES the functions hatch internal and inwards clearance is carried
out in block form. With No the functions such as hatching/clearance
outwards are carried out in a calculation (1 Block).

#0051 Hatch Inside       --------------
The areas framed by closed contours are hatched.
Hauptanwendung ist die Erzeugung grafischer
Effekte. Sollen Abräumdaten zum Freifräsen von Flächen
erzeugt werden ist besser 'Abräumen innen/außen' zu wählen.
$7808

#0052 Hatch Outside      --------------
The areas framed by closed contours are hatched.
Hauptanwendung ist die Erzeugung grafischer
Effekte. Sollen Abräumdaten zum Freifräsen von Flächen
erzeugt werden ist besser 'Abräumen innen/außen' zu wählen.
The hatching limit is entered as a rectangle.
$7808

#0053 Clearance Inside   --------------
The areas framed by closed contours are cleared by row.
The individual clearance cells are, as far as possible,
connected to each other.
$7808

#0054 Clearance Outside  --------------
The areas framed by closed contours are cleared by row.
The individual clearance cells are, as far as possible,
connected to each other.
The hatching limits is entered as a rectangle.
$7808

#0083 Adjust Rate of Cut --------------
Adjustment of rate of cut combined with relief surface depth and
inclined deep cuts on the track. The rate of cut setting is also only
sensible for one layer e.g. for relief surface setting and/or for
deep cut movements. If paths are marked, then the marked data,
otherwise the data in the ActLayer are provided with chip layers.

!Note: rates of cut are always created for fully calculated milling 
paths. The creation of rates of cut before a milling track calculation
(e.g. AutoCorrection) is not possible!

Rates of cut can be calculated in 2 types:
1) Rates of cut for graphic data in the layer in combination layer tools.
Here, no cutter offset calculation is planned or the cutter offset is
already taken into account. For this calculation paths in a
graphic layer and a layer tool are required. The layer tool requires
at least: tip radius (FrS) e.g.. 1.5mm, insert depth (FEt) = max. milling
depth e.g. 2.5mm and a change station (WSt) e.g.. 1.
Select the 'Rate of cut setting' and 'Layer depth' < tool
insertion depth e.g. 1mm. With 'Layer distribution' = 'Same' 3 layers 
each 0.833mm are created, with 'Layer distribution' = 'Rest' 2 layers
with 1.0mm and the last layer with 0.5mm.

2) Rates of cut for milling data in the layer.
calculate your milling paths (e.g. using AutoCorr.) 'Tool . Insertion
depth'= max. milling depth e.g. 2.5mm and save these in a graphic layer.
Now you find milling data with tool information in the selected target layer.
In CAD select the target layer with the milling data. Select 'Rate of cut
setting' and 'Layer depth' < tool insertion depth e.g. 1mm. With 'Layer
distribution' = 'Same' 3 layers with each 0.833mm are created, with 'Layer
distribution' = 'Rest' 2 layers with 1.0mm and the last layer with 0.5mm.

If there is tool information in the data set, then the data of
these tools, otherwise the data of the layer tool, are applied.
If there are paths for several tools in the data set, then layers
are calculated for all tools.

|Relief surface depth (Z offset) [mm]:
Z displacement downwards for the complete data (e.g. for processing
in pockets). Der Spiegel ist die höchste Stelle des Bearbeiteten
Werkstückes. Die Spiegeltiefe kann immer nur positiv angegeben werden
(Werte > 0: Verschiebung nach Unten). Eine Verschiebung nach Oben ist
nicht möglich (oberhalb Materialoberfläche, bzw. Kollision der Leerwege
mit dem Material).

|Layer depth [mm]:
Max. 999 layers, minimum layer depth = 0.001mm. The complete, available
milling depths are divided into equal layer thicknesses (e.g. FEt = 2.0 mm
and layer depth = 1.5 mm results in 2 layers each of 1.0 mm).
For the end depth the deep cut depth of the current tool or the depth
of the 3D paths are used (larger value).

|Deep cut angle [°]:
Deep cut movement (10..90°), with 90° deep cutting is vertical.

|Track/Layer oriented  [Y/N]:
YES: the contours are set lower individually.

|Layer distribution [Same/Rest]:
Same: all layers are made the same.
Rest: the layers are milled to the depths given. For the
last layer there is a residual layer up to the complete milling depth.

!Example: Drilling with rate of cut.
Simple drillings, inputted e.g. with 'draft . point (drilling)', 
can receive layers and chip break movement with Rate of Cut. 
Input:
- Layer depth: Setting < Tool . Final Cut Depth.
- Deep cut angle: 90°.
- Track/Layer oriented: 'YES'.
- Layer distribution: 'Same'.

#2006 TLayer Rate of Cut --------------
Rates of cut and/or approach movements are calculated  for the
contours in the TLayer. Deep cut movements are created along the
milling paths starting at the path beginning. Here rates of cut
or cut depths can be produced separately for each tool.

|Tool #1..10, clearance track:
Indication of the milling data sets corresponding with the data
in the TLayer.
Inputs are only possible for tools which are allocated milling data.

|Layers:
Number of milling layers (1..99). With 1 the milling data remain
unchanged (i.e. no distribution into milling layers).

|Distribution L/V:
L = Linear layer distribution.
V = Volume oriented layer distribution.

|Angle (insertion angle):
Approach angle 10ø.. 90ø. With 90ø the approach is vertical.

|Clearance tracks:
Separate layer input for clearance paths (as afr as available).
No. of milling layers (1..99). With 1 the milling data remains
unchanged (i.e. no division into milling layers).

|Relief surface depth Z offset) [mm]:
Z displacement downwards for the complete data (e.g. for processing
in pockets). Der Spiegel ist die höchste Stelle des Bearbeiteten
Werkstückes. Die Spiegeltiefe kann immer nur positiv angegeben werden
(Werte > 0: Verschiebung nach Unten). Eine Verschiebung nach Oben ist
nicht möglich (oberhalb Materialoberfläche, bzw. Kollision der Leerwege
mit dem Material).

#1092 Input Parameter    --------------
Configurations for the program (CAD, Graphic, Settings,
AutoCorr (program with mill correction only),
TextEffect (program with text input only)).

|Input: (Setting for CAD) **************************************
|Circular resolution/spline resolution:
Vectorisation - resolution for arcs of circle and spline curves.
Small numbers result in a coarse vectorisation with little data.
Large numbers result in fine vectorisation with large mounts of data.

|Background colour:
Setting of graphic background colour.
%- White:    background = white.
%- WinGnd:   Windows Desktop - colour.
%- White-Ln: background = white, but with horizontal and vertical
             mark lines (without any snare function).
%- LGrey:    background = light.
%- Black:    background = back.

|Input grid X / Y:
Cursor input takes place in the given step widths (gridding).
A gridding is only activated if it is visible on the monitor screen.
With grid point separations small or equal to 5 picture elements
(pixel) the grid is not shown and the gridding is not active. On the
other hand, with this, the gridding can be switched off with the
input of very small values.

|Cursor circle:
With a cursor circle > 0, in CAD, the reticule is drawn with a circle.

|Cursor capture matrix:
Using capture matrix, capture (connect with the neighbouring points
in the capture matrix) for various drawing functions is activated. With
capture raster = 0, capture does not take place.

|Capture layer (draw):
Using capture layer the layer is switched on, on which, with drawing,
capture is to take place within the capture matrix set. On setting -1
capture is always in the ActLayer (layer in which drawing take place).
On setting 0..maxLayer capture is in the given layer.

|Arc tolerance:
Automatic arc creation with export of 2D data in Menu Export and
Font Editor. Arcs are created from the vector data which deviate the
max. amount from the polyline with the set tolerance. With input
Arc Tolerance = 0 there is no arc creation. Typical settings are
0.01..0.05mm.

|Cursor shape:
Adjustment of the CAD cursor cross to the graphic card.

|Message Beep:
Setting of the warn tone. For operation using sound card the sound
used can be matched to the following setting:
%- ON:     Warn tone as normal (standard setting).
%- Simple: Simple tone with the selection of a Windows sound.
%- OFF:    Warn tone basically off.

|Warning with 3D edit:
If there are 3D paths in the graphic layer then a warning occurs
with each editing. This warning can be switched off here.

|Warning Tool Data Edit:
If there are tool data in the graphic layer, then a warning occurs
with each editing. This warning can be switched off here.

|Displace Mark. Paths [Y/N]:
YES: Marked paths can be modified (displaced, enlarged, distort)
     in CAD using the cursor.
NO:  Marked paths cannot be modified.


|Graphic: ******************************************************
|Layer colours/Tool colour:
YES: with every graphic build up only the layer colours are used.
NO:  with every graphic build, as far as no other colours
     are applied, the layer colours are used. If, however, there
     are tool data in the layers, then the tool colours are used.

|Milling track Y=base/N=relief surface:
With plotting using the aid milling track with
YES: the cutting width is shown at the base (=tip radius) and with
NO:  the cutting width is shown at the relief surface height.

|Fill contour Y=precise/N=rapid (only for HCAM!):
With plotting using the aid milling track, with
YES: the fill contour is calculated accurately, with
NO:  the filling contour is calculated as quickly as possible, -
     with complex contours errors can, however, occur.

|Fill contours:
On plotting using the aid milling track, with
YES: all contours are filled for better engraving preview, with
NO:  only the contours are plotted.

|Empty paths visible:
With YES emerging lines are also shown.

|Clip Area Fast Graphic:
Dependent on the graphic card lines in Zoom are no longer correctly
shown. Using Clip Area the limits can be defined from which slower but
more secure clip routine is applied. Standard setting 16000.
If, with Zoom, lines in the graphic are missing, then the Clip Area must be
made smaller (setting 8000, 4000). On the other hand, for a good graphic
card the Clip Area can be increased (32000, 64000 ..) for more rapid
graphic build-up.

|Drilling marking [2D,..,0]:
Marking for drilling in the CAD graphic.
'    none' : Drillings will not marked.
'  for 2D' : Drillings will marked for 2D - Data (Standard).
'   2D+3D' : Drillings will marked for 2D and 3D Data. 
             Drilling indication in milling 3D - pathes.

|Computer power height:
minimal: The computer power is reduced with he program neutral 
  (action indication = green). This setting is favorable for notebooks.
height : The program (computer) needs height power even in neutral action.
active : The power consumption is height only if the program works.


|Basic setting: ************************************************
|No. of layers:
Th number of the available graphic layers can be determined by the user in
the range 16..50. The number of layers should not be increased unnecessarily.

|Menu shape:
Menu setting as desired to Text Menu only, Icon Menu only and Text+Icon Menu.

|Graphic with ruler:
YES: indicate a ruler at the lefthand and upper graphic edge.

|Graphic with layer bar:
YES: shows a layer selection at the lefthand side of the graphic.

|Help in the Editor:
YES: the Help indicator takes place in the text editor. Here you can,
inter alia, also print Help.
NO: The standard program help indicator is used.

|Clr. Layer tool   [Y/N]:
YES: with 'File . New' and 'Open' the layer tool is deleted.
NO: with 'File . New' the layer tool is not deleted.
With 'File . Open' the layer tools are overwritten only with the existing
tool data in the label.

|Save data for later session:
YES: the work remains for the next session after end of the
program (standard).
NO: the work is saved in a file at the end of the program.

|Help delay. [0..100*0.1s]:
Setting for the automatic menu short help.
0 : No short help is indicated.
1..100 : Delay for the short help in 0.1 sec. If the cursor stays 
  this delay time onto a menu point, a short help will be shown.

|Convert ASCII in ANSI [Y/N]:
'YES : With Text import the special characters (#128..255) will 
  be converted in the correct ANSI characters. With this some 
  special characters can't be inputted.


|AutoCorr: (Milling correction settings) ***********************
Diese Einstellungen werden in Programmen ohne Offsetberechnung nicht
verwendet.

|Round-off angle 2D:
for outer corners with 2D correction. If sharp corners are to be created
using correction, >120 deg. is to be set.

|Round-off angle 3D:
for outer corners with 3D correction. This value should lie at ca. 10..35 deg.

|Up milling:
YES: a surface (relief surface) is milled in the mathematically positive
direction (up milling).
NO: a surface (relief surface) is milled in the mathematically negative
direction (down milling).

|Overlap line clear. (Row-form clearance):
0% gives a track separation with cutter diameter (2*Frs - utilisation 100%).
Values > 0 give an overlapping of the clearance paths.

|Overlap optimum clear. (Track parallel clearance):
Overlapping the neighbouring cutter tracks with equidistant clearance.
The input of 0%, with the setting 'Track parallel. Radius' gives a track
separation with cutter radius (utilisation 50%) and with the setting
'Track parallel. Diameter' a track separation with cutter diameter
(utilisation 100%). Values > 0 give an overlapping of the clearance
paths. Due to the favourable conditions for row-form clearance
tracks (shorter calculation time and quicker processing)
row-form clearance is recommended.

|Parameter standard size:
Matching the calculation parameters to a data standard size.
Settings 50 / 100 / 200 / none... Standard setting = 50. With
calculation problems the value can be varied.
%Some indications:
%none  : For big cutter radius in proportion to the work dimension
         (e.g. steel stamp with small characters).
%50    : For medium until big cutter radius, complex brass stamps.
%100   : For medium cutter radius (~1mm) and medium data amounts.
%200   : For small cutter radius and large work dimension.
%500   : For very small cutter radius and large work dimension.
%99999 : For large dimension and exact toolpath. In this case results
%        no track optimization. This procedure is ambitious and should
%        used only in exception.
The cutter radius follows in proportion with the data dimension. The 
standard setting is '50'. For large data dimensions this setting can 
be increased to e.g. 500. In exception cases is '99999' or 'none' 
possible. For smaller dimensions please reduce this setting to '50'.. 
'200' again. Please comply: With bigger setting, the automatic data 
correction will be reduced. In this cases calculation problems will 
be expected earlier.

|Data check before calculation:
With the setting 'YES' the program checks the contours for overlapping
before calculation. Marking also remains in CAD. Interface markings
can be removed using 'Process . Mark. interface . Delete interface'.

|Calculate by block:
NO: all data is calculated together. For security reasons, this setting
should as far as possible be avoided.
Rows/Columns: the data are calculated in blocks (all in one outer
contour together in row/column form sequence.

|Contour start:
Unmodified: the contour start points are not modified.
Internal corner: the contour start points are laid in the respective
tightest internal corner.
Straight line:	the contour start points are laid in the centre of the
respective longest straight lines.

|Clearance tracks first:
With the setting 'YES' the clearance tracks are given first
(standard setting).

|Combine clearance lines:
With 'YES' the milling tracks are as far as possible combined together.

|Sort clearance tracks later:
Additional sorting of the clearance sequence for the achievement
of the shortest empty paths (corresponds approx. with
'Process . Sort Tracks . Auto').

|Clearance paths together:
YES: the milling around the contour using the clearance tool and
  clearance movements are combined.
NO: milling around contours and clearance movements remain
  separate data sets.

|Round off clearance lines:
YES: clearance lines are rounded-off at the reversal points for
  softer machine movements.
  This function is only possible for line formed clearance in
  combination with the setting 'Clearance paths together = NO'


|Text effect: (not for iMill) **********************************
The text effects are always set for the current label. If another label is
loaded, then the text therein text effects are also loaded. If the label is
deleted using New or Delete Text, then the text effects are set to the
initial status.

|Larger <Alt><G>:
Present all following characters larger.

|Smaller <Alt><K>:
Present all following characters smaller.

|Raised <Alt><H>:
Arrange all following characters higher referred to the base line.

|Lowered <Alt><T>:
Arrange all following characters lower referred to the base line.

|Distortion X <Alt><V>:
Distort all following characters in their width.

|Inclination <Alt><N>:
All following characters are inclined by the given angle.

|Spacing <Alt><F>:
All following characters are spaced.

|Parallel displacement <Alt><P>:
All following characters are allocated to an inclined base line.

|Space:
Setting of the word separation for the complete data set.
With 100% the separations from the character set are used.

|Inc serial number +/-99999:
With every export the serial numbers are increased or decreased
by the given amount.

#3413 Fräsproj. Öffnen   --------------
Ein CAMSort Fräsprojekt laden.

#3414 Fräsproj. speich.  --------------
Ein CAMSort Fräsprojekt speichern.

#3420 Fräsproj. clr      --------------
Ein CAMSort Fräsprojekt löschen.

#3401 Grenzen            --------------
Arbeitsgrenzen für ein CAMSort Fräsprojekt einstellen.

$0020

#3402 Import LG1-Obj.    --------------
Eine LG1-Fräsdatei (LG1-Objekt) in ein
CAMSort Projekt importieren.

Die LG1-Datei besteht in der Regel aus mehreren 
Werkzeugobjekten, die gemeinsam geladen und Anschließend 
an die Arbeitsposition verschoben werden. Die 
Darstellung in der Grafik und während dem Verschieben
kann in 'CAMSort Parameter' eingestellt werden.

#3403 LG1 in Obj.        --------------
Mehrere LG1-Einzeldateien, die an einer Stelle gemeinsam 
gefräst werden sollen zu einem Objekt zusammenfassen
und importieren.

Import LG1 in Obj.
Die LG1-Dateien können auf 2 Wege zu einem Projekt 
kombiniert werden: 'Import LG1-Datei' und 
'Import Verzeichnis'.

|Import LG1-Datei:
Jede zum Objekt gehörende LG1-Datei wird im Dateidialog
einzeln ausgewählt.

|Import Verzeichnis:
Alle LG1-Dateien in einem Verzeichnis werden zu einem 
Objekt kombiniert. Dazu wird im Dateidialog eine LG1-
Datei ausgewählt. Wenn sich in dem Verzeichnis LG1-
Dateien befinden, die nicht zum Objekt gehören, müssen 
diese vorher aus dem Verzeichnis entfernt werden.

|Obj. übernehmen:
Das mit den Funktionen 'Import LG1-Datei' oder 'Import 
Verzeichnis' erstellte Objekt wird in das CAMSort 
Projekt übernommen. Soll ein Objekt nicht übernommen 
werden, kann die Eingabe mit <Esc> abgebrochen werden.

Das komplette Objekt kann anschließend an die 
Arbeitsposition verschoben werden. Die Darstellung in 
der Grafik und während dem Verschieben kann in 'CAMSort 
Parameter' eingestellt werden.

#3404 Obj. verschieben   --------------
Ein CAMSort Fräsobjekt auswählen und an die 
gewünschte Arbeitsposition verschieben.

Beim Verschieben kann das Fräsobjekt mit den Tasten <F3>
(+ Drehwinkel) und <F4> (- Drehwinkel) in Schritten gedreht
werden. Mit <F5> und <F6> werden die Daten mit einem
kleineren Winkelschritt von 1/5 gedreht. Die Schrittweite
kann mit 'CAMSort Parameter . Drehschritt für <F3>, <F4>'
eingestellt werden.

Durch das Drehen mit <F3>, <F4> wird der Nullpunkt nicht
mitgedreht.

#3405 Obj. duplizieren   --------------
Vom ausgewählten CAMSort Fräsobjekt eine Kopie erzeugen
und an die gewünschte Arbeitsposition verschieben. So 
können z.B. einzelne Fräsobjekte mehrfach erzeugt und 
gefräst werden.

Beim Verschieben kann das Fräsobjekt mit den Tasten <F3>
(+ Drehwinkel) und <F4> (- Drehwinkel) in Schritten gedreht
werden. Mit <F5> und <F6> werden die Daten mit einem
kleineren Winkelschritt von 1/5 gedreht. Die Schrittweite
kann mit 'CAMSort Parameter . Drehschritt für <F3>, <F4>'
eingestellt werden.

#3406 Obj. löschen       --------------
Ein CAMSort Fräsobjekt aus dem Projekt heraus löschen.

#3409 Obj. Folge         --------------
Die Abarbeitungs Reihenfolge (Fräsreihenfolge) der 
CAMSort Objekte manuell bestimmen.

Reihenfolge
Die Fräsreihenfolge wird in der Grafik durch Zahlen 
[001]... angezeigt. Zur Änderung der Fräsreihenfolge 
wählen Sie ein Objekt aus und bestimmen die neue 
Position in der Reihenfolge.

|An Stelle #:
Das ausgewählte Objekt wird an die angegebene Stelle 
verschoben.

|erster:
Das ausgewählte Objekt wird an die erste Stelle [001]
verschoben.

|letzter:
Das ausgewählte Objekt wird an die letzte Stelle 
verschoben.

|Eins nach Vorn:
Das ausgewählte Objekt wird eine Stelle nach vorne 
verschoben.

|Eins nach Hinten:
Das ausgewählte Objekt wird eine Stelle nach hinten 
verschoben.

|übernehmen:
Die zuvor eingestellte Reihenfolge wird in das CAMSort 
Projekt übernommen.

#3410 Obj. Werkzeuge     --------------
Ein CAMSort Fräsobjekt auswählen und alle 
Werkzeuge anzeigen.

Die Werkzeuge können hier komplett editiert werden.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, daß die Fräswege unverändert
bleiben. Eine Änderung der Werkzeug Geometrie kann das
Fräsergebnis verfälschen.

#3499 Fräsgrafik         --------------
|Fräser Mittellinie:
Zeichnen des Fräsobjektes in der Draufsicht mit der
Fräser Mittellinie.

|Fräserspur:
Zeichnen des Fräsobjektes in der Draufsicht mit der
breiten Fräserspur der Werkzeuge (Fräser Simulation).

|Norm Projektion:
Die 3D-Daten werden perspektivisch angezeigt. Bei Einstellung in
Draufsicht (alle Winkel = 0) werden die 3D-Bahnen in Grau-(Farb-)
stufen gezeigt.

|PosA:
Farbeinstellung für ausgetauchte Bewegungen. Bei Eingabe PosA ohne
Farbe erfolgt die Perspektiv-Anzeige mit Höhen-Levelmarkierung.

|PosA = cyan:
Für Daten aus einer 'Mehrachsen Proj.' werden die Stellungen (Winkel)
des Werkzeuges durch Linien an den Vektorendpunkten dargestellt.

|Zoom Projektion:
Eine Vergrößerung der Perspektiv Ansicht wird gezeigt.
Diese Funktion wird nach 'Norm Projektion' benutzt.

|Volumen Ansicht:
Die Fräswege werden als Volumen Ansicht des bearbeiteten
Werkstückes gezeigt. Dazu wird ein Quader so bearbeitet,
als ob er gefräst würde. Für diese Anzeige sind gültige
Werkzeuge (Layerwerkzeug oder Werkzeug im Datensatz) nötig.

|Vorbereitende Eingaben:
|  Grenzen:
  Werkstück: Die Arbeitsgrenzen sind der Bildrahmen und die Fräswege.
  Fräsweg: Die Anzeigegrenzen werden durch die Fräswege bestimmt.

|  Auflösung:
  Einstellung sehr fein bis sehr grob. 'sehr fein' benötigt lange
  Rechenzeiten, 'sehr grob' erzeugt eine grob gerasterte Ansicht.
  'Automatisch': Das Bild wird mehrmals mit jeweils höherer
    Auflösung gerechnet. Die Berechnung kann mit <Esc> beendet
    werden.

|  erzeugen:
  Die Ansicht wird berechnet.

|Einstellung der Volumen Ansicht:
|  Palettenauswahl:
  Auswahl der Graustufen-/Farb-Palette.

|  Grafik:
  Grafikeinstellung für die Graustufen-/Farbdarstellung.

|  Pos-Höhe:
  Zeigt die 3D-Reliefposition und Steigungswinkel an der
  Cursorposition.
  RX, RY, RZ: Reliefposition in mm.
  WiZX, WiZY: Steigung in Grad an der Reliefposition für die
    Richtungen Z-X (horizontal) und Z-Y (vertikal).

|  Höhenlinie:
  Von einem horizontalen Schnitt durch das Relief wird die
  Höhenlinie angezeigt. Die Schnittlinie wird in Y-Richtung mit
  dem Cursor positioniert.

|  Norm/Zoom Projektion:
  3D-Anzeige über Gitter, Vektoren, Punkte oder Fläche.
  Die Betrachtungsrichtung kann in 10°-Schritten eingestellt
  werden. Mit PosA stellen Sie die Linien-Darstellungsfarbe ein.
  Bei Eingabe PosA ohne Farbe erfolgt die Perspektiv-Anzeige mit
  einstellbarer Höhen-Levelmarkierung.

|  Relief speichern:
  Die Volumen Ansicht als Relief speichern.

|  Rendern:
  Das Bild der Grafik im Ansichtswinkel und mit
  definierter Beleuchtungsquelle berechnen (Rendern).
    Ansichtswinkel: Ansichtswinkel einstellen.
    Lichtwinkel: Winkel und Abstand der Beleuchtungsquelle.
    Auflösung: Bild Auflösung 'gering'..'hoch'.
    Zeichnung: Einstellung weich/hart.
    Kontrast: Grauabstufung 'gering'..'sehr stark'.
    Grafik: Das berechnete Bild ansehen.
    Relief speichern: Das Bild als Relief speichern.
    BMP-Bild: Das Bild in eine BMP-Datei speichern.

|Werkzeug Simulat.:
Abarbeiten von Fräsdaten mit den Werkzeugen.

|Fr Mittellinie/Breite FrSpur:
Auswahl der Fräswegdarstellung.

|keine Leerwege/zeige Leerwege:
Simulation mit/ohne Leerwege.

|Vorschubfaktor [0,1..10]:
Der Grafikaufbau erfolgt dem eingestellten Vorschub. Mit dem
Vorschubfaktor kann der Fräsvorschub reduziert oder erhöht
werden. Ein Vorschubfaktor = 1 läßt den Fräsvorschub unverändert.
Ein Vorschubfaktor < 1 verringert und ein Vorschubfaktor erhöht
der Fräsvorschub.

|Relief:
JA: Aus den Fräsdaten wird ein Relief gerechnet das als
Hintergrundbild verwendet wird.

|Qualitätsstufe:
Einstellung der Qualitätsstufe für das Hintergrundrelief.
'sehr fein', 'fein', 'normal', 'mittel', 'grob', 'sehr grob'.

|Rendern:
JA: Das Hintergrundrelief wird zusätzlich gerendert.

|Farben:
Farbenauswahl für das Hintergrundrelief oder gerendertes
Hintergrundbild.

|Grafikdruck:
Die aktuelle Zeichnung wird an den Standard Drucker
ausgegeben.
|  Seite anpassen:
  Die Grafik wird an die Blattgröße angepaßt.
|  Konturen füllen:
  Alle geschl. Konturen werden sw. gefüllt.
|  Papierrand Offset:
  Zusätzlicher Rand um die Grafik.
|  Mit Rahmen:
  Mit Grafikrahmen drucken.
|  Mit Abmessung:
  Abmessung des Grafikrahmens o.r. drucken.
|  Hochformat:
  Auswahl Hoch-/Querformat.

Arbeiten Drucker und Hardwaresicherung an der gleichen
Schnittstelle, dann darf erst nach Beendigung des
Druckvorganges mit dem Programm weitergearbeitet werden.

|Grafik speichern:
Das Bild im Grafikbereich in eine Bilddatei speichern.

|Arbeitsbereich/Grafikbereich:
|  Arbeitsbereich:
  Die Grafik innerhalb des eingestellten Grafikbereiches
  wird gespeichert. Wird eine ZOOM - Einstellung verwendet,
  dann wird nur der sichtbare Arbeitsbereich gespeichert.

|  Grafikbereich:
  Der gesamte sichtbare Grafikbereich wird gespeichert.

#3411 Obj. Fräsgrafik    --------------
Ein CAMSort Fräsobjekt auswählen und die Fräswege
mit verschiedenen Grafikmethoden anzeigen.

$3499

#3421 Obj. edit          --------------
Alternative Editierung der CAMSort Fräsobjekte.

|erster:
Das erste Objekt [001] wird ausgewählt.

|letzter:
Das letzte Objekt wird ausgewählt.

|Eins nach Vorn:
Die Objekt Auswahl wird eine Stelle nach vorne 
verschoben.

|Eins nach Hinten:
Die Objekt Auswahl wird eine Stelle nach hinten 
verschoben.

|Objekt verschieben XY:
$3404

|Objekt duplizieren:
$3405

|Objekt Reihe:
$3407

|Objekt Clr:
$3406

|Objekt Folge:
$3409

|Werkzeuge:
$3410

|Fräs Grafik:
Die Fräswege mit verschiedenen Grafikmethoden
vom ausgewählten CAMSort Fräsobjekt anzeigen.

$3499

#3416 Objektliste        --------------
Liste der CAMSort - Objekte im Editor anzeigen.

In der Liste wird der Importname, der Objekt - Bezugspunkt, die
Objektausdehnung und die Anzahl der Datenpunkte (Stützpunkte)
angezeigt. Der Objekt - Bezugspunkt (Punkt mit welchem das
Objekt positioniert wird) wird abhängig von der Einstellung
'CAMSort Grafikeinstellung . Bezugspunkt' angezeigt (vgl. Anzeige
in der Liste).

#3415 Werkzeugfolge      --------------
Alle Werkzeuge im CAMSort Projekt listen und die
Abarbeitungs- Reihenfolge bestimmen.

Die Funktion erlaubt die automatische Bestimmung der
Werkzeugfolge mit 'Autosort' und die manuelle Bestimmung
der Werkzeugfolge mit 'Ausschneiden', 'Verschieben', 'Einfügen'.

Zur manuellen Editierung können einzelne Werkzeuge
durch Anklicken ausgewählt werden. Sollen mehrere
aufeinander folgende Werkzeuge ausgewählt werden, 
klicken Sie auf das erste Werkzeug und markieren das 
letzte Werkzeug bei gleichzeitigem Drücken der 
Taste <Sft>.

|Ausschneiden:
Die markierten Werkzeuge werden ausgeschnitten.

|Verschieben/Einfügen:
Abhängig von der Bedienfolge können markierte Werkzeugzeilen
an eine andere Stelle verschoben oder ausgeschnittene 
Werkzeugzeilen an einer anderen Stelle eingefügt werden.

Wird eine oder mehrere Zeile(n) markiert, wird der Button 
mit 'Verschieben' aktiviert. Sobald Zeilen ausgeschnitten 
sind und sich im Zwischenspeicher befinden, wird der Button 
mit 'Einfügen' aktiviert.

Verschieben:
Die zuvor markierten Werkzeuge werden vor dem markierten 
Werkzeug eingefügt und an der alten Stelle gelöscht.

Einfügen:
Die zuvor ausgeschnittenen Werkzeuge werden vor dem 
markierten Werkzeug eingefügt. Wird vor dem Einfügen 
kein Werkzeug markiert, dann werden die zuvor 
ausgeschnittenen Werkzuge an letzter Stelle eingefügt.

|Aktiv/Inaktiv:
Die markierten Werkzeuge 'Inaktiv' geschaltet. Waren 
die Werkzeuge bereits Inaktiv, dann werden diese 'Aktiv' 
geschaltet. Inaktive Werkzeuge werden beim Export nicht 
berücksichtigt.

|Edit Werkzeug:
Die markierten Werkzeuge können editiert werden.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, daß die Fräswege unverändert 
bleiben. Eine Änderung der Werkzeug Geometrie kann das 
Fräsergebnis verfälschen.

|Autosort alle WZ/Autosort mark.WZ:
Die aktiven Werkzeuge nach verschiedenen Kriterien 
sortieren. Mit 'WSt steigend'/'WSt fallend'/
'Werkzeugnamen' /'Schneidenrad.'/'Spitzenradius'/
'Kugelradius'/'Winkel'/'Flughöhe'/'Eintauchtiefe'/
'Arbeitsvorschub XY'/'Eintauchvorschub Z'/
'Spindeldrehzahl'/'Werkzeugstandweg' werden die Objekte 
nach diesem Kriterium sortiert. Mit 'Reihenfolge
umkehren' kann die Reihenfolge invertiert werden.

Abhängig von der Bedienfolge werden alle Werkzeuge oder 
nur die markierten Werkzeuge sortiert.

Sind keine Werkzeuge markiert, ist der Button mit 
'Autosort alle WZ' aktiv und es erfolgt die Sortierung
aller Werkzeuge im CAMSort Projekt. Sind mindestens 2 oder
mehr Werkzeuge markiert, ist der Button mit 'Autosort
mark.WZ' aktiv und es werden nur die markierten
Werkzeuge sortiert.

|Werkzeug Liste:
Eine Liste der Werkzeuge mit unterschiedlichen
Geometrien im Editor anzeigen. Diese Liste kann
zur Bestückung des Werkzeugwechslers verwendet werden.

Dieser 'Werkzeug Belegungsplan' kann in 3 Arten
erstellt werden:

|  Werkzeug Liste
  Normale Werkzeug Liste. Schon belegte Wechselstationen
  bleiben erhalten, soweit keine Fehler (z.B. doppelte WSt.)
  festgestellt wurde. Nicht belegte WSt (=0) werden mit einer
  WSt# > 0 belegt.

|  WSt. neu belegen
  Die Wechselstations-Nummern (WSt.) werden neu vergeben.
  Die Reihenfolge richten sich nach der Reihenfolge der
  Fräsobjekte.

|  WSt. editieren
  Die Wechselstations-Nummern (WSt.) der Werkzeuge kann
  manuell festgelegt werden.

|Text Editor:
Alternative Werkzeugsortierung im Texteditor. Jede 
Textzeile steht für ein Werkzeugobjekt. Die Textzeilen 
können markiert, ausgeschnitten, eingefügt und damit 
manuell sortiert werden. Wird der 'geänderte Text
übernommen', dann werden die Werkzeugobjekte in der 
angegebenen Folge sortiert.

Hinweis: Verändern Sie nicht den Text innerhalb der 
Zeilen, immer nur komplette Textzeilen ausschneiden und 
einfügen. Manuell veränderte Textzeilen und doppelte 
Textzeilen können zu Fehlern führen.

|Hilfe:
Anzeige der Programmhilfe zur Funktion 'Objektliste'.

|OK:
Die editierte Werkzeugfolge in das CAMSort Projekt
übernehmen.

|Abbruch:
Die Eingabe 'Objektliste' beenden, ohne die editierte
Werkzeugfolge zu übernehmen.

#3412 Proj. Fräsgrafik   --------------
Die Fräsgrafik des gesamten CAMSort Projektes anzeigen.

$3499

#3417 Export             --------------
Das CAMSort Fräsprojekt mit den in 'Werkzeugfolge'
editierten Werkzeugobjekten exportieren.

#3422 CAMSort Parameter  --------------
Einstellungen für CAMSort.

|Werkzeugfolge Editor - Anzeige:
Für die Werkzeuganzeige in 'Werkzeugfolge . Text Editor' werden
hier die Werkzeugdaten ausgewählt, die im Editor angezeigt werden.

|CAMSort Grafikeinstellung:
Einstellung der grafischen Darstellung und Bedienung in der
CAMSort Grafik.

|Bezugspunkt:
Einstellung des Bezugspunktes an welchem das CAMSort
Fräsobjekt zum Verschieben angefaßt wird.
|  Cursor:
  Das Objekt wird an der Stelle angefaßt an der es angeklickt wurde.

|  U- links:
  Das Objekt wird links unten angefaßt.

|  M-zentr.:
  Das Objekt wird zentrisch angefaßt.

|  Daten-NP:
  Das Objekt wird an seinem Nullpunkt angefaßt. Diese Einstellung ist
  zu wählen, wenn Daten an der gleichen Stelle gefräst werden sollen.

|dyn.Grafikdarstellung:
Grafische Darstellung der CAMSort Objektes beim 
Verschieben.
|  Rahmen:
  Es wird ein Rechteck Rahmen um das Objekt gezeichnet.

|  nStützp.:
  Es werden die unter 'max. Stützpunktzahl' eingestellten Linien
  gezeichnet.

|  gr.WZObj:
  Es wird nur das Objekt mit der größten Fräsbreite gezeichnet.

|Grafik Liniendarstellung:
Grafische Darstellung der CAMSort Objektes.
|  MittelL.:
  Die Fräswege werden mit ihrer Mittellinie gezeichnet.

|  Fräsersp:
  Die Fräswege werden mit der breiten Fräserspur der Werkzeuge
  gezeichnet.

|max. Stützpunktzahl:
Eingabe der Fräslinien, die bei Auswahl
'dyn.Grafikdarstellung . nStützp.' gezeichnet werden.
Die Auswahl kann im Bereich 100..100000 erfolgen.

|Drehschritt für <F3>, <F4>:
Beim Verschieben eines CAMSort Objektes an die
Bearbeitungsposition kann mit <F3> und <F4> das Objekt gedreht
und damit das Fräsmaterial optimal genutzt werden. Mit <F5>
und <F6> werden die Daten mit einem kleineren Winkelschritt von
1/5 gedreht. Die Auswahl kann im Bereich 1°..90° erfolgen.

#9918 CAMSort            --------------
CAMSort ist ein Programm zum importieren, anordnen,
sortieren und exportieren von LG1-Fräsdaten. Die
Bedienung erfolgt über Menü.
Das Programm enthält folgende Eigenschaften:
- Eingabe des Arbeitsbereiches (Materialgröße)
  mit Eingabe eines beliebigen Bezugspunktes (Nullpunkt).
- Importieren von LG1 - Fräsdaten z.B. aus LErgoCAD,
  LSIGN, HCAM Zur schnelleren Positionierung der
  Fräsdaten mit dem Cursor werden die Fräsdaten
  reduziert bzw. ein Arbeitsrahmen um die Fräsdaten
  erzeugt.
- Die Anordnung der Fräsdaten kann einzeln manuell oder
  als Reihe/Matrix erfolgen.
- Werkzeugsortierung (bestimmen der Reihenfolge) nach
  Werkzeug - Technologiedaten oder Werkzeugnamen.
  Erzeugen von Stationsnummern (WSt.) für LANG - Daten.
- Fräsdatenexport in LG1 und DIN/ISO.
- Fräswiederholung eines einzelnen Werkzeug Objektes
  oder ab einer manuell angegebenen Stelle in der
  Fräsreihenfolge.

#0056 Route > Contour    --------------
The marked tracks (path, lines) are converted into
contours (double line) with the defined 'Contur with'.

The minimum vector length is 0.001mm, i.e. all shorter
lines (e.g. in arcs) are removed.

|Contour width:
Width (separation) of the double line.

For contours with >0.01mm, the settings in 'Input parameter .
AutoCorr' are used for the offset calculation. The contours
are well roundet in outer corners with the setting in
'Round-off angle 2D'.

#1820 Leitkurvenfläche   --------------
Die Fläche zwischen 2 Leitkurven berechnen. Die Flächenhöhe kann mit einem
optionalen Z-Profil oder über die Einstellung 'Variable Höhe' gesteuert
werden. Mit 'Zielhoehe' läßt sich die Fläche auf eine gewünschte Gesamthöhe
exakt skalieren.

Für diese Fläche werden mindestens 2 Strecken (für Leitkurvenfläche ohne
Z-Profil, Leitkurve 1 + 2) oder maximal 3 Strecken (für Leitkurvenfläche mit
Z-Profil, Leitkurve 1 + 2 und Z-Profil) verwendet. Die Strecken für die
Leitkurven 1 und 2 sowie das Z-Profil können sowohl in 2D als auch in 3D
angegeben werden. Die Leitkurven 1 und 2 beschreiben die äußeren Grenzkurven
(z.B. links und rechts der Fläche). Der Schnittverlauf (Spiegelverlauf =
Querschnitt) wird zwischen diesen Leitkurven gespannt und passend gedehnt
(verzerrt).

Wird das optionale Z-Profil verwendet, dann steuert dieses Z-Profil (in der
Regel in 3D) die Flächenhöhe. Das Z-Profil faßt den Schnittverlauf in dessen
Mitte an. Das Z-Profil befindet sich zwischen den Leitkurven 1 und 2.

Zum Start der 'Leitkurvenfläche' werden nacheinander die nötigen Strecken
angeklickt (Anzeige in der Eingabezeile beachten):
1. Leitkurve 1 (z.B. Linke Seite der Leitkurvenfläche),
2. Leitkurve 2 (z.B. rechte Seite der Leitkurvenfläche),
3. optionales Z-Profil (Mittenverlauf/Höhenprofil zwischen den beiden
   Leitkurven). Wird kein Z-Profil verwendet, dann kann diese Eingabe
   mit <Esc> oder <R> angebrochen werden.
   Wird ein Z-Profil verwendet, sollte dieser über die gesamte durch die
   Leitkurven 1 + 2 eingeschlossene Fläche verlaufen.

Die beiden Leitkurven müssen in gleicher Richtung verlaufen (bei Erstellung
im CAD Verlaufsrichtung anzeigen lassen). Bei entgegengesetzter
Verlaufsrichtung ist keine korrekte Flächenberechnung möglich.

|Verlauf
Schnittverlauf (Spiegelverlauf = Querschnitt) für die Leitkurvenfläche.
Für Flächen ohne Z-Profil kann der Schnittverlauf als einfache Strecke wie
herkömmliche Spiegelverläufe angegeben werden. Die Besonderheit ist lediglich,
daß der Verlauf in der Regel ansteigt (wie Verlauf für Spiegelfläche), in
einer Kurve verläuft und wieder abfällt (wie Verlauf für Strecken). Für
Flächen mit Z-Profil greift das Z-Profil in der Verlaufsmitte an.

|Rasterauflös.:
Rasterauflösung für Leitkurvenberchnung. Die Leitkurvenfläche wird in
3D-Teilflächen zerlegt. Die Genauigkeits - Einstellung der Teilflächen
erfolgt in 6 Stufen von 'sehr grob' bis 'sehr fein'. Die Rasterauflösung
darf für komplexe Leitkurven nicht zu grob gewählt werden, da ansonsten
die Randkontur nicht hinreichend genau erreicht wird.

|Variable Höhe:
Variable Höhensteuerung ein-/ausschalten. Diese Einstellung wird nur für
Flächen ohne Z-Profil verwendet.
JA   = Die Schnitthöhe ergibt sich durch Skalierung entsprechend dem Abstand
       der beiden Leitkurve. (Standardeinstellung)
Nein = Die Schnitthöhe ergibt sich nur durch die Vorgabe im Schnittverlauf.

|Grundhöhe
Zusätzlicher Höhenversatz in positiver oder negativer Richtung. Alternativ
zur manuellen Zahleneingabe kann der Z - Wert auch nach <M> oder <F2> in
der Zahleneingabe aus dem vorhanden Relief übernommen werden. Zur Eingabe
vgl. 'Relief Edit . Pixel Edit . Zeige Pos'.

|Zielhöhe
Mit dieser Einstellung kann die Leitkurvenfläche exakt auf eine Höhe
(incl. 'Grundhöhe') eingestellt werden. Dabei wird die höchste Stelle der
Fläche auf den eingestellten Wert skaliert. Der Wert 'Zielhoehe' = 0
schaltet die Skalierung aus, d.h. es wird nicht nachskaliert.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1096 Eingabeparameter   --------------
Einstellungen für das Programm CAMSort.

|Hintergrundfarbe:
Einstellung der Grafik - Hintergrundfarbe.
%- White:   Hintergrund = weiß (konstant).
%- WinGnd:  Windows Desktop-Farbe.
%- LGray:   Hintergrund = hellgrau (konstant).
%- Black:   Hintergrund = schwarz (konstant).

|Eingaberaster X / Y:
Die Cursoreingabe erfolgt in der eingegebenen Schrittweite (Rasterung).
Eine Rasterung ist nur eingeschaltet, wenn sie am Bildschirm sichtbar ist.
Bei Rasterpunkt-Abständen kleiner oder gleich 5 Bildpunkte wird das Raster
nicht angezeigt und die Rasterung ist nicht aktiv. Andererseits kann damit
die Rasterung durch Eingabe sehr kleiner Zahlenwerte abgeschaltet werden.

|Kreisbogen-Toleranz:
Automatische Kreisbogenerzeugung bei Export von 2D-Daten im Menü Export
und Font Editor. Aus den Vektordaten werden Kreisbogen erzeugt die max.
mit der eingestellten Toleranz von der Polylinie abweichen. Bei Eingabe
Kreisbogen-Toleranz = 0 erfolgt keine Kreisbogenerzeugung. Typische
Einstellungen sind 0.01..0.05mm.

|Cursorform:
Anpassung des CAD-Cursors.

|MessageBeep:
Einstellung des Warntones. Für den Betrieb mit Soundkarte kann der
verwendete Sound mit der nachfolgenden Einstellung angepaßt werden:
%- ein:     Warnton wie gewohnt (Standardeinstellung).
%- einfach: Einfacher Ton bei Auswahl eines Windows Sounds.
%- aus:     Warnton grundsätzlich aus.

|Clipbereich Fast Grafik:
Abhängig von der Grafikkarte werden Linien im Zoom nicht mehr korrekt
gezeichnet. Mit dem Clipbereich kann die Grenze definiert werden, ab
welcher die langsamere aber sichere Clip-Rutine einsetzt.
Standardeinstellung = 16000. Wenn beim Zoom Linien in der Grafik
fehlen, dann muß der Clipbereich verkleinert werden (Einstellung
8000, 4000). Andererseits kann für eine gute Grafikkarte zum
schnelleren Grafikaufbau der Clipbereich vergrößert werden (32000,
64000 ..).

|Rechnerleistung hoch [J/N]:
JA: Das Programm benötigt auch im Leerlauf hohe Rechenleistung.
Nein: Die Rechenleistung wird im Leerlauf (Aktionsanzeige = grün)
  begrenzt. Diese Einstellung ist günstiger für Notebooks. Viele
  Prozessoren benötigen dann weniger Batterieleistung.

|Grafik mit Lineal:
'JA': Zeigt ein Lineal am linken und oberen Grafikrand.

#7913 Menü Bereichswahl  --------------
Ein eingeschränktes Programm Menü für ein bestimmtes
Aufgabengebiet laden.

Um die Übersicht speziell in der Einarbeitungsphase
zu behalten, kann das Menü auf einige Einsatzgebiete
eingeschränkt werden. Je nach Programmumfang oder -art
stehen einige Menübereiche zur Verfügung. Steht in
einem Bereichsmenü die gewünschte Funktion nicht zur
Verfügung, können Sie diese Funktion nach Umschaltung
auf 'Komplettmenü' anwählen.

|Komplettmenü (complete):
  Das Standardmenü mit komplettem Leistungsumfang
  wird eingeschaltet.

|Schild/Beschriftung (label):
  Das Bereichsmenü für Schilder und Beschriftungen
  wird eingeschaltet.

|einfaches Schild (plate):
  Das Bereichsmenü für einfache Schilder
  wird eingeschaltet.

|Serienschilder (serial plate):
  Das Bereichsmenü für Serienschilder
  wird eingeschaltet.

|Frontplatte (panel):
  Das Bereichsmenü für Frontplatten
  wird eingeschaltet.

|2D-Fräsung (2D-mill):
  Das Bereichsmenü für 2D Fräsarbeiten
  wird eingeschaltet.

|3D-Stempel (3D-stamp):
  Das Bereichsmenü für ausgespitzte Stempel und
  AutoKorrektur wird eingeschaltet (nur für
  iSIGN+3D, HCAM3D plus, HCAM3D prof, HCAM it!).

|Relief (relief):
  Das Bereichsmenü für Relief wird eingeschaltet
  (nur für HCAM3D prof, HCAM it!).

#0945 Action Indicator   --------------
|Indicator green (2D):
In the ActLayer there are pure 2D data (graphic data).

|Indicator red (3D):
In the ActLayer there are pure 3D and/or milling data with
tool information.
If there is only one tool in the data set then with selection using 
<F2, M> the tool can be taken over as layer tool.

|Tool Input:
$0944 Tool Input         --------------

#7802 Figure Input       --------------
Figure input in the status line.
Example:
  Position E x,y [mm]:
  123,1  210,5  or  123.1  210.5

For figure input the characters 0..9 . , - + * x :  are accepted.
Multiple figures must be separated e.g. using space ' ' or any
other character which is not permitted as a figure. Only if
precisely the same values as demanded by the program have been
entered is the input accepted.

The figure input could be combined with the basic calculation.
For the calculation values must be written joined together.
E.g. 123.4+10 or 234-3 or 12*4 or 256.4/2 or -10*0.5
Operations with brackets or multiple following calculation
signs (10*-0.5) are not possible.

Permissible calculation signs:
+       = Addition
-       = Subtraction
* or x  = Multiplication
/ or :  = Division

#3408 Obj. tauschen      --------------
Die Fräsdaten eines Objektes gegen Fräsdaten
aus einer LG1-Datei tauschen.

Ein Fräsobjekt auswählen und durch die Daten aus einer LG1 -
Fräsdatei ersetzen. Die Fräsdaten aus der Datei werden an die
Position des ausgewählten Objektes gesetzt. Die Bezugsposition
ist die Daten Nullposition der importierten LG1 - Fräsdaten
und ist die Nullposition die bei Parameter - Einstellung
'CAMSort Grafikeinstellung . Bezugspunkt . Daten-NP' angezeigt
wird.

#3501 Projekt öffnen     --------------
Ein Dental - Projekt (.HPR) wird geladen.

Die Objekte werden durch ein gerendertes Bild mit
der Grenzkontur und die Objektnummer angezeigt.
Die Grafik wird mit den Hilfsmitteln  und der Maus
gesteuert.

#3502 Projekt speichern  --------------
Ein Dental - Projekt wird in eine (.HPR)
Datei gespeichert. Die Datei enthält die
Blankdaten, Formen und Stege.

#3503 Projekt clr        --------------
Das vorhandene Projekt wird gelöscht und ein
neues leeres Projekt erzeugt. Für das neue
Projekt ist ein Blank auszuwählen. Mit dem
Blank werden die Fräsgrenzen und Skalierung
eingestellt.

#3504 Objekt Import      --------------
Ein STL - Objekt (Form) wird in das Dental Projekt geladen.

Für eine Form werden die Daten der Krone und Stege benötigt.
Optional sind Daten für eine Nachbearbeitung (Kante) möglich.
Die 2 bzw. 3 STL - Dateien müssen sich in einem Verzeichnis
befinden. Ein Objekt wird ausgewählt indem im Dateimanager
eine der 2(3) STL - Dateien ausgewählt wird.

Das importierte Objekt wird als gerendertes Bild angezeigt.
Die Auflösung (Qualität) kann unter 'Grafik Parameter .
Render Auflösung [mm]' eingestellt werden.

Das importierte Objekt kann mit dem Cursor bei gedrückter Maus
Taste <L> an die gewünschte Fräsposition geschoben werden. Zum
Verschieben wird nur die Begrenzungskontur gezeigt. Währen dem
Verschieben kann das Objekt mit Hilfe der Tasten <F3 .. F6> in
Schritten gedreht werden:
<F3> : Drehung in math. pos. Richtung (entgegen Uhrzeigersinn).
<F4> : Drehung in math. neg. Richtung (im Uhrzeigersinn).
<F5> : Feine Drehung in math. pos. Richtung.
<F6> : Feine Drehung in math. neg. Richtung.
Die Schrittweite für <F3, F4> kann unter 'Grafik Parameter .
Drehschritt [°]' eingestellt werden. Die Standardeinstellung
ist 15°. Die feine Drehung ist immer 1/5 der eingestellten
Schrittweite.

Die Taste <Ret> oder <L> bestätigt die Eingabe und das Objekt
wird an der eingegebenen Position fixiert. Die Taste <Esc>
oder <R> bricht die Eingabe ab und das Objekt bleibt an seiner
ursprünglichen Position.

Wenn die Objektstärke in Z die Blankdicke überschreitet
erzeugt das Programm eine Fehlermeldung.

#3520 Objekt Import      --- IP-Tec ---
Ein STL - Objekt (Daten der Krone) wird in das Dental Projekt
geladen.

Das importierte Objekt wird als gerendertes Bild angezeigt.
Die Auflösung (Qualität) kann unter 'Grafik Parameter .
Render Auflösung [mm]' eingestellt werden.

Das importierte Objekt kann mit dem Cursor bei gedrückter Maus
Taste <L> an die gewünschte Fräsposition geschoben werden. Zum
Verschieben wird nur die Begrenzungskontur gezeigt. Währen dem
Verschieben kann das Objekt mit Hilfe der Tasten <F3 .. F6> in
Schritten gedreht werden:
<F3> : Drehung in math. pos. Richtung (entgegen Uhrzeigersinn).
<F4> : Drehung in math. neg. Richtung (im Uhrzeigersinn).
<F5> : Feine Drehung in math. pos. Richtung.
<F6> : Feine Drehung in math. neg. Richtung.
Die Schrittweite für <F3, F4> kann unter 'Grafik Parameter .
Drehschritt [°]' eingestellt werden. Die Standardeinstellung
ist 15°. Die feine Drehung ist immer 1/5 der eingestellten
Schrittweite.

Die Taste <Ret> oder <L> bestätigt die Eingabe und das Objekt
wird an der eingegebenen Position fixiert. Die Taste <Esc>
oder <R> bricht die Eingabe ab und das Objekt bleibt an seiner
ursprünglichen Position.

Wenn die Objektstärke in Z die Blankdicke überschreitet
erzeugt das Programm eine Fehlermeldung.

#3505 Objekt verschieben --------------
Ein Objekt aus dem Dental Projekt auswählen und an die
Arbeitsposition verschieben.

Ein Objekt wird mit dem Cursor durch Anklicken innerhalb der
angezeigten Grenzkontur ausgewählt.
Objekte, die bereits abgearbeitet/gefräst sind,
können hier nicht mehr ausgewählt werden.

Das ausgewählte Objekt kann mit dem Cursor bei gedrückter Maus
Taste <L> an die gewünschte Fräsposition geschoben werden. Zum
Verschieben wird nur die Begrenzungskontur gezeigt. Währen dem
Verschieben kann das Objekt mit Hilfe der Tasten <F3 .. F6> in
Schritten gedreht werden:
<F3> : Drehung in math. pos. Richtung (entgegen Uhrzeigersinn).
<F4> : Drehung in math. neg. Richtung (im Uhrzeigersinn).
<F5> : Feine Drehung in math. pos. Richtung.
<F6> : Feine Drehung in math. neg. Richtung.
Die Schrittweite für <F3, F4> kann unter 'Grafik Parameter .
Drehschritt [°]' eingestellt werden. Die Standardeinstellung
ist 15°. Die feine Drehung ist immer 1/5 der eingestellten
Schrittweite.

Die Taste <Ret> oder <L> bestätigt die Eingabe und das Objekt
wird an der eingegebenen Position fixiert. Die Taste <Esc>
oder <R> bricht die Eingabe ab und das Objekt bleibt an seiner
ursprünglichen Position.

#3506 Objekt duplizieren --------------
Ein Objekt aus dem Dental Projekt auswählen, eine Kopie
erstellen und an die Arbeitsposition verschieben.

Zur Bedienung vgl. 'Objekt verschieben'.

#3507 Objekt drehen      --------------
Ein Objekt aus dem Dental Projekt auswählen und um die X, Y
und Z - Achse drehen. Die Arbeitsposition in X/Y wird dabei
nicht verändert.

Ein Objekt wird mit dem Cursor durch Anklicken innerhalb der
angezeigten Grenzkontur ausgewählt.
Objekte, die bereits abgearbeitet/gefräst sind,
können hier nicht mehr ausgewählt werden.

Mit dieser Eingabe kann das Objekt in allen Achsen (für die
Bearbeitung passend) gedreht werden. Von der augenblicklichen
Einstellung werden das Objekt in Bearbeitungslage (Draufsicht),
ein horizontaler Schnitt oberhalb der Draufsicht, ein vertikaler
Schnitt rechts von der Draufsicht und die Ausdehnung in X/Y/Z
in der Eingabezeile angezeigt.

Eingaben:
|Winkel XY:
Drehung um die Z - Achse. Schrittweite = 15°.

|Winkel YZ:
Drehung um die X - Achse. Schrittweite = 1°.

|Winkel XZ:
Drehung um die Y - Achse. Schrittweite = 1°.

|Schnitt horizontal/vertikal:
Position der horizontalen/vertikalen Schnittgrafik einstellen.

Die jeweils zuletzt benutzte Eingabe ist aktiv. Die gewünschte
Eingabe kann durch Anklicken mit dem Cursor auf das Eingabefeld
oder Anklicken auf die Dreh-/Verschiebemarken um die Draufsicht
aktiviert(umgeschaltet) werden. Das Drehen am Rändelrad der Maus
verändert die Eingabe in der oben angegebenen Schrittweite und
berechnet eine neue Grafik. Nach dem Anklicken einer Position in
der Grafik wird der horizontale/vertikale Schnitt an diese Lage
gestellt und berechnet.

Wenn die Objektstärke in Z die Blankdicke überschreitet
erzeugt das Programm eine Fehlermeldung.

#3508 Objekt löschen     --------------
Ein Objekt aus dem Dental Projekt löschen.

Ein Objekt wird mit dem Cursor durch Anklicken
innerhalb der angezeigten Grenzkontur ausgewählt.
Objekte, die bereits abgearbeitet/gefräst sind,
können hier nicht mehr ausgewählt werden.

#3509 Objektliste        --------------
Eine Liste der im Dental Projekt enthaltenen
Objekte erstellen und im Editor anzeigen.

#3513 Objekt fräsen      --------------
Ein Objekt aus dem Dental Projekt auswählen und
für dieses Objekt Fräsdaten berechnen.

Ein Objekt wird mit dem Cursor durch Anklicken
innerhalb der angezeigten Grenzkontur ausgewählt.

Die Fräsdaten Berechnung erfolgt mit den
Werkzeugen und Einstellungen aus 'Fräsparameter'.
Wenn die Objektausdehnung die Blankgrenzen überschreitet,
wird die Berechnung abgebrochen.

Objekte, die bereits abgearbeitet/gefräst wurden,
werden für die weitere Auswahl/Editierung gesperrt.
Ein gesperrtes Objekt kann mit 'Fräsmark. aufheben'
wieder freigegeben werden.

#3514 Blank fräsen       --------------
Für das gesamte Projekt (alle Objekte auf dem Blank)
Fräsdaten berechnen. Die Fräswegberechnung und die
Fräsfolge erfolgt in Reihenfolge der Eingabe.

Wenn die Objektausdehnung die Blankgrenzen überschreitet,
wird die Berechnung abgebrochen.

Objekte, die bereits abgearbeitet/gefräst wurden,
werden für die weitere Auswahl/Editierung gesperrt.
Ein gesperrtes Objekt kann mit 'Fräsmark. aufheben'
wieder freigegeben werden.

#3510 Fräsparameter      --------------
Einstellung zur Fräsdaten Berechnung und Sprachauswahl.

Die Programmeinstellungen (Parameter) beeinflussen das
Projekt und das Fräsergebnis. Einige Einstellungen
verändern die Anordnung und Ausdehnung der Objekte.
Deshalb sollten Einstellungen nur für ein leeres
Projekt geändert werden. Nach der Änderung der
Parameter können ältere Projekte evtl. nicht mehr
fehlerfrei abgearbeitet werden.

|Einstellungen laden:
Hier können Sie vorbereitete Datensätze laden. Diese
Parametersätze erhalten Sie mit dem Programm bzw. von
Ihrem Lieferanten.

|Einstellungen editieren:
Die Einstellungen können nur durch geschultes Service -
Personal geändert werden.

|Sprache:
Auswahl der zur Verfügung stehenden Sprachen.
Die Sprachumschaltung kann jederzeit vorgenommen
werden. Sie beeinflußt nicht die Einstellungen.

#1097 Grafik Parameter   --------------
Grafikeinstellungen für das Projekt.

|Grafik mit Lineal:
Lineal ein-/ausschalten

|Drehschritt [°]:
Einstellung der Dreh - Schrittweite für Eingaben
mit den Tasten <F3 .. F6> während dem Verschieben.
Standardeinstellung = 15°.

|Render Auflösung [mm]:
Auflösung für die Grafik (gerendertes Bild). Grobe
Auflösungen beschleunigen die Berechnung, feine
Auflösungen ergeben eine bessere Grafikqualität.
Standardeinstellung = 0,1mm.

#3106 LG10bj '*.LG1'     --------------
If milling data is exported via 'Direct Mill', then storage
takes place together with the tool and technology data. With
'Export Graphic' in LG1 the data are separated according to
layer and saved without tool and technology data.

LANG LDriver/KDriver takes on no inset forward feed from
the LG1 format.

Layer separation with Export LG1-Obj.:
With export of pure 2D graphic data (via 'Export Graphic') the query
'Layer separation off [Y/N] appears with export. With 'NO' the data
is separated according to layer. As soon as the data, which has to
be exported, contains tool information or 3D data, it is assumed
that milling data are exported and the query is dropped.

|Auswahl für Leerwege
Das bisherige Graviersystem kannte Fräsungen nur in Z - Richtung
unterhalb des Nullpunktes vornehmen. Mit dieser Auswahl kann für
LDriver ab Ver. 4.x auch mit Nullpunkten unterhalb des höchsten
Bearbeitungs - Punktes gearbeitet werden (kann für importierte
Fräsdaten vorkommen).

|  LDriver 4.x mit PosA in 3D [J/N]
  Bei Einstellung 'JA' werden Leerbewegungen in 3D gefahren (ist nur
  für neuere LDriver - Versionen geeignet). Auch 2D-Arbeiten werden
  in diesem Fall mit PosA3D gefahren.
  Bei Einstellung 'Nein' werden Leerbewegungen in 2D ausgegeben. Dies
  ist sinnvoll, wenn alle Fräsbewegungen unterhalb des Z - Nullpunktes
  stattfinden. Die Einstellung 'Sicherheitsabstand z [mm]' ist hierbei
  unerheblich.

|  Sicherheitsabstand z [mm]
  Bei Einstellung 'LDriver 4.x mit PosA in 3D [J/N] = JA' werden
  Leerbewegungen (PosA) in 3D um den 'Sicherheitsabstand z' oberhalb
  der höchsten Fräsposition gefahren. Hindernisse können durch einen
  entsprechen groß gewählten Sicherheitsabstand überfahren werden.

#0944 Tool Input         --------------
Input of tool and technology data for the calculations and export. For 
the creation of the milling data complete tool information is required.
The tool data are entered into the tool list.

The tool list contains 200 tools (#0..199). The first 50 tools (#0..49)
are allocated to the layer. This tools are delayed with a new project 
('Data . new') or are overwritten with the project tools by opening a
new project ('Data . open'). All other tools are planned for the milling
offset calculation in AutoCorrection, Relief etc. and stay unchanged.

Each tool requires a geometry (cutting radius, point radius, angle and 
possible spherical radius) and valid technology data (incision depth, 
clearance height, working feed XY, incision feed Z, spindle revs and 
tool change station). Tools with station = 0 are switched off. A tool
change will only take out with a change of the station no. On the other
hand, tools with the same geometry data, but different technology data 
can own the same station no. In this case a tool change will not occur, 
but the technology data are changed. 

For track properties and cycles one additionally requires the technology 
data II (max. layer depth, chip lift, smoothing offset). If the tool data 
are incomplete or erroneous, then false milling data can result.

|!On select via action indicator (2D/3D):
Are milling data with tool information located in the layer, the tool 
input will be opened with the indication 'tools in data set'. In this 
case You'll edit only the tool(s) in the layer data. The tool library 
will be unchanged. If there are no milling data with tool information 
in the layer, the tool input will opened with the indication 'tool 
input (199)'. Here You'll edit the tools in the tool library.

|Geometry data:
Geometry's are required for all tools.
|  Toolname:
  Optional text for the tool - also used as layer name.
|  Cutting radius [mm]:
  Maximum cutting radius and tool dimension for the graphic.
|  Point radius [mm]:
  Radius at the tip of the tool.
|  Angle [°]:
  Cutter angle measured to the tool centerline. For an end milling cutter
  (cylindrical) 0° is entered.
|  Spherical radius [mm]:
  Radius of a sphere or corner radius at the tool tip.

|Technology data I:
This input is required for all tools.
|  Incision depth [mm] (Final cut depth):
  Milling depth of the tool measured from the tip of the tool to the
  material surface.
|  Clearance height [mm] (Safety height):
  Safety separation of the cutter tip to the material surface for incised
  movement.
|  Working feed XY [m/min] (Cut feed XY):
  Milling feed for XY and 3D movements.
|  Incision feed Z [m/min] (Cut feed Z):
  Incision depth for vertical  movements downwards.
|  Spindle revs [rpm] (Spindle rotation):
  rate of rotation of the tool spindle.
|  Tool life travel [mm]:
  Travel up to automatic cutter change. On achieving the
  tool life travel a tool change is enforced. The
  input 0 switches off the evaluation. The tool life travel
  is only evaluated by some export paths (LG1Obj, DIN/ISO and
  directMill).
|  Change station (Tool changer #):
  A change station (WSt) must be given for each tool independent of
  the geometry data. Tools with Wst = 0 are switched off. A station 
  >0 must be entered, even if You work with a machine without tool
  changer. In this case please enter WSt#1.
  A tool change is carried out with the change of WSt# only. On the
  other hand tools with the same geometry but differing technology
  data (milling depth, feed,...) can have the same WSt#. In this
  case, no tool change is carried out, but the technology data are
  changed.

|Technology data II:
The values are used for characteristics and/or 3D cycles only.
This functions are used in HCAM.. only.
|  max. layer depth [mm]:
  Maximum milling depth which can be carried out in a layer
  using this tool.

|  Chip lift [mm]:
  Chip lift movement with vertical drillings (no milling).
  A chip lift movement is used to remove drilling chips. This
  technology can not be used for milling movements. After attain
  the layer depht, the tool will raise with the amount specified
  with 'max. layer depth'. Following this, the movement to the
  next layer will follow.
  
| Smoothing offset [%[FrS]]:
  Separation for an additional smoothing operation. With 0 there is
  no smoothing action.

|Copy by tools/tool parameter.
Within a tool list, You can copy the data of complete tools or single 
tool parameter to other places in the tool list. The choose occurs with
the cursor on the desired display/input and enter the key <F2>, <M> or 
<R>. If the cursor is situated on the first 5 overview - lines, the 
corresponding tool will be selected. If the cursor is situated of a tool 
parameter (toolname .. change station/smoothing offset), the corresponding
parameter will be selected for copy. After the tool/parameter selection
You'll receive a menu for the further action:

|  copy to intermediate store
  The tool/parameter will be copied into the intermediate store.

|  insert fr.intermediate store
  The tool/parameter will be copied from the intermediate store
  into the actual/selected tool.

|  copy to all tools
  The tool/parameter will be copied into all tools in the list.

|  copy to tool #
  The tool/parameter will be copied into a selected tool - list.
  The input of the target tools can be a combined form.
  Permissible inputs are e.g.: 1,5,7-9 11 - 12
  After this the value will be copied into the tools 1,5,7,8,9,11,12.

#9925 Import             --------------
Selection of import filter. Import data are loaded into the existing
vector and text data. The dimensions of the graphic remain unchanged.

The selection lists the last 3 import filters used.
Using "All' the complete import filter selection is listed. 

|Load  *.ZEI (3002) *********************************************
Import an individual character from LANG LGF2 character set (ZEI).

|Project  *.ZEI (3003) ******************************************
Import a data set from the series LANG LGF2 character sets (ZEI).
ZEI-Projects are created using the programs LCAD-M, LSCAN and HProject.
the name consists of the following combination: xxxxxmnn.ZEI
xxxxx = Name, min. 1, max. 5 symbols.
m = tool designation (1..5, A, S)
nn = serial character set number (01..99).
Character sets with other names must be imported using Load '*.ZEI'.

|Vector H2R/LG1/SLD (3014) **************************************
Import a vector (H2R-, LG1 format) or a flat file (SLD format).

|EPS  *.EPS/AI (3006) *******************************************
Import an EPS file, which contains no vector data and no grid picture.
Files are read in using ADOBE Illustrator Format ('*.ai'). The data
must be exported in DTP (e.g. CorelDRAW) using the following settings:
- contours without filling,
- outline as hairline,
- text as curves.
Data which have been falsely saved, cannot be read in and the export
is aborted with an error message. In this case please export the
data again with the correct settings.

Although EPS data with fillings are imported, the contours are, however,
joined by webs. To avoid this, the contours must be exported without filling!

|HP-GL (3008) ***************************************************
HP-GL functions with a fixed plotter resolution. Many
manufacturers transfer vectorised HP-GL data, i.e. circles
are broken down into polygon moves. Here also lies the decisive
disadvantage: curved moves are frequently to coarsely vectorised
for one milling processing. Really useful results are achieved
if the data are exported from CAD or DTP programs with increased
resolution or several times magnified. In HCAM these data can then
be easily matched again. Texts are usually transferred vectorised
in HP-GL, whereby this can transfer such data very simply.

The support point resolution for HP-Gl usually lies at 0.025 mm
(inch/1000). Some standard applications in addition support
only one limited extension (to A0). In HCAM the resolution of
HP-GL (support point accuracy) can be matched with step
resolution  in Input Parameter . Plotter; the extension is
almost unlimited.

Unfortunately there are many HP-GL formats for milling plotters,
with  extensively arbitrary, and with HP, non-documented 3D
orders. These in part very exotic formats cannot be imported.

|Windows  *.WMF (3018) ******************************************
Import Windows WMF data. WMF contents are graphic data. Contour
paths are vectorised coarsely and have no scale reference.

|DXF  *.DXF (3026) **********************************************
Import AutoCAD - DXF files. Vector data can be controlled and corrected
in the menu 'Process'. Texts can be adapted using 'Edit line:' and
'Operat. Line'.

AutoCAD character sets must be replaced by engraving letters (HZE).
As text distortion in the DXF Format (not the text width) is taken
over the texts frequently appear with other widths. If this is not
wanted, then the texts must be corrected. Alternatively it is
recommended that here data exchange is via HP-GL. If texts have
been imported via DXF, then the text style can be changed easily
in Module Text using Operat line . Font for the complete file.

The import of 2D data from AutoCad to Ver. 12 is without problem -
other CAD systems in part provide very incomplete data. In Ver.13
AutoCAD is, at best, compatible with itself as this contains coded
areas. From Ver.14 onwards AutoCAD can also save downward compatible
in format DXF Ver.12.

Limitations: polylines are evaluated with width 0. 3D DXF is a pure
graphic processing and usually not be used for milling tasks.

|Recommended data export from AutoCAD:
- delete all layers not required such as, for example, dimensioning and
  check and delete all disabled, frozen and switched off layers.
- save file, load again and 'clean'. Repeat this several times until
  no further check messages appear. For this see also the AutoCAD handbook.

If problems occur with import, then import DXF data in AutoCAD, revise
the contents there as described above and export the data set again for
HCAM/iSIGN+.

|Combine vector data to contours Y/N?
Using 'Yes', the imported vector data are combined to contours. This
function is recommended only for path through lines! Only contours
which are stored in one block are combined. If the contour - lines
for one layer are separated in several blocks, they can be combined 
later with 'Process . Connect tracks'. 

|Mastercam (3019) ***********************************************
|*.NCI (3D/2D):
Milling data acceptance from Mastercam. With import of
3D milling data and additional monitoring of the Z axis takes place.
If the upper processing point is  further away from 0 than 0.01 mm, then
there is a message and, if desired, a displacement to Z upper = 0.0 mm.

|ASCII-Pt. *.DOC/*.FIA:
Ordered 3D dot cloud.

|GerberNC  *.NCD (3009) *****************************************
Import Gerber drill data for the production of printed boards.

|EXCELLON  *.NCD (3023) *****************************************
Import EXCELLON drill data for the production of printed boards.

|ASCII  *.TXT (3016) ********************************************
The open ASCII interface is helpful for all applications, which want
to issue 3D engraving/milling data to a machine. The format can be
easily created and can be processed using a text editor. A command
always begins with a 2-place character, consisting of capital letters
and numbers, followed by 1 or 3 parameters. The format includes
vectors, arcs, splines and different technology data. Notes on
formatting can be found under the instruction CAD . Import.

|Generic  *.MCR (3017) ******************************************
Import of vector data from  Generic CAD.

|Kuhlmann  *.SOR (3022) *****************************************
Import Kuhlmann SOR vector data. The commands FER, FEL, FA, TE, TA
are not interpreted.

|Baublys  *.AH3 (3024) ******************************************
Import of vector data in Baublys AH3 format.

|Baublys  *.DIG (3021) ******************************************
Import of vectorised 2D data in Baublys DIG format.

|Nill&Ritz  *.LOG (3029) ****************************************
Import of 2D/3D vector data from Nill&Ritz Logo-Format.

|DIN/ISO  *.??? (3027) ******************************************
Import of DIN/ISO milling data. Read in are paths with G0, G1,
G2 and G3. At the start of data at least 1 set with G0 is expected.
If this is not available, then  a set G0 X0 Y0 is created. For the
milling paths at least at the start G1, G2 or G3 must be put in
once. If no correct import of the data is achieved, then the ISO
data is either faulty or contains sets with special functions.
In this case you should check and revise the data using an editor.

|Circle MP abs/rel:
Absolute/relative dimensioning of the circle centre point.
With 'Auto' an automatic recognition relative/absolute is used.

|Import format 2D/3D:
Import only graphic vectors for 2D, all milling data for 3D. With
import of 3D milling data there follows an additional check of the
Z axis. If the upper processing point is further away than 0,01mm
from 0, then a message results and selective displacement to
Z above = 0.0mm.

|Adopt tool with 3D:
With YES the tool data F=advance mm/min, S=Spindle revs rpm
and T=tool number are read in and saved as tool in the data set.
These data are suitable only for the further export to a machine.
The tool data will possibly have to be supplemented.

|Import metric/inch [Y/N]:
Conversion of scaling mm/inch. With the setting "inch" all
dimensions are converted to mm using the 25.4.

|APT  *.APT (3028) **********************************************
Import APT milling data.

#0020 Borders            --------------
Determine Extension limits for the processing. These limits
are used for calculations and are always applied, if the
function 'Graphic NORM' is selected.

|Input limits:
|Frames
  Enter working limits left-below (0) to right-above (1).
  The input of the working limits is relating to the
  zero point selection (right beside the input). With
  the zero pint selection of 9Pt. inside the frame, only
  the values for width dx an height dy are requested.
  With zero point selection outside the frame, inputs
  were expected for all values left-below to right-above.

|With zero point [Y/N]:
  With 'YES' the yellow zero point is indicated.

|With centring cross [Y/N]:
  With 'YES' a cross is displayed in the centre of the frame.

|With label frames [Y/N]:
  With 'YES' the (label-)border is displayed.

|Border:
  A border can be determined for the working limits.
  Positive border value: relative border in % for labels.
  Negative border value: absolute border in mm.

|Use frame contour = YES
  A frame exported in 'Operate . Border Line' is used
  in 'AutoCorr' as working limit.
  A frame must consist of closed contours and may have no 
  overlapping (not even with cutter-corrected paths).
  The frame must be suitable for hatching or for a cutter
  correction. The working frame can consist of any number of
  contours. It is used only a limit line for free clearing
  (creates no 2D-/3D cutter contour). The working frame is
  saved with the SLD file using 'File . Save (under)'

|Match - Button:
Align graphic data to working limits or working limits to
graphic data.

|Picture Max.:
  Align limits to graphic.

|Centre graphic:
  Centre graphic in frame.

|Centre frame:
  Centre frame and graphic to the zero point.

|Displace:
  Displace the graphic in the ActLayer manually. Here a
  manual nesting is also possible (arrange milling objects
  layer oriented for clipping optimisation).
  - For displacement the frame is drawn dashed and the
    paths complete (up to max 20000 pts).
  - Objects (milling paths in the layer) are rotated by
    +/-30° usings <F3/F4>. Texts are not rotated with these. 

#3511 Objekt Daten anz.  --------------
Anzeige der Blankdaten und Objektausdehnung.

#3515 Stegobjekt wählen  --------------
Auswahl eines unbearbeiteten Objektes
zur Stegeingabe.

Objekte, die bereits abgearbeitet/gefräst sind,
können hier nicht mehr ausgewählt werden.

Das ausgewählte Objekt wird mit einem roten Rand
markiert. Wenn Sie das Objekt wechseln möchten,
müssen Sie das neue Objekt hier auswählen.

#3516 Steg eingeben      --------------
Grafische Eingabe eines Steges zum ausgewählten
Objekt.

Ein Steg wird in 2D mit seinen beiden Endpunkten
eingegeben. Die Lage in Z ist immer die Objektmitte
(Z = 0).

Das ausgewählte Objekt wird mit einem roten Rand
markiert. Soll ein Steg für ein anderes Objekt
eingegeben werden, müssen Sie dieses Objekt zuvor
mit 'Stegobjekt wählen' auswählen/markieren.

Auflösung und Stärke des Steges können unter
'Steg Daten' eingestellt werden.

#3517 Steg löschen       --------------
Auswahl und löschen eines Steges.

Es kann immer nur ein Steg im ausgewählten/markierten
Objekt gewählt und gelöscht werden. Ein anderes
Objekt können Sie mit 'Stegobjekt wählen' auswählen.

#3512 Fräsmark. aufheben --------------
Bereits berechnete (abgearbeitete) Objekte werden
für die weitere Bearbeitung gesperrt. Diese Sperre
kann hier für 1 Objekt wieder aufgehoben werden.

#0798 Graphic > Mill.Path--------------
Create milling path from graphic in the ActLayer.

You can use this function in two ways:
No path marked:
  All graphic and all text - data from the ActLayer are
  saved as milling path (with/without tool) in the target layer.

Marked graphic:
  The marked graphic - data will be saved as milling path
  (with/without tool) in the target layer.

|Tool:
Selection of the cutting tool from the library.
A clic on the tool graphic, opens the tool input.
The milling process will use this tool.

|Target layer:
Selection of the target layer for the milling data.
Using <F2> opens the layer selection.

|Delete original contour:
With YES the original graphic path (and text) is deleted.

|Save using tool:
'YES' saves the given tool to the milling paths.
With 'NO' the result is saved without the tool.
Remark: Milling data You should always save with tool

#7914 Registrieren/best. --------------unbenutzt
Hier erhalten Sie aktuelle Informationen zum Programm. Sie können
das Programm registrieren oder bestellen. Für diese Funktion
benötigen Sie einen funktionierenden Internetzugang.

|Aktuelle Informationen (Internet):
Sie erhalten aktuelle Informationen zu diesem Produkt.
Sie können die Seite auch mit Ihrem Internet Explorer unter
http://www.AHSoftgravur.de/AHSoftStart.HTM aufrufen.

|Programm registrieren:
Wir empfehlen Ihr Programm zu registrieren. Nur für registrierte
Programme können Sie unseren eMail - Service (siehe Kundendienst)
nutzen. Nur Anwender von registrierten Programmen können von
unserem Update - Service profitieren.

|Programm bestellen:
Wir empfehlen die Programmbestellung über diese Funktion.
Hier werden die benötigten Rechnerdaten automatisch in Ihre
Bestell - eMail eingefügt.

Wenn Sie ein anderes als das angegebene Programm wünschen, so
ändern Sie die Bestellung entsprechend ab. Für Einzelplatz -
Lizenzen senden Sie bitte den Code des Rechners an welchem Sie
das Programm installieren möchten.

Bitte beantworten Sie alle Fragen (genaue Programmbezeichnung,
Lieferanschrift). Bei Bedarf können Sie die eMail mit eigenen
Nachrichten ergänzen.

#0057 Row Linear         -------eSIGN2D
The marked tracks and routes are arranged several times in rows.
$7857 Reihe linear Einfügetext --------

#0058 Tile               -------eSIGN2D
The marked tracks and routes are arranged several times
in the X- and Y-direction.
#7858 kacheln Einfügetext -------------

#0029 Layer Row          --------------
Multiple arrangement for vector data. If text lines are present
then these are duplicated up to max. 4000 lines and serial numbers
incremented in the text lines.

|Row linear:
The selected layer is arranged repeatedly in rows.
$7857 Reihe linear Einfügetext --------

|Tile:
The selected layers re arranged repeatedly in the X- and Y-direction.
#7858 kacheln Einfügetext -------------

#2022 TLayer Row         --------------
Tool tracks are copied repeatedly. Before using 'TLayer Row' the
milling paths must be calculated, for example, using AutoCorr.

Creation of a row using this function results, as opposed to the same
functions in 'Layout', in an optimised tool arrangement, i.e. each tool
first works over all parts of the row before the next tool is exchanged.

|Row linear:
Tool tracks are arranged repeated in a row.
$7857 Reihe linear Einfügetext --------

|Tile:
Tool tracks are repeated in the X- and Y-direction.
#7858 kacheln Einfügetext -------------

#0026 Layout             --------------
Adapt all data to the border (height, distortion, offset ...)
inside 'all layers' or inside the 'ActLayer'.

|All layers / ActLayer:
The data of all layers or of the ActLayer are processed using Layout.

|Mirror in 2D:
Mirror data about  X(Y). Here text is not taken into account.

|Scaleß2D X/Y:
Graphic data and texts are scaled using two horizont/vertical points
to a given X/Y scale.

|Scaleß3D % Zero point:
Graphic data and texts are scale by percent in all axes (X,Y,Z).

|Deformation X/Y:
The graphic data are deformed using two horizontal/vertical points to a
given X/Y scale. Texts are not take into account.

|Deformation %:
Deform graphic data by percent in X. Texts are not taken into account.

|Deformation XYZ:
The graphic data are deformed in the X,Y,Z axis using a factor.
Attention!: texts not taken into account.

|Offset XY:
Displace graphic data and texts using a relative value (Offset).

|Ref. Pt.XY:
Displace graphic data and text to an absolute  X,Y position.

|Frame zero point:
Displace zero point of the working limits.

|Layer line (Multiple arrangement):
If text lines are present, then these are duplicated up to max. 4000 lines
and serial numbers are incremented into the text lines.
|Linear row:
The selected layer is arranged several times in rows.
$7857 Reihe linear Einfügetext --------
|Tile:
The selected layers are arranged several times in the X and Y direction.
#7858 kacheln Einfügetext -------------

|Rotate in degrees:
Rotate the graphic data in degrees mathematically positively (anti-clockwise)
about the Layout mid-point (MP). Attention!: texts not taken into account.

|Horizontally/vertically rotate:
The graphic data is rotated horizontally/vertically about their mid-point
using two points. Texts not taken into account.

!Attention:
Texts are not taken into account with individual operations and
must possible be converted into graphics. If texts exist there is
a selection:
  Text > Graphic : texts ar taken into account as graphics.
  Ignore : texts are ignored.
  Abort : the function is broken off.

!Description 'Simultaneous milling of several tasks':
- Create the milling paths for their working as normal and save the 
  milling paths in a layer. The data can also be stored temporarily
  as required in LG1 files.
- Set 'Layout . Layout' to 'ActLayer only..'
- Select a layer using milling data and displace the data using
  'Layout . Limits . Displace' to the desired position. Using the
  function keys <F3> and <F4> the milling paths can also be rotated.
  The paths can also be allocated using 'Layout . OffsetXY/ReferencePosXY/
  Layer Series'.
  Note: the input of aid lines possibly eases the work.
- Export the milling layers using 'Direct Mill'.
- If desired the working off sequence can be modified using 
  'Export Aids . Tool Sequence'.
- Then select your export filter.

#3407 Obj. Reihe         --------------
Das ausgewählte CAMSort Fräsobjekt mehrfach anordnen.

|Reihe linear:
Das ausgewählte CAMSort Fräsobjekt wird mehrfach in 
Reihe angeordnet.
$7857 Reihe linear Einfügetext --------

|kacheln:
Das ausgewählte CAMSort Fräsobjekt wird in X- und Y-
Richtung mehrfach angeordnet.
#7858 kacheln Einfügetext -------------

#0860 Holding Webs       --------------
Enter holding webs for milling tasks. At the holding web the processing tool
moves upwards from relief bottom by the web thickness, so that the material
at this point is not completely cut through and the inner part is retained
on milling out. Holding webs can only be entered for closed contours.
At the point where a holding web is placed there should be no 3D paths.

You can enter holding webs only for milling data with tool information. If 
You are work within a layer with graphic data, the input will be break off
by a error report.

|Web width:
Width of the web (without cutter width). The selected contours
must have a minimum length of 5*web width.

|Web thickness:
Thickness of holding web (in Z direction).

After enter the holding web data, you can put into place any holding webs 
within 2D milling pathes. For enter a holding web click on the milling path 
on the place where the holding web should be placed.

A holding web is placed at the clicked on position and the contour start
point so displaced, that the holding web is the last to be travelled.
For contour one or more points can be clicked on for holding webs.
In this case the last defined holding web of a contour is at the end
of the contour.

The holding web input is finished by enter the key <Esc> or the mouse
button <R>.

#8760 Navigator Projectio--------------
A navigator for the functions to project vector data onto a
relief shape.

For a projection You must load a relief (shape). You create or load a
relief with 'open'. If You want to take some changes on the relief
(filter, handling, ..) You have to do that before a relief projection.

The vector data for projection must be prepared and saved with an
engraving program, that stores .H2R or .LG1 - data (eSIGN2D, iSIGN+, HCAM).

To project vector data, the following steps are necessary:
- Make a relief as a projection basic available.
- Import the vector data (2D or 3D) with 'Import vect.'. If necessary
  adapt the vector data with 'Center vect.' .. 'Distort vect.'.
- Project the vector data onto the relief with 'Project vect.' and
  control it with 'Norm/Zoom projection'.
- Export the milling data (projected vector data) with 'Export projection'
  and save it for Your milling machine.

The functions are listed in handling sequence. The work order follows
from above to below. You can select functions with black color. Function
with gray color are not active now. Help for the functions You receive
with the active navigator using <F9>, in the menu using [?] and click
onto the function.

All functions for the projection of vector data are existing in the menu
from eMillRelief too. But the navigator offers You some help for the
training period.


#8769 Import vect.       --------------
Import prepared vector data (.H2R- or .LG1 - format) for the following
projection onto a relief surface.

The vector data for projection must be prepared and saved with an
engraving program, that stores .H2R or .LG1 - data (eSIGN2D, iSIGN+, HCAM).

This function imports 2D - graphic data (without a tool) and milling
data (with tool information) (.H2R, .LG1) for the deepened engraving
as well as 3D - graphic data and milling data for the deepened and
embossed engraving (.LG1).

For this function You must have loaded a relief (shape). You create or 
load a relief with 'open'.


#8768 Center vect.       --------------
The vector data are centric arranged (center in X/Y) to the relief. 

For a projection the vector data has to lay onto he relief completely.

For this function You must have loaded a relief (shape) and vector data.
You create or load a relief with 'open'. Vector data You can load with 
'Import vect.'.


#8767 Position vect.   . --------------
The vector data are hold on their zero point and displaced with the 
cursor in X/Y direction.

For a projection the vector data has to lay onto he relief completely.

For this function You must have loaded a relief (shape) and vector data.
You create or load a relief with 'open'. Vector data You can load with 
'Import vect.'.


#8766 Displace vect.     --------------
The vector data are displaced relatively (related to the last position)
in X/Y. For this input the displace value for X: / Y: in mm.

An input 0 takes place no movement for the axis. Positive values takes
place a movement for X = right (Y = above), negative values a movement
X = left (Y = below).

For a projection the vector data has to lay onto he relief completely.

For this function You must have loaded a relief (shape) and vector data.
You create or load a relief with 'open'. Vector data You can load with 
'Import vect.'.

#8765 Size % vect.       --------------
The vector data are corresponding to the input in % enlarged or decreased.
The input 100% takes place no data change. Values <100% decrease the
vector data, values >100% enlarges the vector data.

For a projection the vector data has to lay onto he relief completely.

For this function You must have loaded a relief (shape) and vector data.
You create or load a relief with 'open'. Vector data You can load with 
'Import vect.'.

#8763 Distort vect.      --------------
The vector data are corresponding to the input factors for X and Y
compressed or stretched. The input for the axis occurs as factors.
The factor 1 takes place no data change. Values <1 compresses the vector
data, values >1 stretches the vector data.

For a projection the vector data has to lay onto he relief completely.

For this function You must have loaded a relief (shape) and vector data.
You create or load a relief with 'open'. Vector data You can load with 
'Import vect.'.

#8762 Project vect.      --------------
The vector data are projected onto the actual relief.

For graphic data You have to input a tool with complete geometry and
technology data before a projection. The projection occurs always onto
a relief, which highest point lays in Z on 0 - position. The correct
Z - location You have to arrange with Your milling machine. This e.g.
can occur through gradually get down to the engraving surface.

For a projection the vector data has to lay onto he relief completely.

For this function You must have loaded a relief (shape) and vector data.
You create or load a relief with 'open'. Vector data You can load with 
'Import vect.'.

#8757 Norm projection    --------------
3D - milling data - norm - aspect. The projected vector data are shown
in perspective. With the setting in top view (all angles = 0) the 3D
tracks are displayed in gray (color) levels.

PosA:
Color setting for raised movements. With input of PosA without color the
perspective display is in height level marking.

For this function You must to project he vector data with 'Project vect.'.

#8758 Zoom projection    --------------
3D - milling data - zoom - aspect. The projected vector data are shown
enlarged (zoom) in perspective. With the setting in top view (all
angles = 0) the 3D tracks are displayed in gray (color) levels.

For this function You must to project he vector data with 'Project vect.'.

#8759 Export Projektion: --------------
The calculated (projected) milling data are exported. For the milling
data export please select on of the listed export way and complete the
necessary settings.

For this function You must to project the vector data with 'Project vect.'.

#7915 Relief-Korrektur-Parameter
|Relief-Corr-Parameter:
|  Inset angle:
  Angle for the inset movement into the material. To preserve the tool it 
  should inset the material in a sloping movement.
  Input boundary: 5° .. 90°(vertical).
  Typical value: 30°.

|  Plain offset:
  The pre milling tool (Pre-mill coarse + fine) allows a minimum material 
  thickness remain.
  Input boundary: 0 .. 10mm.
  Typical value: 0,1mm.

|  Spiral resolution:
  Vector resolution for circular spirals. Spirals are vectorised for the 3D
  milling. With circular resolution = 0.1° a variable circular resolution 
  is created.
  Note: circular spirals are fundamentally rounded off externally.

|  Smooth - Finnish   [Y/N]:
  YES: following the cutter correction the relief is refined for a better
    surface quality. The setting somewhat improves the surface quality.
    If extremely steep edges are to remain unmodified in the relief, then 
    this parameter is to be set to 'NO'.
  NO: the relief remains unmodified.

|  Lift SmoothTool.Level 0 [Y/N]:
  YES: the tool, with the milling of plane faces leaves at the highest 
    level (depth 0). Only sensible with relief with large plane faces which 
    are not to be milled.
  NO: the complete relief is milled (coin relief, without tool step).

|  Accelerate pre-mill correction:
  YES: the correction for the pre-milling tool is accelerated considerably.
    If, for example, steep areas are already finish milled using the pre-
    mill tool, because with large angles of pressure the finishing tool can 
    no longer reach these positions, then this parameter must be set to 
    'NO'. 

|  Projection tol. (0..0,1)[mm]:
  Milling accuracy for the milling data creation. Sensible amounts for 
  high-quality milling path are tolerances <=0,002mm. For more simply 
  pieces of work You can work with tolerances <0,05mm. For wood handling 
  there are settings 0,05 .. 0,20mm enough. With the setting 0 the relief 
  is milled with the highest accuracy. However, You receive a very high 
  data density, which simple machines not be able to manage it 
  problem-free.

#1757 Relief AutoCorr    --------------
Automatic 3D relief milling correction for up to 3 tools. Inputs take
place in columns: left (pre-mill coarse), medium (pre-mill fine), right
(smooth). Tools can be combined for track calculation. The input pre-mill
fine is only possible together with pre-mill coarse and smooth.

If previously marked in contours in CAD (only HCAM..), then these are
used as reference, otherwise the relief border limit is used as milling
limit. Depending on type of projection the relief Z value is worked
relative or absolute (only HCAM..).

|Pre-mill coarse:
As much as possible material is removed using a tool. A smoothing movement
must always be held for the finished relief, as for pre-milling residual
layers remain as security for the finishing process.

|Pre-mill fine:
This process is required for a few special cases only in order to conserve 
the finishing tool. A smoothing movement must always be carried out for the 
finished relief, as for pre-milling residual layers remain as security for 
the finishing process.

|Smooth:
Finishing of the reliefs using the finest tool. The resolution of the
milling data (minimum support point separation) is calculated from the
track separation (FrS+FrK) * TrackSep / 100 and limited by the minimum
relief resolution (in X or Y). Linear interpolation is carried out between
the individual relief points.

|Tool number:
Number of the cutter from the tool library. The key <Del> or number  -1
switches off this calculation. The Tool needs at least a tip radius > 0
(FrS and/or FrK) and a Station number! For the calculation the following
combinations of processes are permitted: only pre-mill coarse, only smooth
or all processes and pre-mill coarse and smooth.

The cutter tip radii (FrS + FrK) must be ended in descending order. I.e.
for pre-milling the larger and for smoothing the finer tool.

|Clearance procedure:
Surface milling process see selection. If contours have been previously
marked in CAD, then these are used, otherwise the relief limit is used as
milling limit. Which type of clearance is possible is indicated in the
selection.

|Clearance direction:
inside>outsi: the milling track order runs from inside outwards.
outside>insi: the milling track order runs from outside inwards.

|Clearance track separation [%]:
Separation of the milling tracks (line, spiral, ..) dependent on milling
radius f(FrS+FrK, tip radius + sphere radius).
With 100% track separation, working is with a an offset of FrS+FrK.

|Layer separation Z (1st track):
On clearance outwards a border is cut in the layer around the relief
(free-cut relief). The setting always takes place relative to the cutter
used (FrS + FrK, tip radius + sphere radius), i.e. with the setting 100%
the cutter dips into the material per track with a max. depth which
corresponds with the cutter radius. Typical settings are 20% ..150%.

|Clearance layer number (1..99):
Number of desired layer levels from upper edge of relief to relief base.
You can input layers only for the biggest used tool. E.g. if You use only
'smooth', You can input layers for the smooth tool. If You use 'Pre-mill
coarse' + 'smooth', You can use layers only for the pre mill tool.

#7915 Relief-Korrektur-Parameter

In part, you can save considerable calculation time if you match milling
resolution and relief resolution, then you can match the relief using
'Scale . Reduce [%]/[mm]'.

#1787 Relief smooth      --------------
3D - relief - milling - smooth - correction for 1 tool.

If previously marked in contours in CAD, then these are used as reference,
otherwise the relief border limit is used as milling limit. Depending on
type of projection the relief Z value is worked relative or absolute
(setting only for HCAM).

Smooth.
Finishing of the reliefs using the finest tool. The resolution of the
milling data (minimum support point separation) is calculated from the
track separation (FrS+FrK) * TrackSep / 100 and limited by the minimum
relief resolution (in X or Y). Linear interpolation is carried out between
the individual relief points.

|Tool number:
Number of the cutter from the tool library. The key <Del> or number  -1
switches off this calculation. The Tool needs at least a tip radius > 0
(FrS and/or FrK) and a Station number >=1!

|Clearance procedure:
If contours have been previously marked in CAD, then these are used,
otherwise the relief limit is used as milling limit. Which type of
clearance is possible is indicated in the selection.

|Clearance direction:
inside>outsi: the milling track order runs from inside outwards.
outside>insi: the milling track order runs from outside inwards.

|Clearance track separation [%]:
Separation of the milling tracks (line, spiral, ..) dependent on milling
radius f(FrS+FrK, tip radius + sphere radius).
With 100% track separation, working is with a an offset of FrS+FrK.

|Layer separation Z (1st track):
On clearance outwards a border is cut in the layer around the relief
(free-cut relief). The setting always takes place relative to the cutter
used (FrS + FrK, tip radius + sphere radius), i.e. with the setting 100%
the cutter dips into the material per track with a max. depth which
corresponds with the cutter radius. Typical settings are 20% ..150%.

|Clearance layer number (1..99):
Number of desired layer levels from upper edge of relief to relief base.

#7915 Relief-Korrektur-Parameter

#1788 Relief pre-mill    --------------
3D - relief - milling - pre-mill - correction for 1 tool.

If previously marked in contours in CAD, then these are used as reference,
otherwise the relief border limit is used as milling limit. Depending on
type of projection the relief Z value is worked relative or absolute
(setting only for HCAM).

Pre-mill.
As much as possible material is removed using a tool. A smoothing movement
must always be held for the finished relief, as for pre-milling residual
layers remain as security for the finishing process (also with Plain offset
 = 0).

|Tool number:
Number of the cutter from the tool library. The key <Del> or number  -1
switches off this calculation. The Tool needs at least a tip radius > 0
(FrS and/or FrK) and a Station number >=1!

|Clearance procedure:
If contours have been previously marked in CAD, then these are used,
otherwise the relief limit is used as milling limit. Which type of
clearance is possible is indicated in the selection.

|Clearance direction:
inside>outsi: the milling track order runs from inside outwards.
outside>insi: the milling track order runs from outside inwards.

|Clearance track separation [%]:
Separation of the milling tracks (line, spiral, ..) dependent on milling
radius f(FrS+FrK, tip radius + sphere radius).
With 100% track separation, working is with a an offset of FrS+FrK.

|Layer separation Z (1st track):
On clearance outwards a border is cut in the layer around the relief
(free-cut relief). The setting always takes place relative to the cutter
used (FrS + FrK, tip radius + sphere radius), i.e. with the setting 100%
the cutter dips into the material per track with a max. depth which
corresponds with the cutter radius. Typical settings are 20% ..150%.

|Clearance layer number (1..99):
Number of desired layer levels from upper edge of relief to relief base.

#7915 Relief-Korrektur-Parameter

#3518 Steg Daten         --------------
Einstellung der Parameter zur Eingabe der Haltestege.

Nach einer Änderung der Daten wirken sich die Parameter erst auf
die nächste Stegeingabe aus. Bereits eingegebene Stege bleiben unverändert.
Stege werden durch eine Mittellinie eingegeben, welche den äußeren Rand und
die zu haltende Krone schneiden soll.

|Stegdurchmesser(0,5..10)[mm]:
  Stärke (Dicke) des Haltesteges.

|Steg Facetten        (3..45):
  Facetten - Auflösung für den Haltesteg.

|Zeige Unterseite [J/N]:
  Standardeinstellung = Nein.
  In der Standardeinstellung werden die Kronen von Oben gezeigt
  (0° - Stellung). Mit JA kann eine Sicht von Unten gewählt werden
  (180° - Stellung). Damit können die Vertiefungen (Innenbereiche) 
  kontrolliert werden. Die Ansicht von Unten ist eine in Z gespiegelte 
  Ansicht. Die X/Y - Anordnung bleibt unverändert.

|Z-Verschiebung -10..+10 [mm]:
  Standardeinstellung = 0.
  In der Standardeinstellung liegen die Stege in Z zentrisch im Blank.
  Durch die Z - Verschiebung können die Stege aus dem Zentrum verschoben
  werden. Positive Werte verschieben die folgenden Stege in der 0° - 
  Stellung nach Oben.

|Überschneidung 0..1 [mm]:
  Standardeinstellung = 0,2 mm.
  Die Stege werden mit den Kronen verschnitten. Mit der ersten Kronen-
  Berührung endet eine Facette. Damit können besonders bei kleiner 
  Facetten - Zahl Lücken entstehen. Die Lücken sind eigentlich nur ein 
  optisches Problem. Durch die Offsetberechnung für die Fräs Werkzeuge 
  werden die Lücken in der Regel gefüllt. Mit Überschneidung können die 
  Stege in die Kronen hineinragen und die möglichen Lücken füllen. 
  Bei zu groß gewählter Überschneidung können die Stege evtl. in die 
  Vertiefungen hineinragen.

#3119 Roland Drucker     --------------
Fräsdatenexport für Roland Graviermaschinen über Druckertreiber (USB).
Zur Verwendung dieses Exportes muß ein geeigneter Druckertreiber
der Firma Roland installiert sein. Die Daten werden mit dem
selektierten Druckertreiber (Anzeige in der Exportauswahl) exportiert.

Zum erstmaligen Datenexport muß mit 'Drucker einrichten' ein geeigneter
Druckertreiber ausgewählt/eingerichtet werden. Druckertreiber und
Informationen zur Installation erhalten Sie von Ihrem Maschinenlieferanten.

Hier werden Kommandos für die 3D - Bearbeitung nur für Roland erzeugt.
Diese Datenausgabe entspricht in etwa dem HPGL - Export 'Roland 3D'.
Die hier verwendeten Kommandos können nur von 3D - Roland - Maschinen
verarbeitet werden. Für reine 2D - Maschinen (Schilder) verwenden Sie
bitte den Export 'Drucker mill'.  

Zum wiederholten Export können Sie das Hilfsmittel 'direct mill Auto' oder
'Export' in dieser Auswahl verwenden.


|Drucker einrichten:
Den für die Maschine geeigneten Druckertreiber auswählen und einrichten.
Der Druckertreiber muß vor dem ersten Export korrekt installiert sein.
Die Funktion 'Drucker Einrichten' akzeptiert nur Roland Druckertreiber!
Solange kein Druckertreiber ausgewählt wurde, ist der Export über
'Roland EGX-350' voreingestellt. Der Name des Druckers wird in der
Exportauswahl angezeigt. Wird zum Export der Drucker nicht gefunden,
erfolgt die Fehleranzeige 'Printer error!'.

Soweit nur mit einer Maschine gearbeitet wird, muß der Drucker (Roland
Maschine) nur einmal ausgewählt werden und ist dann für alle weitere
Exporte voreingestellt. Arbeiten Sie mit verschiedenen Roland Maschinen
an einem Rechner, müssen Sie bei Wechsel der Maschine den Drucker
erneut auswählen.


|Parameter:
Einstellung der Freifahrposition und der Ausgabeauflösung.

|  Freifahrposition X/Y/Z [mm]:
  Position, die nach der Bearbeitung mit der Maschine angefahren
  werden soll.

|  Schrittauflösung:
  Anpassung der Ausgabeauflösung an die Auflösung der Maschine.
  Übliche Einstellungen sind z.B. 0.025 (0.0254; 0.01).


|Export:
Export der Fräsdaten an die Maschine.
Zum Export wird der eingestellte Drucker und die Parameter verwendet.

#7857 Reihe linear Einfügetext --------
|Number:
  Number of the object in the row.
  The number must be >1. Input area 2 .. 999.

|Separation X/Y:
  Separation of the object from reference point to reference point.
  At least 1 separation must be <> 0.

#7858 kacheln Einfügetext -------------
|Number X/Y:
  Number of objects in the X/Y-direction.
  At least 1 number must be >1. Maximum 10,000 objects are possible.

|Separation X/Y:
  Separation of the object from reference point to reference point
  At least 1 separation must be <> 0.

#0706 Row                --------------
Repeat the marked graphic (in linear rows, polar rows, tile).

|Row linear:
The marked tracks and routes are repeated in rows.
$7857 Reihe linear Einfügetext --------

|Row polar:
The marked tracks and routes are repeated in a circle. For this 
first input the center of the polar row or select it with the 
cursor. You can edit all the data in the following input.

|  Mid-point X/Y::
  Center of the polar order.

|  Separation dXY:
  Separation from the object center to the circle center.

|  Amount:
  Object number they should be created.

|  Start angle:
  Angle for the first object in the polar row.

|  Angle to be filled:
  Area in which the objects are created.

|  Rotation angle:
  Separation for the objects in degrees.

|  Rotate objects:
  'Yes': The objects will be rotated.
  'No': The objects stay in their original rotation.

|Tile:
The marked tracks and routes are repeated in the X- and Y direction.
#7858 kacheln Einfügetext -------------

#0705 Displace Contour   --------------
Calculate parallel track(s) or offsets to the marked contour(s).
With this function only closed contours (no open routes) are usable.

|Offset [mm]:
  Calculation offset in mm.

|Internal/external:
  Internal = correction inwards.
  External = correction outwards.

|Rounded/pointed:
  Rounded = round corners.
  Pointed = sharp corners.

|Retain/delete original:
  Retain original = after the calculation original and corrected
    tracks remain.
  Delete original = after calculation only corrected tracks remain.

|Calculate:
  Calculation start.

#0711 Displace Line      --------------
Calculate parallel path to the marked lines/routes.
Closed Contours are calculated better with 'Displace Contour'.

|Offset [mm]:
  Calculation offset in mm.

|Right/Left:
  Direction of correction right/left of the run direction 
  of the routes.

|Keep/delete original:
  Keep original = following calculation both original
    and corrected tracks are available.
  Delete original =  following calculation only the corrected 
  tracks are available. 

|Calculate:
  Start of calculation.

#0084 Fuse               --------------
To fuse 2 contour blocks, which are to be fused or combined together,
must be selected consecutively. A contour block can consist of one
or more contours or combined contours. Open routes are allowed only
for punching out. Contour blocks are to be selected using the cursor.
The respective selection is ended using <R> or <Esc>. The first
contour block is marked in green, the second in blue.

The function is called repetitive, to fuse another contours. The
function can be ended with the key <Esc> or <R> during the selection
'Fuse/punch out'.

|Punching out:
The paths (contours and routes) in Block 1 are punched out using the
contours in Block 2. Result are the contours and routes which are closed 
in from the contours in the block 2. All vectors which be lying outside 
and the contours in block 2 are removed. Punching out allows 2D and 3D 
paths. Milling data can also be punched out with this.

|Sum:
The outer sum from both contour blocks is formed. Contours from block 1,
which cut contours in block 2, are each combined to complete contours. 
The inner contour segments are deleted. This function is only allowed 
with contours.

|Together:
The inner sum from both contour blocks is formed. The contour segments 
from block 1, which are lying in contours of block 2, are combined to 
new contours. The outside lying contour segments are deleted. This 
function is only allowed with contours.

|Difference 1:
Contour Block 2 is punched out with block 1 and combined into contours. 
The punched out contour segments are deleted. This function is only 
allowed with contours.

|Difference 2:
Contour Block 1 is punched out with block 2 and combined into contours. 
The punched out contour segments are deleted. This function is only 
allowed with contours.

#0713 Inlay              --------------
Automatic calculation of outline (male) or inline (female) mill tracks
for inlays. This function calculates all offsets and all round off. 
Inlays can be used for punch out milling and for pockets 

With milling of 2D parts there inevitable are created round off in the 
inner corner. These round off are created from the cylindrical tool and
cannot be avoided. To match such parts inside the companion piece, the 
opposite part must have the same round off in the outer corners. To mill
equal round off for both parts, You have to select equal tools. The with 
of the enclosed surfaces has to be at lest 2x offset radius on all places.
If this minimum with fall below, there will be build gaps or the contour 
will be ignored.

For various parts it may be important, to create an additional gap 
between the inlay parts. For this You can use the contour offset. A 
negative contour offset creates a gap. A positive contour offset e.g.
will be used for tool consumption.

$7910 Textaufruf 'Intarsien + Abräum'

#7910 Intarsien + Abräum --------------
|Tool # [0..max]:
  Selection of the milling tool for the offset track. 
  <M,F2> or click to the tool graphic for tool input.
  For inlays should be selected a cylindrical tool.

|Target layer [0..LayerMax]:
  Selection of the target layer for the offset track. 
  <M,F2> for the graphical layer selection.

|Contour offset (+/-100)[mm]:
  For the tool path calculation will be used the radius of the selected
  tool ('Tool #'). With 'Contour offset' the tool radius can be enlarged
  or reduced (Additional offset of the cutter tip in pos./neg. direction).
  Input in the positive direction max. 99.999 mm. In the negative 
  direction max. cutter tip radius of the offset tool.

|Smoothing offset [<100% FrS]:
  For clean milling the offset track is worked over with a final cut 
  the width of the smoothing offset. he input follows in % of the dip
  radius. A 'Smoothing offset' = 0% will create no additional smooth
  path. The input 100% creates a smoothing offset with the with of the 
  tool dip. Typical inputs are 10 .. 50%.

|Correction direction:
  Inner (female): correction inwards so that cutouts or pockets 
    are created.
  Outer (male): correction outwards so that milling around is 
    created.

|Direction [down milling, up milling]:
  Milling direction down or up milling. For down milling (Climb cutting) 
  a surface is milled around in the mathematically negative direction. For
  up milling (Conventional milling) a surface is milled around in the 
  positive direction.

|Rounding angle [°]:
  Rounding off of outer corners. Large round off angles creates rough 
  vectors, small angles creates smooth vectors of the outer round off. 
  Typical settings are 5 .. 30°.

|Delete original contour:
  'YES': After the calculation in the target layer are the milling path.
    The contour used for the calculation are deleted.
  'No': The contour used for the calculation are unchanged and can be 
    used later.

|saving with tool:
  'YES' saves the given tool to the milling paths.
  With 'NO' the result is saved without tool (not recommended).

|Clearance process:
  If there are pockets should produced for inlays, the inner areas must 
  be cleared with one of the following strategy. If the material is 
  punched out, no area must be cleared and the 'Clearance process = None'
  can be selected.

|  Line removal:
    Creates clearance lines at the angle to be given in 'Hatching angle'.
    The clearance lines are as far as possible combined together.
    Recommended setting.
|  Line unidirectional:
    Creates clearance lines at the angle to be given in 'Hatching angle'.
    The lines always run in one direction.
|  Track Parallel:
    A clearance track is created through equidistant cutter run lines
    (radius related island engraving).
|  None:
    No clearance movements created. Setting for punch out cutting.

|Overlapping:
  Overlapping of the clearance paths. In order to clear pockets the
  clearance path should overlap. The input follows in % of the dip
  radius. Typical settings are 20 .. 30%.

|Hatching angle:
  Direction of run of the line-shaped hatching tracks in the
  mathematically positive sense or rotation. 0 degrees gives horizontal 
  hatching lines. 90° gives vertical hatching lines.

#0050 Hatch              --------------
The surfaces framed by closed tracks are hatched. The clearance 
(complete surface milled off) differentiates from hatching inter 
alia through the separation of the milling tracks and through the 
combination of the milling lines. 

Non-closed tracks or individual vectors create errors (comp. Vector 
Data format)!

To select the graphic date this function can be used in 2 ways:
No marked pathes:
  All graphic and all texts from the ActLayer are used for the 
  calculation.

Marked graphic:
  Only the marked contours are used for the calculation.

|Tool:
  For the selection 'Save with tool' a complete an correct tool (see
  tool input) is used. The tool will be shown in the input window. 
  <F2, M> or a click onto he tool graphic will open the tool input.

|Target layer:
  Selection of the target layer for the milling data.

|Combine clearance lines:
  'YES' : The hatching lines are combined together.
  'No' : The hatching occurs in single lines.

|internal (inset):
  Selection hatching inside or outside the contours.
  YES = limitation ends are the outer tracks.
  NO  = limiting border is the working frame.

|Line separation:
  Determines the parallel offset of the individual milling tracks.

|Safety:
  Determines the safety separation of the milling tracks in the milling 
  direction of the contour (track). If the value is selected greater 
  than 50% of the line separation, a safety query takes place 
  additionally. It is meaningful fundamental to keep a safety separation 
  to the contour. Otherwise there exist a danger with unstable milling 
  machines to injure the contour. For clearance this setting should be 
  have an amount of approximately 50% of the line separation to connect 
  the clearance lines without a touch of the contours. 

|Hatching angle:
  Determines the hatching angle in degrees in the mathematically positive
  sense of rotation. 0 degrees gives horizontal hatching lines.
  Input area = -180° .. 360°

|Internal block type:
  With YES the functions hatch internal and inwards clearance is carried
  out in block form. This results better milling paths. With No the 
  functions such as hatching/clearance outwards are carried out in one 
  calculation (1 Block).

|Bi-directional:
  The setting 'Bi-directional' is only used for not connected hatching
  (setting 'Combine clearance lines = No').
  'YES': Milling path optimized movement. After each hatch line occours
    a changing of the mill direction (zig-zack-milling).
  'NO': Milling path in one direction only. his setting creates larger 
    raised movements to the start of the next line. This setting will be
    used mainly fr optical engraving or for better surface quality.

|Save contour jointly:
  'YES': Saves the hatching limits (contours) with the paths to be 
    created.
  'No': Saves the hatching lines without any contours.

|Save with tool:
  'YES': Saves the given tool to the milling paths. 
  With 'NO' the results are saved as graphic path (without tool)
    (not recommended).

#8915 List layer content --------------
Lists the layer data of all layers in a file and opens this 
using an editor.

Displayed are: program version, file name, date + time, 
working frame, Layer#, data limits, number of vectors and 
text lines, layer tool or tool in layer, paths and times
in and above the material.

The data which is to be shown can be selected previously.

If the graphic layer contains paths, then the number of 
contours is shown. If the layer contains text then after 
the number of text lines the number of characters is indicated. 
Counted are all symbols > Space (#33..#255).

#8917 List layer content --------------
Lists the layer data in the ActLayer in a file and opens 
this using an editor.

Displayed are: program version, file name, date + time, 
working frame, Layer#, data limits, number of vectors and 
text lines, layer tool or tool in layer, paths and times
in and above the material.

If the graphic layer contains paths, then the number of 
contours is shown. If the layer contains text then after 
the number of text lines the number of characters is indicated. 
Counted are all symbols > Space (#33..#255).

#1107 Graphic ZOOM +     --------------
Zoom graphic. Frame picture section with a rectangle
and represent enlarged.

After clicking on with <M , F2> in some module
you get an extra zoom selection.

#1106 Graphic ZOOM -     --------------
Un-zoom graphic. Replot graphic half size.

After clicking on with <M , F2> in some modules
you get an extra zoom selection.

#1105 Graphic NORM       --------------
Restore normal graphic settings. 
The graphic is replotted with the set
picture limits.

#1102 Graphic New        --------------
Graphic redraw. Plot graphic with the current setting.

#1111 Graphic All        --------------
So adjust the graphic that all parts are indicated
and replot.

#0710 Laser Hatching     --------------
Fills contours for laser working.

The surfaces framed by closed contours are hatched. Non-closed
tracks or individual vectors create errors (see Vector Data format)!
A simple deepen engraving (laser hatching with lines, routes) can be 
exported directly from the graphic layer without hatching (see Export . 
Laser . Laser Parameter).

Using 'Laser Hatching' hatching offset and lines are automatically created 
in several directions. Data is saved with an automatically created tool 
object for lasers. The tool object cannot be changed manually.

|Parameter Array  (WSt 1..16):
  Parameter settings for TRODAT laser.
  Steering of the feeds and the laser light in accordance with the 
  TRODAT reference manual. There are selectable 16 sets of parameters 
  [WSt. 1..16] (see Export . Laser . Laser Parameter).

|Target layer:
  Selection of the target layer for the laser data.

|Contour offset   (+0..0,1)[mm]:
  An optionally laser beam offset (to the contours) can be calculated.
  With Konturoffset = 0 there results no offset calculation.
  Standard = 0.

|Correction:
  Correction direction ext(milling around) or int(cutout).

|Delete original contour:
  'YES' deletes the contour used for the calculation. 
  'No' the originally contours are not cleared.

|Line separation:
  Determines the parallel offset of the laser hatching.
  Usually settings are between 0,025 and 0,075 mm.
  Standard = 0,050 mm.

|Save with contour:
  'YES' saves the hatching limits with the paths created to these.

|Directions:
  For a 2D processing mostly the setting '1' for 0° - direction is 
  meaningful. Adjustable are hatching lines in
  - 0° - direction.
  - 0° and 90° - direction.
  - 0°, 60° and 120° - direction.
  - 0°, 45, 90° and 135° - direction.
  - 0°, 36, 72°, 108 and 144° - direction.
  - 0°, 30, 60°, 90, 120 and 150° - direction.

#1203 Volume Aspect      --------------
The milling path in the ActLayer is indicated as 
volume aspect of the workpiece. 

For this a quader is so processed as if it has been 
milled. For this indication valid tools (layer tool 
or tool in the milling data) are necessary.

|Preparatory inputs:
|Limits:
  Work piece: Limits are the picture frame and the milling 
    paths.
  Milling path: The indicator limits are determined only 
    by the milling paths.

|Resolution:
  Setting very fine to very coarse. 'Very fine' requires 
  longer computer times, 'very coarse' creates a coarse 
  gritted aspect.

|Create:
  The aspect is calculated.

|Adjusting of the volume aspect:
|Palette selection:
  Palette selection for the color picture.

|Graphic:
  Graphic setting for the color picture.

|Posn. height:
  Shows 3D relief position and angle of slope at the 
  cursor position.
  RX, RY, RZ: relief positions in mm.
  WiZX, WiZY: slope in degrees at the relief position for
    the directions Z-X (horizontal) and Z-Y (vertical).

|Height line:
  The height line is shown from a horizontal section through
  the relief. The cut line is positioned in the Y-direction 
  using the cursor.

|Standard/Zoom Projection:
  3D indicator over grid, vectors, points or surface. Direction
  of view can be set in 10° steps. Using PosA you adjust the 
  line representation color. With input PosA without color 
  there results a perspective indicator with adjustable height 
  level marking.

|Save relief:
  Save volume aspect as relief.

|Render:
  Calculate (render) the picture of the graphic in the 
  projection angle and using defined light source. 

|  Projection angle: 
    Set projection angle.

|  Light angle: 
    Angle and separation of the lighting source.

|  Resolution: 
    Picture resolution 'slight' .. 'high'.

|  Drawing: 
    Setting soft/hard.

|  Contrast: 
    Grey toning 'slight' .. 'very strong'.

|  Graphic: 
    View calculated picture.

|  Save relief: 
    Save picture as relief.

|  BMP picture: 
    Save the picture in a BMP file.

#1204 Volume Aspect      --------------
The milling path in the ActLayer is indicated as 
volume aspect of the workpiece. 

For this a quader is so processed as if it has been 
milled. For this indication valid tools (layer tool 
or tool in the milling data) are necessary.

|Resolution:
  Setting very fine to very coarse. 'Very fine' 
  requires longer computer times, 'very coarse' 
  creates a coarse gritted aspect.
  Presetting = normal

|Palette selection:
  Palette selection for the color picture.
  Presetting = blue intensive

|Projection angle: 
  Set projection angle.
  Presetting = top view (0°/0°)

|Drawing: 
  Setting soft, middle, hard.
  Presetting = middle

|BMP picture: 
  Save the picture in a BMP file.

#3308 Relief Import      --------------
Read in picture or surface data as relief.
The previous relief data is overwritten.

|LANG RLF / Baublys BFF:
Relief formats from other manufacturers (Firma LANG, Firma Baublys).

|LG1 rows / ISO rows / ASCII Support Pt.:
Scatter plots or ordered milling data. 
Import conditions: The data rows are horizontal. For a better quality 
the support point separation should have the resolution of the Y axis.
The program determines the import data and shows the relief data. 
Normally the suggested data can be taken unchanged. Only in some 
exceptions changes are recommended.
|  Zero point X0/Y0/Z0:
  Relief limit left, below from surface data.
|  Width X/Height Y/Depth Z:
  Relief expansion determined from surface data.
|  Resolution X/Y:
  The program determines the most frequent used resolution and 
  suggest these as resolution - setting. The best quality will 
  be reached for resolution settings is the supportpoint distance.
|  Pixel -Interpol X/Y:
  Gaps in then surface data will e interpolated in X, Y until the 
  setting for Pixel -Interpol (filled with the neighbor value).

|ASCII Support Pt.: (for general 3D scatter plots).
Suitable for the data format: *.DOC/*.ASC (= MasterCAM ASCII); 
*.FIA (= MasterCAM and Renishaw).
Number format for the support points: '123.456 123.456 12.34' or
'X123.456 Y123.456 Z12.34' or 'X=123.456 Y=123.456 Z=12.34'.
The order X, Y, Z must be observed.
The row start is 'M' or 'NEWROW'
The program determines the import data and shows the relief data. 
Normally the suggested data can be taken unchanged. Only in some 
exceptions changes are recommended.
|  Zero point X0/Y0/Z0:
  Relief limit left, below from surface data.
|  Width X/Height Y/Depth Z:
  Relief expansion determined from surface data.
|  Resolution X/Y:
  The program determines the most frequent used resolution and 
  suggest these as resolution - setting. The best quality will
  be reached for resolution settings is the supportpoint distance.
|  Pixel -Interpol X/Y:
  Gaps in then surface data will e interpolated in X, Y until the 
  setting for Pixel -Interpol (filled with the neighbor value).

|ACSYS:
Imports ASCII Scatter plots (digitizing data) of the firm ACSYS.

|Gauß-Krüger:
Import of Gauß-Krüger (DHM) coordinate (landscape - relief data).
The program expects row formed arranged 3 - vector data.
|  Scaling factor [0.00001..1]:
  The coordinates of the earth are normally too big for an direct
  relief import and must be scaled down. Typical Setting is 0.001.
|  Row run direction [h/v]:
  The rows must be available in horizontal or vertical direction.
  Other directions cannot be processed. 

|STL:
$3312 Import STL         --------------


%STL - Z -location correction.
%-----------------------------
After the STL import follows the indication 'Displace relief to Z=0
[Y/N]'. With input 'YES' the relief will be displaced in Z -
direction until the highest relief point Z = 0. The amount of the
displacement is saved in the relief - data. For projections onto
this relief the displacement will be marked in the milling pathes.
For the DIN/ISO - exports
  #53 : MAHO MH800
  #63 : Andronic/8V Micromat
  #64 : Siemens 840D
the Z - offset will be outputted as a zero point displacement with
G92 X0 Y0 Znn (nn = displacement).


|DXF-3DFace:
Read in DXF files using 3DFACE - surfaces. These data are, for
example, created using Roland Picza digitalization machines.
Attention: Here only files with 3DFACE - surfaces can be correctly 
read in. In cases of doubt please check your data using a suitable 
Editor or CAD.

|Import Photo:
$1755

#3311 Relief Export      --------------
Save relief as picture or surface data.

|STL (CAD):
Very fast export with reduced surface amount. With this procedure 
Z tolerances between the singular triangles are created. In top view
all surfaces are closed. Many CAD - systems accept this data also.

|STL (closed.):
Export with reduced amount of surfaces. The surface is closed 
without gaps. With this procedure bigger relief tolerances are
possible.

|STL (connected):
STL is a stereo lithographic surface format from the firm
3D-Systems. For export STL binary files are created.
The Surface is closed without gaps. 

|DXF-3DFace:
Export of current relief in a DXF file using 3DFACE - surfaces. 
This file can, for example, be read-in using AutoCAD.

|BMP picture:
Save the relief as grey shade picture (256 shades) in BMP
format.

#8795 Relief projection  --------------
Projection of milling data from a layer onto relief surface.
The data for projection can consist of 2D or 3D mill paths 
and must own an correct defined tool (layer tool or tool in 
the data).

%Suitable way to project data.
%-----------------------------
1) Create a suitable surface (relief) in the relief module. 
For this You can open a relief, import surfaces from STL, DXF,
Picture or construct a relief.
2) Create milling paths in a CAD - layer, which should projected
onto the relief. The milling path need at least 1 tool (tool
in the data or layer tool).
3) Start the function 'Relief projection . Projection'. The
projected data will be saved in a layer immediately.
4) Control the projected mill paths with 'Norm/Zoom Projection'.
If needed, You can repeat the projection and overwrite the 
data in the target layer.


%Function for relief projection.
%-------------------------------
|Open relief:
Opens a relief from a file. This function overwrites the data
in the relief memory. Other surface formats You can import or
create in the relief module.

|Projection:
The prepared mill data are projected onto the actual relief.
For 2D graphic data the safety height and mill depth of the 
layer tool will be shown.
he projected mill paths are saved into a layer. For this 
You have to select a target layer.

|Norm Projection:
The projected tool mid tracks are viewed in perspective.
The perspective angle is adjustable with the 8 direction 
buttons. With setting top view (all angles = 0) the 3D tracks 
are displayed in gray (color) levels.

|  PosA:
  Color setting for raised movements. 
  PosA = black: The raised movements are shown in gray.
  PosA = cyan: The raised movements are shown in cyan color.
  PosA = red: The raised movements are shown in red color.
  PosA = gray: Display in perspective with high level marking.
    Tracks above the entered level are shown in black, tracks
    below this level are shown in gray color. Raised movements 
    are not shown.

|  OK:
  The graphic will be created with the entered adjustments.

|  Esc:
  The function will be interrupted.

|Zoom Projection
Enlarged 3D tool mid track view in perspective. An enlargement
of the (3D) milling data is displayed in perspective. This 
function is used following 'Norm projection'.

#1318 Nameplate          --------------
Program for engrave of ready made nameplates. For a easier orientation 
the nameplate input works with a graphic model in the background. The 
program makes possible the simple text arrangement onto existing 
nameplates.

Nameplates which should be inscribed, are digitized with a scanner and
used as a background. The model is used as a form and the texts are 
filled easily in the designed areas. With this the individual text 
field must not positioned. The engraving onto the nameplate is 
controlled immediately. 

The nameplate input follows one after another in work groups:
1) Prepare the program with 'load background', 'Set limits', and 
   'Input layer tool'.
   For a nameplate You must determine a work area and a tool at
   least.  
2) Input text in the designed fields with 'Enter help lines' and
   'Enter text'.
   The inscription is allocated onto the nameplate.
3) Control and export the milling data with 'Mill control' and
   'Mill export'.
   Export the finished and controlled milling path with the related
   tool to the milling machine.

|Load background picture:
You can import the graphic of a nameplate and use as background. Suitable
graphic formats are PCX, BMP, GIF, JPG and JPEG. For a problem free import
we recommend the JPG/JPEG format. These gray scale or color scale pictures 
are imported with the correct dimension. The formats PCX, BMP and GIF are 
suitable here only as 8 bit gray scale pictures. The GIF - format 
furthermore dos not transfer the right resolution or dimension.

A background graphic can be determined with the aid 'Graphic background'
also.


|Background setting:
The picture representation is selected here.

|  Background contrast [1..10]:
  Mostly the background picture is shown pale, in order to recognize 
  the graphic input onto the background clearly. The setting 1 takes 
  place a very pale picture, the setting  10 takes place a normal 
  contrast picture with dark elements. Standard setting = 5.

|  Background invert:
  Yes: The background picture is shown with inverted grayscale. This
    means dark picture areas are shown bright, bright picture areas 
    are shown dark.
  No: The background picture is shown with the determined gray scale.

The background setting can be determined also with 'Graphic background .
Background setting'.

You can make out nameplates without background graphic also. In this 
case You must measure and enter the text position of each text field.


|Set work limits:
Enter the work limits upon the dimension of the nameplate. The graphic 
zero point always is on the left - below corner

The work dimensions You can determine with the function 'Layout . 
Work limits' also.


|Enter layer tool:
For a milling You need always a tool. Simple engraving as engrave 
nameplates occurs in a graphic layer (AktLayer) wit a allocated layer
tool. First choose the layer in which the inscription is generated. 
After this enter the layer tool. A simple engraving tool You can select 
in a graphic list by using the button 'Type'. If needed You can adapt 
the tool data.

These inputs You can determine also with he aid 'Select AktLayer' and
with the function 'Extra . Tool input'.


|Enter help lines:
The help line input is optional. Help lines are useful if he nameplates 
uses rows and/or column. The text input snatch to the existing help lines.
With this You save the forced position input for the individual text 
fields.

Help lines You can determine also with the function 'Drawing . Help lines'.


|Enter text:
Enter the texts with here parameters into the designed text fields. Each
text line can contain a serial number.

You can enter text lines wit the function 'Text . Edit text line' also.


|Mill control:
With 'Mill control' the engraving is drawn with the entered tool for a 
easy control. This function needs a correct entered tool. Without a 
correct tool only the tool middle line is shown. 

The milling path control can occur also with the aid 'Graphic tool track'.


|Mill export:
Export the entered engraving to the milling machine.

You can export the milling date with the function 'File . direct mill' 
or after a used export path with the aid 'direct mill auto'.


|Aid:
Show the description to this navigator.


|End navigator:
End the nameplate navigator.


You can enter nameplates manually without this navigator and without 
a background graphic also. All function You can select in the program 
menu also.

#7940 Instruction        --------------
Instruction and work sequences to the program.
You need the Internet Explorer and Adobe Reader
for reading.

The help files must be located in the program 
subdirectory '\help\'. If the help files was not
found an error report will result.

#1113 Graphic Background --------------
Display a picture, relief or scanner background graphic.
The selection possibility is dependent on the program version.
The relief or scanner picture can be used only if appropriate 
data are available in the modules.

Indication of the settings:
Black: current selected background.
Blue : the setting can be selected.
Grey : the setting is not possible (no data in the module).

|Background picture:
Show the background. The background picture will be opened 
using 'Load background picture'. The background picture will 
not be rendered and can be adjusted using 'Background setting'.

|Relief:
Shows relief graphic in background. If the relief module 
graphic setting is 'rendering' (standard), the background 
graphic will be rendered also. For all other settings the 
background graphic is the gray scale picture.
If rendering is switched off, the relief graphic can be
adjusted using 'Background setting'.

|Scan:
For scanner graphic in background one can only work with whole 
numbered enlargement/reduction factors (1,2,...n). The max. 
enlargement is 8.

|Load background picture:
Load a background picture in BMP-, PCX- (256- shades of gray) 
or in relief format. The background picture is always laded 
with the zero point at left-bottom. The dimensions of the 
picture can be determined in the inquiry 'Relief dimensions'.
Alternatively, using Relief . Relief Edit . Relief in Background 
Pic. a relief can be stored in the background.

|Background setting:
The picture representation is selected here.

|  Background contrast [1..10]:
  Mostly the background picture is shown pale, in order to recognize 
  the graphic input onto the background clearly. The setting 1 takes 
  place a very pale picture, the setting  10 takes place a normal 
  contrast picture with dark elements. Standard setting = 5.

|  Background invert:
  Yes: The background picture is shown with inverted grayscale. This
    means dark picture areas are shown bright, bright picture areas 
    are shown dark.
  No: The background picture is shown with the determined gray scale.

#1741 Filter             --------------
Relief smooth or remove picture error.

Filters are mostly used for imported data. E.g. after an import
of dot clouds digitizing errors must be removed (with Error pix.,
Rogue value, Approximate). Or after an import of STL data gaps
must be compensated (with Correction filter 2).

|Error pix.:
Regional filter. The point, which deviates from all its
neighbouring values by more than the given value is approximated.

|Rogue value:
Delete large deviations.

|Approximate/approximate heavily:
The relief is smoothed. As required, the approximation
can be repeated several times.

|Smooth:
The relief resolution is doubled and the relief simultaneous
approximated. This filter takes place very much data and should
be used only for small resolved reliefs.

|Radius filter:
Smooth the relief, all edges are rounded off.

|Correction filter 1:
Smooth the relief, all edges are rounded off at one side.

|Correction filter 2:
This filter fills holes (e.g. following STL Import) up to a max.
width of 2*Fr.
  error radius (Fr): half the width of the hole to be filled.
  fill (flat/round): hole flat, fill spherically.
  type of calculation (exact/point): (s. Relief Correction)
    exact: expensive and error-free calculation.
    point: rapid calculation for slightly curved surfaces.

#3312 Import STL         --------------
Import of 3D - STL - surface data.
STL is a Stereo Lithography - format of the Firma 3D-Systems.
For a import there were accepted ASCII and binary data. The measure 
unit is always mm.

The STL - data should be available in handling position. If not, 
the STL - surfaces can be rotated before the relief is created.

|Enter STL - position:
  The surface could be rotated around the X, Y or Z - axis in the 
  area -180° .. +180°. The rotation results in 5° - steps through 
  click on the buttons left and right beside the angle display.
  Alternatively the last inputted axis can be rotated using the 
  mouse wheel. Exact inputs are manual possible in the number 
  input area.


|    Angle XY:
    Horizontal surface rotation round the Z - axis.

|    Angle YZ:
    Surface rotation round the X - axis.

|    Angle XZ:
    Surface rotation round the Y - axis.

|    Volume aspect.
    The 3D - graphic could be adjusted to Your requirements. There
    can be selected the line aspect (vector graphic), relief aspect,
    rendering aspect or a combination of the line and relief or 
    rendering aspect. The aspect shown in black is selected. The 
    aspect shown in blue can be selected.


The program determines the import data and shows the relief data. 
Normally the suggested data can be taken unchanged. Only in some 
exceptions changes are recommended.

|  Zero point X0/Y0/Z0:
  Relief limit left, below from surface data.

|  Width X/Height Y/Depth Z:
  Relief expansion determined from surface data.
  With shift of the zero point and increase of the relief dimension,
  e.g. a border round the surface can be generated.

|  Resolution X/Y:
  Raster resolution for the relief calculation.
  Smaller resolutions takes place bigger amounts of relief data
  and with this bigger calculation times. The suggested resolution
  is mostly enough for a fine work.


!Notice:
Dependent to the quality the STL - data can contain some gaps 
(surface error). Very small gaps (1 relief point) will be filled 
by he program automatically. Bigger errors must be filled after 
the import with a filter or manually. A suitable filter is 
the 'correction filter 2'.

#1767 Export Extract     --------------
Creates a rectangular or an elliptical extract from the relief.
The extract can be exported in a file or replace the actual Relief.

|Border:
The Border for a rectangular or an elliptical extract is generated.

|Width, Height:
Enter the wished Border width/height.

|x0 left, y0 below, x1 right, y1 above:
Position of the outer extract rectangle.

|Measurement in:
For the number input there is a selection for 3 settings:
  mm, pt. center: Dimension in mm, center of the reliefpoints.
  mm, pt. outside: Dimension in mm, outside border of the reliefpoints.
  Pix.: Dimension in reliefpoints (pixel).

|Export file:
Exports the relief extract to a file.

|Replace act. relief:
The actual relief is replaced by the extract.

#1768 Export Frame       --------------
Export an extract from a relief, which lies within a frame
contour. The relief parts, which lie outside the frame contour
are shielded (does not over-write the existing relief on
importing in ReliefVTR).

The frame is a contour entered and marked in CAD before.

#3012 Data list         ---------------
The last opened or saved files (SLD/LG1/H2R - format)
are listed. The file which is selected in the list will
be opened. (see file . open).

#7908 Verknüpfungslogik  --------------
|Logic (ADD, SUB, COPY, AND, OR, -OR, INVERS, SKAL, AND(Clr), Activ):
Kind of the object combination with the relief background (existing
relief). Some of the objects don't use all of the combinations.
%ADD(+)        = Add to the background.
%SUB(-)        = Subtract from the background (deepen).
%COPY          = Replace the background.
%AND(min)      = Result height is contained in the background 
%                and the object.
%OR(max)       = Result height is contained in the background 
%                or the object.
%-OR(min)      = Subtract and OR (deepen OR).
%INVERT        = Mirror the background in Z direction.
%SCALE(mul)    = Multiply the background with the object depth (scale).
%AND(clr)      = Punch out the background with the object in 3D.
%ACTIVE/IN-..  = ACTIVE : Create the object; 
%                INACTIVE : Don't create the object.

#0797 MillCorr 2D/3D     --------------
2D(3D) milling track calculation for 1 tool in ActLayer.

You can use this function in two ways:
No path marked:
  All graphic and all text - data from the ActLayer are
  used for the mill path calculation.

Marked graphic:
  The marked graphic - data will be used for the mill
  path calculation.

The mill path calculation needs a tool with complete and
correct tool data (see parameter . tool input). The tool is
shown at the input window. The milling track offset results
from the tool data (FRes) + contour offset.

|Tool#:
Selection of the offset-tool. The tool is addressed with its number 
in the tool library (#0..199). The selected tool is shown in the 
window on the right side. If there is no tool library created or a 
new tool should be entered or changed, the tool library input can 
be activated by click onto the tool window. Alternatively the tool 
library input is activated by enter <M> or <F2> in the tool number 
input. If the tool path calculation is break off by error report 
(e.g. 'tool without milling depth', 'no tip radius' ...), please 
complete the tool input (see help tool input).

|Target layer:
Select the target layer for the offset path (result of the path 
calculation). If there are data in the target layer already, the new 
path is saved in addition. With <M> or <F2> You will reach the 
layer selection.

|Contour offset:
Additional displacement of the cutter tip in pos/neg direction. In 
positive direction (offset extension) max. 99,999 mm. In negative 
direction (offset reduction) max. tool tip radius.
The contour offset is added to the tool radius (FRes) and is used as
a tool correction (offst) (e.g. for a tool consumption). Mostly this 
offset is not used and is 0.

|Process 2D, 2D+3D, 3D:
Correction process 2D/3D.
2D: The contours are travelled around only at the full milling depth.
2D+3D: The contours are travelled and, with cone-shaped tools, cut out
in the inner corners.
3D: Only the inner corners are cut out using a cone-shaped tool.

In more easy programs the 3D procedures are not available.

|Correction:
Correction direction ext(milling around) or int(cutout).

|Direction:
Milling direction down or up milling. For down milling a surface
(relief surface) is milled around in the mathematically negative
direction.

|Round-off angle:
Rounding off of outer corners (5..180°). An angle of 5° to ca. 30°
rounds off all corners. An angle >120° (e.g. 150°) forms corners
from all roundings in the given radius.
With some cases a too big round-off angle can create problems. To 
avoid this the setting should be in the area of about 20°..30°.

|Delete Original Contour:
'YES' deletes the contour used for the calculation. 'No' the
originally contours are not cleared.

|Save with tool [Y/N]:
'YES' saves the given tool to the milling paths. With 'NO'
the result is saved as graphic path (without tool).

|Clearance process:
|  Line removal:
  Create clearance contours and clearance lines at the angle
  to be given.
  The clearance lines are as far as possible combined together.
|  Line uniform:
 Create clearance contours and clearance lines at the angle
  to be given.
  The lines always run in one direction.
|  Track Parallel:
  A clearance track is created through equidistant cutter run lines
  (radius related island engraving).
|  None:
  No clearance movements created.

|Overlapping:
Overlapping of clearance paths. A small overlapping results less 
clearance path. With an overlapping of e.g. 0% there results the 
danger, a rest splint will result in the milling ground. A big 
overlapping results more clearance path. For standard milling a 
overlapping of abut 20% is recommended. 

|Hatching angle:
Run direction of the line-shaped hatching tracks in mathematically
positive rotation sense. The hatching angle can be entered in the 
area -180°..+180°. 0° gives horizontal hatching lines.

#1319 Plate auto layout  --------------
Automatic plate layout creation for 'Single plate', 'Column' or a 
'Plate matrix' with single plates or column. The text rows, which 
are created with auto layout ca be edited with 'Text . Edit row'. 

The rows are first created with de selected font in 'Single plate' or 
'Column'. If there where wished multiple fonts, the font must be changed 
with 'Text . Edit row' after the plate creation.

Before the data input for a single plate or a Column, the 'plate borders'
must be entered.

|Single plate.
A single plate consist of a pre determined number of horizontal text rows. 
The row height, separation ... are calculated automatically according to 
the determination. With each input the plate is calculated and shown in the 
graphic newly.

|Column.
A Column consists of a determined number of column with text rows. In 
additional there can be determined a head row and a foot row with the 
complete width of the plate. The column division follows the user input 
(column width, separation, row number ...). With each input the column is 
calculated and shown newly.

|Matrix.
A matrix is a multiple arrangement of single plates or columns. This means 
before the data input for a matrix is the data input for the single plate 
or column necessary. With each input the matrix is calculated and shown 
newly.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Plate border.
Before an plate or column input the borders for the plate must be 
determined. A plate is situated an its left, bottom side always on 0/0. 
As borders are entered only he plate width and the plate height 
Border left, below, right, above: Text separation to he plate border.
Show plate border = Yes: Shows the additional border in the graphic.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Single plate:
Input for a single plate with multiple rows. The input is separated in a 
global area (font .. orientation). This inputs are used for all text rows. 
And the local area (row .. separation). This inputs are used for the 
selected row only. 

|Windows button:
Tool (repair): All user settings are deleted.
Confirmation (o.k.): The settings are adopted and the plate created.
Abort (esc): The input is aborted.

|Inputs in the global area:
|Font:
Character set selection for the plate. The font an the text parameters 
can be changed later with 'Text . edit row'. 

|Row number:
The wished number of text rows in the plate.

|Covering [%]:
Part of the disposal engraving area, which should be covered with text. 
With the setting 100% the plate will be made without any separation space, 
the hole area inside the plate border will be engraved without any space.

|Orientation:
Text orientation within the text rows.
Input 'L' = left; 'Z' = centered = standard; 'R' = right.

|Inputs in the local area:
|H-factor (height factor):
Affect for the text height in the comparison to the other text rows. 
A factor >1 enlarged this text row.

|R-height (row height):
Text row height setting in mm.

|Separation (row separation):
Setting for the text row separation (gap) in mm.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Column (plate with multiple rows):
Input for a single plate with multiple columns. A column can obtain a head 
and a foot row with the hole plate width. The input is divided in the 
global area (font .. foot row height). This inputs are used for all text 
rows. And the local area (column .. orientation). This inputs are valid 
only for the selected text column.

|Windows button:
Confirmation (o.k.): The settings are adopted and the plate created.
Abort (esc): The input is aborted.

|Settings in the global area:
|Font:
Character set selection for the plate. The font and the text parameters 
can be changed later with 'Text . edit row'. 

|Column number:
The wished number of text columns in the plate.

|Rows per column:
Number of text rows in each column.

|Line height:
Text line height in he columns.

|line Covering [%]:
Part of the disposal engraving area, which should be covered with text. 
With the setting 100% the plate will be made without any separation space, 
the hole area inside the plate border will be engraved without any space.

|Head row height, Head row separation:
Input for the head row height an its separation to he columns. Wit head 
row height = 0 there is no head row created.

|Foot row height, Foot row separation:
Input for the foot row height an its separation to he columns. Wit foot 
row height = 0 there is no head row created.

|Orientation:
Text orientation within the text rows.
Input 'L' = left; 'Z' = centered = standard; 'R' = right.

|Inputs in the local area:
|Width (column width): 
Input for the column width in mm. With 'lock' ('!', click with the cursor 
onto '~'), the entered width can be locked. This means: With the input of 
other settings, the locked setting would not changed. With the 'unlock'
setting ('~') the column is changed with altering the settings for the 
other columns.

|Separation (column separation):
Input for the column separation in mm. With 'lock' ('!', click with the 
cursor onto '~'), the entered separation can be locked. This means: With 
the input of other settings, the locked setting would not changed. With the 
'unlock' setting ('~') the column is changed with altering the settings for 
the other columns.

|Orientation:
Text orientation in the text rows: 'L' = left; 'Z' = center; 'R' = right

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Plate matrix:
Matrix creation with multiple single plates or columns. Before the input 
of a matrix, the single plate ore column must be entered.

|Source:
Setting for single plate or column for the matrix creation.

|Material width/height:
Setting for the material width and height for multiple plates. The material 
size must be greater then the plate border entered in 'Plate border'. The 
material size should be enough for he wished number of plates.

|Mat.Border left, below, right, above:
Plate separation to he material border. The plate are created with the 
entered minimum separation.

|Plate separation X/Y:
Separation for the plates to each other.

|Plate border:
Setting for an optional marked plate border. This milling path are saved 
in a separate layer (border layer).
No border: There were no milling path for the borders created.
Frame: For each plate were created rectangular frames around the plate.
Corner: For each plate were placed corner marking lines.
Corner points: For each plate were placed corner marking points.
Lines: For the plates were created horizontal and vertical lines.

|Border layer:
Selection for a layer which contains the border milling path. The border 
layer should be not the same layer which contains the text rows.

|Number of plates:
Input for the wished plate number. The really creatable plates are shown 
in the graphic. Is the entered plate number greater than the reachable 
plate number, there follows an report.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Edit row:
Text input with the standard text input ('Text . edit row'). All the 
settings for each row can be changed. Before an input the layout for 
an single plate, column or matrix must be created.

!Remark:
After the text parameter changing the single plate, column or matrix 
creation is not permitted. With a new creation all the entered text 
parameter are lost.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Edit text:
Text input or import with an text editor. The editor can be activated with 
or without line numbering (see parameter). Before an input the layout for 
a single plate, column or matrix must be created.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Import plate rows:
The texts for a single row or all rows of a single plate or a column are 
imported from a file or entered with the text editor. Before an input the 
layout for a single plate or a column must be created.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Import matrix rows:
The texts for a single row or all rows of a matrix or a column are imported 
from a file or entered with the text editor. Before an input the layout for
a matrix must be created.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|RdWr plate layout:
Open or save the layout (settings) for a singe plate, column or matrix.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Parameter:
Settings for the plate auto layout.

|Text editor with line numbers [Y/N]:
'YES' = For the text editor line numbers were created.

|Auto distortion modus:
If the text width exceeds the determined text row length, the operation 
for the text width can be determined.
Individual: If the max. length is exceeded each text row is 
  compressed separately. 
All rows: If one row exceed the max. length all text rows are 
  compressed symmetrical.
Same eight: If one row with the same text height exceeds the max. length, 
  all text rows with the same height are compressed symmetrical.

|Auto distortion S-plate/Matrix:
The entered 'Auto distortion modus' is valid for a single plate/column 
or the whole matrix.

|Matrix arrangement:
Determination of the order for the plates within a matrix (determination 
of the order for the milling path). 
meander: Alternately work from left to right and in the follow row 
  from right to left and so on.
horizontal: Works in horizontal rows from left to right.
vertical: Works in vertical columns from above to below.

#3192 New Project        --------------
Delete PROJECT - directory.

Under PROJECT you can save all data, even foreign data, which
are linked with your current work. Using 'Save Project' these
data are packed and saved together in a target file. If you
reopen this project then all data are again available in the
PROJECT - directory.

The open/save of projects is useful e.g. for complete
work with the modulus ReliefVTR.

#3194 Open Project       --------------
Select a project and unpack in the PROJECT - directory.

Under PROJECT you can save all data, even foreign data, which
are linked with your current work. Using 'Save Project' these
data are packed and saved together in a target file. If you
reopen this project then all data are again available in the
PROJECT - directory.

The open/save of projects is useful e.g. for complete
work with the modulus ReliefVTR.

#3195 Save Project       --------------
Pack all data on the PROJECT - directory and save together.

Under PROJECT you can save all data, even foreign data which
are linked with your current work. Using 'Save Project' these
data are packed and saved together in a target file. If you
reopen this project then all data are again available in the
PROJECT - directory.

The open/save of projects is useful e.g. for complete
work with the modulus ReliefVTR.

#3198 Direct Mill        --------------
Graphics and texts are converted into tool paths, linked with
layer tools and saved in the desired export form.
All layers, which are marked in colour are
exported in increasing order (0..Max.Layer). Layers, which are
not to be exported are to be marked in white by clicking on.

With export in H2R/LG1 formats, data are separated
by tool-station numbers.

A valid tool must be entered for every layer with 2D milling data
(comp. Parameter . Tool Input). If there are 3D milling data (e.g. from a
cutout calculation), then the tool data also saved in the graphic layer
is also exported.

|Feed limit ON/OFF (HCAM only):
With feed limit = one the milling feed for curves is limited according
to their radius, so that ideal feeds are achieved for the machine.
Radii for the curves are determined automatically from the program.
The feed limits are arranged in the table of radii in % of the
maximum feed.

|Select order (HCAM only):
Select the layer to be exported and determine the export sequence.
Input example: 1,7,12,3-6.
0.1..Maxlayer: layers, which are to be exported. Several consecutive
layers can be combined using '-' (e.g. 4-9). All other characters
(e.g. ,)are interpreted as number separation. The multiple input of
a layer is possible. If no order is given, then the layers are
exported in increasing order. The complete line can be deleted
using <Ctrl Y>.

Export path.
Select Your wished export path (e.g. DIN/ISO, LG1Obj ...). The program
list the last 3 export ways. If You wish an path that is not listed,
select 'all' and the program list the whole export ways.

For help, please first select the export path and then <F9>.

#1731 Generate new       --------------
Calculates the relief new with the settings in 'New
Relief' and the objects. A relief has to calculated 
new after changing the object characteristic.

#0410 Demark all         --------------
Select / remove all marking.

#0411 Mark track posn.   --------------
Mark a track or route in the ActLayer using end point. This function
seeks the nearest position to the cursor. All tracks, which lie
within the rectangle with at least one support point, are marked
using a frame. With concurrent pressing of the <Sft> key the previous
marking is retained.

#0412 Mark in layer      --------------
A path (track or route) is sought in all layers. The layer with the
nearest path is switched as ActLayer and the path is marked. The same
effect is produced by search with simultaneously pressed <Ctrl> key.

#0413 Paths -info        --------------
Show vector information on the marked paths. For individual paths
the path designation is displayed, for several paths the number of
contours and tracks as well as the number of polygon points, the
elongation and the centre of the data. With 'Path in material' only 
the 2D - path is shown also with 3D tracks.

#0414 Cut <Ctrl X>       --------------
Exchange marked path via the (program- intermediate store.

#0415 Copy <Ctrl C>      --------------
Exchange marked path via the (program- intermediate store.

#0416 Input <Ctrl V>     --------------
Exchange marked path via the (program- intermediate store.

#7809 Freigabecode       --------------
Enter a computer code.

Example for a demo eSIGN..:
1) Load the demo and unpack it with Winzip in a new directory.
2) Start eSIGNxx.EXE, the program starts the installation process 
   and reports an installation no. (Installationsnummer e.g. 
   FES123.45).
3) Please send this installation no per eMail with Your
   complete address and phone no. to 
   Info@AHSoftgravur.de.
4) You receive a code from AHSoft to start the demo.
   The code is connected to this computer. For installation
   with an other computer please start the program (see 2) 
   and ask with the new installation no. an another computer code.

For program information please see the program help, the 
manual with 'Extras . Manual' or www.AHSoftgravur.de.

#7811 Freigabecode       --------------
Enter a computer code.

1) Load the demo ConstruCAM-3D and unpack it with Winzip in a
   new directory.
2) Start ConstruCAM.EXE, the program starts the installation process
   and reports an installation no.
3) Please send this installation no per eMail with Your
   complete address and phone no. to info@cnc-step.com.
4) You receive a code to start the demo.
   The code is connected to this computer. For installation
   with an other computer please start the program (see no. 2)
   and ask with the new installation no. an another computer code.

#0796 PCNC-drilling mach.--------------
Turn on a lathe with HEITZ milling machine. This special function creates
the movements for a drilling machine by using a CAD - route in horizontal 
direction. The route describes a cut through the drilling work piece.

The route is designed in CAD in the X-/Y - cut. For milling the axis were 
coded in the right machine movements.
  Graphic X -> machine X.
  Graphic Y -> machine Z.
The drilling equipment must be placed in X - direction onto the machine.
The milling movements are following with the machine X- and Z - axis.

In CAD the cut line should be entered in the area +X and -Y. The extreme 
height point should be at Y = 0. No part of the cut line be permitted 
above Y = 0. The cut line must be a connected route without any break. 
For the milling the path is calculated and directly exported with 
DIN/ISO . PCNC-Drehmaschine into a data file. This special function 
can be used only with WinPC-NC.

|Tool:
Selection of the cutting tool from the library. A click at the 
tool graphic opens the tool input.
The calculation fundamentally takes place using a tool.

|Cut location:
Usage and correction of the cut line location in Y.

|  relative:
  The cut line will always displaced so that the highest point 
  will be located at Y = 0.

|  ABSOLUTE:
  The cut line will not be displaced. With a cut line below Y = 0
  more material can be leveled down for a smaller drilling diameter.

|Clearance procedure:
Before milling the cut line material can be leveled down in layer.

|  None:
  No layer cut will be created.

|  Line formed:
  The program creates horizontal layer lines.

|  Scaling:
  he program creates scaled cut lines in layer.

|Clearance separation [mm]:
Separation of the clearance lines in (graphic) Y - direction.

#1727 Ellipse            --------------
Input of a spherical or ellipsoidal surface.

|Center:
  Middle of area in X and Y.

|ApexZ:
  Raising or lowering of the center. The ApexZ can be directly entered 
  or, following <M>, <F2> selected in relief.
  ApexZ is not allowed to be >= the smallest radius. For greater apex 
  first set the radius to the wished value and then change the ApexZ. 
  The ApexZ always must be smaller (0.001 mm) then he smallest radius.

|Radius X/Y:
  Ellipse radii, for a spherical section both radii are the same.

|Radius X+Y:
  Symmetrical input of the both radius X+Y for a spherical section.

|Edit Param:
  Display and amend ellipse parameters.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#3011 Open               --------------
Open a file with vector and text data. SLD (Plate Project), LG1 
(3D Vector data) and H2R (2D Vector data) are read.

You receive a graphic preview after a click onto a file name.

With the loading of SLD  lines, the character set names are checked.
If the given character set cannot be found, then the indication Font
[DS name] not found! and the character set selection are opened.
Following selection of a valid name the next line is loaded.
Using <Esc> in the character set selection the work is aborted.

|Notice:
Shows a notice saved with a SLD - File. You can enter a notice after 
select 'Save under' in the file dialog.

|Project
Selects the 'Project - directory'.

|Library:
Opens a graphic file selection. The selection results there with a 
click on the graphic an 'OK'.

#3114 Save Under         --------------
A job with all data including aid lines, layer tools and
technology data is saved in SLD format.

|Notice:
Input of a notice which is saved with the SLD - File. You can edit 
a notice after select 'Change'(Ändern).

|Project
Selects the 'Project - directory'.

|Library:
Opens a graphic file selection. The selection results there with a 
click on the graphic an 'OK'.

#1764 Dither             --------------
Dither create dots with constant diameters and different distance (for
2D machines). For the dither procedure are cylindrical or conic tools
possible. A 2D or 2,5D milling machine is enough.

The dither milling data are suitable to the application in a wide area.
A dither milled picture should be watched from a bigger distance. A 
greater dimensioned picture should be used also. The program offers 3
milling procedures. 'Dithern 9p, Dithern 16p und Dithern 25p. Dither 25 
should be used for large format picture, Dither 9p is suitable for 
smaller format picture.

In result of the relative big sized dither points, the graphic dimension,
can not be observance exactly in all cases. The different size is 
visible in the graphic area.

-------------------------------------------------------------------
Display in the window above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
|Dimension X / Y [mm]:
  Dimension of the picture and the engraved work piece.

|Max. milling depth Z [mm]:
  Shows the milling depth in the material.

|column number X / row number Y:
  Point number, if all of the possible points where milled. On white
  places no points are created. A dither point consist of multiple 
  (up to 9, 16, 25) 2D points

-------------------------------------------------------------------
Inputs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
|Tool tip radius [mm]:
  With smaller tip radius smaller dot separation and a larger
  total dot count is achieved. For a fine grid point the tool dip
  should selected as small as possible.

|Tool angle [°]:
  For dither are possible cylindrical [0°] and conic tools [>0°]. 
  Reasonable tool angle lies between 10° and 20°.

|Safety height:
  Safety separation for the tool dip to the material surface for 
  raised movements. For smaller safety height the overall cut 
  movement in Z is shorter and more points are milled in the same time.

|Milling depth [mm]:
  Tool milling depth in the material.

|Density [-0,5..+0,5]:
  Changes the density of milling points. Setting <0 sets the points
  dense, setting >0 sets the points widely.

|Scattering [0..1]:
  Scattering for the single milling points. With the setting 0 the 
  points are milled well-ordered (best quality). With bigger settings
  the points are scattered. A scattering gives a small quality reduction
  The picture has a blur effect.

|Brightness [-0,5..+0,5]:
  With setting >0 the picture will be brighter, with setting <0 the
  picture will be darker.

|Contrast [-0,5..+0,5]:
  With setting >0 the picture will be rich in contrast, with setting <0 
  the picture contrast will be smaller.

|Invert [Y/N]:
  Yes: The gray levels were inverted.

|Processing method:
  Dither milling procedures.

  'Dithern  9p':
    For smaller pictures with reduced gray level. For 1 dither point
    were 0(white) .. 9(black) single points milled (fine resolution).

  'Dithern 16p':
    For middle picture sizes with enough gray levels. For 1 dither 
    point were 0(white) .. 16(black) single points milled (middle
    resolution).

  'Dithern 25p':
    For bigger picture sizes with many gray levels. For 1 dither 
    point were 0(white) .. 25(black) single points milled (rough
    resolution).

#1705 Mill data aspect   --------------
Selection for the milling data aspect. This setting is used,
if there was calculated milling data with raster, dither or
hatching.

Selection of the milling data aspects.
The aspect shown in black is selected. The aspects listed in
blue could be selected.

|Milling point:
Milling path drawing in top view with filled milling path.

|Relief aspect:
A relief (3D - surface) is calculated using the milling path
and shown in a gray scale picture.

|Render aspect:
A rendered picture is calculated and shown using the milling
path.

|Relief color:
Relief- and render aspect representation.
  Standard : Standard gray levels. The background is white,
    milling points were represented dark.
  Invert : Invert gray levels. The background is black, 
    milling points were represented bright.

#1202 Zoom projection    --- alt ------
Enlarged 3D tool mid track view in perspective. An enlargement
of the (3D) milling data is displayed in perspective. This
function is used following 'Norm projection'.

#1201 Norm projection    --------------
3D tool mid track view in perspective. The milling tracks are shown in 
perspective. The perspective angle is adjustable with the 8 direction 
buttons. With setting top view (all angles = 0) the 3D tracks are 
displayed in gray (color) levels.

The perspective settings are possible in 2 variants. The change follows 
by using the button Graf/Norm. For the zoom selection (enlarged view), 
the input will be switched in Graf position (onto the menu).

|Graf/Norm:
  Switch for schematic block view or direct 3D - graphic.

|Zoom:
  Selection for an enlarged 3D view. If the input window is in setting 
  Norm - view (block view), then the window will be switched in Graf - 
  view (onto the menu) an the 3D - graphic is shown. After input of the 
  graphic area by a rectangle an enlarged graphic will be shown.

|Direction buttons: 
  Alteration of the Block-/3D - graphic - view in 5° steps.

|PosA:
  Color setting for raised movements. 
  PosA = black: The raised movements are shown in gray.
  PosA = cyan: The raised movements are shown in cyan color.
    For data from a HCAM multi axial projection (5 axis milling 
    data) the tool angle settings are represented by lines at 
    the vector end points.
  PosA = red: The raised movements are shown in red color.
  PosA = gray: Display in perspective with high level marking.
    Tracks above the entered level are shown in black, tracks
    below this level are shown in gray color. Raised movements 
    are not shown.

|OK:
  The graphic will be created with the entered adjustments.

|Esc:
  The function will be interrupted.

#1748 Zoom Projection    --- alt ------
Relief data aspect.
Enlargement of the representation produced by the standard
projection. The desired detail is defined using the cursor
by both extreme positions of a rectangle (zero position and
end position).

#1747 Norm Projection    --------------
3D - relief - aspect. The milling tracks are shown in perspective. The 
perspective angle is adjustable with the 8 direction buttons. The relief
representation (grid, vector, point or surface) can be selected with the
upper buttons.

The perspective setting is possible in 2 variants. The change follows 
by using the button Graf/Norm. For the zoom selection (enlarged view), 
the input will be switched in Graf position (onto the menu).

|Graf/Norm:
  Switch for schematic block view or with 3D - graphic.

|Zoom:
  Selection for an enlarged 3D view. 
  If the input window is in setting Norm - view (block view), then 
  the window will be switched in Graf - view (onto the menu) an the 
  3D - graphic is shown. 
  After input of the graphic area by a rectangle an enlarged graphic 
  will be shown and the input terminated.

|Direction buttons: 
  Alteration of the Block-/3D - graphic - view in 5° steps.

|PosA:
  Using PosA the line representation color is set. With input PosA 
  without color the perspective indicator takes place using height 
  level adjustment.

|OK:
  The graphic will be created with the entered adjustments.

|Esc:
  The function will be interrupted.

#7905 Queries on Program --------------
Questions on operation, errors, help settings, updates etc. The 
quickest and most favorable way: Send an eMail to Info@AHSoftgravur.de

Your E-mail should at least contain the following information:
- Your complete address with eMail address
- Program designation and Version number. The correct program 
  designation can be found under 'Parameter . Info'.

If a there is a complaint then save your data in a file. Send
this data packed with WinZip with
- a detailed description,
- the last operations and program settings 
(comp. General Instruction . Customer service) to the eMail address 
above.

Register your program (comp. General Instruction . Program
registration). We would request you to understand that we can
only offer our customer service for registered program licenses.

#1766 Grid photo         --------------
Milling data are calculated from the photo for 1 tool. Raster Photo 
has multiple raster-, dither-, and hatching procedures to create 
optimal milling data. With the row- and grid - procedures gray levels 
in the  picture were represented by lines or points with multiple 
thickness (3D milling data). The dither procedure represent gray 
levels by points with the same thickness but variable distances (2D 
milling data). In the hatching procedure gray levels are represented 
by 2D - hatching lines in adjustable directions and separations.

|-----------------------------------------------------------------------
|Line grid.
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------
$1790


|-----------------------------------------------------------------------
|Grid.
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------
$1763


|-----------------------------------------------------------------------
|Dither
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------
$1764


|-----------------------------------------------------------------------
|Hatch
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------
$1765

#3309 Relief Import      --------------
Read in picture or surface data as relief.
The previous relief data is overwritten.

|STL:
$3312 Import STL         --------------


%STL - Z - location correction.
%------------------------------
STL - molds are imported so that the highest relief point is situated 
on then place Z = 0.

Molds can be filled up by the function 'Relief edit . Relief flood'. 
With this the tool works on a reduced depth.

Example: A mold with the shape of a symmetric bottle can be handled only
from the top. One half of the mould is covered. The mould can be flood 
onto 50% before start the milling path calculation. With this the tool
will work only on the the surface above.


|DXF-3DFace:
Read in DXF files using 3DFACE - surfaces. These data are, for
example, created using Roland Picza digitalization machines.
Attention: Here only files with 3DFACE - surfaces can be correctly 
read in. In cases of doubt please check your data using a suitable 
Editor or CAD.


|Import Photo:
$1755

#1789 Relief flow        --------------
Molds can be filled up by the function 'Relief flood'.
With this the tool works on a reduced depth.

Moulds can be handled only by 3 axis, from above. Some mould areas 
(e.g. imported STL data) are not reachable from above. In an unchanged 
relief the tool works until the complete mould depth. This unnecessary 
milling depth can be reduced by lift up the ground area.

Example: A mold with the shape of a symmetric bottle can be handled only
from the top. One half of the mould is covered. The mould can be flood 
onto 50% before start the milling path calculation. With this the tool
will work only on the he surface above.

The input of the flood area can occur by 2 ways:

|Input in mm:
  Enter the flood area in mm (input 0 .. max.). The value is measured 
  from the deepest relief point. The max. input area is shown. With 
  the input 0 the relief stays unchanged. With an input of e.g. 1 mm
  the relief ground will be raised about 1 mm.

|Input in %:
  Enter the flood area in % (input 0 .. 100). The value is measured 
  from the deepest relief point. With the input 0 the relief stays
  unchanged. With an input of e.g. 50% the relief ground will be raised 
  up with the half of the mould Z area.

#7907 Text menu          --------------
Selection of the functions and program areas.

#0646 Special            --------------
Special, rare used functions for trim, clip, editing ...

|Edit 3D tracks.
The 3D data in the ActLayer can be modified in the Z component.

|Axis exchange:
Exchange the addresses (X,Y,Z) of the milling data in the ActLayer.

|Print posn. list:
Output of the data in the ActLayer as position list to the standard
printer.

|Scatter field (random drilling arrangement).
Calculation limit is the frame border. The layer tool must be entered
before the calculation. (Fd) field width : width/height of the field
within which a drilling should be. Fd frame : min. separation of drilling
from the field border (0..Fd width/Z). With FWi = 0 drillings, otherwise
3D movements created. Note: scatter width = Fd width -2*(Field frame).
The larger the scatter width the better the scatter!

|Unix in DOS text:
A text file from UNIX Systems is converted into DOS text.

|Clipper XY:
2D-data and 3D-milldata in the graphic layers are clipped into a
rectangle. Vectors, which lie outside the rectangle are removed.
|  Only ActLayer/all layers:
  With '.. to 00' data are displaced to the posn. X=0, Y=0.
|  Process 3D paths:
  For 3D processing of milling paths (e.g. of cleared areas).

|End point 3D:
Amend the Z value of one or more support points. If only one point
is clicked on, then only this one set to the value to be given,
if a frame is plotted around several support points of one or more
contours, then all points within the frame are set to the value to
be given. For this function a valid layer tool is required.

|Bent line 3D:
Cuts 3D milling paths with 2D lines. Points with the depth to be
given are set at the intersection points, Indicator:
Select 3D tracks - ...: mark bent line, end input with <Esc>.
Depth [mm]: enter desired Z value.
For this function a valid layer tool is required.

|Trim 3D:
Cuts 3D milling paths with 2D lines. - to remove unwanted areas.
Indicator: select 3D tracks - ...: mark 3D milling tracks which are
to be separated. End input with <Esc>.
Trim using line..: mark trim line. End input with <Esc>.

|2D Effect:
With this function pictures in actlayer are so distorted as if they
were placed on cylinders, spheres etc.
|  Distort quadratically
  Distort on the same X/Y dimension.
|  Cylinder horiz. / vert.
  Radius (cylindrical) distortion.
|  Circle set / spheroid set / spheroid distortion
  Various spherical distortions.
  
|Clear cut outs:
Clear unnecessary 3D - cut outs (< clear length) from the file. With 
'multiple test = YES' are cut outs cleared until the 'Clear length' is 
exceeded or no cut out is found. 
Remark: With 'multiple test = YES' probably correct cut outs are deleted 
also.

|Shift inner contour to ..
Separate contours in outside and inside contours. The outside contours 
staying in the ActLayer. Contours which are enclosed by the outside 
contours (inside contours) are shifted into the entered layer. If routs 
(open contours) were found, they were saved with the outside contours.

|Beam displace:
Radial distortion and scaling of vector data. The vectors are displaced
radial by the amount of 'Strahlen Verlängerung'. The Beam center is the
pos. x = 0 / y = 0. 

If there are paths marked, the paths else all vectors and text in the 
ActLayer were displaced.

#0803 Rhinestone         --------------
Dieses Rhinestone Dekorationsprogramm ist eine leistungsstarke Lösung 
zur einfachen und bequemen Herstellung von Straß - Stein - Schablonen 
mit einer Fräsmaschine. Das Programm konvertiert Vektordaten aus Strecken 
und Konturen zu Straß - (Rhinestone-) Mustern und unterstützt verschiedene 
Modi zur Anordnung auf der Linie oder in Flächen. Das Programm kann in 
2 Stufen sehr universell eingesetzt werden.

Stufe 1: 
Berechnung der Rhinestone - Punkte entlang Strecken oder innerhalb 
Konturen.

Stufe 2: 
Umrechnung der Rhinestone - Punkte in Kreise oder Bohrzyklen. Vorher 
können die Rhinestone - Punkte bei Bedarf manuell editiert werden.

Allgemeine Vorgehensweise ist die Berechnung der Rhinestone - Punkte 
(Stufe 1), evtl. eine manuelle Editierung der Punkte und die anschließende 
Umrechnung in Fräswege (Stufe 2).


%-----------------------------------
%Berechnung der Rhinestone - Punkte.
%-----------------------------------
Zur Punktberechnung stehen die Funktionen 'Rhinestone Strecken', 
'Rhinestone Flächen', 'Rhinestone Raster', 'Rhinestone Flächenfunktion' 
zur Auswahl. Die mit diesen Funktionen erzeugten Rhinestone - Punkte werden 
in einen Ziellayer gespeichert. Dieser Ziellayer darf nach der Berechnung 
nicht geändert werden, da die nachfolgenden Funktionen zur Berechnung der 
Kreise oder Bohrungen nur Punkte aus diesem Ziellayer verwenden.


|Rhinestone Strecken:
Punktanordnung entlang Strecken und Konturen. Diese Funktion erlaubt 
die Verwendung von offenen Strecken und geschlossene Konturen.

|  Punkt Grund - Abstand [mm]:
  Basis Abstand der Rhinestone - Punkte. Dieser Abstand kann variieren, 
  wenn 'Längenausgleich' <> 'kein Ausgl.' gewählt wird.

|  Punkt Mindest - Abstand [mm]:
  Wenn Punkte dichter liegen als dieser Mindestabstand, dann werden 
  die zu dicht liegenden Punkte entfernt.

|  Längenausgleich:
|    kein Ausgl.:
      Der vorgegebene 'Punkt Grund - Abstand' wird eingehalten.
|    nächster:
      Der Abstand wird vergrößert oder verkleinert, damit eine 
      ganzzahlige Anordnung erreicht wird.
|    Abst.verläng.:
      Der Abstand wird für eine ganzzahlige Anordnung vergrößert.
|    Abst.verkürz.:
      Der Abstand wird für eine ganzzahlige Anordnung verkleinert.

|  Abstand fallend (<1), steigend (>1):
  Der Faktor = 1.0 läßt den Abstand unverändert. Ein Faktor < 1 
  verkleinert den Punktabstand, Ein Faktor > 1 vergrößert den 
  Punktabstand mit jedem Objekt.

|  Ziellayer [0..LayerMax]:
  Die erzeugten Rhinestone - Punkte werden in diesen Layer gespeichert.


|Rhinestone Flächen:
Punktanordnung entlang Linien (Schraffur) oder konturparallel. Diese 
Funktion erlaubt nur die Verwendung von geschlossene Konturen.

|  Füllung:
  Flächen können mit einer Schraffur oder mit konturparallelen 
  Anordnung gefüllt werden.

|  Schraffurwinkel [°]:
  Winkel der Schraffurlinien bei 'Füllung = Schraffur'.

|  Konturoffset [mm]:
  Optionaler Konturversatz nach innen für Schraffurlinien.

|  Mit Kontur [J/N]:
  Bei JA werden auch für die Kontur(en) Rhinestone - Punkte erzeugt.

|  Punkt Grund - Abstand [mm]:
  Basis Abstand der Rhinestone - Punkte. Dieser Abstand kann variieren, 
  wenn 'Längenausgleich' <> 'kein Ausgl.' gewählt wird.

|  Punkt Mindest - Abstand [mm]:
  Wenn Punkte dichter liegen als dieser Mindestabstand, dann werden 
  die zu dicht liegenden Punkte entfernt.

|  Längenausgleich:
|    kein Ausgl.:
      Der vorgegebene 'Punkt Grund - Abstand' wird eingehalten.
|    nächster:
      Der Abstand wird vergrößert oder verkleinert, damit eine 
      ganzzahlige Anordnung erreicht wird.
|    Abst.verläng.:
      Der Abstand wird für eine ganzzahlige Anordnung vergrößert.
|    Abst.verkürz.:
      Der Abstand wird für eine ganzzahlige Anordnung verkleinert.

|  Ziellayer [0..LayerMax]:
  Die erzeugten Rhinestone - Punkte werden in diesen Layer gespeichert.


|Rhinestone Raster:
Punktanordnung im Raster innerhalb Konturen. Diese Funktion erlaubt 
nur die Verwendung von geschlossene Konturen.

|  Punkt Grund - Abstand [mm]:
  Basis Abstand der Rhinestone - Punkte in den Raster - Zeilen
  (X - Abstand).

|  Zeilen - Abstand Y [mm]:
  Abstand der Raster Zeilen (Y - Abstand).

|  Abstands Faktor X/Y [0.1 .. 10]:
  Den Abstand verändern. Der Faktor 1.0 läßt den Abstand unverändert. 
  Ein Faktor < 1 verkleinert den Punktabstand, Ein Faktor > 1 
  vergrößert den Punktabstand mit jedem Objekt.

|  Raster Drehung [°]:
  Drehung des Punktegitters innerhalb der Kontur(en).

|  Random Start [0..100]:
  Erzeugung von Zufallswerten für die Abstandserzeugung.
    0      = Die Zufallserzeugung ist aus.
    1..100 = Zufallserzeugung mit dem angegebenen Startwert.

|  Mit Kontur [J/N]:
  Bei JA werden auch für die Kontur(en) Rhinestone - Punkte erzeugt.

|  Punkt Mindest - Abstand [mm]:
  Wenn Punkte dichter liegen als dieser Mindestabstand, dann werden 
  die zu dicht liegenden Punkte entfernt.

|  Ziellayer [0..LayerMax]:
  Die erzeugten Rhinestone - Punkte werden in diesen Layer gespeichert.



|Rhinestone Flächenfunktion:
Punktanordnung in Spirale, Kreise oder Strahlen innerhalb Konturen. 
Diese Funktion erlaubt nur die Verwendung von geschlossene Konturen.

|  Form:
  Ausgehend vom Form - Zentrum kann eine Spirale, Kreise, oder 
  Strahlen gewählt werden.

|  Bahn - Abstand [mm]:
  Abstand der Spiral - Umdrehung, der Kreise oder der Strahlen.

|  Zentrum ermitteln [J/N]:
  Das Flächenzentrum kann mit JA automatisch in die Mitte der Kontur(en) 
  gelegt werden. Mit Nein wird das Punktzentrum anschließend manuell mit 
  dem Cursor oder der Tastatur eingegeben.

|  Mit Kontur [J/N]:
  Bei JA werden auch für die Kontur(en) Rhinestone - Punkte erzeugt.

|  Punkt Grund - Abstand [mm]:
  Basis Abstand der Rhinestone - Punkte. Dieser Abstand kann variieren, 
  wenn 'Längenausgleich' <> 'kein Ausgl.' gewählt wird.

|  Punkt Mindest - Abstand [mm]:
  Wenn Punkte dichter liegen als dieser Mindestabstand, dann werden 
  die zu dicht liegenden Punkte entfernt.

|  Längenausgleich:
|    kein Ausgl.:
      Der vorgegebene 'Punkt Grund - Abstand' wird eingehalten.
|    nächster:
      Der Abstand wird vergrößert oder verkleinert, damit eine 
      ganzzahlige Anordnung erreicht wird.
|    Abst.verläng.:
      Der Abstand wird für eine ganzzahlige Anordnung vergrößert.
|    Abst.verkürz.:
      Der Abstand wird für eine ganzzahlige Anordnung verkleinert.

|  Ziellayer [0..LayerMax]:
  Die erzeugten Rhinestone - Punkte werden in diesen Layer gespeichert.


%------------------------------------------------------
%Die Berechnung von Fräsdaten aus Rhinestone - Punkten.
%------------------------------------------------------
Aus den im Ziellayer angelegten Rhinestone - Punkte werden Fräsdaten 
berechnet. Der Ziellayer wurde mit den Rhinestone - Berechnungen 
festgelegt und wird in den nachfolgenden Eingaben nur angezeigt,
er kann nicht mehr geändert werden.


|Erzeuge Kreise:
Aus den Rhinestone - Punkten im Ziellayer werden Kreise berechnet.

|  Kreisdurchmesser [mm]:
  Durchmesser der Kreisobjekte.

|Erzeuge Bohrzyklen:
Aus den Rhinestone - Punkten im Ziellayer werden Bohrzyklen berechnet.

|  Werkzeug #:
  Auswahl des Bohrungs- (Fräs-) Werkzeuges aus der Bibliothek.
  <M,F2> oder Klick auf die Werkzeuggrafik öffnet das Fenster zur
  Werkzeugeingabe. Das Werkzeug benötigt Geometriedaten zur Beschreibung
  der Werkzeugform. Geeignete Werkzeuge sind Bohrer oder Schaft-
  (Zylinder-) Fräser. Der Fräserradius muß zum Bohrungsdurchmesser
  passen. Die Technologiedaten I bestimmen die Gesamt Bohrtiefe
  (Eintauchtiefe), Vorschübe, Drehzahl, Wechselstation. Die
  Technologiedaten II werden zur Berechnung der Bohrstrategie benötigt:

|    max. Schichttiefe [mm]:
    Maximale Frästiefe, die mit diesem Werkzeug in einer Schicht
    (Zustellung) ausgeführt wird. Diese Einstellung wird für senkrechte
    Bohrzyklen und Bohrkreise verwendet. Für eine einfache senkrechte
    Bohrung in einem Durchgang ist 'max. Schichttiefe' auf einen Wert
    >= der Werkzeug Eintauchtiefe zu stellen.

|    Spanbruchhub [mm]:
    Spanbruchbewegung (Peck Drilling) für senkrechten Bohrungen (nicht
    für Bohrkreise). Ein Spanbruchhub dient zum abbrechen/abreißen eines
    Bohrspanes. Für Fräsungen kann diese Eigenschaft nicht verwendet
    werden. Für Bohrungen wird nach einer Schichttiefe (Einstellung 'max.
    Schichttiefe') um den im Spanbruchhub angegebenen Wert nach oben
    gefahren (der Span wird gebrochen). Danach erfolgt die Bewegung zur
    nächsten Schichttiefe).

|    Schlichtoffset [%[FrS]]:
    Abstand für einen zusätzlichen Schlichtgang. Bei 0 erfolgt kein
    Schlichtgang. Diese Einstellung kann nur für Bohrkreise verwendet.
    werden. Die Einstellung erfolgt in % vom Spitzenradius (FrS).
    Typische Einstellungen sind 10 .. 50%.

|  Ziellayer:
  Auswahl des Ziellayers in welchen die Fräsdaten gespeichert werden.

|  Bohrungsdurchmesser:
  Durchmesser der Bohrung oder des Bohrkreises. Ein Bohrungsdurchmesser
  kann nur gleich oder größer als der Werkzeugdurchmesser (2 x FrS)
  gewählt werden. Ist der Bohrdurchmesser = dem Werkzeugdurchmesser,
  dann berechnet das Programm senkrechte Bohrbewegungen. Ist der
  Bohrungsdurchmesser größer als der Werkzeugdurchmesser, dann berechnet
  das Programm Bohrkreise, um den gewünschten Bohrungsdurchmesser zu
  erhalten.

#3186 Mult. export Lfd#  --------------
Milling data export for multiple plates, which are milled on the same 
position. The milling data will be completed with special commands for 
start and stop of each plate.

This export is useful e.g. for multiple plates with serial number. For an 
engraving interrupt or stop after each plate (workpiece change ...) there 
are fit it special commands into the DIN/ISO and HPGL milling data (see 
below). The complete milling data for all plates are saved in one file. 
Only DIN/ISO and HPGL data can be combined with this special commands.
This special export is not possible with other export ways.

|Preparation.
The commands which should fit in for a workpiece change must be saved in 
two ASCII text file in the program directory. File 'ErgaenzStart'
Contains all commands before the plate engraving starts. File 
'ErgaenzEnde' Contains all commands after the plate engraving ends. The 
commands were saved in the right DIN/ISO format for the used export filter. 
It is not allowed to use row numbers for DIN/ISO in this files.

Name of the supplement files:
'ErgaenzStart.txt', 'ErgaenzEnde.txt' for DIN/ISO, 'ErgaenzStart.plt',
'ErgaenzEnde.plt' for HPGL and 'Roland Printer'.

Example for isel ncp. Supplement commands for a plate.
  FASTABS X0 Y5000 Z0
  SETBIT A1.1
  MOVEABS Z1000
  FASTABS X1101 Y4322 Z0
  RESBIT A1.1
  MOVEABS Z-1000

|Data creation (plate design).
- Enter the dimension of a single plate in 'layout . Limits'.
- Enter Your text with serial number and graphic (if needed).
- Enter the layer tool for the used layers.

|Data export.
- Create the supplement files 'ErgaenzStart.txt' + 'ErgaenzEnde.txt'.
- For export please select 'Mult. export Lfd#'.
- Select the layer which should be exported.
- Enter the wished number of plates (2..9999). You must enter at least 2 
  plates, max. 9999 plates. The program creates data and a graphic with all 
  plates. If serial numbers used, multiple numbers were written.
- Select the wished DIN/ISO export.

!Remark:
For an export repeat after an export test, the serial number must be
adjust to their start amount.

#1384 Import Weller      --------------
Spezieller Import für Skalen und Texte zur Objektiv - Beschriftung.
Importiert werden formatierte Textdateien, welche die Texte und
Strichaufteilung enthalten. Zur Beschriftung (Texte und Striche) wird
ein spezieller Font ('LG1052.HZE') verwendet. Der Font enthält alle
Textzeichen und Striche. Die Gradeinteilung wird für einen Rundgravier-
Durchmesser von 86.8mm umgerechnet. Zum DIN/ISO - Datenexport ist
der gleiche Betrag für de Rundgravierdurchmesser zu verwenden.   


Detenimport:
Zum Import ist eine geeignete formatierte Textdatei auszuwählen.
Die Versalhöhen (Höhe der großen Buchstaben) der Texte können beim
Import angepaßt werden.

|Versalhöhe große Schrift [mm]:
Höhe für große Zeichen und Referenzhöhe für die Striche.
Standardeinstellung = 3,25.

|Versalhöhe kleine Schrift [mm]:
Höhe für die kleinen Zeichen.
Standardeinstellung = 3,25.

Die Texte und Striche werden in 3 Layer aufgeteilt:
Layer #1: Lange und kurze Striche.
Layer #2: große Zahlen und Text 'ft'.
Layer #3: Kleine Zahlen.

Nach dem Import können Texte und Striche mit 'Text . edit Zeile'
editiert (verändert) werden.


Werkzeuge und Datenexport:
Zum Fräsdatenexport werden für diese Layer Werkzeuge benötigt. Die
Geometrie und Stationsnummer ist für alle Werkzeuge gleich (kein
Werkzeugwechsel). Die Strichstärke (Skalenstriche, große Zahlen,
kleine Zahlen) wird durch unterschiedliche Eintauchtiefen erreicht.

Der Datenexport erfolgt mit einem DIN/ISO Exportfilter.
Unter 'Rundgravierdurchmesser [mm]' ist der Betrag 86.8 einzugeben.
Das Vorzeichen des Rundgravierdurcmessers steuert die Drehrichtung
der Rundachse.

#3196 Direct Mill Auto   --------------
Automatic export to the path last used with 'Direct Mill'. 
For this the last 'Direct Mill' export setting is employed.

Alternative selection by using <F2>: Set up the direct export.
The program help You receive after selection the set up help
via <F2> by using the key <F9>.

#9926 Milldata export:   --------------
The calculated milling data are exported.

#9927 Milldata export:   --------------
The calculated milling data are exported.

For the program variant with direct export to WinPC-NC
please set up the data export first with a valid program 
and data path (selection with <F2> or <M>).

The program help You receive after selection the set up help
via <F2> by using the key <F9>.

#0801 Drilling Cycles    --------------
Input of drilling cycles and create right milling data. With this 
function it's possible to create simple drilling in one pass, peck 
drilling cycles with chip removal lift and drill circles. The 
drilling cycles are created automatically in different patterns 
(single drill .. drilling on polygon point).

The single drill cycles are created in the indicated target layer 
by using the tool data and the drilling diameter. The tool and 
technology data can be adapted by click on the tool graphic or 
by using <F2>, <M>.


%General inputs:
%---------------

|Tool #:
  Selection for the drilling or milling tool from the tool library.
  <F2, M> or click on the tool graphic will open the tool input. The
  tool needs geometric data to describe the tool shape. Suitable tools 
  are drilling tools or cylindrical milling tools. The tool radius must
  match to the needed drilling diameter. The technology data I determine
  the overall drilling dept (dip depth), feeds, revolutions per minute, 
  Tool changer #. The technology data I are needed for calculate the 
  drilling strategy:

|  Max. layer depth [mm]:
  Maximum milling depth which are executed with this tool in one layer
  (rate of cut). This setting is used for drilling cycles (peck drilling)
  and drilling circles. For simple vertical drilling in one step the 
  setting 'max. layer depth' is to adjust >= the tool dip depth.

|  Chip removal lift [mm]:
  Movement for chip removal used with vertical drilling cycles (not 
  for drilling circles). The chip removal helps to break/tear-off the 
  drilling chips. For milling cycles (drill circles) this input is not 
  usable. In drilling cycles the tool will after a layer depth (setting
  'max. layer depth') raise with the in 'chip removal lift' determined 
  distance. After this movement starts the cycle for the next
  layer depth.

|  Smooth offset [%[FrS]]:
  Separation for a additional smooth milling path. With 'smooth offset'
  = 0 there occurs no smooth milling path. This setting is only used with 
  drilling circles (milling path). The setting occurs in % to the tool dip 
  radius (FrS). Typical settings are (0) 10 .. 50%.


|Target layer: 
  Selection for the milling data target layer.

|Drilling diameter [mm]:
  Diameter for the drilling or he drilling circle. A 'Drilling diameter' 
  only can be the same or grater than the tool diameter (2 x FrS). If the 
  drilling diameter = tool diameter, the program calculates vertical 
  drilling cycles. Is the drilling diameter grater than the tool diameter, 
  the program calculates drilling circles, to obtain the right drilling 
  diameter.


%Drilling pattern:
%-----------------

|Single drilling:
Position and create a single drilling. The drilling center can be 
selected with the cursor or input the X/Y - coordinates by keyboard 
(e.g. -21 33,5). After input the drilling data (see above) a drilling 
cycle will be calculated on the selected place.


|Drill circle:
Create drillings on a circle. The center of the drill circle can be 
selected with the cursor or input the X/Y - coordinates by keyboard 
(e.g. -21 33,5).

|  Drilling diameter [mm]:
  Diameter for the drilling or he drilling circle (see above).

|  Drill circle diameter [mm]:
  Diameter of the circle on which the drilling cycles are to be placed.

|  Start angle [°]:
  Corner angle for a drilling cycle on the drill circle.

|  No. of drillings:
  Number of drillings distributed over 360°.


|Drilling row:
Create drilling grid in a row.

|  Number:
  Number of drillings in the row.

|  Separation X/Y:
  Separation of the drillings.


|Drilling matrix:
Create drilling grid in columns and rows.

|  Number X/Y:
  Number of drilling cycles in X- and Y-direction.

|  Separation X/Y:
  Separation of the drilling cycles in X and Y.


|Drilling matrix spec.:
Create drilling grid in columns and rows with enhanced settings.
First a reference point has been entered. The drilling matrix is 
referenced to this point with its left bottom side.

|  Number X/Y:
  Number of drilling cycles in X- and Y-direction.

|  Separation X/Y:
  Separation of the drilling cycles in X and Y.

|  X-displacement next line [%]:
  The drilling of the next row will be displaced right with 
  this amount. The displacement is referenced to the separation X
  X-displacement [mm] = X-displacement [%]/100*separation X.

|  Direction X:
  Operating sequence in X-direction.
  [le > ri] : Operating sequence for all rows is left to right.
  [ri > le] : Operating sequence for all rows is right to left.
  [meander] : Operating sequence for all rows is meander formed 
              (oscillating).

|  Direction Y:
  Operating sequence in Y-direction.
  [top > do] : Operating sequence for the matrix is top to down.
  [do > top] : Operating sequence for the matrix is down to top.


|Drilling plate centre/corner/edge:
Place drilling cycles on a plate. The working limit given in 
Layout . limits is used as limit.

|  Centre:
  Place a drilling cycle in the plate centre.

|  Corner:
  Place 4 drilling cycles in the corners at ax and ay to the
  working limit.

|  Edge:
  Place 8 drilling cycles on the edge at a separation of ax and ay
  to the working limit.


|Drilling contour:
Place drilling cycles along the marked paths at the entered separation.


|Drill on PolyPt.:
Place drilling cycles along the marked paths at the end of the 
polygon points.

#0805 MAchsen Bohrung    --------------
Einen senkrechten Bohrzyklus in Stufen mit Spanbruchbewegung erzeugen.
Alle Bohrbewegungen werden mit den Achsen X/Y/Z im Arbeitsvorschub 
gefahren (keine Leerbewegungen). Deshalb können diese Bohrzyklen auch
mit der 'Mehrachsen Proj.' verwendet werden. Herkömmliche Bohrzyklen
enthalten Bewegungen, welche bei Mehrachsen Anwendung zum Bohrerbruch
führen können.

Mit 'MAchsen Bohrung' kann nur ein senkrechter Einzelbohrzyklus erzeugt 
werden. Für eine Bohrung werden gültige Werkzeugdaten, die Bohrposition 
in X/Y und ergänzende Daten (Vorschübe) benötigt.

Nach Anwahl von 'MAchsen Bohrung' wird zunächst die Eingabe des 
Bohrzentrums in X/Y erwartet (Eingabe 'Einzelbohrung'). Das 
Bohrzentrum kann mit dem Cursor ausgewählt oder durch X/Y - 
Koordinaten (Bsp. -21 33,5) eingegeben werden.

Für die Bohrung wird ein fehlerfrei eingegebenes Werkzeug benötigt (s.u.).
Ist ein Werkzeug noch nicht definiert, wird empfohlen die Werkzeugdaten
vor Anwahl der Funktion 'MAchsen Bohrung' bzw. nach der Meldung 'Kein
oder fehlerhaftes Werkzeug! - Werkzeug eingeben J/N?' einzugeben. Der
danach angezeigte/einzugebende 'Eintauchvorschub' wird aus den
Werkzeugdaten übernommen.

Neben dem Werkzeug sind zur Bohrung noch der Ziellayer und die 
Bohrvorschübe einzugeben. Nach Eingabe der Bohrungsdaten wird am
Bohrzentrum ein Bohrzyklus für eine 3-Achsen-Maschine erzeugt.


|Werkzeug #:
Das Bohrwerkzeug sollte vor Anwahl der Funktion 'MAchsen Bohrung' in 
der Werkzeugbibliothek definiert sein, kann aber auch noch in der 
Bohrzyklus - Eingabe nach Anklicken der Werkzeuggrafik oder nach Anwahl 
mit <F2>, <M> in der Zeile 'Werkzeug #' angepaßt werden.

Das Werkzeug benötigt Geometriedaten zur Beschreibung der Werkzeugform 
(vgl. Allgemeine Anleitung . Werkzeugeingabe). Geeignete Werkzeuge 
sind Bohrer oder Schaft-(Zylinder-) Fräser. Die Technologiedaten I 
bestimmen die Gesamt Bohrtiefe (Eintauchtiefe), Vorschübe, Drehzahl, 
Wechselstation. Die Technologiedaten II werden zur Berechnung der 
Bohrstrategie benötigt:

%Technologiedaten II:
%--------------------
|  max. Schichttiefe [mm]:
  Maximale Frästiefe, die mit diesem Werkzeug in einer Schicht
  (Zustellung) ausgeführt wird. Für eine einfache senkrechte Bohrung
  in einem Durchgang ist 'max. Schichttiefe' auf einen Wert >= der
  Werkzeug Eintauchtiefe zu stellen.

|  Spanbruchhub [mm]:
  Spanbruchbewegung (Peck Drilling) für senkrechten Bohrungen. Ein 
  Spanbruchhub dient zum abbrechen/abreißen eines Bohrspanes. Danach 
  erfolgt die Bewegung zur nächsten Schichttiefe. Für Bohrungen wird 
  nach einer Schichttiefe um den im 'Spanbruchhub' angegebenen Wert 
  nach oben gefahren (der Span wird gebrochen). Sinnvoll sind 
  Einstellungen in Größe der 'max. Schichttiefe' bis zur 'Eintauchtiefe'.
  Wenn Der Spanbruchhub >= Eintauchtiefe gewählt wird, hebt das Werkzeug
  um den Weg des Spanbruchhubes, aber max. nur bis zur Oberfläche aus.

|  Schlichtoffset [%[FrS]]:
  Einstellung für Bohrkreise, für senkrechte Bohrungen wird kein 
  Schlichtoffset verwendet.


|Ziellayer:
Auswahl des Ziellayers in welchen der Bohrzyklus gespeichert wird.


|Eintauchvorschub:
Vorschub der Bohrschichten mit Ausnahme der 1. Bohrschicht.


|Vorschub 1.Bohrspan:
Vorschub für die 1. Bohrschicht (wird meist < 'Eintauchvorschub' 
gewählt.


|Vorschub Spanbruch:
Erhöhter Vorschub für die 3D - Rückzugsbewegung (Spanbruchhub).


Für einen kompletten Bohrzyklus werden folgende Vorschübe verwendet:
- Werkzeug . Arbeitsvorschub XY: Zum Anfahren der Bohrung.
- Vorschub 1.Bohrspan: Für 1. Bohrschicht.
- Eintauchvorschub: Für alle weitere Bohrschichten.
- Vorschub Spanbruch: Für die Rückzugsbewegungen (Spanbruch).


%Beispiel eines Bohrzyklus mit 3-Achsen-Bewegungen:
%[Eintauchtiefe = 5mm, Schichttiefe = 1mmm, Spanbruchhub = 5mm]
%G0 X10 Y10                 //zum Bohrzentrum in X/Y
%G1 Z-0 F1000 M8            //zur Oberfläche (Arbeitsvorschub XY)
%G1 Z-1 F500                //1. Schicht
%G1 Z-0 F5000               //Rückzug
%G1 Z-0.8                   //letzte Schicht - Vorhalt 0,2mm
%G1 Z-2 F800                //2. Schicht
%G1 Z-0 F5000               //Rückzug
%G1 Z-1.8                   //letzte Schicht - Vorhalt 0,2mm
%G1 Z-3 F800                //3. Schicht
%G1 Z-0 F5000               //Rückzug
%G1 Z-2.8                   //letzte Schicht - Vorhalt 0,2mm
%G1 Z-4 F800                //4. Schicht
%G1 Z-0 F5000               //Rückzug
%G1 Z-3.8                   //letzte Schicht - Vorhalt 0,2mm
%G1 Z-5 F800                //5. Schicht
%G1 Z-0 F5000               //Rückzug


%Beispiel einer Projektion mit 4-Achsen-Bewegungen:
%[Eintauchtiefe = 5mm, Schichttiefe = 1mmm, Spanbruchhub = 5mm]
%G0 X7.873 Y6.735
%G1 Z-22.641 B-26.574 F1000 //zur Sicherheitsebene (Vors.XY)
%G1 X8.32 Z-23.535          //zur Oberfläche (Z = 0)
%G1 X8.767 Z-24.43 F500     //1. Schicht
%G1 X8.32 Z-23.535 F5000    //Rückzug
%G1 X8.678 Z-24.251         //letzte Schicht - Vorhalt 0,2mm
%G1 X9.215 Z-25.324 F800    //2. Schicht
%G1 X8.32 Z-23.535 F5000    //Rückzug
%G1 X9.125 Z-25.145         //letzte Schicht - Vorhalt 0,2mm
%G1 X9.662 Z-26.218 F800    //3. Schicht
%G1 X8.32 Z-23.535 F5000    //Rückzug
%G1 X9.573 Z-26.04          //letzte Schicht - Vorhalt 0,2mm
%G1 X10.11 Z-27.113 F800    //4. Schicht
%G1 X8.32 Z-23.535 F5000    //Rückzug
%G1 X10.02 Z-26.934         //letzte Schicht - Vorhalt 0,2mm
%G1 X10.557 Z-28.007 F800   //letzte Schicht
%G1 X8.32 Z-23.535 F5000    //Rückzug
%G1 X7.873 Z-22.641         //zur Sicherheitsebene
%G0 Z1 B0                   //Objektende = B0

#1381 Series Label       --------------
List and matrix labels can be created using series labels.

|Text lists:
Each label contains its own text and possibly a serial number
<AltGr 3> (³).
|Text matrix:
The labels contain the same text, text variables <AltGr +> (~)
and serial number <AltGr 3> (³).

Text input takes place via an external edit. Text lines are
created using series labels, which are converted into text
modules and can be, as previously, further processed.
Text lines laid down in 'Label data' is entered per block.
Empty text lines are left out of the label, alternatively, with
'.p' at the start of lines one can switch to the next block.

The series label module always takes the texts for the labels
from the file SERTXT.TXT. When you open this editor, this file
is loaded automatically into the text editor. If texts are
adopted in the editor from other files, then you must save
these for the series label module in the file SERTXT.TXT.
This applies both for the internal and also external editor.
To adopt data select Select File . Save Under
[HCAM directory]SERTXT.TXT.

Serial numbers are added with the serial numbers set in
Input Parameter . Text Effect . Inc.

Limits:
- Max. 20 text lines in one block.
- In all max. 4000 text lines.
- Only straight text lines are permitted. (Radius = 0,
  incline = 0).

|Text editing.
Activation of a text editor for the input of label texts.
Point orders are possible in the text list. These orders
start with a point '.' at the first place in the line.
Lines with point orders are not engraved.
%.. (Commentary)
This line serves as comment.
%.p (Block separation)
Following this marking anew label begins.

The following control orders are possible in the text list:
%³ <AltGr 3>
Serial number - can be used for both text lists and also for a matrix.
%~ <AltGr +>
Text variable - for Matrix only.

The texts are entered continuously. So far as no block separation
'.p' is present, all text lines up to the max. block line number are
taken over in one block. Empty lines are also counted, but are not
engraved. If an empty line is to be output, then this line is to be
entered with SPACE (' ').

A serial number can be entered into the text. The serial
number is introduced and ended using the key combination
<AltGr 3> (³). For text lists and matrix only one serial number
is permitted. The serial number is incremented with
each new block (label). A serial number can be laid down formatted
or unformatted. 

|Unformatted input:
The unformatted input is designated through (³) followed
possibly by a start number (e.g. (³1)). If the start number
 is not given, then the serial number starts with '1'. If further
numbers, which may not be incremented, follow the start number,
then the serial number limited by (³) become (e.g. (³1³456)). The
serial number in the series label are incremented using
Input Parameter . Text Effect .Inc Serial Number.

|Formatted input:
The input of leading zeros in the serial numbers is allowed.
A number overrun (boundary value) is, however, not checked.

|Use text variables for Matrix.
The symbol <AltGr +> (~) is the place holder for the variable text.
The variable texts follow immediately after the predefined frame
text - for each entry a text line.

|Label data:
Enter data for the individual label.

|Control code:
Match the control codes '³ <AltGr 3>' and '%~ <AltGr +>' to
country-specific editors. Under Windows, depending on the
installed language. the proposed control codes are not usable.
For this case an own code can be determined here.

|Text editing:
Call up the text editor for the input of label texts.

|Change Excel Rows:
Excel texts which are read in with 'Text editing' are separated in
discrete text rows. 'TAB' (#9) is used for separation. This means 
Excel texts must be saved using 'TAB' as separation character. 

|Create text list.
Create labels with a text list. For labels with text lists, the
complete text lists for all blocks are to be entered. The texts up
to the max. number of lines are then taken over in the blocks
Lines which are not used can be switched out as empty lines or
limited using .p'. A serial number can be defined at each place and
incremented with every further (³)marking. 

|Create Matrix.
Create label matrix with the same and variable texts. For
a label matrix the frame text and the variable texts are to be
entered completely beforehand. A serial number (³) and/or a
text variable (~) can be defined in the frame text.

#1790 Line grid          --------------
With Line grid gray shade pictures are converted in 3D milling lines 
for a conic tool. The tool dips in various depth into the material 
following the brightness and creates the photo into the workpiece. 
Bright picture areas takes place small milling depths and with the tool 
cone a small line width. Dark picture areas in comparison results large 
milling depths and wide lines.

With the import the photo is converted into a 3D relief. The dimensions 
X/Y are the photo (Relief) dimension. These can be adopted with 'Scaling'.
The milling depth is determined by the relief depth (input/change e.g. 
with 'Scaling . Measurement Z').

For photo engraving large milling depths are not necessary, some 0.1 
mm are mostly enough. The normal process is the picture engraving and 
fill the milling path with color. If You use multiple layer (color) 
material, please consider the thickness of the upper material layer 
(enlarge the safety height (Off) and dip in something deeper).


-------------------------------------------------------------------
Display in the window above.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
|Dimension X / Y [mm]:
  Dimension of the picture and the engraved work piece.

|Max. milling depth Z [mm]:
  Shows the milling depth (relief depth) in the material.

|Path separation:
  The separation of the milling path is tool radius with max. depth 
  multiplied with the 'Line separation' (/100). The path separation 
  is a strong depending with the tool angle (FWi) and the relief 
  depth. Smaller tool angle or smaller milling depth takes place more
  milling lines. The picture will be clearer as more as lines are
  milled, but the milling time raises also. 

|Row number:
  Number of the calculated lines.

|Layer number:
  Calculated amount of the layers. If selected 'Layer depth' >= 
  'Max. milling depth Z', only one layer is the result.


-------------------------------------------------------------------
Inputs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
|Tool #:
  Selection of the milling tool.
  For the line grid milling always a conic tool is needed (FWi > 0°,
  e.g. 20..30°). The tip radius should be selected as much as small 
  (FrS <0.1 mm). For small tip radius please always mind for enough 
  revolutions per minute.

|Line separation [10..500%]:
  The line separation always works with tool radius with max. milling 
  depth (100%). With the line separation the row separation is determined. 
  A bigger line separation results a bigger row separation and has an 
  effect of a more bright picture. Recommended settings are 100% .. 300%.

  Relief (e.g. lithophane) can be milled with the program also. For this 
  a tool with a bigger tip radius or sphere radius and a smaller line
  separation (approx. 10..50%) should be selected. With the function 
  Line grid only a tool tip offset is calculated. Because of that we
  recommend for a correct relief production the relief module or the 
  program eMillRelief.

|Angle [-90..+90°]:
  Angle for the milling rows. 0° results horizontal rows.

|Procedures:
  Milling method selection:

  Hatching :
    Simple lines without turnaround.
  Cross hatching :
    Simple lines without turnaround + 90° rotated crossings.
  Hatching meander :
    Lines in zigzag order.
  Cross hatching meander :
    Lines in zigzag order + 90° rotated crossings.
  Rectangle :
    Rectangles concentrically ordered.
  Circle :
    Circles concentrically ordered.
  Spiral :
    Elliptical spiral.
  Radial lines :
    Simple radial lines without turnaround.
  Radial lines meander :
    Radial lines in zigzag order.
  Spiral > rectangle :
    Elliptical spiral go over to rectangle form.

|Layer depth [mm]:
  Dependent to the 'Max. milling depth Z' the picture can be milled in 
  1 or more layer. If the 'Max. milling depth Z' exceeds the 'Layer depth'
  the program creates multiple milling layer.

|Contrast [-0,5..+0,5]:
  With settings >0 the picture will be rich in contrast, with settings 
  <0 the picture contrast will be smaller.

|Invert [Y/N]:
  Yes: The gray levels were inverted. Bright areas are milled dark, 
  dark areas are milled bright.

#1382 Text from file     --------------
Using 'Text from file' both external ASCII text files can be read in
and texts can also be taken over via the intermediate memory. If texts
are read in via the file menu of the Editor, then these must be saved
for acceptance in the file 'HS05.TMP'. The file 'HS05.TMP' can be
found in the main directory of the program HCAM/iSIGN+.

Texts from Word, CorelDraw or other Windows programs are accept in
the ANSI/ASCII - code. Text settings how font height, look ... cannot 
be accepted. For a simple text transfer we recommend the following way:
- Choose 'Text from file . delete text'.
- Choose 'Text from file . edit text'.
  Fit in the text in the editor from the Windows Intermediate store
  with <Ctl V> and end the editor. Confirm the report 'save data ...' 
  (in the file 'HS05.TMP) with Yes.

|Delete Text + Param:
  Delete all existing lines of text. (text + text parameter).

|Delete text rows:
  Deletes only text, no text parameter (text settings). The texts
  are replaced by space. With this the text parameters are not 
  deleted and the text could be filled in later.

|Replace text:
  The text rows are filled with the text from an ASCII/ANSI - file.
  The text parameters remain unchanged. Text rows, which are not be 
  filled with text, are filled with space. 

|Import text:
  A ASCII/ANSI - text file is loaded and bound to the existing
  text.

|Edit text:
  The existing text is displayed in the Windows Editor. These
  texts can be edited, texts read in, texts taken over from the
  intermediate store etc. Before leaving the text editor the
  text must be saved in the file 'HS05.TMP'.

|Excel text import:
  Import of formatted Excel - text - files. The data has to be presented
  in ASCII/ANSI (TXT) format. The text fields were separated with 'tab'. 
  For this please export Your texts from Excel in a *.TXT - file.

  In this TXT - file are text for one or multiple plates. The text for
  one plate is saved in one text - row. The text fields are separated 
  by tab (chr(9)). One text - row is allowed to contain up to 40 text - 
  fields.

  The Excel - text is handled in 2 steps:
  - Import the TXT - file with 'Excel text import'.
  - Create the plates (1 plate per text row) with 'Excel label #'.

  The imported texts are shown first in a text editor. There it's 
  possible to change the text if needed (e.g. delete header lines). For 
  the further processing, please end the editor by [x], at changes save 
  the changed text. If there was no tab found in the text file, a 
  warning follows an the process will be interrupted.

  After the checkup in the editor, the first text row (row 0001) will be
  shown and undertaken in the plate. If not done before, please arrange
  the texts in 'edit text' to the right engraving positions. 
  Further handling see 'Excel label #'.

|Excel label #:
  The next row which is not processed will be shown. With 'Row #' 
  ([<][0001][>]) You can select the text row manually also. With 'OK'
  the selected text row will be adopt into the plate. The text field 
  allocation follows the order of the plate text fields.

  Imported plates You can still modify manually in 'edit text' and
  export to Your milling machine. For the next plate please select
  'Excel label #' again.

|Excel-multi label #:
  'Excel-multi label' is a completion to the function 'Excel label' and 
  is used to create multiple labels, which were parallel processed. For 
  'Excel-multi label' is a ready label layout with al least one label 
  needed. Each of the label is a Excel row associated. The number of 
  lines in the label must exact match to the Excel text fields.

  'Excel-multi label' verifies the label text lines and reports 
  disagreements with 'Row number don't match to Excel-text!'. This 
  function associates the Excel text fields to the label text lines. If 
  the last Excel row is reached, the text allocation will be interrupt. 
  Empty labels and empty text lines are removed.

  For the label creation using 'Excel-multi label' the strategy as 
  follow is recommended:
  1) Create a layout for on label.
  2) Create a multiple layout using 'Layout . Layout . Layer row'.
  3) Enter the proper work limits with 'Layout . Limits'.
  4) Save this layout with 'File . Save under'.
  5) Assign texts with 'Excel-multi label' from the Excel rows to the
     label text lines. The possible label number will be calculated 
     from the layout. If there where more labels possible than Excel 
     rows present, the redundant labels and text lines are deleted.

  Inputs:
  The next row which is not processed will be shown. With 'Row #' 
  ([<][0001][>]) You can select the text row manually also. With 'OK'
  Excel text is allocated starting with the selected 'Row #'. The text 
  field allocation follows the order of the plate text fields.

  Imported plates You can still modify manually in 'edit text' and
  export to Your milling machine. For the next plate please select
  'Excel label #' again.

#1714 Relief position    --------------
Indicates 3D-relief-position at the cursor position.

The z-value indication is dependent to the z-zero point (setting with 
'Displace Z'). If the z-zero point is located on top (standard), then the 
relief depth is shown (numerical value is negative). If the z-zero point
is located at the bottom, the relief height is shown with positive amounts.

If the indication is ended by using <L>, the z-amount of the clicked 
position will be marked in the graphic (e.g. x 1.234). With the repeat-
function another points can be clicked on, to mark in the graphic.

|X, Y, Z:
Relief position in mm.

|A, B:
  Slope in degrees at the relief position for the
  direction A (rotation about the X longitudinal axis) and
  B (rotation about Y longitudinal axis).
  An angle of 0° describes a flat progression,
  an angle of a vertical progression (will not be achieved).
  The angle is measured over 3 relief points
  (interpolated). Thus a vertical progression (90°) is
  not achievable.

#0027 Adjust Work        --------------
Adjust the limits to the existing data. This function can be
used with existing graphic and/or text data only.

|Data width/Data height
Indication of the current data dimensions

|Input
Select the following input.
|  Width/height
  In the following fields the width and/or the height of the
  working space can be entered.
|  Edge X/Y
  In the following fields an edge can be entered around the
  data up to the working frame.

|Working width/working height:
Input of the desired width and height of the working frame.

|Edge X/Edge Y:
Edge around the data up to the working frame.

|Frame zero point:
Zero point for processing. The working space to be created
is produced to match this zero point.

|Round data width+height:
The data dimensions (width and height) are round up to 
the next whole-numbered amount.

|Adjust
Calculate the working limit and correctly orient the data.

#1792 StoneBlaster       --------------
Conversion of rastered b/w pictures to milling points. The pictures must
be present in a purely 1bit - b/w - format. Gray shades or color pictures
are not allowed for this conversion.

Pictures with more than 1bit pro pixel (gray shaded or color) must be 
converted with a photostyler into b/w pictures. This conversion You 
receive e.g. using 'PhotoPaint'. Please select in PhotoPaint 'picture . 
convert into b/w (1bit)'. Here You have several methods for disposal.
PhotoPaint converts colors in usable point structures.

With StoneBlaster the point structures are converted into milling points 
for Your machine.

After the path calculation the data were saved with the suitable 
export at once. The export data are applicative only for a special 
machinery using StoneBlaster (Firm Hylewicz).


-------------------------------------------------------------------
Picture import
-------------------------------------------------------------------
$1755 Import Photo


-------------------------------------------------------------------
Line grid inputs
-------------------------------------------------------------------
|Procedures:
  Milling method selection:

  horizontal :
    Horizontal processing in in zigzag order.
  vertikal :
    Vertical processing in in zigzag order.

|Invert [Y/N]:
  Yes: The gray levels were inverted. Bright areas are milled dark, 
  dark areas are milled bright.

#1793 DitherPicture      --------------
Conversion of rastered b/w pictures to milling points. The pictures must
be present in a purely 1bit - b/w - format. Gray shades or color pictures
are not allowed for this conversion.

Pictures with more than 1bit pro pixel (gray shaded or color) must be 
converted with a photostyler into b/w pictures. This conversion You 
receive e.g. using 'PhotoPaint'. Please select in PhotoPaint 'picture . 
convert into b/w (1bit)'. Here You have several methods for disposal.
PhotoPaint converts colors in usable point structures.

With DitherPicture the point structures are converted into milling 
points for Your machine.


-------------------------------------------------------------------
Picture import
-------------------------------------------------------------------
$1755 Import Photo


-------------------------------------------------------------------
Line grid inputs
-------------------------------------------------------------------
|Tool #:
  Selection of the milling tool.
  For the line grid milling always a conic tool is needed (FWi > 0°,
  e.g. 20..30°). The tip radius should be selected as much as small 
  (FrS <0.1 mm). For small tip radius please always mind for enough 
  revolutions per minute.

|Procedures:
  Milling method selection:

  horizontal :
    Horizontal processing in in zigzag order.
  vertikal :
    Vertical processing in in zigzag order.

|Invert [Y/N]:
  Yes: The gray levels were inverted. Bright areas are milled dark, 
  dark areas are milled bright.

#3185 Vekt.>GranitoGrav  --------------
$3198 direct mill

#1791 GranitoGrav        --------------
Special grid Photo procedure for a grinding processing of e.g. granite.
The grinding depths varies following the picture brightness and creates 
so the photo into the workpiece.

The process is similar to the function 'Grid photo . Line grid'. The 
handling is optimized for the GranitoGrav operation. For other, here
not used settings, the same job is also possible using 'Grid photo .
Line grid'.

The basic line separation is normalized to 1mm. The really line 
separation You can set with 'Line separation [10..500%]'.

After the path calculation the data were saved with the suitable 
export at once. The export data are applicative only for a special 
machinery using GranitoGrav (Firm Hylewicz).


-------------------------------------------------------------------
Picture import
-------------------------------------------------------------------
$1755 Import Photo


-------------------------------------------------------------------
Line grid inputs
-------------------------------------------------------------------

|Line separation [10..500%]:
  With the line separation the row separation is determined. A bigger 
  line separation results a bigger row separation and has an effect of 
  a more bright picture. 

|Angle [-90..+90°]:
  Angle for the milling rows. 0° results horizontal rows.

|Procedures:
  Milling method selection:

  Hatching :
    Simple lines without turnaround.
  Cross hatching :
    Simple lines without turnaround + 90° rotated crossings.
  Hatching meander :
    Lines in zigzag order.
  Cross hatching meander :
    Lines in zigzag order + 90° rotated crossings.
  Rectangle :
    Rectangles concentrically ordered.
  Circle :
    Circles concentrically ordered.
  Spiral :
    Elliptical spiral.
  Radial lines :
    Simple radial lines without turnaround.
  Radial lines meander :
    Radial lines in zigzag order.
  Spiral > rectangle :
    Elliptical spiral go over to rectangle form.

|Minimal level, Maximal level:
Limitation of the lower and upper gray shade level. This avoids milling 
pathes for hardly noticeable gray shade levels. The lower level is 
terminable in the area 0%..20% and the upper level in the area 80%..100%.
0% resp. 100% results no limit.


|Invert [Y/N]:
  Yes: The gray levels were inverted. Bright areas are milled dark, 
  dark areas are milled bright.

#1769 Introduce Relief   --------------
Introduce a relief. The relief can be a normal relief, a previously
exported relief using 'Relief File . Export Extract or Export Frame'.
The relief can be freely positioned and matched using (position,
dimension, distortion, rotation).

|Position x/y:
Position of the relief zero point in the target relief.

|Displace X/Y:
Relative change of position of the reliefs in one axis (X or Y).

|Base height:
Offset in Z-direction for elevation or depression.
The base height can be directly entered manually or selected
in Relief after <M>, <F2>.

|Dimension x/y/z:
Matching dimensions of the reliefs. The Z-axis is matched
analogously to x/y dimension.

|Distortion x/y/z:
Relief distortion, on input using cursor only the x- and
y-axes are changed. With key input all 3 axes can be scaled.

|Rotation:
Rotation of the reliefs in a given angle.
The rotation angle can be changed by using the mouse wheel also.

|Mirror:
Mirror selection for the axes x,y,z.

|Edit param:
Display data of the relief and display and modify relief insertion parameters
(position, distortion, ...).

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1743 Enter Lin-Grav     --------------
Direct plotting of 3D lines and creation of the relief
routes. The setting for the creation of lines takes place
using 'Lin-Grav Param'. If a 3D line is clicked on for
editing, then the editing window is opened.

|Progression:
Progression selection for the line.

|Ends:
End routes straight or rounded off.

|Base height:
Offset in Z direction for raising or lowering. The base
height can be entered directly manually or selected in
relief following <M>, <F2>.

|Displ.XY:
Displace individual support points in xy. For this the
point is to be clicked on as closely as possible and
displaced with the <L> key depressed.

|Scroll Z:
Z-value input for the support points by using a scroll mouse.
With rotating the scroll wheel the Z value is displaced.
For the first input the scroll wheel acts by push the ctrl -
key at the same time. Without the ctrl - key the scroll wheel
controls the graphic zoom.

|Pos Z:
Input of Z value in the input field.

|Pos List:
All points of the line are displayed in the editor and
can be altered here. The format of the list may not be
altered.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#1730 Object Edit        --------------
Every object can be selected for editing by clicking on to its
paths (contours, routes, points). Here only objects already
created can be marked. The characteristics of the object are
created following clicking on. The characteristics can now
be amended within the described limits. On being adopted the
new object characteristics are saved. For a new graphic the 
the function 'Generate new' must be started.

If the ctrl key is pressed at the same time, the next object in 
all object layers is searched. If the next objet in an other layer 
which is not the actual VTR - layer, then this layer will be 
activated with no object selection.

#0857 3D Cycles          --------------
Calculation of 3D milling cycles (paths) from marked contours or
drillings. Conversion for cutout, milling around and pocket can 
take place for only one contour. For route, drilling, spiral drilling, 
and hollow several paths can also be selected. Here own cycles are 
then calculated for each path. The 3D cycles are saved together with 
the tool data in the given target layer.

For the creation of the milling data complete tool information
(geometry data, Technology Data I and Technology Data II) is required.
If the Technology Data II (max. layer depth, chip lift and smoothing 
offset) are not provided, then only simple milling paths in complete 
depth are calculated.

|Inward excavation, milling around, pocket:
Calculation of an excavation, milling around or a pocket (with
clearance tracks). The sense of rotation of the milling paths
(upmilling/downmilling) depends on the rotation sense of the graphic.

|Route:
Calculation of milling tracks (layers) for route(s)
(without offset calculation).

|Drilling:
If the drill diameter is the same as the cutter diameter
then vertical movements with chip lift otherwise
circular milling tracks in layers are calculated.

|Thread:
To tap simple threads. At the end of the helix the tool moves 
freely to the middle.

|Spiral drilling:
Spiral form drilling to drill larger. 

|Hollow:
Create milling path for a complete hollow (flat hollow,
cone and drilling).

Drillings, spiral drillings and hollows can also be used on 
paths which are not drillings. Then for each way the center is 
determined were the drilling is arranged.

!Forward feed reduction + retraction length:
Milling forward feed reduction, e.g. for excavations, milling around 
etc. Here the forward feed can be reduced in order that parts becoming 
free can be better held. With forward feed reduction = 100% or
retraction lengths < 0.01mm no forward feed reduction is produced.
The forward feed reduction can only be exported using data formats
which support a forward feed control (e.g. not LG1Obj.).

|Parameter:
Parameter settings for the track calculation.

|  Forward feed reduction:
  Reduction of the milling forward feed in the range 1..100%.

|  Retraction length:
  Route for which the forward feed is to be reduced.

|  Feed reduction 1.drilling:
  Reduction of the dip milling feed for the first drill lift of
  a vertical drill movement in the range 1..100%

|  3D insertion angle:
  Angle of the tool insertion movements. 90° produces vertical
  insertion movements.

|  Milling direction (Upmilling, downmilling):
  Set milling direction for 'inward excavation', 'milling around', 
  'pocket'.
  Upmilling: Mill around clockwise.
  Downmilling: Mill around anticlockwise.

|  Holding Webs No.
  Automatic insert of holding webs for milling around an pocket. 
  The automatic insert of holding webs is useful for simple contours 
  as circle, ellipse, rectangle. Complex contours results sometimes 
  unequal allocations of the holding webs. In that case the holding 
  webs better should be placed manually. Max. 4 holding webs are 
  possible. Setting = 0 creates no holding web.

|  1.holding web at degree [-180..360°]:
  The first holding web is placed at this angle. All other holding 
  webs are placed in the same angle distance. For complex contours 
  irregular angle distances are possible. In that cases the holding 
  webs must be placed manually.

|  Web width [mm]:
  Width of the holding web (without cutter thickness). The contours 
  must have a minimal length of 5 x web thickness.

|  Web thickness [mm]:
  Thickness of the holding webs (in Z direction).

#0861 3D-drill cycles    --------------
Calculation of drillings from marked contours. For route, drilling,
spiral drilling, and hollow several paths can also be selected. Here 
own cycles are then calculated for each path. The 3D cycles are saved 
together with the tool data in the given target layer.

Drillings, spiral drillings and hollows can also be used on 
paths which are not drillings. Then for each way the center is 
determined were the drilling is arranged.

For the creation of the milling data complete tool information
(geometry data, Technology Data I and Technology Data II) is required.
If the Technology Data II (max. layer depth, chip lift and smoothing 
offset) are not provided, then only simple milling paths in complete 
depth are calculated.

|Drilling:
If the drill diameter is the same as the cutter diameter
then vertical movements with chip lift otherwise
circular milling tracks in layers are calculated.

|Thread
To tap simple threads. At the end of the helix the tool
moves freely to the middle.

|Spiral drilling:
Spiral form drilling to drill larger. 

|Hollow:
Create milling path for a complete hollow (flat hollow,
cone and drilling).

#7909 Direktausgabe      --------------
|Set up direct milling
|Auto export:
  Select the last with 'direct mill' used export path for automatic
  export. The last export way and settings by using 'direct mill' 
  are used.

|Direct export by using a machine operation program:
According to the operating program, several pre settings are necessary.
For all direct export ways are required a valid program path and a valid
export path.

|  Program path selection:
  If the program can be found under this path, then the path is shown
  in black in the selection. If the path is invalid, then the path
  with 'Program: ' + Path name is shown in grey. In this case a valid
  path must be selected. For this click on the indicator and select a
  correct path in the opened window for the output program.

|  Export path selection:
  File name for the export file data exchange. The program files the
  data, which are to be milled, in this file. If the program can be
  found under this path, then the path is shown in black in the
  selection. If the path is invalid, then the path with 'Program: ' +
  Export Path is shown in grey. In this case a valid path must be
  selected. For this click on the indicator and select a correct
  path and file name in the opened window. Select the target
  directory (directory in which the output program  is to be found)
  and give it a name e.g. 'Output' one. Enhancements are not entered.


|isel - Editasc:
  Establish isel - ncp export with Editasc.
  For correct export the following are required:
  - a valid call for the output program 'EdiTasc' (program path)
   (e.g. 'C:\Programme\EdiTasc\EtOpen.EXE'),
  - a valid name for the export data
   (e.g. 'C:\Programme\EdiTasc\Ausgabe.ncp') and
  - a correct fast motion.

!  Note:
  The export path must indicate the directory in which 'EdiTasc'
  is to be found!

|  Fast motion:
  Preset is a fast motion of 10m/min. Depending on the machine
  you must reduce the fast motion to suitable values.


|Charlyrobot GPilote:
  Establish GPilote export.
  For correct export the following are required:
  - a valid call for the output program 'EdiTasc' (program path)
    (e.g. 'C:\Wcharly\GRAAL\Pilote\Gpilote.exe') and
  - a valid name for the export data
    (e.g. 'C:\Wcharly\GRAAL\Pilote\Ausgabe.ISO').


|isel - REMOTE:
  Establish isel - ncp export with REMOTE.
  For correct export the following are required:
  - a valid call for the output program 'REMOTE' (program path)
    (e.g.: 'C:\CNCworkbench\Bin\Remote.exe') and
  - a valid name for the export data.
    (e.g.: 'C:\CNCworkbench\Bin\Ausgabe.ncp').


|WinPC-NC:
  Establish ISO export with WinPC-NC.
  For correct export the following are required:
  - a valid call for the output program 'WinPC-NC' (program path)
    (e.g.: 'C:\Programme\WinPC-NC\winpcnc.exe') and
  - a valid name for the export data.
    (e.g.: 'C:\Programme\WinPC-NC\Ausgabe.NC').

!  Remark:
  For automatic data import in WinPC-NC the setting autom. new load
  must be activated. The setting data format DIN/ISO G2/G3 relative
  must be activated for the correct interpretation.

  Work with WinPC-NC:
  After first start of WinPC-NC the first data file must be loaded
  manually. All further exports are loaded automatically.
  If WinPC-NC is minimized in the Windows task after milling end,
  with a direct export by using new data the program is re opened
  automatically.

|BEAMICON:
  Set up ISO - Export with BEAMICON - control (Fa. Benezan 
  Electronics). For the correct export are needed:
  - a correct program call for 'BBrowser'
    (e.g.: 'C:\Programme\BEAMICON\BBrowser.exe') and
  - a valid name for the export data
    (e.g.: 'C:\Programme\BEAMICON\Ausgabe.TXT').
  The milling data are direct transferred to the control. All 
  further operating follows at this control.

|Mach3
  ISO - export for Mach3. For the correct export a valid name for the
  export data is needed. (e.g.: 'C:\Mach3\Ausgabe.TAP').
  The exported date must be loaded manually with Mach3.

#3189 direct mill auto   -------HCAM---
Automatic milling data export. The data are exported by using 
the correct path settings. To set up the direct export way 
please select 'direct mill auto' with <F2>.

The milling data were stored always in the given export path. An
incessantly change of the file name is not intend for the automatic
export. Usual export procedure using 'direct mill auto':
1 First set up the export way.
2 Milling data export by using 'direct mill auto'.
  Dependent from the export way the machine operation program starts
  automatically (e.g. WinPC-NC) or the operation program must be started
  and the milling file must be loaded manually (e.g. Mach3). After this
  milling data can be stored once again by using 'direct mill auto'
  (proceed starts with (2)).

$7909 Textaufruf Direktausgabe

#3190 Estab. Direct Mill -------HCAM---

$7909 Textaufruf Direktausgabe

#3188 direct mill auto   ----ConstruCAM
Automatic milling data export via WinPC-NC or Mach3.

Depending on the export are suitable settings necessary. For 
the direct export is a valid program path and/or data path 
(export path) necessary. To set up the direct export way please
select 'direct mill auto' with <F2>. The program help You'll reach
after set up selection with <F2> by using the key <F9>.

The milling data were stored always in the given export path. An
incessantly change of the file name is not intend for the automatic
export. Usual export procedure using 'direct mill auto':
1 First set up the export way.
2 Milling data export by using 'direct mill auto'.
  Dependent from the export way the machine operation program starts
  automatically (e.g. WinPC-NC) or the operation program must be started
  and the milling file must be loaded manually (e.g. Mach3). After this
  milling data can be stored once again by using 'direct mill auto'
  (proceed starts with (2)).

#3191 Estab. Direct Mill ----ConstruCAM
Set up the data export for Mach3 or set up 
the direct output with call of the machine operating program
WinPC-NC. 

For WinPC-NC we recommend the use of the DIN/ISO - export to 
WinPC-NC (for 3D data recommend absolutely).

For correct export the following are required:
- a valid call for the output program 'WinPC-NC' (program path)
  (e.g.: 'C:\Programme\WinPC-NC\winpcnc.exe') and
- a valid name for the export data (export path).
  (e.g.: 'C:\Programme\WinPC-NC\Ausgabe.NC').

For the correct export with Mach3 a valid name for the export data 
is necessary (export path, e.g.: 'C:\Mach3\Ausgabe.TAP'). Mach3
must be started manually and the export data mast be loaded manually.

|Program path selection:
If the program can be found under this path, then the path is shown
in black in the selection. If the path is invalid, then the path
with 'Program: ' + Path name is shown in grey. In this case a valid
path must be selected. For this click on the indicator and select a
correct path in the opened window for the output program.

|Export path selection:
File name for the export file data exchange. The program files the
data, which are to be milled, in this file. If the program can be
found under this path, then the path is shown in black in the
selection. If the path is invalid, then the path with 'Program: ' +
Export Path is shown in grey. In this case a valid path must be
selected. For this click on the indicator and select a correct
path and file name in the opened window. Select the target
directory (directory in which the output program  is to be found)
and give it a name e.g. 'Output' one. Enhancements are not entered.


!Remark:
For automatic data import in WinPC-NC the setting autom. new load
must be activated. The setting data format DIN/ISO G2/G3 relative
must be activated for the correct interpretation.

Work with WinPC-NC:
After first start of WinPC-NC the first data file must be loaded
manually. All further exports are loaded automatically.
If WinPC-NC is minimized in the Windows task after milling end,
with a direct export by using new data the program is re opened
automatically.


|ISO - export - parameter:
|  Start position X,Y:
  Position to cross over an obstruction, which is approached before
  milling. With start position X =-9999.99 and Y = -9999.99 the start
  position is switched off. In that case the first processing position
  in the nc data will be the start position.

|  Round engraving radius:
  Approach of the 4th axis for a cylindrical engraving. A round engraving
  diameter -0.001mm to +0.001mm gives an output with the X,Y,Z axes.
  With negative values (<-0.001mm) the Y axis (direction of rotation
  of the round axis) is mirrored.

|  Cooling ON:
  With 'YES' the command M8/M9 in the data set cooling lubrication is
  switched on.

|  Free movement position X,Y,Z:
  Movement after ending processing. Input takes place positively 
  upwards for Z. Depending on the export filter the free movement 
  position Z is approached also for tool change.

  With enter a negative free move position in X/Y (e.g. X =-1 + 
  Y = -1) no movement in X/Y results. But the free move position in 
  Z will be used always.
  
#1754 GridPhoto-Start    --------------
GridPhoto-Start is a comfortable solution for 2D photo engraving. Gray
scale pictures are converted in high-quality milling data for 3- or 4-
axis milling machines with a few mouse clicks. The photos should be 
available as pictures with 256 gray levels (8-bit) (exception jpg). The 
imported photos can be edited (scale, filter, mirror...) and convert in 
milling data very fast.

With the milling the bright - dark different in the picture is created 
with lines with corresponding width density. You can repeat the milling 
data calculation as often as whatever.

The navigator combines the program functions in the right operation order. 
The operation order follows in the navigator from above to below. You can 
select the black shown function. If You don't want select a function, then 
switch to the next function with 'continue'. With 'back' You can switch 
back to the previous function. A function help You receive with activated 
navigator using <F9>.

|open:
$1755 Import Photo

|filter:
  Correct or smooth the photo. Useful filters are e.g. approximate 
  (strong).

|mirror+rotate:
  You can rotate or mirror the picture.

|Line grid:
  With Line grid gray shade pictures are converted in 3D milling lines 
  with various width. The various width are created with a conic tool 
  which dipped into the material according to the gray level (3D-milling-
  data). For line grid are a conic tool and a 3D - milling machine 
  needed.

|Milling data export:
  You can export the calculated milling data in various formats.

|End:
  Stops GridPhoto-Start.

#6005 Relief-Start       --------------
Relief-Start is a comfortable solution for photo engraving and
relief milling. Gray scale pictures are converted in 3D - relief data
and high-quality milling data for 3- or 4-axis milling machines are 
created with a few mouse clicks.

The navigator leads You through the process. The functions are in the 
right order. The working off takes place from top down. You can select 
the function marked in black. If a function is not to be selected, then 
switch to the next operation using 'Forward'. Using the function 'Back' 
you switch to the previous function. A help to the functions You receive 
by using the key <F9>.

|open:
$3306 Import Photo

|filter:
  Correct or smooth the photo. Useful filters are e.g. approximate
  (strong).

|mirror+rotate:
  You can rotate or mirror the picture.

|Relief AutoCorr:
  Milling data are calculated. A help for AutoCorr You receive after
  function activation by using <F9>.
  The relief z zero position is placed on the highest relief point.
  The relief deep is depend on the form or the picture. The zero position
  X/Y lays on the left - below side. The milling dimension is determined
  with the import using scaling.

|Milling data export:
  You can export the calculated milling data in various formats.

|End:
  Stops Relief-Start.


#1755 Import Photo       --------------
  Import a gray scale picture and adapt the dimension. The
  program imports bitmap files in the following formats:
  - BMP - Windows Bitmap (1/4/8/15/16/24Bit color)
  - GIF - CompuServ Bitmap (1/4/8Bit color)
  - JPG - JPEG Bitmap (8/24Bit color)
  - PCX - Paintbrush Bitmap (1/4/8Bit color)
  - TIF - TIFF Bitmap (8/16 gray scale format, unpacked)
    For TIFF is an optional plug in for more color and pack formats
    obtainable. Info at Info@AHSoftgravur.de.

  A photo should be handled with a photo styler (e.g. Corel 
  PHOTO-PAINT) and saved as a gray scaled picture.

  Rastered pictures (e.g. from a newspaper) have a very rough surface 
  and should be avoided or should be revised with a photo styler. 
  Rastered photos can be improved by the relief filer approximate 
  fine/strong.

|  Height-width-proportion:
    With setting 'Yes' all axis are changed equally. With 'No'
    the axis are determined individual.

#3306 Import Photo       --------------
  The program opens bitmap- and relief - files in the following formats:
  - BMP - Windows Bitmap
  - GIF - CompuServ Bitmap
  - JPG - JPEG Bitmap
  - PCX - Paintbrush Bitmap
  - TIF - 8-/16Bit grayscale picture.
    The TIFF - import is qualified for 8bit (1 byte/pixel) and 16bit 
    (2byte/pixel) unpacked grayscale pictures. With 16bit TIF, reliefs
    with higher resolution can be saved or opened. Optional is a fee
    required TIF - import/export extension obtainable for more picture
    formats and packed formats.

  Import a gray level picture in .BMP, .GIF, .JPG, .PCX Format and adopt
  the dimension. If You want to change the z - amount only, then switch
  'proportional Y/N to No' before the input. A photo should be processed
  with a photo styler (e.g. Corel PHOTO-PAINT) and saved as a gray level
  picture.

  - HRL - AHSoft Relief unpacket
  - HRP - AHSoft Relief packet
    AHSoft relief file formats.

  - RLF - LANG Relief
    LANG Relief file format (until 1991).

#2011 Relief Surface     --------------
The surface of an application stamp is calculated from the contours
in ActLayer and the relief surface progression. The contours describe
the edge of the surface relief areas. All contours must be closed
and free of overlapping. With activated AutoCorrection parameter
'Data check before calculation [Y/N]' errors in the contours are
marked before calculation.

Fundamentally the tool for the creation of surface relief must be
suitable. In addition the window should always be checked using
the surface relief progression.

The tracks created in the surface relief processing, as for the
milling tracks of a cutout engraving, are secured in the tool layers
and, on saving, can be saved, as required, for a complete processing
of the work piece with all tools or alone for the surface relief
processing only.

|Load relief surface course:
Form-input of the progression from border to centre of surface
area or Form-load from a file. The 'relief surface course'
describes the milling depth from edge of contour to the middle
of the contour (the milling depth grows from both sides inwards).
For very wide surface relief on the changes to the surface relief
need to be described using the 'relief surface course'. At the
end of the 'relief surface course' the depth (horizontal)
remains constant.

If a drawn polyline load from file and the report 'Polyline basis
does not lie on 0/0!' 'Please check your file!' is shown, the
polyline must be corrected in CAD.

|Tool #:
Selection of processing tool (with spherical radius). The current
tool is shown. With the calculation of the cutter offset to the
surface relief progression a tool angle of (FWi) = 0 degrees is
assumed. In the majority of cases this is no problem, but can,
however, lead to undercuts in the area of very steep surface
relief forms. With the input of the surface relief progression
the cutter angle (FWi) should therefore not be exceeded as max.
slope. Surface relief tools must meet the following conditions:
· spherical radius (FrK) >0 (e.g. 0.5mm),
· point radius (FrS) = 0mm,
· cutter angle (FWi) smaller than the steepest point in the
  surface relief.

|Mill track separation:
Separation of milling tracks on the surface.

|Processes:
- lines accurate/grid:
  Line shaped surface processing. Grid calculates the milling track
  relatively quickly, however, creates small errors at the border with
  coarse resolution.
- Contour 2D:
  Contour parallel processing for raised surface relief progressions.
  The process also lays milling tracks around the contours, in order
  to complete the surfaces. If there is a danger that neighbouring
  contours will be damaged the process 'Contour 2D complete' must be
  selected. Dependent on the parameter 'Combine clearance lines [Y/N]'
  the empty paths are avoided within the contour through combination.
  In order to prevent errors the combinations here should be switched
  off using 'NO'.
- Contour 3D:
  Contour parallel processing for deep cut relief surface progressions.
  The paths are joined together. Dependent on the parameter 'Combine
  clearance lines [Y/N]' the empty paths are avoided within the contour
  through combination.
- Block/Complete:
  With Block the contours are calculated separately, with Complete the
  calculation takes place in one go.

|Max.Relief surface width:
Precalculation width for the contour parallel process.
With load of a new 'relief surface course' the actual course width
is adopted as 'Max.Relief surface width'.

#0618 Displace Position  --------------
Displace one or more support points.

If only one point is clicked on, then only this is displaced and
the co-ordinates of the original (not yet displaced point) are
displayed in the input line. If this point is a 'Position 3D', then
the 3D coordinates can be edited after displacement. If a frame is 
placed around several support points of one or more contours, then 
all points within the frame are displaced.

With the displacement the points are snare onto help lines and cursor
grid raster. With additionally pressed <Sft> key displacement is in the
advance direction (greater separation) either in X only or in Y only.


%---------------------------
%3D - position - processing.
%---------------------------
|Function selection using <F2> (only in icon menu):
Convert 1 or several points into 3D - positions and determine the
z - amount.

Is only 1 point selected, the z - amount of his point is shown and 
can be changed. If there are several points selected within a 
rectangular border, the z - value all of the points will be set 
to the entered value.

If the vectors are in 2D (standard), the vector z - value are for
the moment indefinite. Only for a milling export the z - value where 
set with the tool cut depth. If You change only single vectors of a
graphic, the remaining points are still indefinite and will be set 
with the milling export. If You uncertain with this operation. You
should determine all points in a contour or a layer.

Start- and Endpoints of closed loops or double points cannot be 
marked with a single click surely. In order to mark all multiple 
points, this points should be marked with a rectangular border. 

#0084 Fuse               --------------
To fuse 2 contour blocks, which are to be fused or combined together,
must be selected consecutively. A contour block can consist of one
or more contours or combined contours. Open routes are allowed only
for punching out. Contour blocks are to be selected using the cursor.
The respective selection is ended using <R> or <Esc>. The first
contour block is marked in green, the second in blue.

The function is called repetitive, to fuse another contours. The
function can be ended with the key <Esc> or <R> during the selection
'Fuse/punch out'.

|Punching out:
The paths (contours and routes) in Block 1 are punched out using the
contours in Block 2. Punching out allows 2D and 3D paths. Milling data
can also be punched out with this.

|Sum:
The outer sum from both contour blocks is formed. This function is
only allowed with contours.

|Together:
The inner sum from both contour blocks is formed. This function is
only allowed with contours.

|Difference 1:
Contour Block 1 is punched out with Block 2 and combined into
contours. This function is only allowed with contours.

|Difference 2:
Contour Block 2 is punched out with Block 1 and combined into
contours. This function is only allowed with contours.

#1805 3D Effect          --------------
Creates 3D aspects from contour(s), route(s) or relief. The 2D
vector data, shown in top view are provided with a depth and 
rotated so that a 3D object in perspective is shown. 

|3D Form (tape, volume, relief):
Selection for the data processing.
- tape: 2D vector data (routes and/or contours) are shown
  perceptively as a 3D tape.
- volume: 2D vector data (closed contours) are shown as 3D
  shapes in perspective.
- relief: The relief part which is framed with a contour is 
  shown in perspective. The 3D aspect always will be created from
  the present relief. For this calculation enough depth is needed
  in the setting 'new relief'.

|3D input:
Input for the 3D data (depth, perspective angle).
- depth: Depth Z for 2D vector data (tape, volume). For the 
  setting relief the input depth is not needed.
- AngleXY + angleYZ: Determine the perspective angle with
  this settings.

|3D location (unaltered, correct):
Adjust the 3D - perspective - aspect to the relief.
- unaltered: The 3D location stays unaltered how calculated with
  '3D input'.
- correct: Adopt the location of the calculated object to the
  relief.

|Scaling Z:
Scale the complete height of the object. Usually a much flatter
graphic is required.

|Base height:
Offset in Z direction for object raising or lowering.
The base height can be entered directly manually or selected
following <M>, <F2> in relief.

$7908 Textaufruf Verknüpfungslogik

#0858 CAM - Edit         --------------
Indication and editing of milling paths using tools (tool objects).
'CAM - Edit' is usable only for layer with milling paths, which 
contains tool objects. For the milling path creation the setting 
'Save with tool [Y/N] = YES' must be used.

|First, last one forward/backward:
The indicator in CAM list is positioned using 'First'..'One backwards' 
as well as with the cursor keys <CuUp, PgUp, CuDn, PgDn, Home, End>.
The actual milling object is red marked.

|Object sequence:
To alter the data/milling sequence. You can alter the milling sequence 
for the actual milling object and move it to the first .. last place.

|Object Clr:
The actual milling object will be deleted.

|Copy to Layer:
Copy the actual milling object in one other layer.

|Rate of Cut:
Calculation of rate of cut combined with relief surface depth and
inclined deep cuts on the track (see also help to 'Rate of Cut').
If rate of cut are calculated already, this function must not used 
once again.

|Tools:
To edit the tool date in all milling object.
Please comply: Changing the geometry of the tool could result wrong
milling results.
 
|Tool sequence:
Sort the milling sequence of the tool object in accordance with 
various criteria.
With 'WSt ascending'/'WSt descending'/'Tool name'/'Cutting radius'/
'Tip radius'/'Spherical radius'/'Angle'/'Clearance height'/
'Insertion depth'/'Working feed XY'/'Insertion feed Z'/
'Spindle revolutions'/'Tool life travel' the objects are sorted 
according to these criteria. The sequence can be inverted using 
'Reverse sequence'.

|Milling graphic:
To display the 3D milling paths from the actual milling object..

|Info:
Lists the last calculation settings for the object. The data are 
indicated during the session in which the milling object has been 
created. Using 'File . New' or 'File . open' the info - data are 
deleted and are indicated no longer.


Milling path editing.
For milling data creation HCAM principally supports several paths:
· the input of 2D paths in a graphic layer and allocation of the layer
  tool. With exporting via 'Direct mill' the tool and technology
  data are linked with the central cutter track.
· The calculation of milling paths in AutoCorrection, Projections,
  Relief, RasterCut etc. and direct output of the milling data
  via 'TLayer/PLayer Export'.
· The saving of pre-calculated milling data in graphic layers
  and export of the selected layer via direct mill.
· The saving of pre-calculated milling data in one (or more)
  milling layers, editing and view of the complete data
  using, for example, CAM - Edit, Norm / Zoom Projection and
  volume view and export of the layer(s) using 'Direct mill'.

#End                     --------------



Übersetzungshinweise:
--------------------
- Ab '#End                     --------------'
  nicht mehr übersetzen!


Maximal 80 Zeichen je Zeile!
Maximal 40 Zeilen je Eintrag für interne Anzeige,
maximal 400 Zeilen je Eintrag für Editor-Anzeige!
Zeichen '|' an 1. Stelle der Zeile = Hervorhebung Blau (nur interne Anzeige).
Zeichen '!' an 1. Stelle der Zeile = Hervorhebung Rot (nur interne Anzeige).
Zeichen '%' an 1. Stelle der Zeile = Schrifttyp wechseln.
(&-NANE- Resourcen - Grafik (z.B. &KoordinatSyst) bleibt unverändert.
        (nur interne Anzeige)
        sind Namen - nicht übersetzen!!!
        n.n. 090724)
$nnnn   Text Aufruf - nicht übersetzen!!!
70 Char 90123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

Änderungen ab 2006:
---------------------
050110: #1727 Ellipse            --------------
150110: #3011 Open               --------------
150110: #1311 Datei Notiz        -------------- Einrag gelöscht
150110: #3114 Save Under         --------------
180110: #1764 Dither             --------------
210110: #1705 Mill data aspect   --------------
270110: #1201 Norm projection    --------------
300110: #7905 Queries on Program --------------
090210: #1766 Raster Photo       --------------
240210: #3309 Relief Import      --------------
240210: #1789 Relief flow        --------------
250210: #7907 Text menu          --------------
070310: #0646 Special            --------------
160510: #0803 Rhinestone         --------------
240610: #3186 Mult. export Lfd#  --------------
201010: #1384 Import Weller      -keine Übersetzung-
081110: #3188 direct mill auto   --------------
081110: #3191 Estab. Direct Mill --------------
081110: #3196 Direct Mill Auto   --------------
081110: #9926 Milldata export:   --------------
081110: #9927 Milldata export:   --------------
131110: #0801 Drilling Cycles    --------------
191110: #0805 MAchsen Bohrung    --------------
311210: #1381 Series Label       --------------
260111: #1790 Line grid          --------------
280111: #1382 Text from file     --------------
310111: #1714 Relief position    --------------
010211: #0027 Adjust Work        --------------
040211: #1792 StoneBlaster       --------------
040211: #1793 DitherPicture      --------------
080211: #3185 Vekt.>GranitoGrav  --------------
080211: #1791 GranitoGrav        --------------
080311: #1769 Introduce Relief   --------------
080311: #1743 Enter Lin-Grav     --------------
080311: #1730 Object Edit        --------------
020911: #0857 3D Cycles          --------------
020911: #0861 Drill cycles-3D    --------------
020911: #7909 Direktausgabe      --------------
020911: #3189 direct mill auto   -------HCAM---
020911: #3190 Estab. Direct Mill --------------
020911: #3188 direct mill auto   ----ConstruCAM
020911: #3191 Estab. Direct Mill --------------
120911: #1754 GridPhoto-Start    --------------
120911: #6005 Relief-Start       --------------
120911: #1755 Import Photo       --------------
120911: #3306 Import Photo       --------------
220911: #2011 Relief Surface     --------------
230911: #0618 Displace Position  --------------
091111: #0084 Fuse               --------------
231211: #1805 3D Effect          --------------
281211: #0858 CAM - Edit         --------------



H4Helpde.txt
H4Helpnl.txt
H4Helpen.txt
H4Helpit.txt

